Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
Pro/ENGINEER®
2000i2
NC Machining OptionTopic Collection
Parametric Technology Corporation
Copyright © 2000 Parametric Technology Corporation. All Rights Reserved.This document may not be copied, disclosed, transferred, or modified without the prior writtenconsent of Parametric Technology Corporation (PTC).Information described in this document is furnished for general information only, is subject tochange without notice, and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC. PTCassumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in thismanual.The software described in this document is provided under written license only, contains valuabletrade secrets and proprietary information, and is protected by the copyright laws of the UnitedStates and other countries. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATIONCAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION.
Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a SubsidiaryAdvanced Surface Design, CADDS, CADDShade, Computervision, Computervision Services,dVISE, Electronic Product Definition, EPD, HARNESSDESIGN, Info*Engine, InPart, Optegra,Parametric Technology Corporation, Pro/ENGINEER, Pro/HELP, Pro/INTRALINK,Pro/MECHANICA, Pro/TOOLKIT, PT/Products, and Windchill.
Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary3DPAINT, Associative Topology Bus, Behavioral Modeler, CDRS, CV, CVact, CVaec, CVdesign,CV-DORS, CVMAC, CVNC, CVToolmaker, DesignSuite, DIMENSION III, DIVISION,DIVISION EchoCast, DIVISION MockUp, DIVISION ProductView, DIVISION Reality,dVSAFEWORK, dVS, EDE, e/ENGINEER, Electrical Design Entry, EPD.Connect, EPD Roles,EPD Visualizer, Expert Machinist, ICEM, ICEM DDN, ICEM Surf, Import Data Doctor,Information for Innovation, ISSM, MEDEA, MEDUSA, ModelCHECK, NC Builder,Parametric Technology, Pro/ANIMATE, Pro/ASSEMBLY, Pro/CABLING, Pro/CASTING, Pro/CDT,Pro/COMPOSITE, Pro/CMM, Pro/CONVERT, Pro/DATA for PDGS, Pro/DESIGNER,Pro/DESKTOP, Pro/DETAIL, Pro/DIAGRAM, Pro/DIEFACE, Pro/DRAW, Pro/ECAD, Pro/ENGINE,Pro/FEATURE, Pro/FEM-POST, Pro/FLY-THROUGH, Pro/HARNESS-MFG,Pro/INTERFACE for CADDS 5, Pro/INTERFACE for CATIA, Pro/INTRALINK Web Client,Pro/LANGUAGE, Pro/LEGACY, Pro/LIBRARYACCESS, Pro/MESH, Pro/Model.View,Pro/MOLDESIGN, Pro/NC-ADVANCED, Pro/NC-CHECK, Pro/NC-MILL, Pro/NC-SHEETMETAL,Pro/NC-TURN, Pro/NC-WEDM, Pro/NC-Wire EDM, Pro/NCPOST, Pro/NETWORK ANIMATOR,Pro/NOTEBOOK, Pro/PDM, Pro/PHOTORENDER, Pro/PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY,Pro/PIPING, Pro/PLASTIC ADVISOR, Pro/PLOT, Pro/POWER DESIGN, Pro/PROCESS,Pro/REFLEX, Pro/REPORT, Pro/REVIEW, Pro/SCAN-TOOLS, Pro/SHEETMETAL,Pro/SURFACE, Pro/VERIFY, Pro/Web.Link, Pro/Web.Publish, Pro/WELDING,Product Structure Navigator, PTC, PTC i-Series, Shaping Innovation, Shrinkwrap,Virtual Design Environment, Windchill e-Series, Windchill Factor, Windchill Factor e-Series,Windchill Information Modeler, CV-Computervision logo, InPart logo, Pro/REFLEX logo, andPTC logo.
Third-Party TrademarksOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. Windows and Windows NT are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation. CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systems. PDGSis a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company. SAP and R/3 are registered trademarks ofSAP AG Germany. FLEXlm is a registered trademark of Globetrotter Software Inc.Vistools Library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematic Incorporated (VKI) containingconfidential trade secret information belonging to VKI. The HOOPS Graphics System is aproprietary software product copyrighted by Tech Soft America, Inc. All other brand or productnames are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDThis document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation andSoftware, pursuant to FAR 12.212(a)-(b) or DFARS 227.7202-1(a) and 227.7202-3(a), and areprovided to the Government under a limited commercial license only. For procurements predatingthe above clauses, use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictionsset forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clauseat DFARS 252.227-7013 or Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights at FAR 52.227-19, asapplicable.
Parametric Technology Corporation, 128 Technology Drive, Waltham, MA 02453-89053 January 2000
4
5
Table of Contents
Pro/NC ..................................................................................................................18Getting Started with Pro/NC .................................................................................................... 18
About Pro/NC .................................................................................................................... 18
To Create a Manufacturing Model ...................................................................................... 19
Pro/NC Concepts............................................................................................................... 20
To Retrieve a Manufacturing Model.................................................................................... 23
To Place a Workpiece in Part Machining ............................................................................ 24
To Manipulate a Workpiece................................................................................................ 24
To Place a "No Geometry" Workpiece in Part Machining.................................................... 24
To Replace a Design Model in Part Machining ................................................................... 25
Part Family Tables in Pro/NC............................................................................................. 25
Example: Replacing a Design Model.................................................................................. 26
To Build a Manufacturing Model in Assembly Machining .................................................... 26
To Reclassify Components of a Manufacturing Assembly................................................... 27
Manufacturing Process............................................................................................................ 28
About Manufacturing Process ............................................................................................ 28
To Get Process Status and Tool Path Information.............................................................. 30
Operations......................................................................................................................... 31
Workcells........................................................................................................................... 35
Fixtures ............................................................................................................................. 47
Coordinate Systems .......................................................................................................... 48
NC Sequences .................................................................................................................. 51
Retract Surface.................................................................................................................. 54
Material Removal............................................................................................................... 58
Tooling.................................................................................................................................... 61
About Elements of Tool Setup............................................................................................ 61
To Set Up Tools in Advance............................................................................................... 63
To Set Up a Tool when Creating an NC Sequence............................................................. 64
Tool Setup Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 64
Solid Tool Models .............................................................................................................. 78
Manufacturing Parameters ...................................................................................................... 84
About Manufacturing Parameters....................................................................................... 84
To Set or Modify NC Sequence Parameters....................................................................... 86
Common NC Sequence Parameters .................................................................................. 88
Milling Parameters ............................................................................................................. 93
Turning Parameters ......................................................................................................... 123
Holemaking Parameters................................................................................................... 138
6
Wire EDM Parameters ..................................................................................................... 143
To Use Previous Parameters ........................................................................................... 150
To Use a Non-Active Site................................................................................................. 150
To Include a Parameter in a Relation ............................................................................... 151
Using Parameters in Relations......................................................................................... 151
Sites ................................................................................................................................ 152
Machinability Database.................................................................................................... 156
Milling.................................................................................................................................... 161
General Information ......................................................................................................... 161
Tool Axis Control in Milling............................................................................................... 167
Volume Milling ................................................................................................................. 172
Automatic Cut Motions for Volume, Local, and Profile Milling............................................ 176
Local Milling..................................................................................................................... 182
Surface Milling ................................................................................................................. 188
Swarf Milling .................................................................................................................... 209
Face Milling ..................................................................................................................... 211
Profile Milling ................................................................................................................... 215
Pocket Milling .................................................................................................................. 218
Trajectory Milling.............................................................................................................. 219
Thread Milling .................................................................................................................. 234
Engraving ........................................................................................................................ 240
Plunge Milling .................................................................................................................. 241
Mill Geometry........................................................................................................................ 243
About Mill Geometry ........................................................................................................ 243
Mill Window ..................................................................................................................... 244
Mill Volumes .................................................................................................................... 246
Mill Surfaces.................................................................................................................... 261
Turning.................................................................................................................................. 269
About Turning NC Sequences.......................................................................................... 269
To Set Up the Coordinate System for Correct CL Output.................................................. 269
To Define a Turning Envelope.......................................................................................... 270
Using Turning Envelopes ................................................................................................. 271
To Define the Stock Boundary ......................................................................................... 272
Stock Boundary and Cut Extensions ................................................................................ 272
Defining the Stock Boundary in Part and Assembly Machining ......................................... 273
Example: Using Stock Boundary for Area Turning............................................................ 274
To Change the Stock Boundary Outline ........................................................................... 274
To Define the Cut Extensions........................................................................................... 274
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends .............................................................................................. 275
To Specify Corner Conditions .......................................................................................... 276
7
Corner Condition Types ................................................................................................... 277
To Specify Local Stock Allowance.................................................................................... 278
Local Stock Allowance ..................................................................................................... 278
To Specify the Tool Orientation........................................................................................ 279
To Use Multi-Head Turning .............................................................................................. 279
To Create an Area Turning NC Sequence........................................................................ 280
Area Turning.................................................................................................................... 281
Example: Face Area Turning............................................................................................ 281
Example: Outside Area Turning ....................................................................................... 282
Example: Inside Area Turning .......................................................................................... 283
To Create a 4 Axis Area Turning NC Sequence ............................................................... 284
Example: 4 Axis Area Turning.......................................................................................... 284
To Create a Profile Turning NC Sequence ....................................................................... 285
Profile Turning ................................................................................................................. 285
Example: Profile Turning.................................................................................................. 286
To Create a Groove Turning NC Sequence...................................................................... 286
Groove Turning................................................................................................................ 287
To Create a Thread Turning NC Sequence ...................................................................... 290
Thread Turning ................................................................................................................ 290
Examples: Thread Turning............................................................................................... 291
To Create a Facing Thread Turning NC Sequence........................................................... 292
To Perform the Remainder Material Analysis ................................................................... 292
Turn Profile ........................................................................................................................... 292
About Turn Profile............................................................................................................ 292
To Define a Turn Profile................................................................................................... 293
To Define a Turn Profile by Sketching .............................................................................. 294
Sketching a Turn Profile................................................................................................... 295
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces ................................................................ 296
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces ................................................... 297
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Curves ................................................................... 297
To Define a Turn Profile by Section.................................................................................. 298
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Section..................................................................... 298
To Define a Turn Profile by Creating a Reference Envelope............................................. 299
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting a Reference Envelope............................................ 300
To Adjust a Turn Profile ................................................................................................... 300
Holemaking ........................................................................................................................... 301
About Holemaking ........................................................................................................... 301
To Create a Holemaking NC Sequence............................................................................ 302
Holemaking Cycle Types ................................................................................................. 303
Three and Five Axis Holemaking...................................................................................... 304
8
To Set Up a Peck Table................................................................................................... 305
Peck Table ...................................................................................................................... 305
Example: Peck Table....................................................................................................... 306
To Define Hole Sets......................................................................................................... 307
Combining Selection Methods.......................................................................................... 309
To Define Depth .............................................................................................................. 309
To Define the Starting Point for Drilling............................................................................. 310
To Define Depth for Blind Drilling ..................................................................................... 311
To Select Holes by Axes.................................................................................................. 311
To Select Holes by Surfaces............................................................................................ 312
To Select Holes by Diameters.......................................................................................... 312
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters........................................................................... 313
To Select Holes by Points ................................................................................................ 313
To Define the Countersink Diameter ................................................................................ 314
To Use the Automatic Chamfer Selection......................................................................... 315
Example: Automatic Chamfer Selection ........................................................................... 315
To Define Plates for Web Drilling ..................................................................................... 316
Back Spotting Specifics ................................................................................................... 316
Example: Back Spotting................................................................................................... 316
Drill Groups........................................................................................................................... 319
About Drill Groups ........................................................................................................... 319
To Define a Drill Group .................................................................................................... 320
To Modify a Drill Group .................................................................................................... 320
Using Drill Groups............................................................................................................ 320
Auto Drilling........................................................................................................................... 321
About Auto Drilling ........................................................................................................... 321
To Create an Auto Drilling NC Sequence ......................................................................... 321
To Select a Coordinate System and Retract Plane........................................................... 322
The Default Coordinate System and Retract Plane........................................................... 323
To Filter Rows ................................................................................................................. 323
Filters Available for Auto Drilling....................................................................................... 324
To Edit Hole Parameters.................................................................................................. 325
To Apply Hole Strategies ................................................................................................. 325
Defining Your Hole Strategies .......................................................................................... 326
To Customize the Table................................................................................................... 327
To Reorder the NC Sequences Created by Auto Drilling................................................... 327
Wire EDM ............................................................................................................................. 328
About Wire EDM NC Sequences...................................................................................... 328
To Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence ................................................................... 328
Contouring and No Core Cut Motions............................................................................... 329
9
To Create Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions........................................................... 329
Example: Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions............................................................ 331
To Specify Thread Point and Approach Point ................................................................... 332
Example: Specifying Thread Point and Approach Point .................................................... 333
To Specify Taper Angle for 2-Axis Contouring.................................................................. 333
To Specify Corner Conditions .......................................................................................... 334
Corner Condition Types ................................................................................................... 335
Example: Corner Conditions ............................................................................................ 336
To Create No Core Cut Motions ....................................................................................... 336
Specifying a Start Point for No Core Cut Motions ............................................................. 337
To Use Previous Cut Motions........................................................................................... 338
To Mirror Cut Motions ...................................................................................................... 338
Example: Mirroring Cut Motions ....................................................................................... 339
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Taper Angle Format................................ 339
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Head1/Head2 Format ............................. 340
Automatic Synchronization of Start and End Points .......................................................... 341
To Set Up the Register Table(s)....................................................................................... 343
Register Tables ............................................................................................................... 344
To Set Up the Radius Substitution Table(s)...................................................................... 344
Radius Substitution Tables .............................................................................................. 345
Auxiliary NC Sequences........................................................................................................ 346
About Auxiliary NC Sequences ........................................................................................ 346
To Create an Auxiliary NC Sequence............................................................................... 346
User-Defined NC Sequences................................................................................................. 346
About User-Defined NC Sequences................................................................................. 346
To Define a Manufacturing UDF....................................................................................... 347
Including Operations, Workcells, and Reference Superfeatures in a Manufacturing UDF.. 348
Example: Manufacturing a Group of Features .................................................................. 349
To Place a Previously Defined Group in Another Manufacturing Model ............................ 349
Example: Using a Manufacturing UDF with Pro/PROGRAM ............................................. 350
The Customize Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 353
About the Customize Dialog Box...................................................................................... 353
To Create a Control Point ................................................................................................ 355
To Create an Offset Control Point .................................................................................... 356
Offset Control Points........................................................................................................ 356
To Create an Automatic Cut Motion ................................................................................. 357
Implicit Tool Motions ........................................................................................................ 357
To Redefine a Follow Cut Motion ..................................................................................... 357
The Follow Cut Dialog Box............................................................................................... 358
To Split a Follow Cut Motion ............................................................................................ 359
10
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion ................................................................................... 360
Example: Using Tool Kerf and CL Command ................................................................... 361
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion in Holemaking............................................................. 362
To Create a Connect Motion ............................................................................................ 363
To Redefine the Connect Motions .................................................................................... 364
To Create a GoTo Point Motion........................................................................................ 365
To Create a Go Delta Motion ........................................................................................... 366
Modifying the Go Delta Increments .................................................................................. 367
To Create a Go Home Motion .......................................................................................... 367
To Create a Plunge Motion .............................................................................................. 367
Plunge Motions................................................................................................................ 368
To Create a Retract Motion.............................................................................................. 368
To Create a Tangent Approach Motion............................................................................. 369
To Create a Tangent Exit Motion...................................................................................... 369
To Create a Normal Approach Motion .............................................................................. 370
To Create a Normal Exit Motion ....................................................................................... 370
To Create a Lead In Motion ............................................................................................. 371
Lead In and Lead Out Motions ......................................................................................... 371
To Create a Lead Out Motion........................................................................................... 372
To Create a Helical Approach Motion............................................................................... 372
To Create a Helical Exit Motion........................................................................................ 373
To Create an Approach Motion Along Tool Axis ............................................................... 373
To Create an Exit Motion Along Tool Axis ........................................................................ 374
To Specify Parameters for a Tool Motion ......................................................................... 374
To Insert a CL Command................................................................................................. 375
CL Commands................................................................................................................. 376
Modifying CL Commands................................................................................................. 377
Customizing the Operation Tool Path .................................................................................... 377
About Customizing the Operation Tool Path..................................................................... 377
To Reorder Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths............................................................... 377
To Synchronize Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths ........................................................ 378
To Specify Synch Points .................................................................................................. 379
To Insert a CL Command................................................................................................. 380
Adding CL Commands at the Operation Level.................................................................. 381
To Modify a CL Command ............................................................................................... 381
To Find a CL Command................................................................................................... 382
To Delete a CL Command ............................................................................................... 382
To Copy a CL Command ................................................................................................. 383
CL Data................................................................................................................................. 383
About CL Data................................................................................................................. 383
11
To Write CL Data to a File................................................................................................ 383
Default CL File Names..................................................................................................... 384
To Create a Set of NC Sequences ................................................................................... 385
Sets of NC Sequences..................................................................................................... 385
To Output CL Data for a Set of NC Sequences ................................................................ 386
To Process CL Data on a Remote Machine...................................................................... 386
To Input a CL Data File.................................................................................................... 387
To Display CL Data for an Operation, NC Sequence, or a Set of NC Sequences.............. 387
The DISPLAY CL Menu ................................................................................................... 388
To Display Tool Path for an NC Sequence ....................................................................... 390
To Rotate or Translate CL Data ....................................................................................... 391
Rotating and Translating CL Data .................................................................................... 391
Example: Translating CL Data ......................................................................................... 391
To Mirror CL Data............................................................................................................ 391
Mirroring CL Data ............................................................................................................ 392
Example: Mirroring CL Data............................................................................................. 392
To Scale CL Data ............................................................................................................ 392
To Output CL Data in Different Units ................................................................................ 392
To Edit CL Data Files....................................................................................................... 393
To Perform Screen Editing of CL Data ............................................................................. 395
To Perform Search/Replace............................................................................................. 396
To Perform CL Data Gouge Checking.............................................................................. 396
To Specify an NC Alias .................................................................................................... 398
NC Aliases....................................................................................................................... 398
To Include Pre- and Post-Machining Files ........................................................................ 399
To Convert a CL File........................................................................................................ 400
Converting CL Files ......................................................................................................... 400
Using the PLAY PATH Dialog Box ................................................................................... 400
Subroutine Programming....................................................................................................... 406
About Subroutine Programming ....................................................................................... 406
To Create a New Subroutine Pattern................................................................................ 406
Limitations ....................................................................................................................... 408
Examples: Subroutine Programming................................................................................ 408
To Redefine a Subroutine Pattern .................................................................................... 409
NC Post-Processing .............................................................................................................. 409
About NC Post-Processing .............................................................................................. 409
To Generate a CL File and an MCD File at the Same Time .............................................. 410
To Generate an MCD File from an Existing CL File .......................................................... 411
CL Output ............................................................................................................................. 411
About CL Output.............................................................................................................. 411
12
Supported CL Data Commands ....................................................................................... 412
CL Output for Holemaking Cycles .................................................................................... 419
CL Output for Circular Interpolation.................................................................................. 424
Synchronized Output for XY-UV 4-Axis Wire EDM ........................................................... 426
NC Check ............................................................................................................................. 427
About NC Check.............................................................................................................. 427
Modifying NC Sequences ...................................................................................................... 428
About Modifying NC Sequences....................................................................................... 428
To Modify an NC Sequence ............................................................................................. 428
Modifying Parameters of Multiple Automatic Cut Motions ................................................. 429
To Change a Parameter Value for All Cut Motions at Once .............................................. 429
To Redefine an NC Sequence ......................................................................................... 430
To Reorder an NC Sequence........................................................................................... 430
To Suppress or Delete Mill Volumes and Surfaces........................................................... 431
Patterning NC Sequences ..................................................................................................... 432
About Patterning NC Sequences...................................................................................... 432
To Create a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence ........................................................ 433
Coordinate System Patterns ............................................................................................ 433
Using Relations................................................................................................................ 434
To Create a Rotary Table Pattern of an NC Sequence ..................................................... 434
To Modify a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence ........................................................ 435
To Create a Reference Manufacturing Pattern ................................................................. 435
Reference Patterns.......................................................................................................... 436
To Reference Pattern a Volume Milling NC Sequence...................................................... 436
To Create a Dimension Pattern of an NC Sequence......................................................... 436
Changing Feed Colors........................................................................................................... 437
About Changing Feed Colors ........................................................................................... 437
To Change a Feed Color.................................................................................................. 437
To Change a Feed Range................................................................................................ 438
Model Tree............................................................................................................................ 438
About Model Tree ............................................................................................................ 438
To Display the Manufacturing Features............................................................................ 439
To Select the Features to Display .................................................................................... 439
To Display the Manufacturing Parent/Child Relationships................................................. 439
To Add Manufacturing Parameters................................................................................... 440
Process Information .............................................................................................................. 440
About Process Information............................................................................................... 440
To Output Manufacturing Information ............................................................................... 440
To Set Up Filter Configuration.......................................................................................... 441
To Generate a Route Sheet ............................................................................................. 442
13
Route Sheet .................................................................................................................... 442
To Create a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process........................................... 442
Using Pro/REPORT in Pro/NC ......................................................................................... 443
Examples: Creating a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process............................ 444
Naming Conventions ............................................................................................................. 446
About Naming Conventions.............................................................................................. 446
Expert Machinist ...............................................................................................447Getting Started with Expert Machinist .................................................................................... 447
About Expert Machinist .................................................................................................... 447
To Create a Machining Process ....................................................................................... 449
To Retrieve a Machining Process..................................................................................... 449
To Create a New NC Model ............................................................................................. 450
The NC MODEL Menu Commands .................................................................................. 450
Tip: Creating NC Models.................................................................................................. 451
To Replace a Reference Model........................................................................................ 451
Part Family Tables in Expert Machinist............................................................................. 452
Creating and Modifying Stock................................................................................................ 452
To Create Stock............................................................................................................... 452
The Create Stock Dialog Box........................................................................................... 453
Example: Creating a Default Billet .................................................................................... 455
To Modify Stock Allowances ............................................................................................ 457
To Modify Stock Outline................................................................................................... 458
Operations ............................................................................................................................ 459
To Create an Operation ................................................................................................... 459
The Operation Setup Dialog Box...................................................................................... 460
To Define Program Zero .................................................................................................. 461
Program Zero Usage ....................................................................................................... 462
Machine Tools....................................................................................................................... 463
To Create a Machine Tool................................................................................................ 463
Machine Tool Settings ..................................................................................................... 464
To Set Up a PPRINT Table.............................................................................................. 467
The PPRINT Table .......................................................................................................... 468
Cutting Tools......................................................................................................................... 471
About Setting Up Tools .................................................................................................... 471
To Set Up Cutting Tools................................................................................................... 471
The Tool Setup Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 471
To Set Up the Material Directory Structure ....................................................................... 473
Example: Setting Up the Material Directory Structure ....................................................... 473
To Add a New Tool .......................................................................................................... 474
To Specify the Cutting Data for the Tool........................................................................... 475
14
To Retrieve Tool Parameters ........................................................................................... 475
To Add a Sketched Tool................................................................................................... 476
To Modify an Existing Tool............................................................................................... 476
To Delete a Tool .............................................................................................................. 477
To Save Tool Parameters ................................................................................................ 477
To Create a Tool Model ................................................................................................... 477
Solid Tool Models ............................................................................................................ 478
To Use a Tool Model........................................................................................................ 478
Using Assembly as a Tool Model ..................................................................................... 479
Machining Features............................................................................................................... 479
About Machining Features ............................................................................................... 479
To Create a Machining Feature........................................................................................ 480
To Adjust Feature Boundaries.......................................................................................... 481
Example: Adjusting Feature Boundaries........................................................................... 481
To Adjust Soft Walls ........................................................................................................ 485
To Adjust Feature Depth.................................................................................................. 485
To Machine a Feature...................................................................................................... 486
To Set Tool Path Properties............................................................................................. 486
To Mimic a Tool Path....................................................................................................... 487
Face Features....................................................................................................................... 488
To Create a Face Feature................................................................................................ 488
To Machine a Face Feature ............................................................................................. 488
The Face Milling Dialog Box............................................................................................. 489
Example: Face Machining................................................................................................ 491
Slab Features........................................................................................................................ 491
To Create a Slab Feature................................................................................................. 491
Example: Creating a Slab Feature ................................................................................... 492
To Machine a Slab Feature.............................................................................................. 493
The Slab Milling Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 494
Pocket Features .................................................................................................................... 496
To Create a Pocket Feature............................................................................................. 496
To Machine a Pocket Feature .......................................................................................... 497
The Pocket Milling Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 498
Through Pocket Features ...................................................................................................... 500
To Create a Through Pocket Feature............................................................................... 500
Example: Creating a Through Pocket............................................................................... 501
To Machine a Through Pocket Feature ............................................................................ 502
The Through Pocket Milling Dialog Box............................................................................ 503
Step Features ....................................................................................................................... 505
To Create a Step Feature ................................................................................................ 505
15
To Machine a Step Feature.............................................................................................. 505
The Step Milling Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 506
Profile Features..................................................................................................................... 508
To Create a Profile Feature.............................................................................................. 508
To Machine a Profile Feature........................................................................................... 509
The Profile Milling Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 510
Channel Features.................................................................................................................. 512
To Create a Channel Feature........................................................................................... 512
Example: Creating a Channel Feature ............................................................................. 513
To Machine a Channel Feature........................................................................................ 513
The Channel Milling Dialog Box ....................................................................................... 515
Example: Channel Machining........................................................................................... 517
Slot Features......................................................................................................................... 518
To Create a Slot Feature.................................................................................................. 518
To Machine a Slot Feature............................................................................................... 519
The Slot Milling Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 520
Through Slot Features........................................................................................................... 521
To Create a Through Slot Feature.................................................................................... 521
To Machine a Through Slot Feature................................................................................. 522
The Through Slot Milling Dialog Box ................................................................................ 523
Boss Top Features................................................................................................................ 525
To Create a Boss Top Feature......................................................................................... 525
Example: Creating a Boss Top Feature............................................................................ 526
To Machine a Boss Top Feature ...................................................................................... 527
The Boss Top Milling Dialog Box...................................................................................... 528
Example: Boss Top Machining......................................................................................... 530
Flange Features .................................................................................................................... 531
To Create a Flange Feature............................................................................................. 531
Example: Creating a Flange Feature................................................................................ 532
To Machine a Flange Feature .......................................................................................... 533
The Flange Milling Dialog Box.......................................................................................... 534
O-Ring Features.................................................................................................................... 535
To Create an O-Ring Feature........................................................................................... 535
To Machine an O-Ring Feature........................................................................................ 536
The O-Ring Milling Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 537
Example: O-Ring Machining............................................................................................. 538
Hole Group Features............................................................................................................. 539
To Create a Hole Group Feature...................................................................................... 539
Combining Selection Methods.......................................................................................... 540
To Select Holes by Axes.................................................................................................. 541
16
To Select Holes by Diameters.......................................................................................... 541
To Select Holes by Surfaces............................................................................................ 541
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters........................................................................... 542
To Machine a Hole Group Feature ................................................................................... 542
The Drilling Strategy Dialog Box....................................................................................... 543
Example: Automatic Chamfer Machining.......................................................................... 546
Entry Hole Features .............................................................................................................. 547
To Create an Entry Hole Feature ..................................................................................... 547
The Entry Hole Dialog Box............................................................................................... 548
To Machine an Entry Hole Feature................................................................................... 549
Free Form Machining ............................................................................................................ 550
To Machine a Free Form Feature..................................................................................... 550
The Freeform Milling Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 552
Tool Path Display and Output ................................................................................................ 553
About Displaying the Tool Path ........................................................................................ 553
To Display the Tool Path.................................................................................................. 554
The PLAY PATH Dialog Box............................................................................................ 555
To Add a Break Point....................................................................................................... 556
Manipulating Break Points ............................................................................................... 556
To Position the Tool......................................................................................................... 557
To Insert a CL Command................................................................................................. 557
Using Parameters in CL Commands ................................................................................ 558
To Delete a CL Command ............................................................................................... 558
To Redefine a CL Command............................................................................................ 558
To Save CL Data in a File ................................................................................................ 559
To Output a CL File ......................................................................................................... 559
To Output NC Codes ....................................................................................................... 560
Template Machining .............................................................................................................. 561
About the Template Manager........................................................................................... 561
To Create a New Template .............................................................................................. 561
To Convert an Existing TPL Template File to XML Format ............................................... 563
To Place a Template........................................................................................................ 563
Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................... 564
To Manipulate Features Using the Model Tree................................................................. 564
Options Available from the Model Tree............................................................................. 564
To Toggle Material Display .............................................................................................. 567
Pro/PROCESS for MFG.....................................................................................568Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 568
About Pro/PROCESS for MFG......................................................................................... 568
About Defining the Process Plan Work Flow .................................................................... 568
17
To Use Pro/PROCESS for MFG....................................................................................... 570
About Specific Uses for Pro/PROCESS for MFG.............................................................. 571
About the Part Machining Process Plan ........................................................................... 571
To Document the Part Machining Process Plan................................................................ 572
Process Steps....................................................................................................................... 573
About Process Assemblies .............................................................................................. 573
To Use Process Mode ..................................................................................................... 574
MFG SETUP Menu Commands ....................................................................................... 575
MFG SEQUENCE Menu Commands ............................................................................... 575
COMPONENT Menu Commands..................................................................................... 576
MFG MODIFY Menu Commands ..................................................................................... 577
STEP REGEN Menu Commands..................................................................................... 578
Select Step Menu ............................................................................................................ 578
Read About and Create Steps ......................................................................................... 578
View Steps ...................................................................................................................... 584
Documenting the Process ..................................................................................................... 585
Create Customized Documentation.................................................................................. 585
Read About Process State............................................................................................... 588
Specific Process Considerations ...................................................................................... 588
Reports............................................................................................................................ 590
Other Process Functions ....................................................................................................... 595
About Obtaining Information............................................................................................. 595
About Step Information .................................................................................................... 595
Simplified Representations............................................................................................... 596
Sample Session .................................................................................................................... 597
About the Sample Session............................................................................................... 597
To Retrieve the Process Model ........................................................................................ 597
Example: Retrieved Process Model.................................................................................. 597
To Create Drawings......................................................................................................... 598
To Use the Play Steps Functionality................................................................................. 598
Example: MFG Model Stock Assembled .......................................................................... 598
To Use the Copy Process Functionality............................................................................ 600
Example: Copy Process Functionality .............................................................................. 601
To Define a New Operation.............................................................................................. 607
18
Pro/NC
Getting Started with Pro/NC
About Pro/NC
Pro/NC will create the data necessary to drive an NC machine tool tomachine a Pro/ENGINEER part. It does this by providing the tools to let themanufacturing engineer follow a logical sequence of steps to progress from adesign model to ASCII CL data files that can be post-processed into NCmachine data. The illustration below summarizes the Pro/NC process.
Create CL DataFiles (APT)
ProduceIn-ProcessModel
Design Model
ManufacturingModel
Workpiece
Define NCSequences
Post-Process
ToolFixture Setups
Drive NCMachine Tool
Machine Tools(Workcells)
Set UpManufacturingDatabase
Set UpOperation
Pro/NC
Licensing RequirementsPro/NC is a family of optional modules that can be ordered in anycombination, to provide a “custom fit of the available functionality to yourcompany’s needs.
The Pro/NC-ADVANCED license covers the complete Pro/NC functionality asdescribed in this Help System. Other modules provide subsets of thisfunctionality.
The table below lists the functionality available with each of the modules.
19
If you do not have the appropriate license to perform a specific set offunctions, you may need to use a different command to start Pro/ENGINEER,or you might be able to “float the necessary options to your working session.
IF YOUHAVE
YOU CAN
Pro/NC-MILL
Perform 2.5-Axis Milling with positioning
Perform 3-Axis Milling and Holemakingwith positioning
Pro/NC-TURN
Perform 2-Axis Turning and centerlinedrilling
Perform 4-Axis Turning and centerlinedrilling
Pro/NC-WEDM
Perform 2- and 4-Axis Wire EDM NCsequences
Pro/NC-ADVANCED
Perform 2.5- to 5-Axis Milling andHolemaking
Perform 2- and 4-Axis Turning andHolemaking
Perform Milling, Turning, and HolemakingNC sequences on Mill/Turn centers
Perform 2- and 4-Axis Wire EDM NCsequences
To Create a Manufacturing Model
1. From the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, choose File > New (or click the correspondingicon). The system displays the New dialog box.
2. Choose the Manufacturing option button under Type.
3. Specify the type of the model by selecting an option button under Sub-Type:
� If you are machining a single part with only one workpiece, choose NC Part.
� If you are machining an assembly of reference parts with no, one, or manyworkpieces, or if you do not have the permission to make changes to the workpiecemodel, choose NC Assembly.
20
4. Type a name for the new manufacturing model in the Name text box, unless you want toaccept the default.
5. Click OK.
6. If you have chosen NC Part as the sub-type, the system displays the browser window,listing all the part files in the current directory. Select the name of the reference part.
7. The system displays the MANUFACTURE menu, the model tree, and, in case of Partmachining, the reference part.
Pro/NC Concepts
Design ModelThe Pro/ENGINEER design model, representing the finished product, is usedas the basis for all manufacturing operations. Features, surfaces, and edgesare selected on the design model as references for each tool path. Referencingthe geometry of the design model sets up an associative link between thedesign model and the workpiece. Because of this link, when the design modelis changed, all associated manufacturing operations are updated to reflect thechange.
Parts, assemblies, and sheetmetal parts may be used as design models.
The following illustration shows an example of a design model—a valvehousing.
Holes to bedril led
Surfaces tobe milled
WorkpieceThe workpiece represents the raw stock that is going to be machined by themanufacturing operations. Its use is optional in Pro/NC. The benefits of usinga workpiece include:
21
• Automatic definition of extents of machining when creating NC sequences.
• Dynamic material removal simulation and gouge checking (available with Pro/NC-CHECK).
• In-process documentation by capturing removed material.
The workpiece can represent any form of raw stock; such as bar stock orcasting. It may be created easily by copying the design model and modifyingthe dimensions or deleting/suppressing features to represent the realworkpiece.
The following illustration shows an example of a workpiece—a casting.
Holes removed—not part of casting
Dimensions increasedto allow for materialremoval
Dimensions decreasedto allow for materialremoval
If you have a Pro/ASSEMBLY license, the workpiece can also be createddirectly in Manufacturing mode by referencing geometry of the design model.
As a Pro/ENGINEER part, the workpiece can be manipulated as any other: itcan exist as an instance of a part family table; it can be modified andredefined.
Manufacturing ModelA regular manufacturing model consists of a design model (also called“reference part since it is used as a reference for creating NC sequences) anda workpiece assembled together (see illustration below). As themanufacturing process is developed, the material removal simulation can beperformed on the workpiece. Generally, at the end of the manufacturingprocess the workpiece geometry should be coincident with the geometry of thedesign model. However, material removal is an optional step.
22
Solid linesshow designmodel
Dotted linesshowworkpiece
Reference part is assembledinside the workpiece
If you are not concerned with material removal, you do not have to define theworkpiece geometry. Use a workpiece represented by a coordinate system(“workpiece with no geometry), or no workpiece at all in Assembly machining.
When a manufacturing model is created, it generally consists of four separatefiles:
• The design model—filename.prt
• The workpiece—filename.prt
• The manufacturing assembly—manufacturename.asm
• The manufacturing process file—manufacturename.mfg
Part and Assembly MachiningThere are two separate types of Pro/NC:
• Part machining—Acts on the assumption that the manufacturing model contains onereference part and one workpiece (also a part).
• Assembly machining—No assumptions are made by the system as to the manufacturingmodel configuration. The manufacturing model can be an assembly of any level ofcomplexity (as with sub-assemblies), and can contain any number of independentworkpieces and/or reference models. It can also contain other components that may bepart of the manufacturing assembly, but have no direct effect on the actual materialremoval process (for example, the turntable, or clamps.).
Once the manufacturing model is created, Part and Assembly machining usesimilar techniques to develop the manufacturing process. If there are specifictechniques for defining an NC sequence they will be described in theappropriate chapter. Keep in mind that in Part machining the systemautomatically determines some of the machining aspects based on the
23
workpiece geometry; therefore, while Assembly machining gives you moreflexibility in building the manufacturing model, it may also require extrasteps when creating the NC sequences.
The major difference between Part and Assembly machining is that in Partmachining all the components of the manufacturing process (operations,workcells, or NC sequences) are part features that belong to the workpiece,while in Assembly machining these are assembly features that belong to themanufacturing assembly.
Note: Use Assembly machining if you do not have the permission to make changes to theworkpiece model.
When you create an automatic material removal feature in Assemblymachining, the system lets you specify whether or not the feature should bevisible at part level (that is, when you retrieve a workpiece in Part mode).
To Retrieve a Manufacturing Model
1. From the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, choose File > Open (or click the correspondingicon). The system displays the browser window.
2. By default, all files are listed in the browser window. To narrow down the search, chooseManufacturing from the Type drop-down list. You can also use one of the followingoptions from the Sub-type list:
� All—Lists all the models in the Manufacturing family of products, that is, all themodels that have the “.mfg extension (including Cast, Mold, Sheet Metalmanufacturing, and so on).
� NC Part—Lists only the Part manufacturing models created in Release 18.0 andlater.
� NC Assembly—Lists only the Assembly manufacturing models created in Release18.0 and later.
� Pre-18.0 MFG—Lists all the Part and Assembly manufacturing models createdprior to Release 18.0.
Note: Filtering by sub-type applies only to files created in Release 16.0 and later.Use All to retrieve “.mfg files created prior to Release 16.0.
3. Select the name of the model to retrieve from the browser window.
4. The system displays the manufacturing model, the model tree, and the MANUFACTUREmenu.
24
To Place a Workpiece in Part Machining
When you create a new model for part machining, you are immediatelyprompted to enter the name of the design model. This is the base componentof the manufacturing assembly. To continue with the manufacturingassembly:
1. Choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose one of the options:
� Assemble—To assemble the workpiece to the design model. Choose Workpiece andenter the name of the workpiece. The workpiece will be retrieved for assembling withthe design model. Assemble the workpiece by specifying the proper placementconstraints.
� Create—To create the workpiece directly in Manufacturing mode (this option is onlyavailable if you have an appropriate license). Choose Workpiece, enter the name ofthe workpiece, and create the first feature of the workpiece referencing geometry ofthe design model as necessary. To create more features on the workpiece, use theMod Work option in the MFG MODIFY menu.
To Manipulate a Workpiece
While there are no manufacturing operations created, you can disassemblethe workpiece using the Delete option in the MFG MDL menu and create orassemble another one. You can also redefine the assembly constraints of theworkpiece using the Redefine option in the MFG MDL menu.
To Place a "No Geometry" Workpiece in Part Machining
You do not have to define the raw stock geometry if you are not concernedwith the material removal simulation. Since the manufacturing operationsare stored as workpiece features, the workpiece part must be present in themanufacturing assembly; however, it need not have any geometry. You willbe able to create manufacturing operations and generate the appropriate CLdata (no material removal simulation will be performed).
1. Choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose Create, Workpiece, and enter a name for the workpiece.
3. Choose Datum, Coord Sys, and create a coordinate system to represent the workpiece.Return to the MANUFACTURE menu.
25
Note: If you do not have the appropriate license and cannot create a workpiece inManufacturing mode, create the workpiece containing a coordinate system in Part modeand then assemble it to the reference part.
To Replace a Design Model in Part Machining
1. Choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose Replace from the MFG MDL menu.
3. Select the member (design model) to replace.
4. The INSTANCES menu appears with a namelist of instances (including the generic part)and two additional options Show Table and Edit Table.
5. Select the replacement instance from the menu.
6. Regenerate.
Part Family Tables in Pro/NC
The Replace option in the MFG MDL menu allows you to replace a designmodel by a member of the same part family. You can create NC sequences forone member of the family, and then generate appropriate CL data for othermembers by replacing the design model and regenerating the manufacturingmodel.
When you replace a design model and regenerate the workpiece, the NCsequences and material removal (where applicable) are updated according tothe new model.
Note: This functionality only works if you use the Replace option in the MFG MDLmenu. For example, if you replace a reference part with another family member usingSimplified Representations, the NC sequences will still reference the original referencepart.
26
Example: Replacing a Design Model
Replace the design modelwith another family instance
Regenerate to updatethe workpiece.
Create the operations.Init ial manufacturingassembly
Designmodel
Workpiece(shown in dashed lines wheredifferent from the design model)
To Build a Manufacturing Model in Assembly Machining
Assembly machining allows you to define a complex manufacturing assemblyusing an extensive set of techniques. You can assemble parts, regularassemblies, or other manufacturing assemblies, and create parts directly inManufacturing mode.
When you choose Mfg Model from the MANUFACTURE menu, the MFG MDLmenu appears with the following options:
• Assemble—Assemble a reference model (part or assembly), workpiece (part orassembly), a general assembly, or another manufacturing assembly.
• Create—Create a reference part or a workpiece (part).
• Redefine—Redefine the assembly constraints of a selected component.
• Delete—Disassemble any of the manufacturing assembly components. If you try todisassemble a component that is referenced by an existing NC sequence, you will get anerror message. You can then redefine or delete the NC sequence and try again.
You can use the MFG MDL menu options in any combination and as manytimes as needed.
In order for the assembly machining NC sequences to be created correctly,the system must “know which components are reference parts, which areworkpieces, and which are “others (that is, stationary fixtures). As youassemble or create components, you have to classify them:
27
• When you choose Assemble from the MFG MDL menu, the following options areavailable:
� Ref Model—Assemble a reference model (part or assembly). If an assembly isspecified, all its components will be classified as reference parts.
� Workpiece—Assemble a workpiece (part or assembly). If an assembly is specified,all its components will be classified as workpieces.
� Gen Assem—Assemble a general assembly. In this case, you have to classify theassembly components. Choose Ref Model from the MFG CLASS menu and select allthe components (parts or subassemblies) to be classified as reference models. ChooseDone Sel when finished. Then choose Workpiece from the MFG CLASS menu andselect all the components to be classified as workpieces. Choose Done Sel whenfinished. All the components that you have not classified as either reference model orworkpiece will stay in the manufacturing assembly but will have no effect in definingmanufacturing geometry.
� Mfg Assem—Assemble another manufacturing assembly. Its reference model(s) andworkpiece(s) will retain their classification in the new manufacturing model.However, any NC sequences that have existed in the manufacturing assembly priorto the current manufacturing process will not be accessible here: you will not be ableto display CL data, or modify parameters.
• When you choose Create from the MFG MDL menu, the component will be classified asthe reference part or the workpiece, depending on the option you use (Ref Model orWorkpiece).
To Reclassify Components of a Manufacturing Assembly
This functionality provides you with an easy way to reclassify fixtures,workpieces, and reference parts for existing assemblies. It will also save timefor manufacturing engineers who receive an assembly with fixtures that mayhave been created in Assembly mode, and who need to specify whichcomponents are the fixtures, and where are the reference part and theworkpiece.
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Mfg Model > Reclassify.
2. Select component(s) that you want to reclassify. Click Done Select when finished.
3. Select the new class for selected components:
� Ref Model—The selected components will be treated as reference models.
� Workpiece—The selected components will be treated as workpieces.
� Fixture—The selected components will be treated as fixtures.
28
Click Done.
4. Select more components to reclassify, or click Quit Select to finish the reclassificationprocess.
Manufacturing Process
About Manufacturing Process
The Pro/NC process consists of the following basic steps:
1. Set up the manufacturing database. It may contain such items as workcells (machinetools) available, tooling, fixture configurations, site parameters, or tool tables. This stepis optional. If you do not want to set up all your database up front, you can go directlyinto the machining process and later define any of the items above when you actuallyneed them.
2. Define an operation. An operation setup may contain the following elements:
� Operation name
� Workcell (machine tool)
� Coordinate system for CL output
� Operation comments
� Operation parameters
� FROM and HOME points
You have to define a workcell and a coordinate system before you can start creating NCsequences. Other setup elements are optional.
3. Create NC sequences for the specified operation. Each NC sequence is a series of toolmotions with the addition of specific post-processor words that are not motion-related butrequired for the correct NC output.
The tool path is automatically generated by the system based on the NC sequence type(such as Volume Milling, Outside Turning), cut geometry, and manufacturingparameters. You can apply more “low level control, if you like, by:
� Defining your own tool motions, that is, approach, exit, and connect motions. Toolmotions include Automatic Cut motions.
� Inserting non-motion CL commands.
29
4. For each completed NC sequence, you can create a material removal feature, either bymaking the system automatically remove material (where applicable), or by manuallyconstructing a regular Pro/ENGINEER feature on the workpiece (such as Slot or Hole).
Modal SettingsMost of the machining setup elements are modal, that is, all subsequent NCsequences will use this setting until you explicitly change it. Among thoseare:
• Operation setup (including the workcell and Machine coordinate system)
• Fixture setup
• Tool (provided the tool type is compatible with the NC sequence type)
• Manufacturing parameters of an activated site
• NC Sequence coordinate system (for the first NC sequence, the Machine Coordinatesystem specified for the operation will be implicitly used as the NC sequence coordinatesystem as well, unless you explicitly specify another one)
• Retract surface
Walk-Through MenusMost of Pro/NC menus are designed to “walk you through the processdevelopment. These menus use checkmarks to select an option; more thanone option may be selected at a time. When you choose Done from such amenu, the system will invoke the appropriate user interface for each selectedoption in turn.
If some selection is necessary at a particular point, the checkmark will beautomatically turned on. For example, when you first set up an operation,only the Workcell and Mach Csys options will have checkmarks next tothem. You can turn other checkmarks on as well (for example, to specify theFROM and HOME points), but you are not required to do so. Similarly, whenyou start defining the first NC sequence, you will have a checkmark at theTool option. For the next NC sequence, however, the Tool option will nothave a checkmark next to it (provided the previous tool is applicable). Turn iton only if you want to specify another tool.
Another aspect of the “walk-through functionality in the process developmentuser interface is that if you omit a step the system will prompt you for therequired information. For example, if you select the NC Sequence optionwhile the operation has not been set up, the system will bring up theOPERATION menu first (as if you have selected Operation), and then invokethe user interface for creating an NC sequence.
This allows you to reduce the time and minimize the number of menuselections involved in defining an NC sequence.
30
To Get Process Status and Tool Path Information
Once you choose Machining from the MANUFACTURE menu, theManufacturing Info dialog box (Info Box) containing the currentmanufacturing info will appear at the top of the screen. The Info Box has twotabulated pages: Status and Tool Path Info. Select on the appropriate tab(Status or Tool Path Info) at the top of the Info Box to toggle between thepages.
The following items are listed in the Status page of the Info Box:
• Operation name
• Workcell name and type
• Machine coordinate system and the model it belongs to
• NC sequence type
• Tool ID and pocket number
• NC Sequence coordinate system and the model it belongs to
If you want to find out more about a particular item, select on theappropriate button in the Info Box, and a corresponding Info window orsubwindow will appear. The following information can be obtained bypressing the buttons in the Info Box:
• Operation—The current operation data will be displayed in the Info window.
• Workcell—The current workcell data will be displayed in the Info window.
• Machine or NC Sequence coordinate system—Highlights on the screen.
• NC sequence—The current NC sequence info will be displayed in the Info window.
• Tool—The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, which allows you to set up tooling.
The information in the Info Box updates as you develop the manufacturingprocess.
When you display the tool path, the appropriate information appears in theTool Path Info section of the Info Box, such as the feedrate, the spindle speed,the current XYZ coordinates of the tool, the current IJK coordinates of thetool axis, and so on. These values update to match the tool’s location.
31
Operations
About Operations
An operation is a series of NC sequences performed at a particular workcelland using a particular coordinate system for CL data output.
Note: You have to set up an operation before you can start creating NC sequences.
An operation is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that contains the followinginformation:
• Name
• Workcell to be used
• Coordinate system for CL data output
• Retract surface
• Comments (optional)
• A set of manufacturing parameters (optional)
• FROM and HOME points (optional)
When the NC sequences and material removal features are created, theycontain a reference to the current operation name. Operation setting ismodal, that is, once an operation is created, it stays current until anotheroperation is created or activated.
To Create an Operation
You have to create an operation before you can start defining NC sequences.When creating the operation, the required elements are the machine toolname and the Program Zero coordinate system.
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Machining > Operation (or Mfg Setup >Operation).
The Operation Setup dialog box opens.
Note: If you do not have any operations defined, the system automatically opens theOperation Setup dialog box and starts creating a new operation when you clickMachining or Mfg Setup.
2. If you already have defined some operations for the current manufacturing process, clickthe New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new operation.
32
The Operation Setup dialog box displays the default settings for the operation nameand output parameters. To change the default name, type the new name in theOperation Name text box.
3. Select or create a machine tool (workcell). If you have set up some machine tools prior tocreating the operation, their names appear in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create
a machine tool, click next to the NC Machine drop-down list.
4. Define the Program Zero. Click next to the Program Zero text box and select orcreate a coordinate system. Once the Program Zero is defined, the name of the coordinate
system appears in the Program Zero text box, and clicking next to it will highlightthe coordinate system on the screen.
5. Use any of the other, optional, elements of operation setup, if needed. You can:
� On the General tab, set up the Retract surface. The Retract surface is used forcreating Milling and Holemaking NC sequences. If you do not define it at this time,you will be prompted to do this once you start creating the first Milling orHolemaking NC sequence. Click for details.
� On the General tab, click to assemble and set up the fixtures. Click fordetails.
� On the From/Home tab, specify datum points to serve as FROM and HOMElocations.
� On the Output tab, change the output parameters or type the operation comments,to be output using PPRINT.
6. Click OK to finalize creating the operation and close the dialog box.
7. If you want to immediately create another operation, click Apply, and then click the Newicon at the top of the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Operation Setup Dialog Box
The Operation Setup dialog box contains the following elements:
• Operation Name—The operation name identifies the operation within themanufacturing process. The default operation names have the format OP010, OP020,where the number gets automatically incremented by the system. You can type anyname.
• NC Machine—The name of the machine tool (workcell) used to perform the operation. Ifyou have set up some machine tools prior to creating the operation, their names appear
in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create or redefine a machine tool, click nextto the NC Machine drop-down list.
33
In the lower portion of the Operation Setup dialog box there are three tabs:General, From/Home, and Output. They contain the following elements:
The General tab
• Program Zero—Select or create a coordinate system used for NC output and for othermachining references.
• The Retract group box—Specify how the tool retracts between the cuts:
� Surface—Set up the retract surface.
� Tolerance—Controls maximum deviation of the tool when it moves along a non-planar retract surface. The default is 0.1" (in English units) or 1 mm (in metricunits). You can type any value.
• The icon—Assemble and set up the fixtures.
The From/Home tab
• FROM Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the FROM location. Once set,
the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking highlights the datum
point on the screen. Clicking cancels the FROM setting.
• HOME Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the HOME location. Once set,
the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking highlights the datum
point on the screen. Clicking cancels the HOME setting.
Note: If the workcell associated with the operation has two heads, you canset up separate FROM and HOME points for the second head. In this case, aFrom motion will be created between the From point specified for a head(that is, Head 1 or Head 2) and the first point of the first NC sequence thatuses this head; a Home motion will be created from the last point of the lastNC sequence that uses this head to the Home point for the head.
The Output tab
• Output NCL File—The default name for the operation cutter location (CL) data file.You can type any name. Clicking Use Default sets it back to the system default.
• PARTNO—The part name, output with the PARTNO command, as well as usingPPRINT. You can type any name. Clicking Use Default sets it back to the systemdefault (the name of the workpiece for Part machining, and the name of themanufacturing assembly for Assembly machining).
• Startup File—Type the name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning ofthe operation CL file (after the PARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands). The filemust be located in your current working directory and have the extension “.ncl.
34
• Shutdown File— Type the name of the file you want to be included at the very end ofthe operation CL file. The file must be located in your current working directory andhave the extension “.ncl.
• Comments—Type the operation comments in the text box below. These comments canbe output using PPRINT.
To Specify Comments for an Operation
The comments for an operation can be listed in the Manufacturing info; theycan also be output in the CL data files using PPRINT.
1. On the Output tab of the Operation Setup dialog box, type the operation comments in theComments text box.
2. Use the following buttons located to the right of the Comments text box, as necessary:
� Open—Read in an exiting text file containing operation comments. The contents ofthis file will replace the current operation comments, if any.
� Insert—Insert the contents of an exiting text file containing operation comments atthe cursor location, while preserving the current operation comments, if any.
� Save As—Save current operation comments in a text file.
� Clear—Remove current operation comments.
To Activate an Operation
Once an operation is created, it stays current until another operation iscreated or activated. All newly created NC sequences will be included in thisoperation.
Follow the procedure below if you want to activate one of the previouslycreated operations (to add another NC sequence to it, or to customize its toolpath).
1. Click Operation.
2. The Operation Setup dialog box opens, with the name of the currently active operationdisplayed in the Operation Name text box.
3. Select the name of the operation you want to activate from the drop-down list.
4. Click OK to activate the operation and close the dialog box.
35
Workcells
About Workcells
A workcell is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that specifies a machine toolusing:
• Name
• Type
• Number of axes
• A set of parameters
• Associated tools
• Associated site(s)
To Create a Machine Tool (Workcell)
1. On the MFG SETUP menu, click Workcell. Another way to access this functionality is to
click in the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box opens.
2. If you already have defined some machine tools for the current manufacturing process,click the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new machine tool.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box displays the default settings for the machinename, type, and parameters. You can click OK or Apply at this point to create a machinetool with default name and parameters, and no cutting tools associated with it.
3. To change the machine name, type the new name in the Machine Name text box.
4. To change the machine type, use the Machine Type drop-down list.
Click to see a summary of the existing workcell types and the NC sequence typessubsequently available for each of them. The number of axes specified for the workcellwill also affect the NC sequence options; for example, if you set up a 4-Axis Mill workcell,you will have the 3 Axis and 4 Axis options available when creating NC sequences, butthe 5 Axis option will not appear.
Auxiliary NC sequences are available for any type of workcell.
5. To change the number of axes, use the Number of Axes drop-down list.
6. To change the parameters, use the tabs located in the lower portion of the dialog box.
36
7. To set up the cutting tools for the machine, click the Cutting Tool Setup button locatedon the Cutting Tools tab. You can also set up the tools later by clicking NC Setup >Cutting Tool Manager.
8. Click OK to finalize the machine tool creation and close the dialog box.
9. If you want to immediately create another machine tool, click Apply, and then click theNew or the Open icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box.
You can save the current machine tool, along with its parameters, by clicking the Saveicon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box. You can then use the Openicon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box to create a new machine toolwith the same parameters, whether in this or in another NC process.
Machine Tool Settings
A machine tool is identified by the following elements:
• Machine Name—The machine name identifies the machine tool within themanufacturing process. The default machine names have the format MACH01, MACH02,where the number gets automatically incremented by the system. You can type anyname.
When you save the machine tool data on disk, the system uses the Machine Name as afilename (with the .gph extension).
• Machine Type—The machine type can be Mill, Lathe, Mill/Turn, or Wedm.
• Number of Axes—Depending on the machine type, can be:
� For Mill—3 Axis (default), 4 Axis, or 5 Axis.
� For Lathe—1 Turret (default) or 2 Turrets.
� For Mill/Turn—2 Axis, 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis (default).
� For Wedm—2 Axis (default) or 4 Axis.
• CNC Control—The controller name (optional).
• Location—The location of the machine tool (optional).
• Orientation—(Available only for Lathe or Mill/Turn machine tools.) Specifies the latheorientation: Horizontal (default) or Vertical. This option defines the default Sketcherorientation when you later create Turning NC sequences in this workcell:
� For Horizontal, the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system will pointhorizontally to the right, and the x-axis—vertically upward.
37
� For Vertical, the z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system will point verticallyupward, and the x-axis—horizontally to the right.
The tabs on the Machine Tool Settings dialog box enable you to specify thefollowing parameters of a machine tool.
The Output tab
Post Processor Options
• PP Name—The name of the default post-processor associated with the machine. Typethe name in the text box. The Reset button lets you change the name back to the systemdefault.
• ID—The post-processor ID.
PPRINT—Opens the PPRINT menu to let you set up your PPRINT options.
CL Command Output Options
• FROM—Specifies how the FROM statement will be output to an operation CL data file:
� Do Not Output (default)—No FROM statements are output. If a From point isspecified, its location is output as a GOTO statement at positioning feed.
� Only At Start—A FROM statement is output at the beginning of the file. Itcorresponds to the location of the From point, if specified, or to the first location onthe tool path for the first machining feature. All other tool paths are added to theoperation without a FROM statement.
� At Every Tool Path—FROM statements are output at the beginning of each toolpath for a machining feature. For the first tool path, this FROM statementcorresponds to the location of the operation From point, if specified, or to the firstlocation on the tool path for this machining feature.
• LOADTL—Controls the output of the LOADTL command in the operation CL data file:
� Modal (default)—The LOADTL command is output at the beginning of CL data for afeature tool path only if a tool change is needed.
� Not Modal—Outputs the LOADTL statement at the beginning of each feature toolpath, regardless of whether the tool is the same or changed.
• COOLNT/OFF—Controls the output of the COOLNT/OFF statement.
� Output (default)—The COOLNT/OFF statement is output at the end of each featuretool path.
38
� Do Not Output—COOLNT/OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
• SPINDLE/OFF—Controls the output of the SPINDL /OFF statement.
� Output (default)—The SPINDL /OFF statement is output at the end of each featuretool path.
� Do Not Output—SPINDL /OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
Multiple Axis Output Options
These options become accessible only for a Mill type machine tool when youset Number of Axes to 4 Axis.
• Use Rotate Output—If this option is not selected (default), all CL data is transformedand output in the coordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system. When you selectthis option, the system outputs the applicable TRANS and ROTABL commands to specifylinear and rotational transformations. Only select this option when indexing to a newtable position is desired.
• Rotation Output Mode—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected.Controls output of ROTABL statements. The values are: Incremental (default) andAbsolute. In Absolute mode, zero position is defined by the Program Zero.
• Rotation Direction—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected. Allows youto specify that rotation is performed in a particular direction (this may occur when thereis an obstruction in one rotation direction but not another). The values are:
� Shortest (default)—Make the shortest possible move to the new position.
� CLW—Always rotate in the clockwise direction.
� CCLW—Always rotate in the counterclockwise direction.
• Rotation Axis—Specify the rotation axis: A-Axis or B-Axis (default).
Milling Capability
These options become accessible only for a Mill/Turn type machine tool.
• Head 1—Specify whether milling is available on Head 1.
• Head 2—Specify whether milling is available on Head 2.
If both Head1 and Head2 are selected, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options willappear in the MACH AUX menu when creating Milling NC sequences.
39
Creating a Milling or Holemaking NC sequence using HEAD2 will result inHEAD2 statement being output in the CL file.
If neither Head1 nor Head2 is selected when defining the workcell, then theSEL MENU with the MILL and TURN options will not appear when creatingNC sequences. That is, once you click NC Sequence on the MACHININGmenu, you will be brought directly into the MACH AUX menu for Turning.
Note: 5-Axis Holemaking will be allowed on a Mill/Turn workcell, even if it isdefined as 2- or 3-Axis. Select the Head1 option, and then select MILL fromthe SEL MENU when creating the NC sequence.
Cutter Compensation
When you expand this field, the Output cutter position options becomeavailable:
• Tool Center—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the tool center.
• Tool Edge—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the cutting edge of thetool. If you select this option, type the desired value in the Safe Radius text box. Thisvalue represents the smallest concave corner radius that can be safely machined, andmust be slightly bigger than the radius (Cutter Diameter/2) of the biggest tool on themachine. The Adjust Corner drop-down list gives you a choice of corner conditionoptions for convex corners:
� Straight—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straightsegments extended until they intersect.
� Fillet—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straightsegments connected with an arc.
� Automatic—The system adds a fillet corner condition at all the convex corners onthe outside contour of the part, and a loop corner condition at all the convex cornerson the inside contour of the part.
The Spindle tab
• Maximum Speed—Maximum allowable spindle speed for the machine tool (optional).Type the maximum speed value in RPM (revolutions per minute).
• Horsepower—Spindle horsepower (optional).
The Feed tab
40
• Feed Units—Select the rapid feed rate units from the Rapid Traverse drop-down list.The values are:
� IPM (default)—inches per minute
� MMPM—millimeters per minute
• Feed Limits—Type the value of the feed rate used for rapid traverse in the Rapid FeedRate text box (optional).
The Cutting Tools tab
• Tool Change Time—Time needed for changing a tool, in seconds (optional). Type thevalue in the text box, or use the UP and DOWN arrows next to the text box to increase ordecrease the value, respectively.
• The Cutting Tool Setup button opens the Tool Setup dialog box to let you set up thecutting tools associated with the machine tool. For 2-turret Lathe and 4- or 5-axisMill/Turn machines, you get separate cutting tool setup buttons for Head 1 and Head 2.
The Travel tab
Lets you specify the travel limits for the machine tool: X-Axis Travel, Y-Axis Travel, and Z-Axis Travel. Specifying these values is optional. Valuesfor the travel limits along the axes should be the actual dimensions thatindicate the extent of the machine tool workspace relative to the ProgramZero coordinate system. For example, if a machine tool is 60 inches wide, andthe origin of the Program Zero coordinate system is located halfway betweenthe ends, specify the travel limits for X-Axis Travel as follows: type -30 inthe left text box and 30 in the text box on the right.
If you display or otherwise output the CL data for a machining feature thatexceeds the limitations of the machine tool where it is defined, theInformation Window will appear, listing the values of the limits that havebeen exceeded and their corresponding actual values.
The Comments tab
Type the comments associated with the machine tool in the text box(optional).
41
Workcell Types
The workcell type determines the types of NC sequences that can be createdusing it (for example, 4 Axis Lathe allows you to perform 2- and 4-axisTurning and Holemaking).
WorkcellType
Description
NCSequenceTypesAvailable
Lathe 2- or 4-AxisTurning andHolemaking.
Turning:
Area
Profile
Groove
Thread
Holemaking:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
Mill 3- to 5-AxisMilling andHolemaking.
Milling:
Volume
Local Mill
Surface Mill
Face
Profile
Pocketing
Trajectory
Thread
Engraving
42
Plunge
Holemaking:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap
Ream
Mill/Turn Mill/Turncenter (2-AxisTurning to5-AxisMilling andHolemaking).
Milling:
Volume
Local Mill
Surface Mill
Face
Profile
Pocketing
Trajectory
Thread
Engraving
Plunge
Turning:
Area
Profile
Groove
Thread
Holemaking:
Drill
Face
Bore
Countersink
43
Tap
Ream
WEDM WireElectricDischargeMachine (2-or 4-Axis),as well asany othertype of 2DContouring(forexample,flame cut orlaser.).
WEDM
You can create a workcell at setup time and then use it in an operation, orcreate a workcell directly when defining an operation.
Saving and Retrieving Workcells
Workcells are saved as user-defined features (groups) containing a singlefeature (the workcell).
The configuration file option “pro_mf_workcell_dir allows you to specify a“library directory for workcells. There, the workcell files will be available toall users for retrieval into their manufacturing processes. The option’s valueis the path name (absolute path is recommended) of the directory where theworkcell files will be stored.
To Set Up a PPRINT Table
1. On the Output tab of the Machine Tool Setup dialog box, click PPRINT. Another way toaccess this functionality is from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu: click MfgSetup > CL Setup > PPRINT.
The PPRINT menu opens with the following options:
� Create—Create a new PPRINT table.
� Modify—Modify the current PPRINT table.
� Retrieve—Retrieve an existing PPRINT table from the current working directory.
44
� Save—Save the current PPRINT table for later use. You will be prompted for thename of the file. The file will have an extension “.ppr and will be stored in thecurrent working directory.
� Show—Show the current PPRINT settings.
10.If the table has not been set up, the Modify option will be grayed out. Choose Create. Ifyou have previously set up a PPRINT table, you can either change your former settingsusing the Modify option, or start with a clean table using Create.
The Activate PPRINT dialog box opens. It contains all the items that can be outputthrough PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not is determined by the flag value.The default flag value for all items is “NO. Change it to “YES if you want the item to beoutput.
2. To change the flag value, highlight the item or items in the PPRINT table by clicking onthem once, then click on the appropriate action button (Yes or No), located in the lower-left portion of the dialog box. To unselect an item, click on it once more. You can also usethe Select All and Unselect All icons located in the lower-right portion of the dialog box.
3. To supply comments for an item, highlight it and type the comment in the Commentstext box. When you highlight an item with an existing comment, the comment isdisplayed in the Comments text box. While editing a comment, you can revert to theprevious value by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the Comments text box.
4. Click OK to finish setting up the PPRINT table.
The PPRINT Table
To output some model information to the CL files, you have to set up aPPRINT table for this model. This table contains all the items that can beoutput through PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not isdetermined by the flag value. The default flag value for all items is “NO.Change it to “YES if you want the item to be output. You can add an optionalcomment to be output along with the item.
Note: Comments are limited to 69 characters or less.
Whenever you output CL data to file, the system will check the PPRINTtable. If any flag is set to “YES and the appropriate information is available,the corresponding PPRINT command will be output to the CL file.
The following items are output once per CL file:
• PART_NAME
• DATE_TIME
• SCALE
• TRANSLATE
45
• ROTATE
The following items are output once per operation:
• OPERATION_NAME
• OPERATION_COMMENTS
• LAYER_NAME
• UDF_NAME
• TOOL_TABLE
• ONLY_OUTPUT_USED_TOOLS
The following items are output once per NC sequence:
• NC_SEQUENCE_NAME
• NC_SEQUENCE_COMMENTS
• FEATURE_ID
• SEQUENCE_TYPE
• CUTCOM_REGISTER
• SPINDLE_SPEED
• CUT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• ARC_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• FREE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• RETRACT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• PLUNGE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• SCAN_TYPE
• RETRACT_HEIGHT
• NUMBER_OF_SLICES
The following items are output once per LOADTL or TURRET statement:
• TOOL_NAME
• TOOL_POSITION_NUMBER
46
• TOOL_COMMENTS
• TOOL_PARAMETERS
• TOOL_OFFSET_NUMBER
• CHAMFER_LENGTH
• CORNER_RADIUS
• CSINK_ANGLE
• CUTTER_DIAM
• DRILL_DIAMETER
• DRILL_LENGTH
• END_ANGLE
• END_OFFSET
• GAUGE_Z_LENGTH
• GAUGE_X_LENGTH
• HOLDER_TYPE
• INSERT_LENGTH
• LENGTH
• LENGTH_UNITS
• NOSE_RADIUS
• NUM_OF_TEETH
• POINT_ANGLE
• SHANK_DIAMETER
• SIDE_ANGLE
• SIDE_WIDTH
• TOOL_MATERIAL
• TOOL_ORIENTATION
• TOOL_TYPE
47
Fixtures
About Fixtures
Fixtures are parts or assemblies that help orient and hold the workpieceduring a manufacturing operation. Fixtures can be created and saved in Partor Assembly mode, and retrieved into the Manufacturing mode during fixturesetup. Creating the fixture in Assembly mode is advantageous since fixturescan be created as needed during the intermediate process steps byreferencing the workpiece. It is a simple process, since you can build thefixture referencing the workpiece with Use Edge.
You do not have to quit out of Manufacturing mode to enter Part or Assemblymode; you can simply open another object (part or assembly) between NCsequences.
Note: If you have an appropriate license, you can use the library ofmanufacturing fixtures (clamps, holding plates, chucks and jaws) of genericsizes.
To Create a Fixture Setup
1. On the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, click Mfg Setup > Fixture > Create.
Another way to access this functionality is to click on the General tab of theOperation Setup dialog box. The FIXTURE SET menu opens. Click Create.
2. On the DEFINE FIXT menu, click Name and enter a name for the fixture setup. Thename must be unique within the manufacturing model. If you do not use this option, thesetup will be given a default name (FSETP0, FSETP1).
3. Click Component. The FIXT COMP menu appears with the options:
� Assemble—Assemble a new fixture component (part or assembly).
� Create—Create a new part on the fly. This option allows you to create fixtures asneeded during the intermediate process steps by referencing the workpiecegeometry.
� Clear—Remove selected fixture components using the Select option, or remove allthe components in the current fixture setup using the All option in the CLEAR menu.
4. The Setup Time command allows you to type the time it takes to assemble/disassemblethe fixtures. This time will then appear in the route sheet as a setup time for the NCsequence.
48
5. Click Done when finished defining the fixture setup. This setup becomes active (that is,it will be used by all newly created NC sequences).
Fixture Setup
To use fixtures in the manufacturing process, you must first define thefixture setup(s) for the manufacturing model. Each fixture setup has a nameand contains information about the fixtures that are to be present in themodel when the setup is active. Only one setup can be active at a time. Setupnames can be used to manipulate fixtures within the manufacturing model.Since fixture setups contain fixture assembly information, eachmanufacturing model has to have its fixture setup(s) explicitly defined;unlike sites or tools, you can not retrieve a fixture setup from one model intoanother manufacturing model. Fixture setups can be defined at the time ofsetting up an operation or at any time between NC sequences.
When you click on the General tab of the Operation Setup dialog box(or click Fixture on the MFG SETUP menu), the FIXTURE SET menu appearswith the commands:
• Create—Create a new fixture setup. This setup then becomes active (that is, it will beused by all newly created NC sequences).
• Modify—Modify an existing fixture setup. When you select a name of the setup tomodify from a namelist menu, the current setup is temporary replaced by the setupselected for modification. You can modify the setup name, add or remove components, orchange the setup time. Once modifications are done, however, the original setup that wason display before you started the modification process will reappear. If you want to makethe modified setup active, use the Activate option below.
• Delete—Delete a fixture setup by selecting its name from a namelist menu.
• Activate—Specify which of the previously defined fixture setups to display (that is,make active). Select the name of the fixture setup you want from a namelist menu.
Coordinate Systems
About Coordinate Systems
Coordinate systems are one of the elements of operation and NC sequencesetup in Pro/NC. They define the orientation of the workpiece on the machineand act as the origin (0, 0, 0) for CL data generation.
Coordinate systems used in Pro/NC can belong to the design model, to theworkpiece, or to any other component of the manufacturing assembly. You
49
can use coordinate systems created prior to bringing a component into themanufacturing model, or create them in Manufacturing mode.
To Specify a Coordinate System
The Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems are specified in a similarway, as described in the following procedure.
1. Click next to the Program Zero text box in the Operation Setup dialog box, orselect the Coord Sys option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. The MACH CSYS or the SEQ CSYS menu, respectively, will appear with the followingoptions:
� Create—Select the model that the coordinate system will belong to, then create thecoordinate system.
� Select—Select the coordinate system either by selecting on the screen or using theSel By Menu option.
� Use Prev—Allows you to select a coordinate system used for an earlier operation orNC sequence.
If you specify separate coordinate systems, the NC Sequence coordinatesystem is highlighted in magenta, the Machine coordinate system—in red.
Machine and NC Sequence Coordinate Systems
There are two types of coordinate systems in Manufacturing:
• Machine—Acts as the default origin for all CL data. This coordinate system is specifiedat the time of operation setup using the Program Zero option in the Operation Setupdialog box. All NC sequences created within a certain operation will use the sameMachine coordinate system.
• NC Sequence—Affects all the NC sequence data, such as retract surface and cut feeddirection. This coordinate system is specified at the time of NC sequence setup using theCoord Sys option in the SEQ SETUP menu. The NC Sequence coordinate system mustbe oriented in a certain way, as described in the following sections.
The NC Sequence coordinate system setting is modal, that is, once specified,it will stay for all subsequent NC sequences until you change it. For the first
50
NC sequence, the Machine coordinate system specified for the operation willbe implicitly used as the NC sequence coordinate system as well.
If the Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems are different, then, uponcreating an NC sequence, all CL data will be transformed and output in thecoordinates of the Machine coordinate system. If the Z axes of the NCSequence and Machine coordinate systems are not parallel, the toolorientation vector (i,j,k) or table rotation will be provided. This functionalityallows you to post-process 3-axis operations to be performed on the 5-axismachines. In Turning, it can be used if the post-processor requires X-Y input.
Notes:
� Using the CL_DATA_MODE parameter, you may specify that the linear androtational transitions between the NC Sequence and Machine coordinate systems beoutput in the CL file, instead of transforming all CL coordinates.
� To output CL data with respect to the NC Sequence coordinate system, use theCOORDINATE_OUTPUT parameter.
Z-Axis Orientation
Pro/NC NC Sequence coordinate systems should be oriented so that thepositive Z-axis points away from the holding fixtures of the machine. Forexample, on a vertical milling machine, the positive Z-axis points up, awayfrom the table surface. The following shows the Z-axis orientation for milling.
For turning, remember that the positive Z-axis points away from the latheheadstock. If you create a coordinate system at the headstock end of the part,make sure the positive Z-axis points towards the rest of the workpiece. Onthe other hand, if you create a coordinate system at the tailstock end of thepart, the Z-axis should point away from the workpiece, off into space. Ineither case, the Z-axis must be colinear with the turning axis. The followingshows the Z-axis orientation for turning.
51
NC Sequences
About NC Sequences
An NC sequence is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that represents a singletool path. The tool path consists of the following components:
• Automatic Cut motions, that is, tool motions while actually cutting the workpiecematerial.
• Approach, exit, connect moves.
• Additional CL commands and post-processor words (for example, feedrates, PPRINT,OPSTOP).
To Create an NC Sequence
When you choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu, a namelistmenu appears with the names of all existing NC sequences and the NewSequence option. Selecting an existing NC sequence name allows you toredefine references for this NC sequence (that is, redefine the sequence setupelements, or change the tool motions). Selecting New Sequence allows youto create a new NC sequence under the current operation.
You have to set up an operation before creating an NC sequence. The type ofworkcell defines the types of NC sequences available. Once you select thetype of the NC sequence, define the tool path using the NC SEQUENCE menuoptions:
• Seq Setup—Specify geometric references appropriate to the NC sequence type, forexample, select surfaces to mill, or sketch the area of the cut for turning. This option alsoallows you to change the modal settings, such as tool, coordinate system, retract, andspecify the manufacturing parameters for the NC sequence. For most NC sequence types,the system will generate the default tool path based on the results of sequence setup.
• Play Path—Verify the tool path prior to completing the NC sequence.
52
• Customize—Customize the default tool path, that is, define your own tool motions andinsert CL commands.
• Seq Info—Brings up a checklist menu of all tool motions, along with the NC Sequenceoption. Select the motion(s) that you want to display info for (you can use Select All); usethe NC Sequence option to display the NC sequence info. The appropriate info will bedisplayed in an Info Window.
• Done Seq—Finalize the current NC sequence and return to the MACHINING menu.
• Next Seq—Finalize the current NC sequence and immediately start defining a new NCsequence of the same type and with the same initial setup (tool, parameters, cutgeometry). You are brought directly into the NC SEQUENCE menu, where you can changeany of the setup elements or “tweak the tool path using the Customize functionality.
• Quit Seq—Abort defining the NC sequence. You will be prompted for a confirmation.
Elements of NC Sequence Setup
An NC sequence setup consists of the following elements:
• Name (optional)
• Comments (optional)
• Tool
• Manufacturing parameters
• NC Sequence coordinate system
• Retract surface (for Milling and Holemaking NC sequences)
• Geometric references appropriate to the NC sequence type
• Start and End points (optional)
Most of these settings are modal. You usually have to specify cut geometryand adjust the manufacturing parameters for each specific NC sequence. Ifyou choose Customize prior to completing the sequence setup, theappropriate interface will be invoked automatically to “walk you through therequired steps.
To Customize a Name of an NC Sequence
53
As an NC sequence is created, it will be given a default name correspondingto its type (for example, Volume Milling). The Name option in the SEQSETUP menu allows you to enter a customized name for the NC sequence.This name will then be displayed instead of the default NC sequence name inthe namelist menus and messages (for example “Computing tool path forNC_Sequence_name).
To Specify Comments for an NC Sequence
The comments for an NC sequence can be listed in the Manufacturing info;they can also be output in the CL data files using PPRINT.
1. On the SEQ SETUP menu, click Comments.
2. The NCSQ COMMENT menu appears with the following options:
� Create—A system window will appear to allow you to enter the comments using thesystem editor.
� Modify—A system window will appear with the current comments. Edit thecomments using the system editor.
To Set Up Start and End Points for an NC Sequence
At the NC sequence level, the start and end points are specified using theStart and End options in the SEQ SETUP menu. When a new NC sequence iscreated, it will automatically use the End point of the previous NC sequenceas its Start point.
1. On the SEQ SETUP menu, select the Start and/or End option.
2. The following commands are available:
� Create—Create a datum point to serve as the appropriate start or end point
� Select—Select an existing datum point to serve as the start or end point.
� Remove—(Appears only if a point of the appropriate type has already beenspecified.) Delete the start or end point.
54
To Select an NC Sequence
NC sequence features themselves do not have geometry that you can selecton to choose the NC sequence for modification, CL data output . Whenever anNC sequence is to be selected, the NC Sequence option will appear in theSELECT FEAT menu. When you choose it, a namelist menu of the NCsequences will appear; each NC sequence is identified by its number andtype, followed by the operation name, for example:
1: Volume Milling, Operation: OP010
2: Profile Milling, Operation: OP010
and so forth.
If you have specified an NC sequence name using the Name option in theSEQ SETUP menu, this name will appear in the namelist menu instead of theNC sequence type (for example, Volume Milling).
Note: If a line is too long to fit in the namelist menu, place the cursor over it and checkthe bottom line in the message window to see the whole entry.
If more than one operation has been defined for the model, the SEL NC SEQmenu controls which NC sequences are listed in the namelist menu:
• By Cur Oper—Only NC sequences that belong to the current operation will appear inthe namelist menu.
• All Operations—All NC sequences existing in the model will appear in the namelistmenu.
Another way to select an NC sequence is to choose the correspondingmaterial removal feature (if it has been created). However, this works only ifthe material removal feature itself can not be selected for this particularoperation. For example, this method can be used for CL data output, but willnot work for suppressing or reordering.
An NC sequence can also be selected using the Sel By Menu option (as anyother feature) by its feature number, internal ID, or from a Model Tree.
Retract Surface
About Retract Surface
The retract surface defines the level to which the tool is retracted after a cut.Depending on your machining needs, you can specify the retract surface to bea plane, cylinder, sphere, or a custom-made surface.
55
You can specify the retract surface at the operation level, and then modify itat the NC sequence level, if needed.
When an operation Retract Surface is defined, the tool will traverse alongthis surface from the end of one sequence to the beginning of the nextsequence.
The retract surface setting is modal, that is, once specified, it will stay for allsubsequent NC sequences until you change it, as long as it is applicable tothe NC sequence type. For example, if you specify a cylinder at the operationlevel on a 5-Axis workcell, you will have to define a planar retract surfacewhen creating a 3-Axis NC sequence.
The following illustration shows various types of retract surfaces.
Retractplane
Retractcylinder
When you set a non-planar retract surface, you can control the maximumdeviation of the tool from this surface, as shown in the following illustration,by specifying a Tolerance value in the Retract group box, located on theGeneral tab of the Operation Setup dialog box. The default is 0.1" (1 mm).
Tolerance
tool
retract surface
tool path
56
To Set Up a Retract Surface
1. Click next to the Surface text box in Retract group box, located on the Generaltabbed page of the Operation Setup dialog box, or select Retract from the SEQ SETUPmenu.
2. The system displays the Retract Selection dialog box.
3. Select the Surface option button and click one of the following buttons:
� Select—Select a datum plane, a planar or revolved surface feature, or a planarsurface on the model.
� Create Plane—Create a datum plane.
� Create Surface—Create a revolved surface feature. This option is not available in3-Axis workcells or for 3-Axis NC sequences. You do not have to use the Revolveoption to create the surface, as long as the resulting surface is a surface ofrevolution; for example, you can use Extrude and create a cylinder.
� Along Z Axis—Create a datum plane normal to the Z-axis of either the Machine orthe NC Sequence coordinate system (depending on whether you define retract at theoperation or the NC sequence level), by specifying an offset along this axis. Type theoffset value in the Enter Z Depth text box.
4. The Preview button lets you display the retract surface prior to finalizing the setup.Click OK to create the retract surface, Cancel—to quit.
To Set Up a Retract Sphere
1. Select the Sphere option button in the Retract Selection dialog box.
2. By default, the sphere center is either the Machine or the NC Sequence coordinatesystem (depending on whether you define retract at the operation or the NC sequencelevel). To specify a different center, use one of the following options in the drop-down listin the Set Sphere Center group box:
� Default—Use the default center, that is, the Machine coordinate system if youdefine retract at the operation level, or the NC Sequence coordinate system if youdefine retract at the NC sequence level.
� Select Csys—Select a coordinate system.
� Create Csys—Create a coordinate system.
� Select Datum Point—Select a datum point.
57
� Create Datum Point—Create a datum point.
The system displays the name of the coordinate system or datum point that is thecurrent center of the sphere at the bottom of the Set Sphere Center group box. It alsoshows, in parentheses, the name of the model that the coordinate system or datum pointbelongs to.
3. There are two ways to specify the sphere radius:
� Select the Sphere Radius option button and type the radius value in the text box tothe right.
� Select the Offset From Datum Point option button. This activates the Set OffsetReference group box with the following options in the drop-down list:
Default—Use the sphere center as the offset reference.
Select Point—Select a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
Create Point—Create a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
The system displays the name of the reference datum point, with the model name inparentheses, at the bottom of the Set Offset Reference group box. Type the offset valuewith respect to this datum point in the text box below the Offset From Datum Pointoption button.
To Set Up a Retract Cylinder
1. Select the Cylinder option button in the Retract Selection dialog box.
2. By default, the cylinder axis is one of the axes of either the Machine or the NC Sequencecoordinate system (depending on whether you define retract at the operation or the NCsequence level). To specify a different reference, use one of the following options in thedrop-down list at the top of the Set Cylinder Axis group box:
� Default—Use the default reference, that is, the Machine coordinate system if youdefine retract at the operation level, or the NC Sequence coordinate system if youdefine retract at the NC sequence level.
� Select Axis—Select a datum axis.
� Create Axis—Create a datum axis.
� Select Csys—Select a coordinate system.
� Create Csys—Create a coordinate system.
The system displays the name of the reference (coordinate system or datum axis) in themiddle portion of the Set Cylinder Axis group box. It also shows, in parentheses, thename of the model that the coordinate system or datum axis belongs to. If the reference
58
is a coordinate system, you can select which axis to use as the cylinder axis using thedrop-down list at the bottom of the Set Cylinder Axis group box.
3. There are two ways to specify the cylinder radius:
� Select the Cylinder Radius option button and type the radius value in the text boxbelow.
� Select the Offset From Datum Point option button. This activates the Set OffsetReference group box with the following options in the drop-down list:
Default—Use the sphere center as the offset reference.
Select Point—Select a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
Create Point—Create a datum point to be used as the offset reference.
The system displays the name of the reference datum point, with the model name inparentheses, at the bottom of the Set Offset Reference group box. Type the offset valuewith respect to this datum point in the text box below the Offset From Datum Pointoption button.
Material Removal
About Automatic Material Removal
Material removal is a workpiece (or assembly) feature that can be created torepresent the material removed from the workpiece by an individual NCsequence. Pro/NC provides two methods of generating material removalsimulation:
• Automatic—The system automatically calculates material to remove based on thegeometric references specified for the NC sequence.
• Construct—Create material removal feature yourself as a regular Pro/ENGINEERfeature (Cut, Hole).
To Create a Material Removal Feature
1. Choose Matrl Remove from the MACHINING menu.
2. Choose NC Sequence from the SELECT FEAT menu and select the parent NC sequencefrom the namelist menu.
3. Select the method of material removal:
� If you choose Automatic, Pro/NC constructs the appropriate feature.
59
� If you choose Construct, the feature creation interface is invoked. Create thefeature to represent the removed material.
Automatic material removal may not be available for some NC sequence types. In thiscase, you are brought directly into creating a feature.
Material Removal for Assembly Machining
When you create an automatic material removal feature in Assemblymachining, the INTRSCT OPER menu will appear to let you specify the level(part, subassembly, or the top-level assembly) at which the feature should bevisible. If you use the Auto Sel option in the AUTO OPER menu, the volumeof material to be removed by the NC sequence will be automaticallyintersected with all the affected workpieces and the results displayed. If theintersection is performed at the part level (that is, it will be visible in Partmode), and the assembly has several instances of the same part, you will beprompted to select one occurrence of the part to intersect the assemblyfeature with; then the material removal will be shown on all parts accordingto the instance selected for intersection.
Note: If a workpiece is a family instance, or a generic part with instances insession, automatic material removal at part level can not be performed on it.You can use the Construct functionality.
Automatic Material Removal in Milling
For Volume and Local milling, the amount of material removed using theAutomatic option is defined by the milling volume and depends on thePROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameter value. All material inside the volume willbe removed, with the offset equal to the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value left onthe sides and bottom.
For Pocketing, the amount of material removed automatically also dependson the PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameter value. All material along thesurfaces selected for machining will be removed, with the offset equal to thePROF_STOCK_ALLOW value left on the sides and bottom.
When Automatic material removal is performed for a Conventional orContouring surface milling NC sequence, as well as for Plunge milling, thesurface(s) are offset by stock allowance (if applicable) and the side walls arebuilt towards the retract plane. Note that stock allowance is added at all thesurface edges as well. This result is then subtracted from the workpiece.
The following illustration shows the tool path and automatic materialremoval for Conventional surface milling.
60
Automatic material removal for Profile milling is defined by the toolgeometry and the trajectory of the last profiling pass, as shown in the nextillustartion.
NUM_PROF_PASSES 2PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
Material removed for the lastprofiling pass only.
Automatic material removal for Face milling removes all material above thesurface(s) selected for facing.
Automatic material removal for an Engraving NC sequence will produce aline corresponding to the reference groove. Neither the width nor the depth ofthe cut will be reflected.
Automatic material removal is not available for Trajectory and Threadmilling.
Automatic Material Removal in Turning
For Area and Groove turning, the Automatic option will remove materialfrom the whole area of the cut (minus PROF_STOCK_ALLOW). Convexcorners can be either straight or filleted, depending on theCORNER_FINISH_TYPE parameter value.
For Profile turning, Automatic material removal can be created if the NCsequence uses a single Turn Profile, or multiple Turn Profiles that form acontinuous chain of entities. Tool path for Profile turning NC sequences doesnot require definition of cut extensions; for material removal purposes, thesystem adds extensions to the Turn Profile endpoints, similar to cutextensions in Area turning. These extensions point in default directionsdepending on the type of the NC sequence: Outside, Inside, or Face. You do
61
not have control over the direction of material removal extensions; if they donot work for your Turn Profile, create the material removal feature using theConstruct option.
The following illustration shows the default material removal extensions forProfile turning.
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Z
X
Outside Inside Face
For Trajectory and Thread turning, Automatic material removal is notapplicable.
Automatic Material Removal in Holemaking
When Automatic material removal is performed for a Holemaking NCsequence, the system will produce holes in the workpiece coaxial with theholes selected for drilling. The diameter and axial cross-section of the holesare defined by the tool parameters, and the depth of each hole is defined bythe depth of drilling.
Automatic Material Removal in Wire EDM
Automatic material removal is available for No Core Wire EDM only. It is notapplicable for contouring NC sequences.
Tooling
About Elements of Tool Setup
Pro/NC requires the following general categories of information about tools:
• Tool Table information—This set of elements defines the correspondence between adescriptive tool name (Tool_ID) and its location on the machine (Pocket). You canoptionally supply a value for the gauge length register (Offset) and comments output forthe tool (Comments). Each workcell has its own Tool Table.
62
• Tool Type—One of the predefined tool types available in Pro/NC. Tool types correspondto the types of NC sequences performed in the workcell; the tool type, in turn, defines thetool’s cross-section and, therefore, the set of parameters you have to specify for the tool.
• Geometry parameters—Parameters that specify all the dimensions of the tool. Thesedimension values are used in calculating the tool path and material removed, and shouldaccurately reflect the actual tool dimensions and length units. Some of the Geometryparameters are required to define the tool’s cross-section, others are optional. The actualparameter names in this category depend on the Tool Type.
• Advanced parameters—Various parameters, mostly optional, that define tool propertiesother than geometry:
� Length units of the tool (Length_Units). The default length units of a tool are thoseof the workpiece. If you change the Length_Units, this will affect the actual tooldimensions.
� Tool gauge lengths (Gauge_X_Length and Gauge_Z_Length)—optional. (Used tocreate lenght qualifiers in the LOADTL or TURRET statements.)
� Optional parameters used when referencing MDB files: number of teeth (for millingtools only) and tool material. If you do not set these parameters, you will beprompted for information at the time of MDB file lookup.
� Optional comments (Tool_Comment): a text string that will be stored along with thetool parameters and output with the tool table. If you want the tool table to show acomment different than the Tool_Comment parameter string, use Edit > TableComments in the Tool Setup dialog box, and type in a new comment string.
When you set up the tooling for a workcell or specify a tool to be used for anNC sequence, the system displays the Tool Setup dialog box. This dialog boxenables you to add, modify, and delete the tools, as well as view all the toolscurrently defined for the workcell.
Note: When you select a Tool Table entry in the upper portion of the Tool Setup dialogbox, the system updates the lower portion to display this tool’s parameters and sectionsketch.
Tool Table ElementsTool_ID is a descriptive tool name (for example, BALL125), which uniquelyidentifies the tool with a certain set of parameter values. If two tools within amanufacturing process have the same Tool_ID, then all of their parameters(geometry, material, gauge lengths) are also the same. They may, however,be located in different pockets on the machine, that is, have different Pocketnumbers. When you output CL data for an operation or NC sequence to a file,the system outputs the Pocket number in the LOADTL or TURRETstatement. If the Tool Table line contains a value for Offset, it will be outputas well.
For example, these Tool Table lines:
63
Pocket ID Offset Comments------------------------------------------1 BALL12 FLAT1 4 flat end mill
produce, respectively, the following CL output:
LOADTL / 1LOADTL / 2, OSETNO, 4
Comments are output with the Tool Table when you use PPRINT. To addcomments to a tool, enter them in the Tool_Comment field under theAdvanced tab.
The tool name (Tool_ID) is used throughout Pro/NC to identify the tool. Youcan store the tool’s parameters in a text file and then retrieve it to use in adifferent manufacturing process. Tool_ID serves as the name for thisparameter file, therefore, all the operating system’s restrictions for file namesapply to Tool_ID (for example, it cannot contain spaces or periods). The namemust be less than thirty-two alpha-numeric characters long.
Note: The tool name can not contain hyphens (“-). Underscores (“_), however, can beused.
Tool TypeWhen you define a tool within a workcell, tool types available for selection areconsistent with the types of NC sequences performed in the workcell. Forexample, if you have a Mill type workcell, the tool type selection includesmilling and holemaking tools, but no turning. If you set up a tool at the timeof creating an NC sequence, the tool type selection will be limited to thoseapplicable for the current NC sequence type. For example, if you are creatinga Standard Drill NC sequence, the tool types available for selection willinclude DRILLING, MILLING, and so on, while for a Tap NC sequence theonly tool type available will be TAPPING.
Tool type is stored with the tool parameters.
To Set Up Tools in Advance
1. Choose Tooling from the MFG SETUP menu and select the name of the workcell whereyou want to set up the tooling. Or, at the time of creating or modifying a workcell, youcan choose Tooling from the CELL SETUP menu to set up tooling for this workcell.Another way to access tooling setup is to click the Tool Setup icon in thePro/ENGINEER toolbar.
2. The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, with all the tools defined for the currentworkcell listed in the Tool Table section.
64
3. Add new tools or modify the existing ones using any combination of techniques describedbelow.
4. Choose File > Done to exit the Tool Setup dialog box.
To Set Up a Tool when Creating an NC Sequence
1. Check off the Tool option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. The system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, with all the tools defined for the currentworkcell listed in the Tool Table section.
3. Select an existing tool in the Tool Table, modify it if necessary, or create a new tool usingthe techniques described below.
4. Choose File > Done to exit the Tool Setup dialog box.
Tool Setup Dialog Box
About Setting Up Tools
You can set up tools in advance, as part of the manufacturing database setup,and then select the appropriate tool when performing an NC sequence, orcreate tools on the fly at the time of defining an NC sequence. Whenever youaccess the Tooling functionality, the system displays the Tool Setup dialogbox, which enables you to create, modify, and delete tools, as well as to reviewthe tools already defined for the workcell.
To Add a New Tool
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > New.
2. The system fills in the fields in the dialog box with the default values:
� Pocket number is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in theTool Table.
� Tool_ID is a default name in the format T0001, T0002, and so on.
� Offset is blank.
� Tool Type is the first one in the list of the currently applicable tool types.
65
� Parameters that appear under the Geometry and Advanced tabs are defined bythe Tool Type. Required parameter fields contain a system-supplied default value,optional parameters have a default value of dash (-).
3. If you want to set up a tool of a different type, click on the arrow next to the Tool Typeparameter and select the appropriate value. The system displays the parameter namesand default values for the new Tool Type.
4. Modify the parameter values, if desired.
5. Click Preview to display the tool section based on the current parameter values.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until satisfied with the tool section.
7. Click Apply to add the new tool to the Tool Table.
Tool Parameters
Each type of tool has a set of parameters that describe the geometry of thetool. The parameters for each type of tool are listed in a tool parameters tablefor each tool type and are explained in the illustrations that follow. The boldcross (+) shown in these pictures for each type of tool indicates the defaulttool control point, that is, the point for which the tool path will be calculated.
Tool Parameters for Turning Tools
Turn Turn Groove
Nose_Radius
• •
Tool_Width
• •
Side_Width
•
Length • •
Side_Angle
• •
End_Angle
• •
Gauge_X_Length
• •
Gauge_Z_Leng
• •
66
th
Tool_Material
• •
Holder_Type
•
Turning Tools
Length
Nose Radius
Tool Width
Length
Radius
Side Angle End Angle
Tool Width
Side Width
End Angle
TurnTurn Groove
Side Angle
Tool Parameters for Milling Tools
Cutter_Diam
• • • • • •
Corner_Radius
• • • • •
Cutter
• •
67
_Width
Shank_Diam
• • •
Length
• • • • • •
Insert_Cut_Width
•
Insert_Length
•
End_Offset
•
Side_Angle
• • •
Cut_Length
•
Gauge_X_Length
• •
Gauge_Z_Length
• • • •
Num_Of_Tee
• • • •
68
th
Tool_Material
• • •
Milling Tools
For a ball endmill, you can set Cutter_Diam to a dash (-).The tool will then be driven by its Corner_Radius.
*
SideAngle **
Length
Cutter Diamd
Cutter Diamd
Cutter Diam *d
Corner Radiusr = 0 (or "-")Flat Endmill
Corner Radius0 < r < d/2
Radius Endmill
Corner Radiusr = d/2
Ball Endmill
If you specify a Side_Angle other than a dash (-), the tool willnot be automatically degouged when creating the NCsequences. Use Taper Mill tools for automatic degouging.
**
Side Mill Tool Sections
69
Length
Shank Diam Shank Diam
Shank Diam Shank Diam
Length
Length Length
Cutter Diam
Cutter Diam
Cutter DiamCorner_Radius - (or 0)
Cutter Diam
Cutter Width
Cutter Width
CornerRadius Corner
Radius
0 < Corner_Radius <Cutter Width / 2
Corner_Radius =Cutter_Width / 2
Cutter_Width -Corner_Radius - (or 0)(the same section will be displayedif you set Cutter_Diam to "-" andspecify a non-zero Corner_Radius)
Thread Mill Tool
This diagram illustrates the Thread Mill tool
Tool parameters Insert_Length and End_Offset are notreflected in the tool section display. The tool is shownlike this.
* If you specify a non-zero Num_Of_Teeth, Insert_Length is ignoredIf Num_Of_Teeth = 0, then machining is based on the combination of.the effective insert length (Insert_Length - End_Offset*2)and pitch (defined by the manufacturing parameter THREAD_FEED).
LengthInsert Length *
Cutter Diam
End Offset
Insert
Length
Cutter DiamdEnd
Shank
Plunge Mill Tool
70
Length
Insert Cut WidthCutter Diam
Corner Radius
CutterWidth
45
d *
This dimension is calculated by the system, according to the formula:d = 0.2 * (Cutter_Diam - Insert_Cut_Width*2)
*
Taper Mill Tools
71
If the Cut_Length value is a dash (-), the length of the tapered portion isdetermined by the combination of Cutter_Diam, Side_Angle, and Shank_Diamparameter values.
*
SideAngle
Cutter DiamCorner Radius 0Flat Taper Mill
Shank Diam
Corner Radius -Ball Taper Mill
Bullnose Taper Mill
SideAngle
Cutter Diam
Shank Diam
SideAngle
CutterDiam
Shank Diam
CornerRadius
Length Length Length
Taper Mills With No Cut_Length
Taper Mills With Cut_Length Specified
Side
AngleCutLength
Cutter DiamCorner Radius 0Flat Taper Mill
Length
Shank Diam
SideAngle
CutLength
Cutter DiamBullnose TaperMill
Length
Shank Diam
CornerRadius
SideAngle
CutLength
Cutter Diam
Length
Shank Diam
Corner Radius -Ball Ta per Mill
Groove, Contouring, and Auxiliary Tools
72
Unlike other tools, you can set the Cutter_Diam of aContouring tool to be 0.
*
SideAngle
Length
Cutter Diam
Corner Radius0 <= r <= d/2Groove
d
Length
Cutter Diamd
Length
Cutter Diam*d
Length1/2
Contouring(Wire EDM) Auxiliary
Tool Parameters for Auxiliary and Contouring Tools(shown in the preceding illustration)
Auxiliary Contouring
Cutter_Diam • •Length • •
Tool Parameters for Holemaking Tools
Drill Csink Tap Ream CenterDrill
Bore BackSpot
Cutter_Diam • • • • • • •
Point_Diameter • • •
Drill_Diameter •
Body_Diameter •
Length • • • • • • •
Chamfer_Length •
Drill_Length •
Insert_Length •
Tip_Offset •
Gauge_Offset •
73
Cutting_Offset •
Side_Angle •
Point_Angle • • •
Csink_Angle • •
Gauge_X_Length • • • • • • •Gauge_Z_Length • • • • • • •Tool_Material • • • • • • •
Holemaking Tools—Drill and Tap
Point Angle
PointAngle
LengthLength
Point_Diameter -(or 0) Tip_Offset -
Point Diameter
Cutter Diam Cutter Diam
Tip Offset
Drill—Regular Drill—Elongated Tap
Length
Cutter Diam
ChamferLength
Can be 0
Point Diameter
Holemaking Tools—Countersink
PointAngle
PointAngle Length
Length
Point_Diameter = 0 Point Diameter
Cutter Diam Cutter Diam
GaugeOffset
Regular Truncated
Holemaking Tools—Bore and Back Spotting
74
Cutter Diam
Length
Bore Back Spotting
Length
Cutter Diam / 2
CsinkAngle
InsertLength
Body Diameter
CuttingOffset
Holemaking Tools—Ream and Center Drill
SideAngle
SideAngle
Cutter Diam
Length
Length
Drill Length
Point Angle
CsinkAngle
Cutter Diam
Drill Diameter
Ream Center Drill
To Retrieve Tool Parameters
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Tool Parameters File.
2. The system displays the browser window.
The search starts in your current working directory. If you have set thepro_mf_tprm_directory or pro_library_dir by using the appropriate configuration options,you can quickly jump to these directories by clicking the button in the top-right corner ofthe browser window.
By default, the browser displays files with the “.tpm extension. If you have pre-Release12.0 tool files with the extension “.tprm, you can display them in the browser window byclicking the arrow next to the Type field and selecting *.tprm.
3. Select a file name from the browser window and click Open.
4. The system searches the Tool Table for the Tool_ID of the tool being retrieved:
� If not found, the system appends the tool at the end of the Tool Table. The Pocketnumber is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in the Tool Table.The Offset field is left blank.
75
� If the system finds a tool in the current Tool Table that has the same name and thesame parameters as the one being retrieved, it highlights the appropriate Tool Tableentry and displays its parameter values and section sketch.
� If the name belongs to a tool that already exists in your manufacturing process buthas a different set of parameters, the system issues a warning and queries you if youwant to overwrite an existing tool. If you confirm, it highlights the appropriate ToolTable entry and displays the tool’s new parameter values and section sketch.
Note: When you retrieve a tool parameters file, its type must correspond to the ToolType value in the Tool Setup dialog box; otherwise, the system will issue an errormessage and the tool will not be retrieved.
Tool Parameters Library
You can create your own tool library, where all the tool parameter files are tobe stored. This way, the tools are available to all users for retrieval into theirmanufacturing processes, for modifying, or for setting up new tools. Theconfiguration file option to use is:
pro_mf_tprm_dir pathname
Always enter in the configuration file the complete pathname to the toollibrary to avoid problems when working in different directories withPro/ENGINEER. Example:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /usr/users/toolcrib
To Add a Sketched Tool
1. When defining a Trajectory Milling or Trajectory Turning NC sequence, check off theTool option in the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose Edit > Sketch.
3. The system increments the Pocket number by 1 with respect to the last one currently inthe Tool Table and generates a default name for the tool. The Offset field is left blank.
4. Modify the Tool_ID as desired.
5. Click Sketcher.
6. The system invokes the Sketcher functionality and brings up a new subwindow. Sketchthe tool section.
76
To Modify an Existing Tool
1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. The system updates the lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box to display this tool’sparameters and section sketch.
3. Enter new values for parameters you want to modify.
4. Click Preview to display the tool’s section based on the new parameter values.
5. When satisfied, click Apply to update the Tooling database.
To Delete a Tool
1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. Choose Edit > Delete.
3. The system deletes the current table entry.
To Save Tool Parameters
1. Select the tool you want to save by highlighting the appropriate Tool Table entry.
2. Choose File > Save.
3. The system saves the tool parameters in a text file called “tool_id.tpm. If you set the“pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option, described below, the file is stored in the librarydirectory; otherwise, in the current working directory.
Saving Tool Parameters
You can save tool parameters in the form of ASCII text files and then reusethese tools in a different manufacturing process without having to set themup from scratch. When you save a tool, the system stores its type andparameter values in a text file named “tool_id.tpm, where tool_id is the toolname (Tool_ID).
You can later retrieve a tool parameter file into a different manufacturingprocess.
Note: Prior to Release 12.0, the default extension for the tool parameter files used to be“.tprm. Old files with this extension will be recognized by the system as tool parameterfiles, that is, they will be retrievable. Whenever a tool parameter file is stored, however,it will now have the “.tpm extension.
A sample tool parameter file follows.
77
TOOL_ID BALL125
TOOL_TYPE MILLING
LENGTH_UNITS INCH
CUTTER_DIAM 1.25
CORNER_RADIUS 0.625
SIDE_ANGLE -
LENGTH 4
NUM_OF_TEETH -
TOOL_MATERIAL -
GAUGE_X_LENGTH -
GAUGE_Z_LENGTH -
TOOL_COMMENT -
Note that tool parameter files do not contain Pocket number and Offsetinformation. You have to specify these in context of the workcell when you setup the tooling or create an NC sequence.
To Use a Standard Tool
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Std Size (this option is available onlyfor the following tool types: DRILLING, CENTER-DRILLING, and TAPPING).
2. Select a file name from the browser window.
3. The system reads in the tool parameter file.
Standard Tools
System-supported standard tools are available in Pro/NC. They are stored ina system directory as tool parameter files, based on the tool type, and can beretrieved in a manufacturing process using the Open Std Size option underthe File pull-down menu of the Tool Setup dialog box. Currently, only drills,center drills, and taps are supported.
You can configure your own standard size tool database. Set theconfiguration file option “pro_mf_tprm_dir to a local directory. Under thisdirectory create a sub-directory “drills which will contain “.tpm files fordrilling, a subdirectory “center_drills which will contain “.tpm files for centerdrilling, and a subdirectory “taps containing tap tool files.
An example of a directory structure for a standard tools database follows:
78
1_8.tpm 3_16.tpm 5_32.tpm 1_8.tpm1_4.tpm1_2.tpm00.tpm0.tpm
/drills /center_drills /taps
/common/mfg_tools
set "pro_mf_tprm_dir /common/mfg_tools"
Drilling toolparameter files
Center drillingtool parameterfiles
Taping toolparameter files
Note: Do not confuse the standard tool parameter files with the standard library of solidtools (available with Pro/LIBRARY license).
Solid Tool Models
About Solid Tool Models
All Pro/NC needs to know about a tool is its parameters. It creates an NCsequence and displays the default tool based on the values in the “.tpm file.
However, you can enhance the CL data display and interactively check forinterference by showing a “real tool. In order to do this, design your tool as aregular Pro/ENGINEER model (part or assembly), and then establishassociativity between this model’s dimensions and Pro/NC tool parameters.When such a tool is used, you will have the option to display the defaultsection or the real tool model. This is also another way to create your toollibrary.
Standard LibraryIf you have an appropriate license, you can also use the standard tool libraryof solid tools. It contains common tools (mills, taps, and drills) of sizescorresponding to ANSI standards. For more information, refer to theTOOLING LIBRARY Catalog.
To Create a Tool Model
1. Create a new Pro/ENGINEER model of type Part, give it the name of the tool. Reproducethe tool geometry by using the appropriate construction features (protrusions, cuts, andso on).
2. Create a coordinate system to represent the tool origin, i. e., the tool control point. This isthe point that will follow the tool path computed for the NC sequence. Make sure the Z-axis of the coordinate system is pointing in the upward direction (into the tool) forMilling and Holemaking tools; for Turning, the axes of the tool coordinate system must
79
be oriented so that they will coincide with the directions of the NC sequence coordinatesystem’s axes when the tool is in default orientation. Change the coordinate system’sname to “TIP (use Set Up, Name).
3. Establish associativity between the model’s dimensions and tool’s parameters. There aretwo ways to do this:
� Modify appropriate dimension symbols to exactly correspond to the parameternames. Choose Modify from the PART menu, then choose DimCosmetics andSymbol. Select the feature to display dimensions, then select dimension text andenter the new symbolic name, for example, [Cutter_Diam].
� Add parameters to the model with the names exactly corresponding to the toolparameter names. This method is convenient when you want to define the toolparameters directly in the tool assembly (for example, Cutter_Diam for an insertdrill vs. a drill bit).
Notes:
� Parameter names are case-insensitive. For example, when modifying a dimensionsymbol or adding a model parameter for Cutter_Diam, you can use [Cutter_Diam] ,[cutter_diam] , or [CUTTER_DIAM]; the system will recognize either of thesestrings as a tool parameter name.
� If an assembly is to be used as a tool model, you can modify dimension symbols oradd parameters to any of the component parts as well as the assembly itself.
Example: A Solid Tool Model for Milling
A tool model is created as a regular Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly, with afew additional steps to establish associativity between the tool model and themanufacturing tool.
An example of a milling tool model is shown in the following illustration.
Dimension symbolscorrespond to toolparameter names.
Origin coordinatesystem
RCORNER_RADIUS
80
To Assign Tool Material and Number of Teeth
Tool material and number of teeth can be set up while creating a model.Then, when the tool model is retrieved into a manufacturing process, the toolparameters Num_Of_Teeth and Tool_Material will be initialized, which willsimplify the use of Machinability Database files.
• To specify number of teeth, add a relation:
Num_Of_Teeth = 6 (for example)
• To set up material, choose Set Up from the PART menu, then choose Material, andassign material to the tool model.
To Use a Tool Model
To use a tool model in Pro/NC, you have to retrieve the tool using the OpenTool Library option. The system will look up the tool model and readappropriate dimension values into the tool parameter file. When displayingCL data, you will have an option to display the tool model, or a default tool.
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Tool Library.
Note: Make sure to select the correct tool type from the Tool Type drop-down list in thedialog box before retrieving a solid tool model.
2. Choose By Reference or By Copy:
� By Reference—Direct associativity with the library model will be established. Youwill not be able to modify the tool parameters for a particular NC sequence using theTool Setup dialog box. If the tool model in the library is later modified, all themanufacturing data will be updated upon regenerating the manufacturing model.
� By Copy—The tool information will be copied into the manufacturing model. Thetool parameters for the NC sequence can be modified using the Tool Setup dialogbox; the library model will not be changed. If the library model is later modified, itwill not affect this NC sequence.
3. Select a tool model name from the browser window.
4. The system reads in the tool parameters from the model (the model name is used asTool_ID).
Tool Display
81
If a tool model was used for creating an NC sequence, then whenever youdisplay the path and tool, two additional options will appear:
• Disp Model—Use the tool model geometry in CL data display.
• No Model—Display the default tool section based on the tool parameter values.
If you have the same manufacturing model displayed in multiple windows,the tool and tool path will update concurrently in all windows if they aremodified.
Note: If the TIP coordinate system is missing in the model, the system willissue an error message and display the default tool. If multiple coordinatesystems named TIP are found in the tool model, a warning will be issued; thetool origin will be selected by the same rules as the tool parameters areextracted from a tool assembly (for example, the assembly coordinate systemtakes precedence).
Using Assembly as a Tool Model
If an assembly is used as a tool model, the system will search the assemblyfirst, and then all the component parts in the same order as they wereassembled (that is, the first component will be searched first), for the toolparameters and origin data. Once a parameter is set, all values for the sameparameter found later will be ignored. In other words, the top-level assemblyparameters take precedence over component parameters, and after that theprecedence is determined by the order of assembly.
If, after all components are searched, some of the tool parameters aremissing, an error message will appear and you will be asked to select anothertool.
To Use Tool Outline in Turning
1. In the Tool Setup dialog box, choose File > Open Tool Library > Use Outline (thisoption is available only for the tool types TURNING and TURN-GROOVING).
2. Select a tool model name from the browser window.
3. The system reads in the model parameters and geometry, and generates the tool outlineby projecting the external profile of all components of the tool model to the XZ plane ofthe TIP coordinate system. When creating an NC sequence using this tool, the systemwill use the tool outline for material removal and degouging purposes, as describedabove.
Note: If you have trouble generating tool path when using a solid tool outline, tryincreasing the value of the NC sequence parameter BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE.
82
Solid Tool Capabilities in Turning
Generally, a tool model is used for visual purposes only. However, in Turningyou have an option to use the tool model geometry for calculating theautomatic material removal and degouging the tool path. This functionalityallows you to customize the tool outline and designate the cutting edges thatcorrespond to your particular tool/holder combinations.
When you specify that you want to use the tool outline, the system will usethe whole tool profile in computing the tool path. This option is similar tousing a tool model By Reference, because you can modify the tool sectiononly by modification of the tool model geometry.
The tool model for this functionality is set up according to the general rules ofsetting up a solid tool model:
• It can be a Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly.
• It must contain a coordinate system named “TIP to indicate the control point location.
• The only geometric parameter you have to define for the tool model is Nose_Radius,required for calculating material removal. You can define this parameter by either usinga model parameter or a dimension symbol. You can also add parameters to the model toprovide values for non-geometric parameters (such as Tool_Comment orGauge_X_Length). If an assembly is used as a tool model, you can use both Part andAssembly parameters for this purpose, as before. Unlike regular Tool Modelfunctionality, you do not have to define geometric parameters (such as Tool_Width,Length); the tool outline will be based directly on the tool model geometry.
Geometry of the tool will be defined by projecting the external profile of allcomponents of the tool model to the XZ plane of the TIP coordinate system.This projected tool contour will be used to remove material and also todegouge against the tool contour.
If the tool model is an assembly, you can indicate which portion of the toolwill actually be used to remove material using the Yes_No type parameter“solid_tool_cutting at the part level. If this parameter is set to “yes for acertain part in the tool assembly, the outline of this part will be used as thecutting edges.
All other edges in the assembly will be assumed to be non-cutting. You canspecify a clearance value, to avoid contact between non-cutting tool geometryand the workpiece material, using the NC sequence parameterTOOL_CLEARANCE. This parameter designates how close the non-cuttingedges will be allowed to approach workpiece material.
Example: Using the Tool Outline in Turning
83
Tool assembly
Set "solid_tool_cutting yes" forthis part
The system usestool geometry togenerate the toolpath and removematerial.
To Use Customized Tools in Holemaking
If you want to use a tool model By Reference, you generally have to define allthe parameters required by Pro/NC for the appropriate tool type. InHolemaking, however, you may want to use customized tools that are noteasily described by the tool section parameters of either of the Holemakingtool types. Pro/NC allows you to use a simplified parameters’ set for a solidHolemaking tool.
In Holemaking, Pro/NC needs the following information about your tool togenerate the tool path and the proper CL data:
• Cutter_Diam—The cutter diameter of the tool, used for Auto depth computations.
• Tip_Offset—The distance from the tool control point (tip) to the shoulder (whereCutter_Diam starts).
• Length
• Csink_Angle—For countersink tools, defines the resulting chamfer angle.
When you retrieve a Holemaking tool model, if the system finds theTip_Offset parameter it will use this simplified parameters’ set for toolrepresentation. Therefore, when defining a solid model for a Holemaking tool,
84
you can specify just the parameters listed above, and the TIP coordinatesystem, and use this model By Reference for Holemaking NC sequences.
Example: A Solid Tool Model for Holemaking
Dimension symbolscorrespond to toolparameter names.
Origin coordinate system
Manufacturing Parameters
About Manufacturing Parameters
Manufacturing parameters are accessed by choosing options from the MFGPARAMS menu. These can be selected when creating, modifying, or redefiningan NC sequence. To access the MFG PARAMS menu, choose Seq Setup fromthe NC SEQUENCE menu, and then Parameters from the SEQ SETUP menu.
Note: You can also access the manufacturing parameters for the current NC sequence byclicking the Manufacturing Parameters icon in the Pro/ENGINEER toolbar. This isequivalent to selecting Seq Setup, Parameters, Set. The Param Tree dialog box willappear.
You can either set all the parameters for an NC sequence manually, one-by-one, or initialize the parameters file from database.
Initializing the NC Sequence ParametersThere are several ways to initialize the NC sequence parameters:
• If a site corresponding to the type of the NC sequence has been activated (whether byassociating it to the workcell or by using the Activate option), it will be automatically usedto initialize the parameters. You can retrieve parameters of another site appropriate forthe current NC sequence using the Site option in the MFG PARAMS menu. Note thatretrieving site parameters does not activate the site for subsequent NC sequences.
85
• Retrieve an existing NC sequence specific parameters file. Choose Retrieve from theMFG PARAMS menu, then choose Param Files and select a file name from the DATAFILES menu. This menu will contain all the appropriate type files in the currentdirectory, or in the library directory, if set. If the file resides in another directory, selectNames and enter path and name for the file to be retrieved. You can also enter aquestion mark (?) after selecting Names, which will open the browser window. Thesearch will be started in the “pro_mf_param_dir directory, if set; otherwise, in yourcurrent working directory.
Note: If the retrieved file contains some parameters inapplicable for the current NCsequence, these parameters will be listed in the Information Window.
• Retrieve the set of parameters used for a previous NC sequence. The Use Prev option isonly available after at least one NC sequence has been created.
• For a milling, turning, or holemaking NC sequence, feed and speed parameters can beinitialized using the Machinability Database (MDB) files. The rest of the parameters willhave to be filled in using the Set option.
Note: You can use the Set option at any time to modify the parameter values.
Parameter InheritanceAll levels of manufacturing features automatically inherit their parametersfrom an upper-level feature, unless you explicitly modify (customize) aparameter at the current level. That is, Tool Motions inherit their parametersfrom the parent NC sequence, while NC sequences may (under certaincircumstances) inherit their parameters from sites.
The following are the rules for the NC sequence parameter inheritance:
• If, at the time of creating an NC sequence, a site of appropriate type is associated withthe current workcell, the NC sequence will inherit the parameters of this site. This iscalled implicit inheritance. If you later modify the parameters of the site, the NCsequence parameter values will update accordingly. Also, if you later replace theassociated site with another one (of the same type) the NC sequence parameters willupdate to the values in the new site associated with the workcell.
Note: If you disassociate a site from the workcell (without replacing it with another siteof the same type), existing NC sequences that implicitly inherit their parameters fromthis site will keep the inheritance link.
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using a site other than the one associatedwith the workcell (by activating another site or by using the Site option in the MFGPARAMS menu), then the NC sequence will inherit the parameters of this site. This iscalled explicit inheritance. If you later modify the parameters of the site, the NCsequence parameter values will update accordingly. However, changing the siteassociated with the workcell, or the workcell itself, will not affect the parameters of thisNC sequence.
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using the Retrieve option in the MFGPARAMS menu, these parameters will be marked as customized.
86
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using the Use Prev option in the MFGPARAMS menu, and the previous NC sequence inherits its parameters from a site, thecurrent NC sequence will not automatically inherit from the same site. The followingsituations are possible:
� If both the previous and the current NC sequence implicitly inherit from the samesite, the inherited (non-customized) parameters used from the previous NC sequencewill also be marked as inherited in the current NC sequence.
� If the previous NC sequence explicitly inherits from a site, and you want the new NCsequence inherit from the same site, use the Site option first to initialize the NCsequence parameters, then use the Use Prev option. In this case, all the inheritedparameters used from the previous NC sequence will also be marked as inherited inthe current NC sequence.
� If the previous and current NC sequences inherit from different sites, or if one ofthem does not have an inheritance source, then all the parameters used from theprevious NC sequence will be marked as customized.
• If you initialize the NC sequence parameters using an MDB file, these parameters will bemarked as customized.
• If you modify parameter values using the Set option in the MFG PARAMS menu, theseparameters will be marked as customized.
Parameters marked as inherited will automatically update all the way downif you change a parameter value at the upper level. However, if you haveexplicitly modified a parameter value at a certain level, this parameter willbe marked as customized and will not change when you modify parameters atan upper level. Customized parameters can also be inherited by the lower-level features. In other words, if you modify CUT_FEED at the NC sequencelevel, it will no longer change if you later modify CUT_FEED in the parentsite file, but the Automatic Cut motion CUT_FEED will update to the newNC sequence value (unless you explicitly customize it at the Tool Motionlevel, too).
When you look at the parameters of an NC sequence or Tool Motion, theinherited parameter values appear in parentheses. However, if you save aparameters file to disk (using the Save option in the MFG PARAMS menu),this file will list all the parameters without parentheses (because when youretrieve this file into another NC sequence, these parameters will be markedas customized).
To Set or Modify NC Sequence Parameters
The Set option allows you to set or modify parameters for the NC sequence. Ifyou have initialized the parameters, all or some of the parameters values will
87
be filled out. You can then modify them to suit this specific NC sequence. If itis a new file, you will have to replace every “-1 with a value.
Note: Only parameters visible at the NC sequence level will appear for modification. Usethe Visibility option to modify the parameters’ visibility.
1. Choose Set from the MFG PARAMS menu.
2. A Param Tree dialog box appears with a “simplified set of parameters, corresponding tothe NC sequence type. These parameters are the most commonly modified; they providea quick and simple way of creating and modifying the tool path.
If you want to modify a parameter not in the Simplified set, press the Advanced buttonin the upper-right corner of the dialog box (this button allows you to toggle between theAdvanced and Simplified parameters’ presentations). The complete set of NC sequenceparameters is displayed in the Param Tree dialog box. They are listed under thefollowing categories, or branches:
� Name—Machine and NC data file names.
� Feeds—Feed parameters.
� Cut Options—Parameters that define the type of the cut, such as scan type, cycletype.
� Cut Params—Cut parameters, such as step depth, stock allowance.
� Machine—Machine-related parameters, such as speeds, registers, coolant.
� Entry/Exit—Parameters that define the entry and exit path for the tool, such asplunge angle, lead-in, approach and exit path.
� Thread—Parameters specific to a lathe Thread NC sequence. This branch will notappear for any other type NC sequences.
Double-clicking on the name of the branch will collapse or expand it.
3. To modify a parameter, use the mouse to highlight the cell with the parameter value.The value will appear in the input panel at the top of the dialog box. Then, depending onthe parameter type, do the following:
� When modifying a parameter that has a numeric value, type in a new value andpress<CR>.
You can enter a mathematical expression, which may contain other parameters inthe same NC sequence, or tool parameters. For example, if you enter:
STEP_OVER CUTTER_DIAM / 2
the STEP_OVER distance will be based on the cutter diameter of the current tool (ifthe tool is later changed, STEP_OVER will also be updated).
88
You can also include model dimension symbols (in assembly format, for example,d12:0) and user-defined parameters which are already defined in relations for themodel.
When you enter a relation in the input panel, the system evaluates the relation andplaces the value in the appropriate cell. If you later highlight this cell formodification, the input panel will display the relation used.
� When modifying a parameter that has a string value, such as SCAN_TYPE, pressthe down arrow to the right of the input panel (or press <F4>). A drop-down list willappear with all possible values for this parameter. Scroll to the value you want (todisplay it in the input panel), then press <CR>.
4. The Edit button in the menu bar of the dialog box allows you to copy a parameter value(in a cell, not in the input box) and then paste it into other cells, or in all cells within arow. This is especially helpful when modifying parameters of an NC sequence which hasmultiple Automatic Cut motions.
5. To finish modifying the parameters, choose File > Exit.
6. Choose Save from the MFG PARAMS menu if you want to save this file to disk (you willhave to save the parameters if you want to retrieve them for another NC sequence), andenter a file name. The file will be saved with a file extension corresponding to the type ofNC sequence you are creating. These are:
.mil—Milling NC sequences
.trn—Turning NC sequences
.drl—Holemaking NC sequences
.edm—Wire EDM NC sequences
.aux—Auxiliary NC sequences
7. Choose Done to return to the NC SEQUENCE menu.
Common NC Sequence Parameters
The parameters that are common to all NC sequences are listed below. Theyare listed under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when youset up the parameters. Click to access the topics describing the NC sequence-specific parameters.
Notes:
� You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this meansthat the default value is not set by the system).
� Some parameters may have a value of dash (-), that is, “ignore. This means that theparameter will not be used. Usually a system default or another parameter will be
89
used instead. The “- value is only acceptable for those parameters that have it as adefault.
� Length units for NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as theunits of the workpiece. If you change the workpiece units using the Same Sizeoption (so that the dimension values are changed), the system also scales all theappropriate parameters of the currently existing NC sequences.
NamesMACH_NAME
The machine name as required in post-processing. The defaultMACH_NAME is TURN for turning, MILL for all other NC sequences.
MACH_ID
The machine ID as required in post-processing. The default MACH_ID is 01.
NCL_FILE
The default name of the CL file for the NC sequence. The default is a dash (-),in which case the system generates a default name.
PRE_MACHINING_FILE
Enter name of the file you want to be included at the very beginning of theCL file. The file must be located in your current working directory and haveextension “.ncl. The default is a dash (-), that is, none.
POST_MACHINING_FILE
Enter name of the file you want to be included at the very end of the CL file.The file must be located in your current working directory and haveextension “.ncl. The default is a dash (-), that is, none.
Cut ParamTOLERANCE
The tool path approximates curved geometry by moving in small straight lineincrements, as shown in the following drawing. The maximum distance thatthe straight line path deviates from the curved geometry is set byTOLERANCE. The default TOLERANCE is 0.001" (0.025 mm).
90
TOLERANCE
ToolTool centerline path
Design surface
Machinedsurface
FeedCUT_FEED
The feed rate used for cutting motion. The default CUT_FEED is not set(displayed as “–1).
CUT_UNITS
IPM (inches per minute—default), FPM (feet per minute), MMPM(millimeters per minute), FPR (feet per revolution), IPR (inches perrevolution), MMPR (millimeters per revolution).
RETRACT_FEED
The rate at which the tool moves away from the workpiece. The defaultRETRACT_FEED is a dash (-), in which case the CUT_FEED will be used.
RETRACT_UNITS
IPM (default), FPM, MMPM, FPR, IPR, MMPR.
FREE_FEED
The feed rate used for rapid traverse (RETRACT_UNITS are used for rapidfeed rate units). The default FREE_FEED is a dash (-), in which case theRAPID command will be output to the CL file. The same happens ifFREE_FEED is set to 0.
PLUNGE_FEED
The rate at which the tool approaches and plunges into the workpiece (inMilling and Turning). The default PLUNGE_FEED is a dash (-), in whichcase the CUT_FEED will be used.
PLUNGE_UNITS
IPM (default), FPM, MMPM, FPR, IPR, MMPR.
MachineLINTOL
91
Allows you to specify the linear tolerance interpolation used by post-processor, for multi-axis milling and Mill/Turn rotary linearization. Outputsthe “LINTOL / r statement at the beginning of the CL file. The defaultLINTOL is a dash (-), in which case the LINTOL statement will not beoutput.
CIRC_INTERPOLATION
Specifies the format in which the tool motion along an arc or circle will beoutput to the CL file. The options are:
• POINTS_ONLY—Use this format for machines that have no circular interpolationcapabilities. Arcs are approximated by a series of straight line moves affected bytolerance (as shown in the illustration above).
• ARC_ONLY (default)—Use this format for machines that have full circular interpolation.Only the CIRCLE statement and the minimum number of points necessary for post-processing will be output to the CL file. The number of points is defined by theNUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS parameter.
• POINTS_&_ARC—The CIRCLE statement and the maximum number of pointsaccording to the tolerance value will be output to the CL file.
• APT_FORMAT—Use it if your post-processor expects the circular motions to be in theAPT format.
Note: The CIRC_INTERPOLATION parameter specifies only the format for CL dataoutput. The actual tool path along curved geometry is always generated according to theTOLERANCE parameter value, as described above.
NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS
Specifies the number of points to be output to the CL file ifCIRC_INTERPOLATION is set to ARC_ONLY. The default is 3.
COOLANT_OPTION
ON, OFF (default), FLOOD, MIST, TAP, THRU.
COOLANT_PRESSURE
NONE (default), LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH.
COORDINATE_OUTPUT
Specifies which coordinate system, MACHINE_CSYS or SEQUENCE_CSYS,is used as the CL data origin (the default is MACHINE_CSYS).
FIXT_OFFSET_REG
Allows you to specify the fixture transformation offset register used on yourmachine. The default FIXT_OFFSET_REG is a dash (-), that is, none. If you
92
specify another value (“n) for FIXT_OFFSET_REG, the “SET / OFSETL, nand “SET / OFSETL, OFF statements will be output.
END_STOP_CONDITION
Specifies the stop command to be issued at the end of the CL data output foran NC sequence:
• NONE (default)—No command.
• OPSTOP—The OPSTOP command will be issued.
• PROGRAM_STOP—The STOP command will be issued.
• GOHOME—The GOHOME command will be issued. If you specify a Home point for theoperation, the tool appears in the Home location. If you do not specify the Home point,the system outputs the GOHOME command anyway, but it does not move the tool, andissues a warning.
Entry/ExitSTART_MOTION
Defines how the tool will move from the Start point of the NC sequence to thebeginning of the cut motion. If you do not specify the Start point (using theStart option in the SEQ SETUP menu), this parameter will be ignored. Thevalues are:
DIRECT (default)—The approach motion will be a straight line from the Start point ofthe NC sequence to the start of the cut.
Z_FIRST—The tool will first move in the direction parallel to the z-axis of the NCSequence coordinate system, then move in the direction normal to the z-axis and startcutting.
Z_LAST—The tool will first move in the direction normal to the z-axis of the NCSequence coordinate system, then move along the z-axis and start cutting.
Not applicable for Wire EDM.
END_MOTION
Defines how the tool will move from the end of the cut to the End point of theNC sequence. If you do not specify the End point (using the End option in theSEQ SETUP menu), this parameter will be ignored. The values are:
• DIRECT (default)—The exit motion will be a straight line from the end of the cut to theEnd point of the NC sequence.
• Z_FIRST—The tool will first move in the direction parallel to the z-axis of the NCSequence coordinate system until it reaches the Z coordinate of the End point, then moveto the End point in the direction normal to the z-axis.
93
• Z_LAST—The tool will first move in the direction normal to the z-axis until it reachesthe XY coordinates of the End point, then move to the End point along the z-axis.
Not applicable for Wire EDM.
Milling Parameters
The following parameters are specific to milling NC sequences. They arelisted under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you setup the parameters.
For description of the common manufacturing parameters, available for allthe NC sequence types, see the topic Common NC Sequence Parameters.Click to access this topic.
Notes:
� You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this meansthat the default value is not set by the system).
� Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as theunits of the workpiece.
Cut OptionSCAN_TYPE
Applicable for Volume, Surface, Face, Pocket, and Plunge milling.
For Volume milling, refers to the way a milling tool scans the horizontalcross-section of a milling volume and avoids islands. The options are:
• TYPE_1—The tool continuously machines the volume, retracts upon encounteringislands.
• TYPE_2—The tool continuously machines the volume without retract, moving aroundthe islands upon encountering them.
• TYPE_3—The tool removes material from continuous zones defined by the islandgeometry, machining them in turn and moving around the islands. Upon completing onezone, the tool may retract to mill the remaining zones. It is recommended thatROUGH_OPTION for TYPE_3 is set to ROUGH_&_PROF.
• TYPE_SPIRAL—Generates a spiral cutter path.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass itretracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in thesame direction. Avoiding islands is the same as in TYPE_1.
94
• TYPE_1_CONNECT—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting passit retracts, rapids back to the start point of the current pass, plunges, and then moves tothe start of the next pass. If there is an adjacent wall at the start of the cutting passes,the connection motion follows the profile of the wall to avoid gouging.
• CONSTANT_LOAD—Perform high speed roughing (with ROUGH_OPTION set toROUGH_ONLY) or profiling (with ROUGH_OPTION set to PROF_ONLY).
The following illustration shows the scan types for Volume milling.
TYPE_1
TYPE_2
TYPE_ONE_DIR TYPE_1_CONNECT
TYPE_3
TYPE_SPIRAL
For Straight Cut Surface milling:
• TYPE_1—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, retracts uponencountering islands.
• TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine onezone before moving to the next.
For Isolines Surface milling:
• TYPE_1—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, retracts uponencountering islands.
• TYPE_2—The tool continuously machines the selected surfaces, moving around theislands upon encountering them.
95
• TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine onezone before moving to the next.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass itwill retract and return to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in thesame direction.
For Cut Line Surface milling:
• TYPE_1—The tool moves back and forth along the generated cut lines.
• TYPE_3—If selected surfaces are divided into zones, the tool will completely machine onezone before moving to the next.
• TYPE_SPIRAL—The tool makes the first cutting pass halfway between the start and endcutlines. The following passes will be made alternately to the right and to the left of thefirst pass.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass itretracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in thesame direction.
• TYPE_HELICAL—(Available only if the CUTLINE_TYPE parameter is set toFLOWLINES.) The tool moves along a helix. Valid for Closed Cut Line machining only.The resulting tool path is shown in the following illustration.
Start cutline (the top surface boundary)
End cutline (the bottom surface boundary)
For Projected Cuts Surface milling, the scan types are the same as for Volumemilling (with the exception of TYPE_1_CONNECT and CONSTANT_LOAD).They refer to the way the flat pattern of the tool path is created.
For Swarf milling:
• TYPE_1—The tool moves back and forth across the surfaces being machined.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass itretracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in thesame direction.
• TYPE_HELICAL—The tool moves along a helix. Valid for a closed loop of surfaces only.
96
For Face milling:
• TYPE_1—The tool makes parallel cutting passes, moving back and forth along theselected face. If the selected face consists of multiple zones, the tool ignores them andmoves across the whole length of the workpiece.
• TYPE_3—If the selected face consists of multiple zones, the tool machines one zone,moving back and forth in parallel cutting passes, then retracts and moves to the nextzone.
• TYPE_SPIRAL—The tool makes the first cutting pass in the middle of the surface. Thefollowing passes will be made alternately to the right and to the left of the first pass.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass itretracts and returns to the opposite side of the workpiece, to start the next cut in thesame direction.
TYPE_1 TYPE_3
For Pocketing, the scan types are the same as for Volume milling (with theexception of TYPE_1_CONNECT and CONSTANT_LOAD). They refer to theway the tool scans the bottom of the pocket.
For Plunge milling, you can not change the scan type when the tool hasInsert_Width smaller than Cutter_Diam/2. For a regular flat tool thefollowing scan types are available:
• TYPE_3—Completely machines one region before moving to the next.
• TYPE_SPIRAL—Generates a spiral cutting path.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass the toolreturns to the opposite side of the region, to start the next cut in the same direction.
ROUGH_OPTION
Controls whether a profiling pass occurs during a Volume milling NCsequence. The options are:
• ROUGH_ONLY—Creates an NC sequence with no profiling.
97
• ROUGH_&_PROF—Creates an NC sequence that rough cuts the milling volume, thenprofiles the volume surfaces.
• PROF_&_ROUGH—Profiles the volume surfaces first, then rough cuts the volume.
• PROF_ONLY—Only profiling is done.
• ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP—Cleans up the walls of the volume without creating a profilingpass. If SCAN_TYPE is set to TYPE_3, the horizontal connect moves within each slicewill follow the walls of the volume. If SCAN_TYPE is set to TYPE_ONE_DIR, the toolwill follow the walls of the volume vertically, when plunging and retracting. ForTYPE_ONE_DIR, the tool retracts to the level of the previous slice; however, it will notmove sideways by more than (STEP_DEPTH + CUTTER_DIAM/2), with respect to thecurrent slice.
• POCKETING—Profiles the walls of the volume and finish mills all the planar surfacesinside the volume that are parallel to the retract plane (island tops and bottom of thevolume). The open edges of the planar faces are milled according to the value of thePOCKET_EXTEND parameter.
• FACES_ONLY—Finish mills only the planar surfaces inside the volume that are parallelto the retract plane (island tops and bottom of the volume). The open edges of the planarfaces are milled according to the value of the POCKET_EXTEND parameter.
Note: A tool path similar to ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with TYPE_ONE_DIR can beobtained by using 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling with ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH.
The following illustration shows the cutter path depending on theROUGH_OPTION.
ROUGH_ONLY PROF_ONLY
ROUGH_&_PROF PROF_&_ROUGH
Profiling after rough cut Profiling first
98
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP withTYPE_3
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UPwith TYPE_ONE_DIR
STEP_DEPTH
STEP_DEPTH + CUTTER_DIAM/2
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP with TYPE_ONE_DIR
Tool path
Mill volume walls(side view)
POCKET_EXTEND
Defines the positioning of the tool when machining the open edges of theplanar faces inside a volume (for example, island tops). The values are:
• TOOL_ON (default)—The tool stops when its center touches the boundary of the face.
• TOOL_TO—The tool stops when its leading edge touches the boundary of the face.
• TOOL_PAST—The tool stops when its heel touches the boundary of the face.
This parameter is used when ROUGH_OPTION is set to POCKETING orFACES_ONLY.
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
In Volume milling, if set to YES, confines the milling volume to that insidethe workpiece boundaries, in order to avoid air machining. If set to NO(default), trimming will be done only in the Z direction.
Note: When you intentionally offset or sketch the volume past the workpiece boundaries(as shown in the following illustration), make sure to set this parameter to NO.
99
Millingvolume
Specify TRIM_TO_WORKPIECENO to make the offset work.
In 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface and Face milling, if set to YES (the default isNO), makes the tool machine one zone of the workpiece before going to thenext. The actual tool path depends on the SCAN_TYPE parameter value. Thefollowing illustration shows Face milling with SCAN_TYPE set toTYPE_ONE_DIR.
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE NO TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE YES
CUT_DIRECTION
For Volume milling, allows you to reverse direction of tool motion within aslice. The values are STANDARD and REVERSE.
For Profile milling, STANDARD (the default) machines selected surfacesfrom top to bottom, that is, starting with the top slice; REVERSE machinesfrom bottom to top, that is, starting with the lowest slice.
STEPOVER_ADJUST
If set to YES (the default), adjusts the step-over distance (defined by theSTEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters) to make both thebeginning and the end of the cutter path for one pass close to the edges. Theadjusted step-over distance does not exceed the original one. If set to NO, thestep-over distance will be exactly as defined by the combination of theSTEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters.
100
STEPOVER_ADJUST
NO YES
CUT_TYPE
Combined with SPINDLE_SENSE, controls where material is relative to thetool when it is removing material during profiling NC sequences or slices;bottom slices, such as in pocket milling, are not affected by this parameter.The options are CLIMB, UPCUT, and ZIG_ZAG. The possible combinationsand the resulting tool path are:
• CLIMB and CW—Cutter to the left (default).UPCUT and CW—Cutter to the right.
• UPCUT and CCW—Cutter to the left.CLIMB and CCW—Cutter to the right.
• ZIG_ZAG—Cut direction changes on every slice.
Note: CUT_TYPE parameter for Volume milling can be specified whenROUGH_OPTION is specified as ROUGH_&_PROF, PROF_&_ROUGH, or PROF_ONLYor when the SCAN_TYPE is TYPE_SPIRAL.
For Local milling, there is an additional option NONE, which makes the toolmove back and forth when cleaning up material.
For Profile milling, the ZIG_ZAG option can be used when profiling opencontours. It provides lace-type connection between slices, while CLIMB andUPCUT make the tool retract and rapidly traverse to the beginning of thenext slice.
CUT_TYPE
CLIMB ZIG_ZAG
For 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling, CUT_TYPE, combined withSPINDLE_SENSE and CUT_DIRECTION, controls the start point and
101
direction of machining the surface. The LACE_OPTION parameter must beset to NO.
FIX_SKIPPED_SLICES
By default (NO), if Pro/NC cannot create a slice at a certain Z depth whenmilling a volume (for example, because of geometry problems), this slice willbe skipped and the tool will go to the next slice. If this parameter is set toYES, then, whenever a slice cannot be created, Pro/NC will generate the nextslice and repeat it at the level of the skipped slice. In other words, if a slicecan not be created, the next slice will be repeated twice: at the Z level of theskipped slice and at its own Z level. The system will issue a warning everytime a slice cannot be generated.
LACE_OPTION
Controls whether the tool retracts at the end of a pass on a surface mill (asshown in the following illustration). The default (NO) causes the tool toretract after each pass, so that all cuts are in the same direction.LINE_CONNECT, CURVE_CONNECT, and ARC_CONNECT cause the toolnot to retract.
If set to LINE_CONNECT, neighboring endpoints of the cutting passes willbe connected by straight line segments.
CURVE_CONNECT uses a more complex (and slower-working) algorithmwhich takes into account the reference part geometry. If LACE_OPTION isset to CURVE_CONNECT, the tool will follow geometry of the obstacles thatwould otherwise interrupt the cutting pass. Use CURVE_CONNECT only ifLINE_CONNECT causes gouging. Valid for Straight Cut Surface milling andCutline machining (in the latter case, LINE_CONNECT is the default, andthe CURVE_CONNECT option is not available).
The ARC_CONNECT option, available for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surfacemilling only, results in the system providing smooth, arc-like conectionsbetween the neighboring cutting passes. The cutting passes are shortened, asnecessary, to accomodate the connecting motions, so that the tool stayswithin surface boundaries. The connections are automatically degouged. Usethis option for high-speed machining.
Note: If you set LACE_OPTION to LINE_CONNECT for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surfacemilling, the system automatically degouges connecting motions and switches toCURVE_CONNECT if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging. In 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences,if LINE_CONNECT causes gouging, the tool will retract. To avoid such retracts, useCURVE_CONNECT.
102
LACE_OPTION NO LACE_OPTION LINE_CONNECT
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES
If set to NO, eliminates negative Z moves for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surfacemilling NC sequences. The default is YES. If you setALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES to NO, you have to also set SCAN_TYPE toTYPE_1 and LACE_OPTION to NO.
ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES NO
RETRACT_OPTION
Minimizes retracts. The default is OPTIMIZE. If NOT_OPTIMIZE isspecified, the cutter will retract between two slices if the second slice does notstart directly below the cutter’s current location. It will also retract betweenthe rough and the profile pass within a slice if ROUGH_OPTION isROUGH_&_PROF or PROF_&_ROUGH. Specify NOT_OPTIMIZE ifOPTIMIZE causes gouging.
Note: If Approach or Exit path is specified for each slice using Build Cut, theRETRACT_OPTION parameter will be ignored.
GOUGE_AVOID_OPTION
In Swarf milling, specifies whether the tool will retract to avoid gouging:
RETRACT_TOOL—The tool may retract between cuts.
LIFT_TOOL—Number of retracts between cuts will be minimized.
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
103
For 3-Axis Profiling: TIP_&_SIDES (the default) will make the system detectundercuts when degouging the tool path. If you want to be able to machine anundercut, set GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE to TIP_ONLY.For 5-Axis Profiling: if set to TIP_&_SIDES, the system degouges withrespect to the whole tool (as defined by the tool parameters). The tool willretract if an undercut is detected. The default is TIP_ONLY, in which casethe system does not detect undercuts.
Note: GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE setting cannot be changed when modifying parameters.Use Redefine.
REMAINDER_SURFACE
Applicable for Straight Cut Surface milling and 3-Axis Isolines and Cut LineSurface milling NC sequences. If it is set to YES (the default is NO), thesystem will generate a surface representing the leftover material (to beremoved by a subsequent Local Mill NC sequence). This surface will belong tothe current NC sequence, and will be regenerated upon regenerating the toolpath.
Note: The remainder surface will be generated based on the SCALLOP_HGT parametervalue.
AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. If set to YES (the default), thesystem will attempt to use edges crossing all the selected cut lines as synchlines. If this is not satisfactory, set AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE to NO and specifythe synch lines or synch points manually.
AUTO_INNER_CUTLINE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. If set to YES, the system willattempt to use edges crossing all the specified synch lines as inner cut lines.The default is NO.
CUTLINE_TYPE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. Allows you to select whichalgorithm the system uses when it calculates cut line distribution. The valuesare:
BLEND—The system uses a surface boundary blend to generate cut lines.
FLOWLINES (default)—The system uses a Finite Element Analysis method to processthe surfaces selected for milling and generate cut lines.
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE
Applicable for Cut Line Surface milling only. Specifies how the systemhandles the case when a cut line does not extend the whole length of thesurface selected for machining. The values are:
104
BOUNDARY (default)—The system will attempt to extend the cut lines up to theboundary of the surface.
NONE—Machining will be limited to the length of the specified cut lines.
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE
BOUNDARY NONE
Start cut line
End cut line Surfaceselected formachining
AXIS_DEF_CONTROL
Applicable for 5-Axis Cut Line Surface and Trajectory milling, and for Swarfmilling.
For 5-Axis Cut Line Surface milling and Swarf milling, the values are:
• USE_SURF_NORMS (the default)—The surface normal is used in determining the toolaxis orientation, that is, any user-specified axis definition provides a localized lead andtilt angle that is applied to the normal of the surface being machined.
• IGNORE_SURF_NORMS—The surface normal is disregarded, and the tool axisorientation is a strict interpolation of the user-specified axis definitions. Not available forSwarf milling From Surface Isolines.
For 5-Axis Trajectory milling, this parameter is used for Automatic Cutmotions created using the Surfaces option. Another way to specify axisdefinitons is to use the Axis Control option in the CUTMOTION SETUPmenu. The AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter specifies the approximationtype between the explicit axes definitions. The values are:
• RELATIVE_TO_DRIVE_SURFACE (default)—Preserves the lead and tilt of the tool axisrelative to the surface normal for each explicit axis defined at locations on the surface. Asthe tool moves between explicit axis definitions, the system computes an average lead/tiltangle by linearly interpolating between the last explicit axis definition and the nextexplicit axis definition. This average is then applied relative to the surface normal at thecurrent location. This method can be used to generate variable lead / tilt tool paths whenprecise axis control is necessary. An example would be to apply this control to make surethe tool and holder can pass through a narrow channel of part geometry.
105
• PROJECT_ON_DRIVE_SURFACE—Preserves the lead angle of the tool axis relative tothe surface normal for each explicit axis defined at locations on the surface. As the toolmoves between explicit axis definitions, the system computes an average lead angle bylinearly interpolating between the last explicit axis definition and the next explicit axisdefinition. This average is then applied at the current location and the tool axis isprojected onto the surface making the tilt component 0. This method can be used togenerate tool paths that have a variable user-controlled lead angle, but maintain cuttingwith the side of the tool.
• FROM_AXES_AND_DRIVE_SURFACE—This method is appropriate when a set ofsurfaces have some surfaces that are nondevelopable. In these nondevelopable areas, thetool path can be unpredictable, so you may want to override the system defaults byspecifying explicit axis definitions. The system will derive all other tool vectors from thesurface boundary. Tool axes will be interpolated using the same rule as forRELATIVE_TO_DRIVE_SURFACE.
• AXIS_LINEAR_APPROXIMATION—The tool orientation is a linear approximation ofexplicit axis definitions.
• AXIS_LEAD_ANGLE_APPROXIMATION—The tool orientation is an interpolation oflead angles along the trajectory.
USE_VARIABLE_TILT
If set to YES (the default is NO), the tool will tilt to avoid gouging. Availablefor Swarf milling only.
IGNORE_RULINGS
If set to NO (the default), the tool will be parallel to the ruling lines whenmachining ruled surfaces. If set to YES, the tool will ignore the ruling lines ofthe ruled surfaces. Available for Swarf milling only.
4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT
If set to YES (the default is NO), the system will attempt to use variable leadangle to avoid gouging. That is, if gouging occurs with the specified4X_LEAD_ANGLE, the system will try to use another angle in the rangebetween 4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE and 4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE. Applicablefor 4-axis milling only.
CUSTOMIZE_AUTO_RETRACT
If set to NO (the default is YES), the tool will not perform the automaticretract when following the default tool path.
SLICE_PATH_SCAN
Defines the order of machining multiple passes within multiple step depths(slices). The values are:
106
PASS_BY_PASS—After completing the first pass for the first slice, go to the first pass forthe second slice, and so on. After completing the first pass for the last slice, go to thesecond pass for the first slice; proceed until completing the last pass for the last slice.
SLICE_BY_SLICE—Complete all the passes within a slice before going to the next slice.
Cut ParamSTEP_DEPTH
The incremental depth of each pass during rough cut NC sequences. TheSTEP_DEPTH must be greater than zero. The default is not set (displayed as“–1).
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
For Volume and Profile milling, specifies the minimum acceptable distancebetween slices. By default, all planar surfaces that are normal to the Z-axis ofthe NC Sequence coordinate system produce additional slices. A slice alongsuch a planar surface will be skipped if the distance between it and theprevious slice is less than the value of MIN_STEP_DEPTH.
NUMBER_CUTS
For Face milling, gives you additional control over the number of cuts todepth (also controlled by the STEP_DEPTH parameter). The system willcompute number of cuts using the STEP_DEPTH parameter value, compareit with the NUMBER_CUTS value, and use the greater one. The default is adash (-), that is, not used.
For Cutline machining, allows you to perform milling in step depthincrements. This has to be used together with the next parameterOFFSET_INCREMENT. The default is a dash (-), that is, not used.
OFFSET_INCREMENT
Together with NUMBER_CUTS, allows you to perform Cut Line machiningin step depth increments. The tool will make the first slice at(OFFSET_INCREMENT * (NUMBER_CUTS–1) + PROF_STOCK_ALLOW)above the selected surfaces and perform NUMBER_CUTS slices atOFFSET_INCREMENT distance from each other, so that the last slice is atPROF_STOCK_ALLOW above the selected surfaces. If SCALLOP_HGT isspecified, it will affect the last slice only. At the end of each slice, the tool willretract, move to the beginning of the next slice, and plunge. IfLACE_OPTION is set to NO, the tool will additionally retract after eachcutting pass across the surface(s) being machined. The default is a dash (-),that is, not used.
ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH
Available for 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling only. The default is a dash(-). If you specify a value other than the default, the system performs surface
107
milling in depth increments, defined by the appropriate horizontal slices.This allows you to create Volume-like tool paths without actually defining aMill Volume, which is especially helpful when machining imported (nonsolid)surfaces. The NC sequence removes the same material and has the sameautomatic degouging capabilities as the regular 3-Axis Straight Cut Surfacemilling sequences.
The following illustration shows 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling in depthincrements.
Select this surface.
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
Controls the step depth for Volume milling. The WALL_SCALLOP_HGT(wsh) must be less than or equal to the cutter radius, that is, wsh <= d/2. Thedefault is 0.
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT
Similarly used to control step-over distance for Volume milling.
SCALLOP_HGT
Similarly used to control step-over distance for Surface milling and Localmilling By Previous Tool.
The STEP_DEPTH and the WALL_SCALLOP_HGT parameters areillustrated in the following graphic, STEP_DEPTH andWALL_SCALLOP_HGT. Pro/NC handles these parameters as follows:
1. If you specify WALL_SCALLOP_HGT as zero (wsh = 0), a scallop height is calculatedusing STEP_DEPTH.
2. If you specify wsh > 0, a step depth is calculated using wsh. This calculated value iscompared to the STEP_DEPTH you defined. Pro/NC uses the lesser of the two.
The same is true for STEP_OVER and BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT (forVolume milling) or SCALLOP_HGT (for Surface milling).
STEP_DEPTH and WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
108
STEP_OVER
WALL_SCALLOP_HGT
Tool path
STEP_OVER
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut. Bothparameters are used for Rough Cut NC sequences only, and specify differentstock allowances for roughing and profiling cuts in a Volume NC sequence.PROF_STOCK_ALLOW must be set to a value less than or equal toROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW. When geometry is displayed after Automaticmaterial removal, it will use PROF_STOCK_ALLOW.
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW
For Volume milling, the amount of stock left after a rough NC sequence onplanar surfaces parallel to the retract plane. The default is a dash (-), inwhich case the BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW parameter will be ignored andPROF_STOCK_ALLOW will be used instead.
For Facing, specifies the amount of stock left on the selected face. Thedefault, a dash (-), sets the stock allowance to 0.
WALL_TOLERANCE
Lets you specify the amount of material that can be left along the walls afterthe previous NC sequence, without the Local Mill NC sequence cleaning itup. The default is 0. Applicable for Local milling NC sequences referencing aprevious Volume NC sequence.
109
STEP_OVER
Controls the lateral depth of cut of either type of endmill. The STEP_OVERmust be a positive value less than or equal to the cutter diameter. Thedefault is not set (displayed as “–1).
TOOL_OVERLAP
An alternative to STEP_OVER. Indicates the amount that the tool shouldoverlap the region machined during the previous pass. If TOOL_OVERLAP isspecified and STEP_OVER is not, STEP_OVER will be calculated as(CUTTER_DIAM – TOOL_OVERLAP).
PLUNGE_STEP
Controls the distance between successive plunges of the tool. The default is adash (-), in which case:
• If you are using a Plunge Mill tool, this distance is equal to the tool parameterInsert_Cut_Width.
• If you are using a regular milling tool, the system calculates the maximum plunge step,based on the Cutter_Diam of the tool, that results in removing all the material betweenthe plunges.
Applicable for Plunge milling only.
CORNER_ROUND_RADIUS
Specifies the minimum radius allowed for concave corners in high speedmachining. Available for Volume milling only. The default is 0.
NUMBER_PASSES
Gives you additional control over the number of tool passes per slice (alsocontrolled by the STEP_OVER parameter). The system will compute step-over distance using the NUMBER_PASSES parameter value (if other than0), compare it with the STEP_OVER value, and use the one that is smaller.Applicable for Volume milling and Facing. For Facing, if NUMBER_PASSESis set to 1, it will override the STEP_OVER value, so that only one pass perslice will be made.
ONE_PASS_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the tool path for a one-pass Face milling NC sequence(that is, when NUMBER_PASSES is 1). The positive value offsets the pass tothe left with respect to the cut direction, the negative—to the right. Thedefault is 0.
INITIAL_EDGE_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the first pass for Face milling with respect to the edge ofthe surface being milled. The default is 0, in which case the tip trajectory at
110
first pass will coincide with the surface edge; the positive value offsets thefirst pass into the surface, the negative—off the surface. Cannot be greaterthan the STEP_OVER value.
FINAL_EDGE_OFFSET
Allows you to offset the last pass for Face milling with respect to the edge ofthe surface being milled. The default is 0, in which case the tip trajectory atlast pass will coincide with the surface edge; the positive value offsets the lastpass into the surface, the negative—off the surface. Cannot be greater thanthe STEP_OVER value.
CUT_ANGLE
The angle between the cut direction and the X-axis of the NC Sequencecoordinate system. The default CUT_ANGLE is 0, which is parallel to the X-axis. Valid for Volume and Plunge milling, Pocketing, Facing, Straight CutSurface milling, and Projected Cuts Surface milling. CUT_ANGLE will beignored for Volume and Plunge milling, Pocketing, and Projected CutsSurface milling if SCAN_TYPE is TYPE_SPIRAL.
CUT_ANGLE 0 CUT_ANGLE 90
LEAD_ANGLE
Together with TILT_ANGLE, defines the tool orientation with respect to thesurface normal for 5-Axis Surface milling NC sequences. LEAD_ANGLE isspecified in degrees from the surface normal with respect to the tool traveldirection: positive value tilts the tool forward, negative—backward.
TILT_ANGLE
Together with LEAD_ANGLE, defines the tool orientation with respect to thesurface normal for 5-Axis Surface milling NC sequences. TILT_ANGLE isspecified in degrees from the surface normal with respect to the tool traveldirection: positive value tilts the tool to the right, negative—to the left.
AXIS_SHIFT
Allows you to shift the CL data along the tool axis. If set to a positive value,will shift all CL data down along the tool axis; a negative value will shift theCL data up. The default is 0.
Note: AXIS_SHIFT is applied after gouge checking has been performed. Use the GougeCheck functionality to make sure there is no gouging.
111
AXIS_SHIFT
Tool Model
NUM_PROF_PASSES
Together with PROF_INCREMENT, allows you to create multiple profiling ortrajectory passes horizontally offset from each other. NUM_PROF_PASSESspecifies the amount of passes that will be generated (the default is 1).Applicable for Volume milling when ROUGH_OPTION is set toPROF_ONLY, for Profiling, and for Trajectory milling. If another value of theROUGH_OPTION parameter is specified for Volume milling,NUM_PROF_PASSES will be ignored.
PROF_INCREMENT
Specifies the horizontal distance between the passes generated according toNUM_PROF_PASSES, which means that the first pass will be offset from thefinal pass by:(NUM_PROF_PASSES–1)*PROF_INCREMENT.The default is 0. Applicable for Volume milling when ROUGH_OPTION is setto PROF_ONLY, for Profiling, and for Trajectory milling. If another value ofthe ROUGH_OPTION parameter is specified for Volume milling,NUM_PROF_PASSES will be ignored.
NUM_PROF_PASSES and PROF_INCREMENT
NUM_PROF_PASSES =1
PROF_INCREMENTFirst pass
NUM_PROF_PASSES = 4
Final pass
CORNER_OFFSET
Specifies the amount of material to be removed by a Local Mill NC sequenceusing Corner Edges. The default is 0.
112
SLOPE_ANGLE
In Local Milling, the angular value with respect to the XY plane that dividesthe material to be removed into vertical and horizontal regions. For example,if you are removing material left over in a pocket with slanted walls,specifying the value of the SLOPE_ANGLE less than the wall slope will makethe tool machine the bottom edges of the pocket first, and then remove thematerial in the corners between the walls. The default SLOPE_ANGLE fornewly created NC sequences is 30 degrees. For NC sequences created prior toRelease 2000i2, the default value is 90 degrees.
START_OVERTRAVEL
Specifies the distance from the tool to the surface outline for all passes exceptthe first one for each slice (see also APPROACH_DISTANCE). The default is0. Applicable for Facing only.
END_OVERTRAVEL
Specifies the distance that the tool overtravels past the surface outline on allpasses except the last one for each slice (see also EXIT_DISTANCE). Thedefault is 0. Applicable for Facing only.
GROOVE_DEPTH
The depth of the groove. The default is not set (displayed as “–1). Applicablefor Engraving only.
4X_TILT_ANGLE
Specifies the angle (in degrees) between the tool axis and the 4 Axis Plane.Normally, the tool axis is parallel to this plane (the default 4X_TILT_ANGLEis 0). Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the angle (in degrees) between the tool axis and the projection of thesurface normal on the 4 Axis Plane (the default is 0). Applicable for 4-axismilling only.
4X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the maximum lead angle allowed when trying to avoid gouging. Thedefault is a dash (-), but you have to specify a value if4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT is set to YES. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
4X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE
Specifies the minimum lead angle allowed when trying to avoid gouging. Thedefault is a dash (-), but you have to specify a value if4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT is set to YES. Applicable for 4-axis milling only.
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW
113
Allows you to specify stock allowance to be used with check surfaces. Thedefault is a dash (-), that is, ignore. This parameter is available for MillingNC sequences that utilize the Check Surfs functionality (that is, Surface,Trajectory, Profile milling, and for Local Milling referencing a Surface millingNC sequence).
Note: Be careful when specifying CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW for NC sequences whereall the reference part surfaces are selected as check surfaces.
FeedARC_FEED
Allows you to control the cut feed around arcs. The default is a dash (-), inwhich case the CUT_FEED will be used. If set to 0, the RAPID statement willbe output before the CIRCLE statement.
ARC_FEED_CONTROL
Determines how the value for cut feed around arcs is calculated. The optionsare:
TOOL_CENTER (default)—The feed rate that is output for CIRCLE statements isalways equal to the value specified for ARC_FEED.
TOOL_PERIMETER—The feed rate that is output for CIRCLE statements is adjusted toinsure that the contact point between the tool and the material moves with a speed equalto the value specified for ARC_FEED. This means the value for ARC_FEED will have tobe calculated for each CIRCLE statement according to the following rules:
For internal radii:
feed = ARC_FEED * (circle radius / (circle radius + CUTTER_DIAM/2))
For external radii:
feed = ARC_FEED * (circle radius / (circle radius – CUTTER_DIAM/2))
INVERSE_FEED
Enables you to specify the inverse time feed rate, or the rate of rotation, formachines with rotary axes. Available for 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences only. Ifyou set INVERSE_FEED to YES (the default is NO), the system outputs thefollowing line in the CL data file before the first cutting feed statement:
FEDRAT / INVERS, AUTO
At the end of the CL data file, the system outputs the following line:
FEDRAT / INVERS, OFF
RAMP_FEED
See Entry/Exit parameters.
114
APPROACH_FEED
See Entry/Exit parameters.
THREAD_FEED
Defines the thread pitch. Applicable for Thread milling only.
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Applicable for Thread milling only.
MachineSPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates (RPM). The default is -1.
SPINDLE_SENSE
The direction of spindle rotation. CW (clockwise—default), CCW(counterclockwise).
SPINDLE_RANGE
NO_RANGE (default), LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, NUMBER. If a value otherthan NO_RANGE is set, range will be included in the SPINDL command inthe CL file (for example, “RANGE, LOW). If set to NUMBER, theRANGE_NUMBER parameter value will be used in the SPINDL command(for example, “RANGE, 4, where 4 is the RANGE_NUMBER parametervalue).
RANGE_NUMBER
Will be output in the SPINDL command if SPINDLE_RANGE is set toNUMBER. The default is 0.
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPMattribute will be added to the SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
The default SPEED_CONTROL is CONST_RPM (constant revolutions perminute). CONST_SFM (constant surface feet per minute) and CONST_SMM(constant surface meters per minute) allow you to apply feed rate control tothe contact surface between the tool and the workpiece, to create good surfacefinish.
CUTCOM
115
Controls tool compensation. The options are:
ON—Turns on the cutter compensation in the CL file. The compensation is Right or Left,depending on CUT_TYPE and SPINDLE_SENSE.
OFF (the default)—No tool compensation provided.CUTCOM statements are not output for cut motions.
CUTCOM_REGISTER
Specifies the number of the register of the machine controller that holds thetool compensation data. The default is 0.
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
Specifies if colinear points in approach and exit motions should be stripped oradded. The values are:
0—Strip colinear points.
1—Do not strip colinear points, to allow proper implementation of Cutcom.
n (where n is an integer)—The Approach, Exit, or Cutcom move will be divided into nequal segments by adding extra GOTO points.
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 0
(colinear points stripped)
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 1 NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 2
1st GOTO point
1st GOTO point 1st GOTO point
2nd GOTO point
3rd GOTOpoint
4th GOTOpoint
2nd GOTO point 2nd GOTO point
3rd GOTO point
Approachmove
Cut motion
PartApproachmovePart Part
Cut motion Cut motion
Approachmove
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the approach motion if multiplecutcom points are specified. Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, wheren is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 1.
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT
116
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the exit motion if multiplecutcom points are specified. Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, wheren is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 0.
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 2
1st GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
4th GOTO point
2nd GOTO point (cutcom point 1)
3rd GOTO point (cutcom point 2)
5th GOTO point
Approachmove
Cut motion
Part
6th GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
7th GOTO point (cutcom point 1)
8th GOTO point (cutcom point 2)
ExitMove
CUTCOM_ON_SPIRAL
Specifies whether cutter compensation is on or off for Volume NC sequenceswith SCAN_TYPE set to TYPE_SPIRAL. The default is NO. If you set it toYES, you must also set the CUTCOM parameter to ON, and have anapproach and exit motion defined in Build Cut.
HOLDER_DIAMETER
Along with HOLDER_LENGTH, allows you to use holder dimensions forautomatic gouge avoidance. The default is a dash (-). If specified, will also bereflected when displaying CL data and when the tool is displayed in thePreview window of the Tool Setup dialog box. Applicable for Trajectory,Straight Cut and Isolines Surface milling.
HOLDER_LENGTH
Along with HOLDER_DIAMETER, allows you to use holder dimensions forautomatic gouge avoidance. The default is a dash (-). If specified, will also bereflected when displaying CL data and when the tool is displayed in thePreview window of the Tool Setup dialog box. Applicable for Trajectory,Straight Cut and Isolines Surface milling.
OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the tool gauge length register. The default is a dash (-), in whichcase the Offset value from the Tool Table is used.
Z_GAUGE_OFFSET
117
Shifts CL output by a specified value along the tool axis. If you specify apositive value, CL data is shifted in the positive Z-direction of the toolcoordinate system; a negative value shifts CL data in the opposite direction.The default is a dash (-).
Entry/ExitRAMP_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool enters the workpiece during a plunge cut. Thedefault RAMP_ANGLE is 90, which enters the workpiece parallel to the Z-axis. Not applicable for Facing or Trajectory NC sequences.
RAMP_FEED
The rate at which the tool moves upon entering the workpiece during aplunge cut. The default is a dash (-), in which case the CUT_FEED will beused. Not applicable for Facing or Trajectory NC sequences.
CLEAR_DIST
The clearance distance above the surface to be milled (for example, theprevious slice level) at which the rapid motion ends and the PLUNGE_FEEDbegins. The default is not set (displayed as “–1).
PULLOUT_DIST
Specifies the height above the level of the cut (for example, the slice justmilled) up to which the tip of the tool will retract at CUT_FEED and thenchange to RETRACT_FEED. The default is 0.
INTER_RET_HEIGHT
Specifies the distance that the cutter will retract above the level of the cut toperform intermediate rapid motions. The default is a dash (-), in which casethe cutter will retract all the way to the retract surface. Applicable for Facingonly.
LEAD_IN
If set to YES, makes the tool enter the workpiece along a tangent circularpath when profiling. The arc radius is set by LEAD_RADIUS, the arc angle—by ENTRY_ANGLE. You can also specify the length of the adjacent straightportion of Lead In trajectory using TANGENT_LEAD_STEP, and the lengthof a straight segment normal to it using NORMAL_LEAD_STEP.
For closed contours, if start point is not set, the tool will enter at a locationdetermined by the system. If not satisfied with this location, specify your ownStart Point axis. The tool will enter at the point along the profile which isclosest to the start point axis.
LEAD_IN and LEAD_OUT
118
LEAD_OUT
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
LEAD_IN
LEAD_RADIUS
Open profile Closed profile
Startpoint
LEAD_OUT
LEAD_IN
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
ENTRY_ANGLE
EXIT_ANGLE
If a closed contour contains multiple loops, LEAD_IN and LEAD_OUT will beapplied to each loop.
If LEAD_IN is set to YES with a zero radius, the tool will go directly to thepoint closest to the Start Point specified and start cutting. When LEAD_IN isset to NO, cutting will begin at the default point of the contour determined bythe system.
Start Point axis
Tool path
LEAD_IN NO LEAD_IN YESLEAD_RADIUS 0
Default start ofthe contour
Tool path
Start Point axis
LEAD_OUT
119
Makes the tool exit the workpiece along a tangent circular path whenprofiling. Works similarly to LEAD_IN. If the end point is specified it will beused for LEAD_OUT, otherwise the default 90 arc (and the default exit pointfor closed contours) will be used.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in orout. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in orlead-out motion. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion ofthe lead-in or lead-out motion. The default is 0.
HELICAL_DIAMETER
Allows you to replace the plunge motion between the slices for Rough Volumemilling with a helical entry motion. The helical diameter will be formed bythe outside of the tool as it approaches the beginning of a Rough slice; theangle of descent is defined by the RAMP_ANGLE parameter value. If a StartPoint axis is specified, the helix center will be at the axis location; if thehelical motion violates the Mill Volume, the system will issue a warning andstop machining. If a Start Point axis is not specified,the helix will be createdas close to the start point of the lower slice as possible. To move from the endof the previous slice, the tool will lift off the surface by PULLOUT_DIST andhorizontally move at RETRACT_FEED to the start of the helical entry intothe lower slice. If you have specified Approach Walls for the NC sequence, thehelical motion will not be created when the tool moves down outside theApproach Walls; however, if the tool moves down inside the Mill Volume, thesystem will use the helical entry. The default HELICAL_DIAMETER is 0, inwhich case the helical motion will not be performed.
APPR_EXIT_EXT
Applicable for Volume milling only. Defines the maximum distance betweenthe periphery of the tool and the Approach Wall of the mill volume forapproach and exit motions within a slice.
APPR_EXIT_PATH
Applicable for Profiling and for the profiling pass of Volume milling NCsequences. Allows you to trim the sketched approach or exit path by theoutline of the profiling tool motion. For approach path, only the first portion(from the start point up to the first intersection with the profiling outline)will be kept. For exit path, only the last portion (from the last intersectionwith the profiling outline to the end point) will be kept. If the approach/exit
120
path is set to not be trimmed, the tool will follow the whole path as sketched.The values are:
TRIM_BOTH (default)—Both the approach and exit path will be trimmed.
TRIM_APPROACH—Trim only the approach path.
TRIM_EXIT—Trim only the exit path.
TRIM_NONE—Do not trim.
APPR_EXIT_PATH
Approach path Approach path
APPR_EXIT_HEIGHT
Applicable for Volume, Local, Profile milling, and Engraving. Allows you tocontrol the depth of the approach and exit path specified during Build Slice.The options are:
DEPTH_OF_CUT (the default)—The approach/exit path for each pass (including thefirst/last) will be at the depth of the start/end point of the pass.
RETRACT_PLANE—Approach/exit movements will be at the level of the retract plane.
OVERTRAVEL_DISTANCE
For 3-Axis Straight Cut Surface milling, specifies the distance that the tooltravels past the surface outline, both at the beginning and end of each cuttingpass.
APPROACH_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of approach motions. For Facing, also specifies theadditional (with respect to START_OVERTRAVEL) distance from the tool tothe surface outline for the first pass in each slice. The default is 0.
EXIT_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of exit motions. For Facing, also specifies the additional(with respect to END_OVERTRAVEL) distance that the tool overtravels pastthe surface outline for the last pass in each slice. The default is a dash (-),that is, 0.
121
APPROACH_FEED
The rate at which the tool approaches the surface during a Facing NCsequence. The default is a dash (-), in which case CUT_FEED will be used.
EXIT_FEED
The rate at which the tool overtravels past the surface edge during a FacingNC sequence. The default is a dash (-), in which case CUT_FEED will beused.
CLEARANCE_EDGE
Specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the exit motionsand the overtravel motions when the tool leaves the material:
HEEL (default)—The heel of the tool.
CENTER—The center of the tool.
LEADING_EDGE—The leading edge of the tool.
Applicable for Facing only.
ENTRY_EDGE
Specifies which point of the tool is to be used for measuring the approachmotions and the overtravel motions when the tool approaches the material:
LEADING_EDGE (default)—The leading edge of the tool.
CENTER—The center of the tool.
HEEL—The heel of the tool.
Applicable for Facing only.
APPROACH_TYPE
Allows you to automatically create an approach motion in Thread milling andLocal milling By Previous Tool.
In Thread milling, the values are:
RADIAL—The approach motion will be a straight line normal to the cut motion,controlled by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
HELICAL—The tool will approach the start of the cut motion in a helical motioncontrolled by the ENTRY_ANGLE and the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameters.
NONE—No approach motion will be generated.
In Local milling By Previous Tool, the values are:
122
HELICAL (default)—The tool approaches the machining surface following a helicaltrajectory, tangent to the start point of the cutting tool path. The helical pitch value iscontrolled by the RAMP_ANGLE parameter (the default value for RAMP_ANGLE in thiscase is 30). The lead-in radius is equal to the radius of the previous tool minus the radiusof the cutting tool. If the CLEAR_DIST parameter value is greater than 0, the helicalapproach will start at the CLEAR_DIST height; otherwise, at retract plane.
CIRCULAR—The tool approaches the machining surface following a circular trajectory,tangent to the start point of the cutting tool path. The lead-in radius is equal to theradius of the previous tool minus the radius of the cutting tool.
NONE—The tool plunges to the start point of the tool path.
EXIT_TYPE
Allows you to automatically create an exit motion in Thread milling andLocal milling By Previous Tool.
In Thread milling, the values are:
RADIAL—The exit motion will be a straight line normal to the cut motion, controlled bythe EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
HELICAL—The tool will exit the cut motion in a helical motion controlled by theEXIT_ANGLE and the EXIT_DISTANCE parameters.
NONE—No exit motion will be generated.
In Local milling By Previous Tool, the values are:
HELICAL (default)—The tool exits by following a helical trajectory, tangent to the endpoint of the cutting tool path. The helical pitch value is controlled by the RAMP_ANGLEparameter (the default value for RAMP_ANGLE in this case is 30). The lead-out radius isequal to the radius of the previous tool minus the radius of the cutting tool. If thePULLOUT_DIST parameter value is greater than 0, the helical exit will end at thePULLOUT_DIST height; otherwise, at retract plane.
CIRCULAR—The tool exits by following a circular trajectory, tangent to the end point ofthe cutting tool path. The lead-out radius is equal to the radius of the previous toolminus the radius of the cutting tool.
NONE—The tool retracts to the pullout distance or to the retract plane.
ENTRY_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool whenleading in. Used when creating Lead In motions. The default is 90.
In Thread milling, defines the angle of the helical approach motion. If theangle is 0, the helical motion will still be created, but it will only contain onepoint. However, you will be able to modify the motion parameters in order tochange this.
EXIT_ANGLE
123
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool whenleading out. Used when creating Lead Out motions. The default is 90.
In Thread milling, defines the angle of the helical exit motion. If the angle is0, the helical motion will still be created, but it will only contain one point.However, you will be able to modify the motion parameters in order to changethis.
CUT_ENTRY_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default entry move type forintermediate cuts. The values correspond to the Each Cut entry move typesavailable in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
CUT_EXIT_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default exit move type forintermediate cuts. The values correspond to the Each Cut exit move typesavailable in the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
INITIAL_ENTRY_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default entry move type for thefirst cut. The values correspond to the First Cut entry move types available inthe Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
FINAL_EXIT_EXT
For Surface and Swarf milling, specifies the default exit move type for thelast cut. The values correspond to the Last Cut exit move types available inthe Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
ThreadTHREAD_DIAMETER
Defines the minor diameter for an External thread or the major diameter foran Internal thread. Applicable for Thread milling only.
Turning Parameters
The following parameters are specific to turning NC sequences. They arelisted under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you setup the parameters.
For description of the common manufacturing parameters, available for allthe NC sequence types, see the topic Common NC Sequence Parameters.Click to access this topic.
Notes:
124
� You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this meansthat the default value is not set by the system).
� Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as theunits of the workpiece.
Cut OptionSCAN_TYPE
For Area turning, specifies the type of tool movement and the way the toolscans multi-step profiles:
• TYPE_1—The tool will cut in one direction only, then retract to the beginning of the cut.If there are multiple hollows, the tool will complete the first hollow and go to the nextone.
• TYPE_2—The tool will cut back and forth along the whole length of the cut.
• TYPE_3—The tool will cut back and forth. If there are multiple hollows, the tool willcomplete the first hollow and go to the next one.
• TYPE_1_CONNECT—Works the same as TYPE_1, except the tool will move from onepass to the next by profiling the workpiece between the end point of the first pass and thestart point of the following pass.
The following illustration shows the difference between TYPE_1 andTYPE_1_CONNECT.
SCAN_TYPE TYPE_1 SCAN_TYPE TYPE_1_CONNECT
For Groove turning, SCAN_TYPE specifies if the tool cuts from the middle tothe sides of the groove, or from one side to the other:
• TYPE_1 (the default)—Starts in the middle and makes alternating passes on each side inturn.
• TYPE_ONE_DIR—Starts at one side of the groove and moves to the other side.
125
• TYPE_1_CONNECT—Assures uniform stock allowance on the sides of the groove afterthe rough pass. Starts on the deepest portion of the groove, as close to the middle of thegroove as possible, and makes alternating passes on each side in turn; continues makingpasses on the longer side, if necessary, until the wall is reached. Makes connectingmotions between the plunge passes by moving along the profile of the groove (similar toTYPE_1_CONNECT in Area turning, described above).
If ROUGH_OPTION for Groove turning is PROF_ONLY, the SCAN_TYPEparameter is ignored.
ROUGH_OPTION
Specifies if there is a profiling pass during an Area or Groove NC sequence:
• ROUGH_ONLY—No profiling is done. The tool cuts by horizontal rough passes for Areaturning, by vertical passes for Groove turning.
• ROUGH_&_PROF—The profiling pass is performed after the rough turning is completed.
• PROF_ONLY—Only the profiling pass will be performed.
• ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP—Similar to ROUGH_ONLY, except that for ROUGH_ONLY thetool retracts immediately upon completing rough turning. ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UPmakes the tool follow along the profile up to its end before retracting.
ROUGH_OPTION
ROUGH_ONLY ROUGH_&_PROF
ROUGH_&_CLEAN_UP PROF_ONLY
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE
Allows you to extend the tool path past the workpiece boundaries assketched. If TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is NO (the default), the machining zone
126
will be formed by the whole sketch of the cut; the system will add a verticalline as the right boundary and a horizontal line as the left boundary. IfTRIM_TO_WORKPIECE is set to YES, the machining zone will be defined onthe outside by the workpiece boundaries, with a small extension past theseboundaries determined by the system.
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE YES TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE NO
Section sketch extendspast the workpiece.
CUT_DIRECTION
Allows you to reverse the default cutting direction for turning NC sequences(right-to-left for Outside and Inside turning, downward for Facing). Thevalues are:
• STANDARD (default)—Use the default direction.
• REVERSE—Reverse the cut direction. The tool will cut left-to-right for Outside andInside turning, and from the center upward for Facing.
OUTPUT_POINT
Allows you to choose which point of the tool will be used as the control pointfor CL output:
• CENTER (default)—The center of the nose radius (the default control point).
• TIP—The output point will be offset downwards and to the left from the default controlpoint by the NOSE_RADIUS value.
• X_OFFSET—The output point will be offset downwards from the default control point bythe NOSE_RADIUS value.
• Z_OFFSET—The output point will be offset to the left from the default control point bythe NOSE_RADIUS value.
• CENTER_RIGHT—Same as CENTER, but on the right side of the tool (for Grooveturning only).
• TIP_RIGHT—Same as TIP, but on the right side of the tool (for Groove turning only).
• X_OFFSET_RIGHT—Same as X_OFFSET, but on the right side of the tool (for Grooveturning only).
127
• Z_OFFSET_RIGHT—Same as Z_OFFSET, but on the right side of the tool (for Grooveturning only).
All the offsets are determined with respect to the default tool sectionorientation (as appears using the Show option). The same point will be usedfor Outside, Inside, or Face turning. Applicable for Area, Profile, and Grooveturning only.
OUTPUT_POINT
CENTER TIP
X_OFFSET Z_OFFSET
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
Allows you to specify the type of gouge checking for turning NC sequences.TIP_ONLY (the default) calculates gouge avoidance with respect to the tip ofthe tool only. TIP_&_SIDES calculates gouge avoidance with respect to thetip and both cutting sides of the tool. The tool path will be changed to avoidgouging, and material removal simulation will reflect the tool geometry.Applicable for Area and Profile turning only.
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_ONLY
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_&_SIDES
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE
128
Reflects the two ways of generating the tool path when passing a convexcorner during a profiling pass of an Area NC Sequence:
• FILLET (default)—The tool path consists of two straight segments connected with anarc.
• STRAIGHT—The tool path consists of two straight segments extended until theyintersect.
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE
Tool path
Part
FILLET STRAIGHT
tool path
Part
Note: STRAIGHT may not work if the tool size is too big to enter a cavity in the part.
Tool pathTool Tool
Part PartFILLET STRAIGHT
Tool path cannotbe generated
STEPOVER_ADJUST
YES (the default) allows you to uniformly distribute cutting passes across thearea of the cut or along the groove width during a Rough NC sequence. If setto NO, the distance will be determined by either STEP_DEPTH (for Areaturning) or STEP_OVER (for Groove turning).
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE
Allows you to specify an intermediate retract for the profiling pass of Grooveturning NC sequences:
• NO_BACKCUT (the default)—The tool will enter the groove on one side, retract at someintermediate point along the groove profile, enter on the other side and complete the cut.
• CONTINUOUS—The tool will enter the groove on one side, cut across, and exit on theother side.
ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT
If set to YES (the default is NO), allows you to generate CL output for Grooveturning NC sequences based on the side of the tool cutting material. For scantypes TYPE_1 and TYPE_1_CONNECT, the initial plunge is created with
129
output point specified by the OUTPUT_POINT parameter. The tool retractsback to the starting height. The system then issues a new TURRETstatement with OSETNO defined by the ALT_OSETNO_VAL parameter, andthe tool moves to beginning of the next plunge with the X, Y, Z output basedon the side of the tool entering material. This pattern is repeated for allrough passes.
For profiling passes with GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE set to NO_BACKCUT,the first output point, specified by the OUTPUT_POINT parameter, is activeuntil the retract which occurs at the intermediate point along the groove.Once the tool returns to starting height, the system issues a new TURRETstatement with OSETNO defined by the ALT_OSETNO_VAL parameter, andthe rest of the groove is cut with the other side of the tool and the new offsetregister.
DEEP_GROOVE_OPTION
Provides two options for machining deep grooves:
• BY_DEPTH (the default)—The tool will cut to the bottom of the groove in PECK_DEPTHincrements, retracting at FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH, if specified, before stepping over tothe next pass.
• BY_WIDTH—The tool will completely machine the whole width of the groove at eachPECK_DEPTH.
Applicable for Groove turning NC sequences only.
Cut ParamTOOL_CLEARANCE
The distance used to degouge the tool holder when solid tool outline is used.
STEP_DEPTH
The incremental depth of each pass during rough cut NC sequences. TheSTEP_DEPTH must be greater than zero. The default is not set (displayed as“–1). Applicable for Area Turning only.
END_STEP_DEPTH
If the value of END_STEP_DEPTH is different than that of STEP_DEPTH,then the step depth of the NC sequence will start at the value ofSTEP_DEPTH and gradually increase/decrease with each additional sliceuntil the final slice, when it will become the value of END_STEP_DEPTH.Applicable for Area Turning only.
MIN_STEP_DEPTH
130
Controls how the intermediate reference part diameters are machined. Thedefault is a dash (-), which means that all diameters will be machined tostock allowance. Applicable for Area Turning only.
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW
and
PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the rough cut for the finish cut. Bothparameters are used for Rough Cut NC sequences only, and specify differentstock allowances for roughing and profiling cuts in Area and Groove NCsequences. PROF_STOCK_ALLOW must be set to a value less than or equalto ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW. When geometry is displayed after Automaticmaterial removal, it will use PROF_STOCK_ALLOW. The defaults are 0.
ROUGH_ONLY ROUGH_&_PROF
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW PROF_STOCK_ALLOW
profiling pass
STOCK_ALLOW
Determines the stock allowance for Profile turning NC sequences and finalprogrammed thread depth for Thread turning. The default is 0.
Z_STOCK_ALLOW
Specifies the stock allowance in the Z direction, enabling you to leavedifferent amounts of stock on the diameters and faces of a workpiece.Z_STOCK_ALLOW will be ignored if the value of ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOWis 0. The default value is a dash (-), in which case theROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW or PROF_STOCK_ALLOW value will be used asapplicable.
Step Depth and Stock Allowance
131
CSYS z
x
PROF_STOCK_ALLOWZ_STOCK_ALLOW
Z_STOCK_ALLOW(or ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW if Z_STOCK_ALLOW is "-")
STEP_DEPTH
NUMBER_PASSES
Gives you additional control over the number of tool passes during an Area orGroove NC sequence (also controlled by the STEP_DEPTH parameter forArea turning, or STEP_OVER for Groove turning). The system will computestep depth using the NUMBER_PASSES parameter value (if other than 0),compare it with the STEP_DEPTH (or STEP_OVER) value, and use the onethat is smaller.
CUT_ANGLE
Allows you to cut at an angle. For Outside and Inside Turning the angle ismeasured with respect to the Z axis, for Facing—with respect to the X axis.The default is 0. Applicable for Area turning only.
CUT_ANGLE 165
NUM_PROF_PASSES
Specifies the amount of profiling passes. Applicable for Area and Grooveturning when ROUGH_OPTION is ROUGH_&_PROF or PROF_ONLY. Thedefault is 1.
PROF_INCREMENT
Specifies the offset between the profiling passes. The final pass will always bethe same, which means that the first pass will be offset from the final passby: (NUM_PROF_PASSES–1)*PROF_INCREMENT.The default is 0. If NUM_PROF_PASSES is greater than 1, you must specifya positive value for PROF_INCREMENT.
132
NUM_PROF_PASSES = 3
PROF_INCREMENT
CONCAVE_RADIUS
Defines the radius for a Round corner condition at a concave corner.
CONVEX_RADIUS
Defines the radius for a Round corner condition at a convex corner.
CHAMFER_DIM
Defines the size of the 45 chamfer when a Chamfer corner condition is added.
START_OVERTARVEL
and
END_OVERTRAVEL
These two parameters specify the distance that the tool travels outside theworkpiece in the beginning and the end of each pass, respectively. Applicablefor Area and Profile turning. The default value is 0. For Area turning,START_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL will only be applied if thecut extension is parallel to the direction of the cut motion.
START_OVERTRAVELapplied
END_OVERTRAVELnot applied
BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE
133
The minimum angle by which the back end of the tool will clear theworkpiece as it enters an area of smaller diameter than was previously beingmachined. The default is 5.
STEP_OVER
The distance between two neighboring cuts. The default is not set (displayedas “–1). Applicable for rough Groove turning (that is, with ROUGH_OPTIONother than PROF_ONLY).
SIDEWALL_OFFSET
Allows you to control the intermediate retract point for the profiling pass inGroove turning (when ROUGH_OPTION is PROF_ONLY orROUGH_&_PROF, and GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE is NO_BACKCUT).SIDEWALL_OFFSET specifies the length of the second portion of the cut,that is, the distance between the point of retract and the end of the bottom ofthe groove. The default is a dash (-), in which case the tool will retract at themidpoint of the bottom entity.
PECK_DEPTH
If set to a value other than 0, the peck cycle will be performed. The default is0. Applicable only for rough Groove turning (that is, with ROUGH_OPTIONother than PROF_ONLY).
ALT_OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the alternative offset register value for Groove turning NCsequences when the ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT parameter is set to YES.The default value is a dash (-), that is, not used.
MachineSPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates (RPM). The defaultSPINDLE_SPEED is not set (displayed as “–1).
SPINDLE_SENSE
The direction of spindle rotation. CW (clockwise—default), CCW(counterclockwise).
SPINDLE_RANGE
NO_RANGE (default), LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, NUMBER. If a value otherthan NO_RANGE is set, range will be included in the SPINDL command inthe CL file (for example, “RANGE, LOW). If set to NUMBER, theRANGE_NUMBER parameter value will be used in the SPINDL command(for example, “RANGE, 4, where 4 is the RANGE_NUMBER parametervalue).
134
RANGE_NUMBER
Will be output in the SPINDL command if SPINDLE_RANGE is set toNUMBER. The default is 0.
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPMattribute will be added to the SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
CONST_RPM (constant revolutions per minute), CONST_SFM (constantsurface feet per minute), CONST_SMM (constant surface meters per minute).The default SPEED_CONTROL is CONST_RPM.
CUTCOM
Controls tool compensation. The options are:ON—Turns on the tool compensation in the CL file.OFF (the default)—No tool compensation provided.CUTCOM statements are not output for cut motions.
CUTCOM_REGISTER
Specifies the number of the register of the machine controller that holds thetool compensation data. The default is 0.
TOOL_ORIENTATION
Allows you to control the tool orientation. It represents the angle (in degrees)from the tool axis clockwise to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinatesystem. TOOL_ORIENTATION can be any value between 0 and 360. Thedefault is 0.
Note: For Head 2, the angle is measured counterclockwise. That is, ifTOOL_ORIENTATION is 90, for Head 1 the tool shank is oriented along the positive X-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system, while for Head 2 the tool shank is along thenegative X-axis.
DELAY
The duration in seconds of a period of tool dwelling at the bottom of thegroove. The default is 0, in which case the “DELAY / t statement will not beoutput in the CL file. Applicable for Groove turning only.
OSETNO_VAL
Specifies the tool gauge length register. The default is a dash (-), in whichcase the Offset value from the Tool Table is used.
X_GAUGE_OFFSET
135
Shifts CL output by a specified value. If you specify a positive value, CL datais shifted in the positive X-direction of the tool coordinate system; a negativevalue shifts CL data in the opposite direction. The default is a dash (-).
Z_GAUGE_OFFSET
Shifts CL output by a specified value. If you specify a positive value, CL datais shifted in the positive Z-direction of the tool coordinate system; a negativevalue shifts CL data in the opposite direction. The default is a dash (-).
Entry/ExitPLUNGE_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool approaches the workpiece. The default is 0.Applicable for Area and Groove turning.
PULLOUT_ANGLE
The angle at which the tool is pulled away from the workpiece. The default is0. Applicable for Area and Groove turning.
PLUNGE_ANGLE 45 PLUNGE_ANGLE 0
PULLOUT_ANGLE 45PULLOUT_ANGLE 0
RETRACT_RATIO
Controls the depth of the tool retracting motion during an Area turning NCsequence. This depth is specified as a ratio of STEP_DEPTH. The default is1.1.
retracting depth = STEP_DEPTH * RETRACT_RATIO
retractingdepth
STEP_DEPTH
PULLOUT_DIST
136
Used for the final retract of the tool. The default is 0, in which case thesystem default value for retract will be used. Applicable for Groove turningonly.
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
Applicable for peck cycle Groove turning only. If other than 0 (the default),the tool will retract all the way back to CLEAR_DIST upon reaching thisdepth below the top of the groove.
CLEAR_DIST
For Groove NC sequences, the clearance distance above the workpiece surfaceat which the PLUNGE_FEED ends and the CUT_FEED begins. For ThreadNC sequences, the clearance distance from the workpiece (corresponds to “din the AI parameter “FEDTO, d). The default is -1.
APPROACH_DISTANCE
In Area turning, will be used for the initial entry into rough turning, as wellas for the entry into the profiling motion. Also specifies the length ofapproach Tool Motions for all NC sequence types. The default is 0.
EXIT_DISTANCE
In Area turning, will be used for the final exit from rough turning, as well asfor the exit from the profiling motion. Also specifies the length of exit ToolMotions for all NC sequence types. The default is a dash (-), that is, 0.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in or out. Usedwhen creating Lead In and Lead Out Tool Motions, and in Build Cut for Profile turning.The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-outmotion. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cut for Profileturning. The default is 0.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion ofthe lead-in or lead-out motion. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Outmotions in Build Cut for Profile turning. The default is 0.
ENTRY_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool whenleading in. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cutfor Profile turning. The default is 90.
137
EXIT_ANGLE
The angle of the arc created by the circular movement of the tool whenleading out. Used when creating Lead In and Lead Out motions in Build Cutfor Profile turning. The default is 90.
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
LEAD_RADIUS
EXIT_ANGLEENTRY_ANGLE
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
cut motion
ThreadTHREAD_FEED
Number of threads per inch. The default value is not set (displayed as “–1).
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Allows alternate pitch designations.
PERCENT_DEPTH
A decimal number between 0 and 1 that indicates the percentage ofremaining material to be removed with each pass.
Note: This option is valid only for AI macros, not for ISO standard CL Data.
NUMBER_FIN_PASSES
Sets the number of passes to be made after the final thread depth(determined by STOCK_ALLOW) is reached. The default is 1.
NUMBER_STARTS
The number of threading starts in multiple start threading (corresponds tothe AI parameter “TIMES,t and to the ISO parameter “MULTRD,t). Forexample, if NUMBER_STARTS is set to 4, there will be four threading startsspaced at equal intervals around the part.
NUMBER_CUTS
For ISO threads, the number of times the tool will be positioned to a multiplecut (corresponds to the ISO parameter “CUTS,c).
NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS
For AI threads, the number of times the tool will be positioned to a multiplecut (corresponds to “n in the AI parameter “OFSETL,n,o).
138
CUT_OFFSET
For AI threads, the offset distance between the cuts in multiple cut threading(corresponds to “o in the AI parameter “OFSETL,n,o).
The graphic below illustrates the NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS andCUT_OFFSET parameters.
NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS = 4
CUT_OFFSET
tool
thread
OUTPUT_THRD_PNTS
If set to YES (the default), outputs GOTO statements for the first and lastpoints of the thread into CL file, before and after the THREAD/AUTOcommand, respectively. If set to NO, does not output these GOTO statements.
INFEED_ANGLE
Angle at which the tool begins the cut. The default value is 0.
THREAD_DEPTH
Thread depth (for General thread type only). The default value is not set(displayed as “–1).
Holemaking Parameters
The following parameters are specific to Holemaking NC sequences. They arelisted under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you setup the parameters.
For description of the common manufacturing parameters, available for allthe NC sequence types, see the topic Common NC Sequence Parameters.Click to access this topic.
Notes:
� You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this meansthat the default value is not set by the system).
� Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as theunits of the workpiece.
139
Cut OptionSCAN_TYPE
There are several algorithms for automatically creating the Holemaking toolpath:
TYPE_1—By incrementing the Y coordinate and going back and forth in the X direction.
TYPE_SPIRAL—Clockwise starting from the hole nearest to the coordinate system.
TYPE_ONE_DIR—By incrementing the X coordinate and decrementing the Y.
PICK_ORDER—The holes will be drilled in the same order as they are selected. If onechoice results in more than one hole being selected (for example, All Holes or Patternselection), these holes will be drilled according to TYPE_1. Then the PICK_ORDERdrilling will be resumed.
SHORTEST (default)—The system determines which order of holes results in theshortest machine motion time.
xy
x xy y
SCAN_TYPE
TYPE_1 TYPE_SPIRAL TYPE_ONE_DIR
CUT_DIRECTION
Enables you to reverse the order in which the holes are machined. The valuesare: STANDARD (default) or REVERSE. REVERSE will make the systemstart with the last hole and go back to the first one. This functionality ishelpful when you have to create multiple NC sequences on a large hole set:alternating direction of tool path for successive NC sequences lets you savetime for repositioning the tool. If your tool path was created using theCustomize functionality, CUT_DIRECTION will affect the Use Sketchsegments, but not the Connect segments.
CYCLE_FORMAT
Specifies the output format for CL data of a Holemaking NC sequence. For allnewly created NC sequences the default is COUPLET. The other option isFIXED (this is the default for NC sequences created prior to Release 12.0).Not applicable for BORE, REAM, and BREAKCHIP cycles (these are alwaysoutput in COUPLET format).
CYCLE_OUTPUT
140
Specifies the order of drilling for an automatically created Holemaking toolpath when multiple Hole Sets are included in the NC sequence:
BY_HOLE (default)—The SCAN_TYPE algorithm will be applied to all the selectedholes, without considering which Hole Set they belong to. This results in a shortertraversal path of the tool.
BY_HOLESET—The SCAN_TYPE algorithm will be applied to holes in each Hole Setseparately. This will somewhat reduce the size of the CL file, because each Hole Set willonly have one CYCLE / ... and CYCLE / OFF statement associated with it, instead ofturning the cycle on and off every time the tool moves to a hole in a different Hole Set.
Cut ParamBREAKOUT_DISTANCE
The system adds the BREAKOUT_DISTANCE value to the Z depth in theCYCLE statements associated with holes drilled Thru All, and with throughholes drilled using the Auto depth option. You can use it for Blind holes, ifyou select Use breakout distance when defining a Hole Set. The default is0.
CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW
Allows you to specify stock allowance to be used with check surfaces. Thedefault is a dash (-), that is, ignore. This parameter is available for all 3-AxisHolemaking NC sequences except Back boring.
PECK_DEPTH
Depth increment for each drilling pass. Default value is 0. If you select DEEPdrilling, you have to specify non-zero PECK_DEPTH. Not available forCountersink drilling.
FeedTHREAD_FEED
Used for TAP cycles only (instead of CUT_FEED) to specify feed rate. Thedefault is not set (displayed as “–1).
THREAD_FEED_UNITS
TPI (default), MMPR, IPR. Applicable for TAP cycles only. Allows alternatepitch designations.
FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR
Used for the floating TAP cycle only. The feed rate is calculated as theTHREAD_FEED value multiplied by FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR. The default is1.
141
MachineSPINDLE_SPEED
The rate at which the machine spindle rotates. The default is not set(displayed as “–1).
SPINDLE_STATUS
ON (default), OFF.
SPINDLE_SENSE
The direction of spindle rotation. CW (clockwise—default), CCW(counterclockwise).
SPINDLE_RANGE
NO_RANGE (default), LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH, NUMBER. If a value otherthan NO_RANGE is set, range will be included in the SPINDL command inthe CL file (for example, “RANGE, LOW). If set to NUMBER, theRANGE_NUMBER parameter value will be used in the SPINDL command(for example, “RANGE, 4, where 4 is the RANGE_NUMBER parametervalue).
RANGE_NUMBER
Will be output in the SPINDL command if SPINDLE_RANGE is set toNUMBER. The default is 0.
MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
If set to a value other than a dash (-) (which is the default), the MAXRPMattribute will be added to the SPINDL command.
SPEED_CONTROL
CONST_RPM (constant revolutions per minute), CONST_SFM (constantsurface feet per minute), CONST_SMM (constant surface meters per minute).The default SPEED_CONTROL is CONST_RPM. CONST_SFM andCONST_SMM allow you to apply feed rate control to the contact surfacebetween the tool and the workpiece, to create good surface finish.
DELAY
Duration of dwelling at depth. The default is a dash (-), in which case therewill be no delay. Not applicable for TAP and DEEP cycles.
DELAY_UNITS
SECONDS (default) or REV.
142
Entry/ExitCLEAR_DIST
The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which thePLUNGE_FEED ends and the CUT_FEED begins. The default is not set(displayed as “–1).
CLEARANCE_OFFSET
The clearance distance above the top of the hole at which the tool ispositioned for 5-Axis Holemaking. Also defines how far the tool will retractafter drilling a hole and before traversing to the next hole. The default valuefor CLEARANCE_OFFSET is a dash (-), in which case CLEAR_DIST will beused. Applicable for 5-Axis Holemaking only.
PULLOUT_DIST
Allows for the tool to return to a point other than that defined byCLEAR_DIST. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is notused.If the default value is used, then the tool will return to the clearance distance(CLEAR_DIST) when moving to the next hole, and the cycle statement willnot include the RETURN option.If the value of PULLOUT_DIST is set to 0, then the tool will return to theretract plane when moving to the next hole.
RAPTO_DIST
Allows for further rapid advance from CLEAR_DIST towards the top of thehole. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is not used.
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
If set to a value other than 0 (the default), specifies full retraction out of thehole for BREAKCHIP cycle after a certain number of incremental steps. Thisnumber of steps is calculated as FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH / PECK_DEPTH.
ORIENT_ANGLE
Allows you to specify orientation of an asymmetric tool before backing it awayfrom the hole wall before retracting. Applicable for BORE cycle and for backspotting only. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is notused.
JOG_DIST
Allows you to specify the distance of backing an asymmetric tool away fromthe hole wall before retracting. Applicable for BORE cycle and for backspotting only. The default is a dash (-), in which case this parameter is notused.
BACK_BORE_CLEARANCE
143
Minimum distance between tool and hole cylinder. Applicable for backspotting only.
Wire EDM Parameters
The following parameters are specific to Wire EDM NC sequences. They arelisted under a heading corresponding to the name of the branch when you setup the parameters.
For description of the common manufacturing parameters, available for allthe NC sequence types, see the topic Common NC Sequence Parameters.Click to access this topic.
Notes:
� You must supply a value for all parameters that have a default of –1 (this meansthat the default value is not set by the system).
� Length units for the NC sequence parameters (where applicable) are the same as theunits of the workpiece.
Cut Option
AUTO_CORNER_TYPE
Specify the default option for automatically created corner conditions:
RADIUS—Create round corner motions for concave and convex corners. This is thedefault.
STRAIGHT—Create a corner by extending straight segments until they intersect.
CHAMFER—Chamfer the corners.
BISECT— Bisect the corners.
CORNER_PASSES
Specify on which passes to create the automatic corner conditions:
ALL_PASSES—On all passes.
FIRST_PASS—On the first pass only.
LAST_PASS—On the last pass only.
APPROXIMATE_SPLINES
Indicate whether you want to approximate spline edges with arcs whencreating CL data output. The default value is NO; if you specify a value ofYES, the spline edges will be approximated.
144
AUTOSYNCH_START_END
Enables automatic synchronization of the start and end points of a 4-AxisWire EDM cut motion:
YES—The two heads will be automatically synchronized at the beginning and the end ofeach cut.
NO—The start and end points of the upper and lower contours will be mapped by cutentities; therefore, the upper and lower contours will have different start and end pointsin XY.
Cut Param
STOCK_ALLOW
The amount of stock left after the NC sequence. The default is not set(displayed as “–1).
CORNER_LENGTH
Defines the size (the side length) of the parallelograms added to the tool pathwhen corner condition is specified. The default is 0.
CORNER_ANGLE
For a sharp corner, the angle of the parallelogram equals the angle betweenthe adjoining entities, and the CORNER_ANGLE value is ignored. However,if you add a corner condition between two tangent entities, the angle of theparallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLE parameter. Thedefault is 0.
CONCAVE_RADIUS
Specifies the radius for a concave corner condition.
CONVEX_RADIUS
Specifies the radius for a convex corner condition.
ATTACH_WIDTH
Specifies a distance along a Contouring cut motion that is not to be cut,leaving the two sides of the cut attached by a small tab of material.
STOP_DIST
Distance before the end of the cut motion where the system will place a CLstop command (STOP or OPSTOP, depending on theEND_STOP_CONDITION parameter value). This enables the operator toclamp the part before it is cut free and falls away. After the clamp is in place,the tool completes the trajectory. If the tool path consists of more than onepass, the stop point is located on the first pass only.
145
DETACH_STOP_DIST
Distance before the end of the Detach move where the system will place a CLstop command (STOP or OPSTOP, depending on theEND_STOP_CONDITION parameter value).
END_OVERTRAVEL
Overtravel distance past the end of the cut motion. If the cut motion consistsof more than one pass, the overtravel distance is applied according to theEND_OVERTRAVEL_PASS parameter value.
REVERSE_DIST
Distance from end to reverse for multiple passes.
NUM_PROFILE_PASSES
Number of passes for a Finish cut motion.
PROF_INCREMENT
Increment for each Finish pass (unless this data is specified in the registertable).
STEP_OVER
Controls the lateral depth of cut for No Core Wire EDM. The STEP_OVERmust be a positive value less than the cutter diameter. The default is not set(displayed as “–1).
TOOL_OVERLAP
Another way to control the lateral depth of cut for No Core Wire EDM.TOOL_OVERLAP indicates the amount that the tool should overlap theregion machined during the previous pass. The default is a dash (-).TOOL_OVERLAP must be less than the tool diameter. If TOOL_OVERLAPis specified and STEP_OVER is not, the lateral depth of cut will be calculatedas(CUTTER_DIAM –TOOL_OVERLAP).
Feed
ARC_FEED
Allows you to control the cut feed around arcs. If set to a dash (-) (which is thedefault), the CUT_FEED value will be used. If set to 0, the RAPID statementwill be output before the CIRCLE statement.
Machine
SPARK_ALLOW
146
Together with STOCK_ALLOW and the tool parameter CUTTER_DIAM,defines the trajectory of the center of the tool with respect to desiredgeometry. The default is 0.
CL_DIST
Value to be output to the CL_DIST command in the CL data.
TAPER_ANGLE
Value of the machine controlled taper angle (applicable for 2-Axis Wire EDMonly).
CL_OUTPUT_MODE
Defines the CL output format for the tool axis (applicable for 4-Axis WireEDM only):
MULTAX_DATA (default)—The CL output will be in XYZ / IJK format.
TAPER—The CL output will use the STAN statement.
CUT_MOTION_CONNECT
Controls the Connect moves between multiple cut motions:
CUT_WIRE (default)—The wire is cut at the end of the cut motion. If the wire isdisengaged between cut motions, the tool moves at RAPID feed.
CONTINIOUS—Do not unload wire at the end of cut motion. If the wire is engagedbetween cut motions, the tool moves at CUT_FEED.
CUTCOM_MOVE
If this parameter is set to a non-zero value, it will allow the tool to moveaway from the specified tool path by this distance in the direction of the tooloffset or Cutcom offset (whichever is applicable). Before each Cutcom move,the CUTCOM / OFF statement will be output. Then there will be newGENRTR, FLUSH, and CUTCOM statements for the next tool pass. At theend of a cut motion there will be a CUTCOM / OFF statement followed byexit motion for closed contours or by Cutcom move for open ones.
CUTCOM_MOVE_APPROACH
Specifies the length of linear move used to turn cutter compensation on or offfor the first pass of a Contouring NC sequence (similar to CUTCOM_MOVE,described above).
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
Specifies if colinear points in approach and exit motions should be stripped oradded. The values are:
0—Strip colinear points.
147
1—Do not strip colinear points, to allow proper implementation of Cutcom.
n (where n is an integer)—The Approach, Exit, or Cutcom move will be divided into nequal segments by adding extra GOTO points.
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 0 NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 1 NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 2(colinear points stripped)
1st GOTO point
1st GOTO point 1st GOTO point
2nd GOTO point 3rd GOTO point4th GOTO point
2nd GOTO point2nd GOTO point
3rd GOTO point
Approachmove
Cut motion
Part
Approachmove
ApproachmovePart Part
Cut motion Cut motion
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the approach motion if multiplecutcom points are specified. Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, wheren is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 1.
Note: For bisect angles, the motion towards the cut is considered anapproach motion.
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT
Specifies location of CUTCOM statement on the exit motion if multiplecutcom points are specified. Cutcom points are numbered from 0 to n, wheren is the value of NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS. The default is 0.
Note: For bisect angles, the motion away from the cut is considered an exitmotion.
148
NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS 2
1st GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
4th GOTO point
2nd GOTO point (cutcom point 1)
3rd GOTO point (cutcom point 2)
5th GOTO point
Approach move
Cut motion
Part
6th GOTO point (cutcom point 0)
7th GOTO point (cutcom point 1)
8th GOTO point (cutcom point 2)
Exitmove
CUTCOM_REG_START
Initial cutter compensation controller register number.
CUTCOM_REG_INCR
Increment of cutcom register for a multi-pass tool path.
FLUSH_REG_START
Initial flush register number.
FLUSH_REG_INCR
Increment of flush register for a multi-pass tool path.
FLUSH_REG_APPROACH
Number of flush register for the approach move.
FLUSH_REG_DETACH
Number of flush register for the detach move.
GENRTR_ROUGH
Power setting of the machine for the rough pass.
GENRTR_APPROACH
Power setting of the machine for the approach motion.
GENRTR_DETACH
Power setting of the machine for the detach motion.
GENRTR_FINISH
149
Initial power setting of the first finish pass.
GENRTR_REG_INCR
Increment of GENRTR command for subsequent finish passes.
REGISTER_TABLE
Specify the name of the register table to be used. The default is a dash (-), inwhich case cutcom and generator will be determined using the appropriateparameters above.
Entry/Exit
APPROACH_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of approach motions for Customize. The default is 0.
EXIT_DISTANCE
Specifies the length of exit motions for Customize. The default is a dash (-),that is, 0.
APPROACH_MOVE
Allows you to specify if the Approach move will be created automatically. Thedefault is YES. In order for the Approach move to be created, you have toalso specify a Thread Point for the cut motion.
RETURN_TO_START
If set to YES (the default is NO), the wire will return to the start point uponcompleting the cut motion. Applicable to No Core cut motions only.
LEAD_IN
If set to YES, the system will create a Lead In motion automatically on allpasses of a multi-pass cut motion. The default is NO.
LEAD_OUT
If set to YES, the system will create a Lead Out motion automatically on allpasses of a multi-pass cut motion. The default is NO.
LEAD_RADIUS
The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leading in orout. The default is 0.
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circular lead-in or lead-outmotion. The default is 0.
150
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangent portion ofthe lead-in or lead-out motion. The default is 0.
END_OVERTRAVEL_PASS
Specifies on which passes of a multi-pass motion to create an overtravelmotion:
NO—No overtravel motion is created (the default).
ALL_PASSES—On all passes.
LAST_PASS—On the last pass only.
To Use Previous Parameters
The Use Prev option in the MFG PARAMS menu allows you to create initialparameter value settings for the current sequence by making a one-time copyof those parameter values from a previous NC sequence. This is especiallyconvenient when you perform several NC sequences in a row withparameters just slightly varying. After retrieving the parameters, use Set tomake any variations, if necessary.
When you choose Use Prev, a run-time menu of all previous NC sequenceswhose parameters are compatible with the current one will appear (if none ofthe previous NC sequences’ parameters are applicable, the system will issuea message). Select the NC sequence to use. It does not have to be of exactlythe same type as the current one. The system will read in the applicableparameters and ignore those that are not valid for the current NC sequencetype. However, the system will not check for the appropriate parametervalues. For example, TYPE_3 is a valid SCAN_TYPE for Milling, but isinvalid for Holemaking. If the value retrieved is not applicable for this NCsequence type, the system will issue a warning and automatically reset theparameter to its default value.
To Use a Non-Active Site
If there is a site associated with the workcell or an activated site of theappropriate type, its parameters will be automatically retrieved. You can alsoinitialize the NC sequence parameters by explicitly selecting a pre-definedsite.
1. Choose Site from the MFG PARAMS menu. You will have the following options:
151
� Cur Workcell—Use the site(s) associated with the current workcel. Use this optionto use the default sites for the workcell after activating some other site.
� Current Dir—Retrieve site files from the current directory. Select a site type. Onlythe site types that are appropriate for the current workcell type will be listed.
� In Session—Use site files that have been created or retrieved in the current session.
2. Appropriate sites will be listed in a namelist menu. Select a name of the site to use.
3. The “.sit file will be read in, its default values initializing the NC sequence parameters. Ifsome of the default values are missing, supply them using the Set option.
To Include a Parameter in a Relation
1. Choose Relations from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose Assem Rel.
Note: You can use Part Rel for the workpiece in Part manufacturing if the relationcontains only the NC sequence (not tool) parameters and workpiece dimensions.
3. Choose Tool Info or NC Seq Info if necessary to check on the parameter exact namesand current values. NC Seq Info gives you the feature internal ID for the NC sequence.
4. Select the reference part and/or the workpiece to display dimensions in symbolic form.
5. Choose Add and enter the relation. Enter parameters using the syntax above.
Using Parameters in Relations
You can drive NC sequence and tool parameters by other parameters or partdimensions using relations. Both the parameters with numeric and stringvalues can be included in relations.
The NC sequence parameter syntax is:
PARAM_NAME:FID_ #
where:
PARAM_NAME—the parameter name,
#—the internal feature ID of the NC sequence.
Example:
STEP_OVER:FID_22 = d6:1 * 0.1
152
The tool parameter syntax is:
PARAM_NAME:TID_ ID
where:
PARAM_NAME—the parameter name,
ID —the TOOL_ID.
Example:
STEP_OVER:FID_22 = CUTTER_DIAM:TID_RMIL1 * 0.4
If a parameter is driven by relation, the system puts a note next to it in theparameters file. If you modify a relation-driven parameter, its value will bereset upon regeneration.
Options Tool Info and NC Seq Info in the RELATIONS menu, accessible inManufacture mode only, facilitate using tool and NC sequence parameters inrelations. They display parameters (including ID) for a selected tool or NCsequence, respectively.
Sites
About Sites
The Site option in the PARAM SETUP menu allows you to set up NC sequencespecific or generic sites that can be later used to specify parameters for NCsequences.
Warning: When you start using a new release of Pro/NC, make sure toupdate your existing site files whenever there is a change in the way thesystem interprets a parameter value. Parameter values in site files are notupdated automatically.
To Create a New Site File
1. From the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, choose Mfg Setup > Param Setup >Site > Create.
2. Enter the name for the site. The system will automatically add a suffix corresponding tothe site type and extension “.sit (for example, “mach1_mil.sit).
3. Select a site type.
153
4. A Pro/TABLE window comes up with all the manufacturing parameters required for thistype of NC sequence (for a generic site, all the parameters will be present). Supply valuesfor the parameters. Each parameter must have either a default value, or low and highrange, or both, specified. If omitting the default value, enter a dash (-). If both arespecified, the default value must be within the range boundaries. You can also specifyvisibility and add optional comments for any parameters.
When specifying a parameter value, you can enter relations, similar to modifying theparameters of an NC sequence. However, when an NC sequence inherits the siteparameters, it will inherit the evaluated value of this relation, not the relation itself.
Parameter Visibility
Some of the manufacturing parameters need not be changed at the NCsequence level. You can set them up in a site file, and then remove them fromdisplay when you are modifying the NC sequence parameters. Similarly, youcan specify which parameters are to be listed when you output theManufacturing Info.
Parameter visibility can be specified using the following means:
• When you set up site parameters, two columns are available for each parameter:
� NC SEQ VISIBLE—Specifies if the parameter should appear in the NC sequenceparameter list when creating or redefining NC sequences.
� MFG INFO VISIBLE—Specifies if the parameter should be listed when you displayManufacturing Info.
The default values for all parameters are YES for both columns. If you set a value to NO,this parameter will not be visible.
If you specify that a parameter is invisible in NC sequences, it must have a set defaultvalue before the site may be accepted by Pro/NC. If you set a parameter with a “-1 valueto be invisible, the system will issue an error message and allow you to re-edit the sitetable.
• The Visibility option in the MFG PARAMS menu allows you to modify parametervisibility:
� When setting parameters at the operation level.
� At the time of creating or redefining an NC sequence.
When you select this option, a Pro/TABLE window appears with the list of all parametersand the two visibility columns, as described above.
154
Manipulating Sites
The following options are available for site setup:
• Create—Create a new site file.
• Modify—Modify parameters of a site. Select a site name from the menu. The editorwindow comes up with the current site parameters.
• Retrieve—Retrieve an existing site file from disk. Select a site name from the menu, orchoose Names and enter the path and name of the site file.
• Save—Save a site file to disk. Select a site name from the menu. You have to save a sitein order to use it in other manufacturing models.
• Delete—Delete a site. Select a site name from the menu, then confirm that you reallywant to delete the site. If the site has been used by an NC sequence, the system will issuea warning. If you delete such a site, all NC sequence parameters inherited from this sitewill be treated as customized (non-inherited).
• Where Used—Provide information about the NC sequences that inherit parametersfrom the specified site.
• Activate—Activate a site file. Parameters of an activated site will automatically besubstituted as the system defaults for new NC sequences of the appropriate type.Another way of activating sites is associating them with the workcell.
• Show—Display information about an existing site. Select a site name from the menu.
To Activate a Site
The Activate option in the SITE SETUP menu allows you to make a siteactive. Before being activated, the site must be added to the manufacturingmodel using the Create or Retrieve option. Only one site of a particulartype can be active at a time.
1. Choose Activate.
2. Choose one of:
� Cur Workcell—Activate the site(s) associated with the current workcell. Use thisoption to quickly revert to the default sites for the workcell after activating someother site.
� In Session—Select a site other than the default site(s). Only the sites that havebeen created or retrieved in the current session will be available. Select a site name
155
(or several names) from the namelist menu. Sites of the same type are mutuallyexclusive.
Activating a Site
When you create an NC sequence, the parameters of the active site will bethe default parameters. The system will look for an NC sequence specificactive site first (for example, Milling), then for a generic active site. If neitheris found, the system default parameters will be used.
Note: When you activate an operation, the site(s) associated with theoperation’s workcell are activated automatically.
To Associate a Site with a Workcell
1. When creating a workcell, choose Site from the CELL SETUP menu. To associate a sitewith an existing workcell, choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHININGmenu, Workcell, Modify, and select the workcell name. Then choose Site from theCELL SETUP menu.
2. Choose one of:
� Current Dir—Retrieve site files from the current directory.
� In Session—Use site files that have been created or retrieved in the current session.
3. Select a site type. Only the site types that are appropriate for the current workcell typewill be listed.
4. The list of sites of the selected type appears in the menu. Select a site name.
5. Repeat the steps above to select more than one site, if needed, then select Done.
Associating a Site with a Workcell
If you associate a site with a workcell, all NC sequences created in thisworkcell will inherit the parameters of this site. You can then modifyindividual NC sequence parameters on a case-by-case basis. If you modify asite associated with a workcell, or replace it with another site, all the NCsequence parameters inherited from this site (that is, those that have notbeen modified) will update automatically.
You can associate more than one site with a workcell, because different typesof NC sequences created on a workcell may require different parametersettings. However, only one site of a particular type can be associated with
156
the workcell. The table below lists the site types that may be associated withthe each workcell type.
Workcell Type Site TypesLathe Generic
Turning
Holemaking
Mill Generic
Milling
HolemakingMill/Turn Generic
Milling
Turning
HolemakingWEDM Generic
WEDM
If both a sequence-specific and a generic site are associated with a workcell,the system will use the sequence-specific site for parameter inheritance.
Machinability Database
About Machinability Database
Feed rate and spindle speed parameters for milling, turning, and holemakingcan be initialized using the Machinability Database (MDB) files.
MDB files can be created through the Mach DB option in the PARAMSETUP menu, or as ASCII files outside of Pro/ENGINEER. The expectedformat of these files is dependent on the NC sequence type.
You can set up a machinability database directory using the configurationoption:
pro_mdb_dir pathname
Always enter in the configuration file the complete pathname to avoidproblems when working in different directories with Pro/ENGINEER.Example:
157
pro_mdb_dir /usr/users/mach_db
The MDB files for milling, turning, and holemaking must be placed under themachinability database directory (or under the working directory if themachinability database directory is not set up) in subdirectories named“mill_db, “turn_db, and “drill_db, respectively. You will not be able to createan MDB file using the Mach DB option if the default subdirectory for it doesnot exist.
To Set Up MDB Files
1. Choose Mach DB from the PARAM SETUP menu.
2. The MDB SETUP menu appears with the following options:
� Create—Create a new MDB file.
� Modify—Modify an existing MDB file.
� Show—Display the selected MDB file in the Information Window.
3. After selecting an option from the MDB SETUP menu, specify an NC sequence type:Milling, Turning, or Drilling.
4. The UNITS INFO menu then appears with the options:
� Units—Set, modify, or show units for the MDB values.
� File—Create, modify, or show an MDB file. If you are creating a new file, thePro/TABLE window will appear. For Modify and Show, the menu-driven searchwill be initiated in the appropriate directory (“mill_db, “turn_db, or “drill_db).
When you create a new file, the Pro/TABLE window appears with the defaultfile headers. Fill in the appropriate values. If you want to specify the samevalue as in the previous entry, leave the cell blank or put in a dash (-). If thisparameter is to be ignored for a particular entry, type n/a .
When you modify an existing file, it is also retrieved in a Pro/TABLE window.All the cells that were left empty will contain a dash (-). Modify the values asdesired and exit Pro/TABLE. The new version of the MDB file will be saved.
Although MDB files are created through model setup, they can eventually beused in any manufacturing model. When you create an NC sequence, you willhave an option to look up an MDB file. This will initialize the feed and speedparameters based on the tool size, tool and workpiece material, cut depth.
158
Machinability Database Units
If you check off Units when creating or modifying MDB files, the MDB UNITSmenu will appear with the following options:
• Feed—Specify the feed units. The options are:
� For Milling—Inch/tooth, Foot/tooth, Millimeter/tooth, Centimeter/tooth,Meter/tooth. The system default is Inch/tooth.
� For Turning and Drilling—Inch/rev, Foot/rev, Millimeter/rev, Centimeter/rev,Meter/rev. The system default is Inch/rev.
• Speed—Specify the speed units. The options are: Inch/min, Foot/min,Millimeter/min, Centimeter/min, Meter/min. The system default is Foot/min.
• Cut Depth—Specify the cut depth units (applicable for Milling and Turning). Theoptions are: Inch, Foot, Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
• TL Width—Specify the tool width units (applicable for Turning only). The options are:Inch, Foot, Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
• TL Diam—Specify the tool diameter units (applicable for Drilling only). The options are:Inch, Foot, Millimeter, Centimeter, Meter. The system default is Inch.
Note: Conversion of existing MDB files is not provided. that is, if you modify unitsof an existing MDB file, the values will stay the same.
Default Units for the MDB files
UNITS FEED SPEED CUT DEPTH TOOL WIDTH TOOL DIAM HARDNESS
Milling inch/tooth
foot/min inch n/a n/a Bhn
Turning inch/rev inch n/a
Drilling n/a n/a inch
At the beginning of a Pro/ENGINEER session, the MDB units are set tosystem defaults (listed above). Once you change the units, this value willbecome the current default, that is, all the new MDB files will use this value.
If you modify an MDB file whose units differ from the current MDB units, thesystem will issue a warning and prompt you to reset the current units tothose of the file. If you confirm, the current defaults for MDB units will bereset. If you cancel, the units in the current MDB file will be changed tomatch the default units. The values will stay the same!
159
If you select Show from the MDB SETUP menu and then check off Units, theInformation Window will appear with the current default units for theappropriate MDB type (Milling, Turning, or Drilling).
During an MDB file lookup, the proper conversion will be provided, ifnecessary, depending on the parameter units specified for the NC sequence(for example, MMPM), length units of the tool and workpiece (for example,mm), number of teeth, and so on.
Example: A Drilling MDB File
To Use MDB Files
You can use an MDB library file (“*.mdb) to set CUT_FEED andSPINDLE_SPEED for a milling, turning, or holemaking NC sequence. Thefile must already exist in the corresponding subdirectory (“mill_db, “turn_db,or “drill_db) of the machinability database directory, or of your workingdirectory if the machinability database directory has not been set up.
1. Choose Retrieve from the MFG PARAMS menu.
2. Choose MDB Library.
You will be prompted to supply necessary data about the cut and tool, using aPro/TABLE window. Supply the values for all listed parameters.
3. Select an MDB file from a namelist menu.
160
4. If the table lookup is successful, the CUT_FEED and SPINDLE_SPEED parameters willbe set to values derived from the table, either directly or by linear (one- or two-dimensional) interpolation. At the same time:
� For Milling, STEP_DEPTH will be set to AXIAL_CUT_DEPTH, STEP_OVER—toRADIAL_CUT_DEPTH
� For Turning, STEP_DEPTH will be set to CUT_DEPTH
Notes:
� You have to set up the tool before using the MDB Library.
� If you change any of the values on which the parameter selection depends, theparameters will not be updated automatically. You will have to go through theparameter retrieval process again to reflect the changes.
MDB Lookup Failure
If an MDB table lookup fails during NC sequence parameters retrieval, theMACH DB FAIL menu will appear with the following options:
• Modify Input—Edit the input parameters.
• Show Input—Examine the current input parameters.
• Show Error—Display the most recent error message produced by MDB lookup.
• Show Mach DB—Examine the MDB table currently in use.
Good Practice
To minimize the number of parameters to initialize during an MDB filelookup, you can:
• Assign workpiece material in Part mode using Set Up, Material. Workpiece hardnessand condition will be automatically looked up in the material file.
• Provide values for the tool parameters Num_Of_Teeth (for milling) and Tool_Material. Ifusing a tool model, set up tool material and number of teeth.
• Specify parameters STEP_DEPTH and STEP_OVER before using MDB library.
161
Milling
General Information
About Milling NC Sequences
To access Mill type NC sequences, you must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell (if the latter, choose MILL when starting to create an NC sequence).The following NC sequence types are available:
• Volume—2.5-Axis slice-by-slice milling used to remove material from a specified volume.
• Local Mill—Used to remove material left after a Volume, Profile, Conventional orContour Surface, or another Local milling NC sequence (usually with a smaller tool). Canalso be used to clean up material in specified corners.
• Surface Mill—3- to 5-Axis milling of horizontal or slanted surfaces. You are given achoice of several methods for defining the cut.
• Swarf Mill—5-Axis milling of a series horizontal or slanted surfaces by cutting with theside of the tool.
• Face—Facing down the workpiece.
• Profile—3- to 5-Axis milling of vertical or slanted surfaces.
• Pocketing—2.5-Axis milling of horizontal, vertical, or slanted surfaces. The walls of thepocket will be milled as with Profiling, the bottom—as the bottom surfaces in Volumemilling.
• Trajectory—3- to 5-Axis milling, with the tool moving along a specified trajectory.
• Holemaking—Drilling, boring, tapping.
• Thread—3-Axis helical milling.
• Engraving—3- to 5-Axis milling, with the tool moving along a Groove cosmetic feature.
• Plunge—2.5-Axis rough milling of deep cavities by a series of overlapping plunges intothe material, using a flat-bottom tool.
To Select Surfaces
There are several NC sequence types that require selecting surfaces to bemilled in order to define cut geometry: Conventional and Contour Surface,Facing, Profiling, and Pocketing. These types will be jointly referred to asSurface Milling NC sequences.
162
Surfaces to be milled are selected using the Surfaces option in the SEQSETUP menu. They can be selected from:
• Model—Select continuous surfaces from the reference part.
• Workpiece—Select continuous surfaces from the workpiece.
• Mill Volume—Create or select a Mill Volume, then select all or some surfaces from thisvolume.
• Mill Surface—Create or select a Mill Surface. Specify which side of the surface to millusing Flip and Okay options (arrow shows the side). Select all or some patches from themilling surface.
Note: In Assembly machining, the Workpiece option does not appear. The Modeloption enables you to select surfaces from any part in the manufacturing assembly.
After you have specified from where the surfaces are to be selected, theSELECT SRFS menu appears:
• Add—Select surfaces to mill. If selecting from a Mill Volume or Mill Surface, you have achoice of:
� Select—Select surfaces to be milled. You can either select individual surfaces, or usethe Pick Many option in the GET SELECT menu and draw a rectangular box on thescreen by selecting its two diagonal points; all surfaces completely covered by thisbox will be selected.
� Select All—All surfaces included in the Mill Volume/Mill Surface definition will bemilled.
• Remove—Unselect previously added surfaces. You have a choice of:
� Remove Single—Unselect individual surfaces.
� Remove All—Unselect all previously added surfaces.
• Show—When you choose this option, all currently selected surfaces are highlighted incyan.
• Change—Appears only when selecting from a Mill Volume or Mill Surface. Allows you toselect or create another Mill Volume/Mill Surface, or modify the current one. You canthen proceed adding and removing surfaces using the options above.
Selecting a Loop of SurfacesWhen selecting surfaces for a Profile NC sequence, the following additionaloptions are available:
• Surface—Select surfaces by choosing each one individually.
163
• Loop—Select a closed loop of surfaces by choosing a face they surround. If there is morethan one loop of edges (for example, there is a hole in the selected surface), you will beprompted to select an edge to use. This option is especially helpful for Profiling.
These options will also be available when you use Remove Single forProfiling.
The following illustration shows selecting a loop of surfaces.
All side surfacesare selected.
Select this surface. Select this edge.
Note: Selecting by Loop does not parametrically gather surfaces. For example, if youwant to be able to replace the reference part with another family instance that has more,or fewer, surfaces than the original one, and have the tool path automatically update, usea Mill Surface created by Gather, Surf & Bnd.
Selecting Surfaces from a QuiltWhen you select surfaces from a quilt, whether to machine or to use as checksurfaces, you will have the means to specify which side of the quilt you wishto reference:
• When selecting surfaces to be milled using Model or Workpiece, you can only selectsurfaces from one quilt. You will then be prompted to specify which side to use byflipping an arrow.
• When selecting check surfaces, you can select as many entire quilts and individual quiltsurfaces as needed. Upon selecting Done Sel, these selections are highlighted one-by-oneand you are prompted to specify the side by flipping an arrow. When an entire quilt isselected, it is considered to be a single selection, and you will only have to specify the sidejust once.
To Perform Gouge Checking
Pro/NC provides automatic gouge avoidance for all NC sequence typesagainst the geometric references selected for cut geometry. For Volumemilling using Mill Window, automatic gouge checking is performed againstall the surfaces of the reference part.
164
Notes:
� If the HOLDER_DIAMETER and HOLDER_LENGTH parameter values have beensupplied, holder dimensions will be used for gouge avoidance.
� Automatic gouge avoidance is not implemented for Mill type tools with Side_Angle >0. Use Taper Mill tools for automatic degouging.
The Check Surfs option in the SEQ SETUP menu, available forConventional, Contour Surface, Trajectory, and Profile milling (and for LocalMilling referencing a Conventional or Contour milling NC sequence), allowsyou to select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed, or unselect some of the surfaces selected automatically. Selectingthis option brings up the SRF PRT SEL menu with the following options:
• Add Ref Prts—A checkmark next to this option means that all surfaces of the referencepart (or, in case of Assembly machining, of all reference parts) will be included as CheckSurfaces.
• Sel Surf—Select or unselect individual surfaces using the SELECT SRFS menu, whichallows you to add, remove, and show surfaces that will be used for gouge checking.Additional options will be available when adding surfaces or removing them using theRemove Single option:
� Surface—Select individual surfaces to add or remove. If you choose a surface thatbelongs to a quilt, the entire quilt will be selected. Use Query Sel to select just onepatch of a quilt.
� Part—Add or remove all surfaces of a selected part.
Note: If you use a Mill Window, the system automatically performs gouge checkingagainst all the surfaces of the reference part(s); therefore, the Add Ref Prts option is notavailable, and when you add surfaces using the Sel Surf option, reference parts are notselectable.
Gouge Checking Defaults
The system automatically includes all surfaces of the reference part (or, incase of Assembly machining, of all reference parts) as Check Surfaces for thefollowing types of NC sequences:
• 3- to 5-Axis Conventional Surface milling
• 3- to 5-Axis Contouring Surface-by-Surface
• 3- to 5-Axis Cutline machining
• 3- to 5-Axis Surface milling by Projecting Tool Path
• 5-Axis Trajectory milling
165
• Local Milling By Previous Tool
You can override this default by unselecting Add Ref Prts in the SRF PRTSEL menu.
You can also use the following configuration options:
• mfg_auto_ref_prt_as_chk_srf no—To disable automatically including all reference partsurfaces as Check Surfaces for the NC sequence types listed above (the default is “yes).
• chk_part_surfs_profpock yes—To automatically include all reference part surfaces asCheck Surfaces for Profiling and Pocketing NC sequences (the default is “no).
To Perform 4-Axis Milling
When you create a 4-Axis milling NC sequence, the 4 Axis Plane option willappear in the SEQ SETUP menu in addition to all the other optionsappropriate for this particular NC sequence type. This is a plane to which thetool axis will be parallel. You can select a planar surface or select or create adatum plane. You can also specify values for lead angle and tilt angle of thetool axis with respect to the 4 Axis Plane, as well as enable variable leadangle control using the 4X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT parameter.
The system will generate CL data as if for 5-Axis milling and thenautomatically recompute it so that the tool axis is always parallel to thespecified plane. The following shows the difference in CL output between a 5-Axis and a 4-Axis Conventional Surface milling NC sequence.
4- AxisPlane
4-Axis5-Axis
!AL("About_Milling_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
166
To Specify Negative Stock Allowance
Specifying negative stock allowance may be required in special cases, such asmilling of electrodes. Negative stock allowance can be specified for thefollowing NC sequence types:
• For Volume, Local, Conventional, Contour, and Pocket milling, negative stock allowancevalue must be less than Corner_Radius of the tool.
• For Profile and Trajectory milling, any negative value may be specified.
!AL("About_Milling_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
To Customize the Tool Path in Milling
Generally, the system automatically generates a default tool path based onthe cut geometry and manufacturing parameters. For more low-level controlover the tool path, you can use the Customize option in the NC SEQUENCEmenu.
For all Milling NC sequence types, except Trajectory Milling, the systemautomatically generates an Auto Plunge and the default Automatuc Cutmotion. You can either accept the motions automatically generated by thesystem (and supplement them with the Approach and Exit Tool Motions, ifneeded), or delete them and generate your own Automatic Cut motions, aswell as Approach and Exit Tool Motions. For Trajectory Milling, cut geometryis not specified at the time of NC sequence setup; you have to use theCustomize functionality to generate the Automatic Cut, Approach, and ExitTool Motions.
Build Cut at the NC Sequence LevelWhen you create Automatic Cut motions, the Build Cut functionality lets youadd or remove slices or cutting passes, specify approach and exit path, and soon. However, if you are satisfied with the default tool path generated by thesystem (which is based on the sequence parameters and geometricreferences), you can use the Build Cut option in the SEQ SETUP menu toaccess the Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level, without havingto go through the Customize user interface.
This option is available only if the NC sequence’s tool path has not beencustomized. If you define Build Cut items at the NC sequence level, and thenattempt to customize the tool path, the system prompts you first to delete theitems defined at the NC sequence level. An Info Window opens with a list ofitems you must delete. The Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence levelis available for Volume, Local, Profile milling, Conventional Surface milling,Contour Surface milling (including Surf/Surf, Cutline, and ProjToolPath),Face milling, and Pocketing.
167
The Build Cut functionality at the NC sequence level is identical to that atthe Automatic Cut motion level.
!AL("About_Milling_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
Tool Axis Control in Milling
About Variable Axis Control
The Axis Def option in the SEQ SETUP menu enables you to control theorientation of the tool axis for 5-axis Contouring and Conventional surfacemilling NC sequences, including Cut Line machining.
There are three ways to control axis orientation:
• Points on Surface—Select points at which to define the orientation of the tool axis; in theregions between selected points, Pro/NC will gradually interpolate the correct axisorientation for the tool. Axis orientation is interpolated using a weighted average of thetool axis orientations specified at the nearest selected points. If values have beenspecified for the parameters LEAD_ANGLE and TILT_ANGLE, these values will not betaken into consideration when interpolating the default axis orientation, but will beadded/subtracted to/from that value after it has been calculated. For Cutline machining,you can also define tool axis orientation along the cutlines.
• Pivot Point—Select or create a datum point to be used as pivot point for the tool. The toolaxis will always pass through this point while machining the surface(s).
• Pivot Curve—Select an open or closed loop of edges or curves that will be used to guidethe tool axis. The tool axis will always pass through some point of the pivot curve whilemachining the surface(s). All entities that form the pivot curve must be tangent to eachother. You can have the system automatically synchronize tool path with pivot curve ordefine your own synchronization.
Point on Surface and Pivot Curve axis definitions can be used in 4-AxisMilling. For Points on Surface, specified tool axes will be projected onto the 4-Axis Plane and then interpolated.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Points on Surface
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose AxisDef from the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pnts on Srf from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu. The AXIS DEF OPT menu appears with thefollowing options:
168
� Along Cutline—(Available for Cutline Machining only) Specify the tool axisorientation along the cutlines.
� Edge—Specify the tool axis orientation along an edge or chain of edges.
� Location—Specify the tool axis orientation at a datum point. The datum point maybe located anywhere on the surface being machined. Select or create a datum pointat which to define the tool axis orientation.
� Drive Surf—Select a surface (or multiple surfaces) to adjust the tool axisorientation for the selected edges (optional).
4. Choose Edge and select edges for axis control. The edges must form a continuous chain.
You will then be prompted to specify the tool axis orientation at the start and end of eachedge using the AXIS DEF TYPE menu described following. If you selected a drive surface,the tool orientation along the edge will be the average of the two endpoint orientationsadjusted by the shape of the drive surface. If you did not specify a drive surface, you willhave to create additional control points along the edge using the Location option.
5. Choose a command from the AXIS DEF TYPE menu to indicate the tool’s orientation at thespecified point:
� Along Z Dir—Specify the tool axis along the Z direction of the NC sequencecoordinate system.
� Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis to specify the orientation of the toolaxis.
6. If you chose Datum Axis, select or create a datum axis to indicate the tool’s orientationat that location.
7. The DIRECTION menu appears. Choose Flip or Okay to indicate the direction of the toolaxis. The axis orientation definition will be displayed as a magenta arrow originating atthe specified location.
8. Repeat Steps 3 through 7 for every point at which you want to define the tool axisorientation.
Example: Axis Orientation Using Points on Surface
Refer to the following graphic for an illustration of axis orientationdefinitions.
169
Axis definit ion created usingEdge and Along Z Dir.
Axis definition createdusing Location andDatum Axis.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Points Along Cutlines
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in the previous procedure.
2. Choose Along Cutline and Done/Return from the AXIS DEF OPT menu.
3. The system highlights all the existing cutlines. Select a point along a cutline.
4. The ENTER VAL menu appears to let you specify this position as a parameter along theentire length of the cutline (that is, 0.00 is the start point of the cutline and 1.00 is theend of the entire cutline). The system also presents the parameter value corresponding tothe selected point and displays it as an option in the ENTER VAL menu. You can eitherselect this option, or choose Enter and type in another parameter value along thecutline.
5. After you specify the location along the cutline, choose a command from the AXIS DEFTYPE menu to indicate the tool’s orientation at the specified point.
6. Choose Add from the AXIS DEF menu and repeat Steps 2 through 5 for every point atwhich you want to define the tool axis orientation, then choose Done Sel.
You can specify Drive Surfaces and apply them to axis definitions alongcutlines, as you do for axis definitions along edges.
Note: Because two different algorithms exist for interpolating axisdefinitions using Points on Surface, you must choose either Along Cutline ora combination of Edge and Location. If you want to change from onealgorithm to the other, you must first remove all axis definitions of thecurrent type.
To Change Axis Definitions
170
The following options in the AXIS DEF menu allow you to manipulate existingPoints on Surface axis definitions:
• Remove—Delete an existing axis definition.
• Redefine—Redefine an existing axis definition.
• Show—Display all previously defined axis definitions.
If you choose Remove, Redefine, or Show from the AXIS DEF menu, youwill get a namelist menu of all the existing axis definitions (for example,AXIS DEF BY EDGE #1, DRIVE SURFACES #1, and so on). As you placethe cursor over a name in the menu, the complete name appears at thebottom of the message window (this is useful if the name is too long to fitinside the menu), and the system highlights the corresponding geometry onthe screen. Axis definitions appear as magenta arrows. Cutlines and chains ofedges appear in magenta. Drive surfaces appear in cyan, with thecorresponding edges or cutlines that reference them highlighted in magenta.
If you choose Redefine and select an axis definition along the cutline, theAXIS DEF REFS menu appears with the following options:
• Location—Select another point along the cutline and enter the new parameter value.
• Orientation—Change the tool axis orientation by using the AXIS DEF TYPE menuoptions.
If you choose Redefine and select a Drive Surface definition, the DRV SRFREFS menu appears with the following options:
• Surfaces—Reselect the drive surfaces.
• Axis Def Set—Modify the list of axis definitions that reference these drive surfaces. Acheckmark menu appears with all the applicable axis definitions; select additionaldefinitions by checking them off, or unselect some of the ones currently selected. ChooseDone Sel when you are finished.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Pivot Point
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose AxisDef from the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pivot Pnt from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. The PIVOT PNT menu appears with the following options:
� Define—Brings up the CR/SEL PVT menu to allow you to select or create a datumpoint to serve as a pivot point.
171
� Remove—Delete the existing pivot point.
� Show—Display the existing pivot point.
To Define the Axis Orientation Using Pivot Curve
1. When choosing the references that you need to define for the NC sequence, choose AxisDef from the SEQ SETUP menu.
2. Choose Pivot Curve from the AXIS OPT menu.
3. The PIVOT CRV menu appears with the options:
� Define—Brings up the CHAIN menu to let you select entities to define the pivotcurve. All entities of the pivot curve must be tangent to each other.
� Remove—Delete the existing pivot curve.
� Show—Display the existing pivot curve.
� Adjust Tool—(Appears for Cut Line machining only.) Adjust the tool axis positionsalong the pivot curve by specifying synchronization points (synch points). Click fordetails.
To Specify Synch Points Along Pivot Curve
1. Define the pivot curve.
2. Choose Adjust Tool.
3. Check off the Preview option, if desired. If this option is checked off, the system willdisplay the tool axis positions as you add synch points.
4. Choose Set Axis. The SYNCH menu appears with the following options:
� Add—Select pairs of synch points along the pivot curve and the cutlines.
� Remove—Remove a pair of synch points.
� Show—Show the pairs of synch points currently defined and the corresponding toolaxis positions in cyan. You can either display them in turn by using the Next andPrevious options, or use Show All.
172
� Redefine—Modify a pair of synch points. Select a synch line (that is, tool axisposition) to change, by selecting anywhere on the line. Then specify new locations forthe synch points, similar to when adding a new pair.
5. Choose Add. The system highlights the pivot curve.
6. Select a point on the pivot curve.
7. The system highlights a cutline and prompts you to select a point on that cutline. If thePreview option is on, the tool axis position appears as a red line after you select a pointon the cutline.
8. Specify other pairs of synch points by repeating the two steps above. Choose Done Selwhen finished.
Volume Milling
About Volume Milling
A Volume milling NC sequence removes the material inside a Milling Volumeslice-by-slice. All slices are parallel to the retract plane; the axial depth of cut(slice depth) is defined by the combination of STEP_DEPTH andWALL_SCALLOP_HGT parameters. The first slice is generated at slice depthbelow the top of the mill volume. In case the mill volume extends above thetop of the workpiece, the first slice is generated at slice depth below the top ofthe workpiece, to avoid air machining. All planar surfaces inside the volumethat are normal to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinate system produceadditional slices across the whole volume; use the MIN_STEP_DEPTHparameter to control the minimum acceptable distance between slices. Thestep-over distance inside a slice can be controlled by the followingparameters: STEP_OVER, NUMBER_PASSES, BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT,and STEPOVER_ADJUST.
Note: If a nonzero PROF_STOCK_ALLOW is specified (or a BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOWvalue is supplied), it will affect the depth of the last slice and of all the slices overhorizontal surfaces.
The following graphic illustrates the depth of the first slice for Volumemilling.
173
First slice is at slice depth belowthe top of mill volume. First slice is at slice depth
below the top of the workpiece.
Mill volume
Workpiece
No workpiece geometry
Mill volume
Some typical applications for Volume milling are:
• Facing down the workpiece
• General material removal on the outside of the workpiece
• Rough milling of a vertical slot or cut, or a blind slot with islands
• Pocket finishing by using the ROUGH_OPTION parameter value PROF_ONLY
To Create a Volume Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Volume and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Volume—Create or select the milling volume.
� Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Volume are mutuallyexclusive. If you check off the Window option, then the checkmark next to theVolume option is automatically turned off, and the DEFINE WIND menu appearswith the following options:
Select Wind—Select a predefined Mill Window from a namelist menu.
Redef Wind—Redefine the Mill Window used by the NC sequence. This option isonly available if the window is created or selected.
174
Create Wind—Create a new Mill Window.
� ScallopSrf—Select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation ifWALL_SCALLOP_HGT or BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT is specified.
� Excld Surfs—Specify volume surfaces to exclude from profiling. If Mill Window isused, select surfaces from the reference part.
� Top Surfaces—Explicitly define the “top surfaces, that is, surfaces of a mill volumethat can be penetrated by the tool when creating the tool path. This option has to beused only if some of the top surfaces of the volume are not parallel to the retractplane. If Mill Window is used, this option is not available. The window start planewill be used as the top surface.
� Appr Walls—Select side surfaces of a mill volume, or sides of the Mill Window, thatcan be violated during tool approach and exit.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Example: Volume Milling
The following illustration shows a Mill Volume and corresponding tool pathfor a Volume NC sequence.
Specifying Approach Walls
For Volume milling, the tool is supposed to always be inside the millingvolume. In some cases, however, you may want to perform cutting by the side
175
of the tool only, that is, to make tool plunge outside the material. The ApprWalls option in the SEQ SETUP menu allows you to select side surfaces of amill volume that can be violated during tool approach and exit. The userinterface for selecting these surfaces is the same as for other types of surfaceselection in Milling.
If a Mill Window is used, then you will be prompted to select entities from thewindow curve (that is, the window outline in the start plane) rather thansurfaces from the Mill Volume. Selected entities will be used as sides of thetool approach.
If Approach Walls have been defined, the system will attempt to make anapproach and exit for every slice through these walls and plunge outsidematerial, as shown in the following illustration. The length of approach/exitextension is defined by the APPR_EXIT_EXT parameter plus tool radius.
If the Approach Walls have been specified, the datum point, axis, or sketchused for approach or exit in Build Cut can be outside the milling volume.
Profiling passes will not be created along the surfaces selected as ApproachWalls.
The following illustration shows specifying Approach Walls for Volumemilling.
Select this wall of the volumeusing the Appr Walls option.
APPR_EXIT_EXT + CUTTER/DIAM / 2
High Speed Machining
High speed machining (both roughing and profiling) is available for 2.5-axisVolume sequences.
To perform high speed roughing in Volume milling, set the ROUGH_OPTIONparameter to ROUGH_ONLY and SCAN_TYPE to CONSTANT_LOAD. Highspeed roughing is based on the following principles:
176
• Constant cutting condition
• Constant chip load
• Approach from outside material
• Continuous tool engagement
• Minimization of sudden tool direction changes
• Reduction of repositioning moves
To perform high speed profiling in Volume milling, set the ROUGH_OPTIONparameter to PROF_ONLY and SCAN_TYPE to CONSTANT_LOAD. Highspeed profiling is based on the following principles:
• Continuous tool engagement
• Minimization of sudden tool direction changes
• Reduction of repositioning moves
• User-specified minimum radius parameter for concave corners (theCORNER_ROUND_RADIUS parameter)
• Entry and exit moves using an arc or helical move
Automatic Cut Motions for Volume, Local, and Profile Milling
About Automatic Cut Motions
The following Automatic Cut motion types are available for Volume, Local,and Profile milling:
• Automatic (Default)—Use all the slices generated by the system.
• Upto Depth—Use slices up to a certain depth only.
• From-To Depth—Use slices in a certain range of depths.
• Slice/Slice—Generate Automatic Cut motions by specifying depth of each slice.
The first three options produce a single Automatic Cut motion each, nomatter how many slices are generated. In Slice/Slice, each slice represents aseparate Automatic Cut motion. You can use more than one option per an NCsequence; every time a new Automatic Cut motion will be added.
177
Example: Automatic Cut Motion Types
The following illustration shows Automatic Cut motion types for Volume,Local, and Profile milling.
Depth
From depth
To Depth
First depth
Second depth
Third depth (select bottom plane)
Upto depth
From-To depth
Automatic (default)
Slice/Slice
First sliceSecond slice
Third slice
To Create an Automatic (Default) Cut Motion
This is a default Automatic Cut motion: it includes all the slicesautomatically generated by the system. The number and depths of the slicesare defined by the manufacturing parameters. When you choose Automatic,the following options are available:
• Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
• Build Cut—Add or remove slices and specify approach and exit motions for each slice inthe cut motion. Also allows you to perform region-by-region milling.
• Play Cut—Show the cut motion as it is currently defined.
178
• Info—Brings up the INFO ITEMS menu which provides the following information:
� Cut Motion—Displays the feature ID of the current cut motion and the cut motionparameters in the INFO window.
� NC Sequence—Displays feature info for the current NC sequence (feature ID, NCsequence type, reference coordinate systems, parameters) in the INFO window.
� Tool—Displays the tool ID, type, and parameters in the Information Window; asubwindow also appears, displaying the tool.
When satisfied with the cut motion, choose Done.
To Create an Upto Depth Cut Motion
This Automatic Cut motion will include slices from the system start and up toa specified depth. The same options will be available as for the defaultAutomatic Cut motion, but you also have to specify the final depth.
To Create a From-To Depth Cut Motion
This Automatic Cut motion will include slices in a specified range of depths.The same options will be available as for the default Automatic Cut motion,but you also have to specify the “From and “To depths.
To Create a Slice-By-Slice Cut Motion
This option allows you to explicitly specify the depth of each slice. Note thateach slice will represent a separate Automatic Cut motion.
1. Choose Slice/Slice and Done.
2. Choose Depth and specify the depth of the slice. You can also use the Parametersoption to modify parameters for this particular slice.
3. Choose Play Cut to display the slice.
Note: If at this point you choose Depth again, you will modify the depth of the currentslice, not create a new one.
179
4. Choose Done when satisfied with the current slice.
5. Choose Next Slice from the NEXT SLICED menu, and repeat steps 2 through 4 to defineanother slice. The Play Cut option always shows the current slice only.
6. When the desired number of slices has been generated, choose Done/Return from theNEXT SLICED menu.
The Build Slice option, which replaces the Build Cut option for this cutmotion type, allows you to define approach and exit motions for the currentslice.
To Specify Depth
Depending on the cut motion type, you have to determine:
• For Upto Depth motion—the depth of the last slice.
• For From-To Depth motion: From Depth—the depth of the first slice, To Depth—thedepth of the last slice.
• For Slice/Slice motion—individual depth of each slice.
The following options are available for specifying slice depth:
• Specify Plane—Select a planar surface or datum plane parallel to the retract plane.You will also have an option to make a datum plane “on the fly.
• Z Depth—Enter depth as a Z-axis coordinate with respect to the NC Sequencecoordinate system.
The Play Cut option allows you to display the cut motion as it is currentlydefined. You can then specify different depth value(s) if desired.
To Specify Approach and Exit Motions Using Build Cut
1. Choose Approach (Exit) from the BUILD CUT menu.
2. If By Region is checked off, the APPR EXIT TYPE menu will appear:
� Whole Volume—The approach (exit) motion will apply to all slices in all regions.
� Select Region—The approach (exit) motion will apply to the slices of a selectedregion only. Select the region by selecting on the appropriate slice boundary.
180
3. Select an option from the APPR EXIT OPT menu:
� Datum Point—Create or select a datum point to be used as a start (end) point. Thepoint will be projected normal to the retract plane on all applicable slices; theseprojections will be used as a start (end) point for each slice.
� Axis—Create or select an axis to be used as a start (end) point. The axis can belongeither to the workpiece or to the design model, and must be normal to the retractplane.
� Sketch—Sketch the approach (exit) path for the tool in the XY plane of the NCSequence coordinate system. The approach path must finish (and the exit path—start) so that the tool lies completely inside the area of the cut.
� None—Cancel previous approach (exit) instructions.
The Build Cut Functionality
The Build Cut option allows you to add or remove slices and specifyapproach and exit motions for each slice in the cut motion. It also allows youto specify whether you want to machine across the whole milling volume at aparticular Z depth, or to completely machine a pocket before going to the nextone (region-by-region milling). This functionality is available for Automatic,Upto Depth, and From-To Depth cut motion types, for Volume and Localmilling.
The following illustration shows an example of volume regions.
1
2
3
4
(Top basin)
When you choose Build Cut, the BUILD CUT menu appears with thefollowing options:
181
• By Slice—Slices will be generated by intersecting the whole volume at a particular Zdepth.
• By Region—The volume will be automatically broken into regions. Each region will becompletely machined upto depth before going to the next region. Separate approach andexit paths can be specified for each region.
• Show Slices—Display the slices by marking their corners in cyan. You can either usethe Show All option, all step through the slices using the Next and Previous options.
• Add Slice—Specify depth for a new slice using the Specify Plane and Z Depthoptions. Use the Update Slices option after adding slices.
• Remove Slice—Slice boundaries are displayed in cyan. Select a slice to remove byselecting on its boundary. Use the Update Slices option after removing slices.
• Update Slices—Recalculate the slices after adding or removing a slice.
• Show Regions—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Show the volume regionsby displaying their critical slices. You can either use the Show All option, or stepthrough the regions using the Next and Previous options.
• Order Regions—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Specify order of millingthe regions using the Next Region and Done Order options. You do not have to orderall the regions explicitly. The system will mill those you have ordered first, them mill allthe leftover ones in the default order.
• Skip Region—(Available only if By Region is checked off.) Select regions that will notbe milled.
• Approach—Specify the approach motions for each slice.
• Exit—Specify the exit motions for each slice.
• Undo—Delete a Build Cut action. A menu with all the actions created so far will appear;select an action to delete.
• Redo—Redefine a Build Cut action. A menu with all the actions created so far willappear; select an action to redefine, then respecify the action references (such as depth,sketch).
• Play Cut—Show the cut motion as it is currently defined.
• Info—Brings up the INFO ITEMS menu.
Example: Defining Approach and Exit Motions
The following illustration shows defining approach and exit using the Axisoption.
182
This axis is selected forapproach and exit point.
The following illustration shows sketching approach and exit for Build Cut.
Approach sketch
Exit sketch
Local Milling
About Local Milling
There are three types of Local milling:
• Prev NC Seq—Remove material left after a Volume, Profile, Surface, or another Localmilling NC sequence, usually with a smaller tool. When you create a Local milling NCsequence, you will be prompted to select a reference NC sequence. The system will thencompute the material left by the reference NC sequence and machine away this materialonly. After a Volume or Profile NC sequence, you can do region-by-region milling. If aSurface milling NC sequence is used as a reference sequence, a remainder surface,representing the leftover material, will be generated for this NC sequence. You cangenerate this remainder surface at the time of creating the parent NC sequence bysetting the REMAINDER_SURFACE parameter to YES. The following illustration showsLocal milling by reference.
183
Volume milling performedwith a large tool.
Local mill ingremoves theleftover material.
• Corner Edges—Specify corner(s) to clean up by selecting edges. The amount of materialto remove will be calculated by the system based on the value of the CORNER_OFFSETparameter, or the “previous tool radius, that you supply. The following illustration showsLocal milling using Corner Edges.
This material will beremoved.Select corner.
Previous radius(CORNER_OFFSET)
• By Prev Tool—Calculates the remainder material on specified surfaces after beingmachined by a larger tool; then removes this material by the current (smaller) tool. Theprevious tool must be a ball end mill. You can either explicitly select surfaces to bemachined, or use a Mill Window for surface selection. After the system calculates thedefault tool path, you can select a subset of surfaces to be machined, or customize theorder of machining these surfaces. You can also define various types of approach and exitmotions by using the APPROACH_TYPE and EXIT_TYPE parameters.
Local milling is always performed using a spiral scanning algorithm,therefore, the ROUGH_OPTION and SCAN_TYPE parameters areinapplicable for this NC sequence type.
If CUT_TYPE is set to UPCUT or CLIMB, one-direction milling will beperformed. If CUT_TYPE is NONE (this value is applicable to Local millingonly), the tool will clean up material by moving back and forth, as shown inthe following illustration.
184
UPCUT CLIMB NONE
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence by Referencing a Previous NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Prev NC Seq and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
4. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Ref Sequence—Select a reference NC sequence, that is, the NC sequence to cleanup after.
� Order—This option can be used to reorder patches of the remainder surface if thereference sequence is an Isolines Surface Milling NC sequence.
� Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed. This option is applicable only if the reference sequence is a SurfaceMilling NC sequence.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. If a Volume, Profile, or Local Mill NC sequence is selected as reference sequence, selectan Automatic Cut motion to be used. Only one cut motion can be selected.
7. If a Surface Milling NC sequence is selected as reference sequence, the LOCAL TYPEmenu will appear with the options:
� CntrSrfLocal—The cut motions will be performed along the u-v surface lines. If theleftover surface consists of multiple patches, you will have control over the order ofmachining.
� Cnvnl Local—The cut motions will be parallel to the X-axis of the NC Sequencecoordinate system. If the leftover surface consists of multiple patches, the system
185
will completely machine each of the patches before going to the next one (similar toSCAN_TYPE TYPE_3 in Conventional surface milling). The patches will bemachined in a default order.
8. If the sequence type is CntrSrfLocal, and the leftover surface consists of multiplepatches, you will be able to reorder them using the Order option in the SEQ SETUPmenu. The ORDER PATCH menu will appear with the options:
� Define Order—Specify the order of machining by using the Next Surface option inthe CNTR ORDER menu and selecting the next surface to machine. Choose DoneOrder when finished. You do not have to order all surfaces. Those surfaces thatwere not explicitly ordered (or defined as skipped, see the next option) will bemachined at the end in some default order.
� Skip Patch—Select surfaces to be omitted from machining.
� Undo Skip—Select a surface previously specified as skipped to restore it in themachining sequence.
� Show—Display the current order of machining the surfaces. The first surface to bemachined will be highlighted. Choose Next from the SHOW ORDER menu tohighlight the next surface to be machined. Choose Done/Return to quit.
9. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
10. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence Using Corner Edges
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Corner Edges and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
4. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to be milled during this NC sequence.
� Corner Edges—Specify corner(s) to clean up.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
186
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. Make sure the CORNER_OFFSET parameter is set to an appropriate value.
7. Selecting Corner Edges from the SEQ REFS menu will bring up the CORNER EDG menu:
� Suggest—Show possible corners based on the surface selection in the previous step.This option is for information purposes only: the corners to be milled have to beexplicitly defined using the Define option below.
� Define—Define corners by either selecting surfaces that form a corner using theSurfaces option, or selecting the corner edges themselves using the Edges option.
� Redo—Reselect edges to define a corner.
� Remove—Remove corner definitions:
Remove Single—Allows you to step through the specified corners using the Nextand Previous options. Unselect a corner using the Accept option.
Remove All—Unselects all corners defined so far.
� Show—Show all the currently defined corner edges.
8. After defining the corners, choose Play Path to verify the tool path automaticallygenerated by the system. If not satisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or usethe Customize functionality to adjust the tool path.
9. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
To Create a Local Milling NC Sequence by Referencing a Previous Tool
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Local Mill and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose By Prev Tool and Done from the LOCAL OPT menu.
4. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Prev Tool—Specify the “previous (larger) tool, which will be used for calculating theremainder material. The previous tool must be a ball end mill. The user interface forspecifying the “previous tool is the same as for specifying the current tool.
187
Note: If you perform Local Milling by previous tool immediately after machiningwith a large tool, do not forget to select the Tool option in the SEQ SETUP menu andspecify a smaller current tool.
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to be milled during this NC sequence.
� Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Surfaces are mutuallyexclusive. If you use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the specifiedMill Window will be selected.
� Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed.
� Machine Srfs—Specify a subset of surfaces to be machined or customize the orderof machining.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. Selecting Machine Srfs from the SEQ REFS menu will bring up the MACHINE SRFSmenu with the following options:
� Machine All—Machine all the surfaces selected to calculate the remaindermaterial. This option is checked off by default.
� Select Surf—Select a subset off surfaces to machine. To use this option, first turnoff the checkmark next to the Machine All option above.
� Order Surf—Customize the order of machining the surfaces. The ORDER PATCHmenu appears with the following options:
Define Order—Specify the order of machining by using the Next Surface option inthe CNTR ORDER menu and selecting the next surface to machine. Choose DoneOrder when finished. You do not have to order all surfaces: when computing the CLdata, the system will mill the ordered surfaces first, and then mill any leftoversurfaces.
Show—Show the current order of machining. Use the Next option in the SHOWORDER menu to highlight the next surface to be machined.
� Preview—Show regions that will be machined.
7. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
8. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
188
Surface Milling
About Surface Milling
Use Surface Milling to mill horizontal or slanted surfaces. The selectedsurfaces must allow for a continuous tool path. There are several methods ofdefining the cut and generating the tool path:
• Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts. For 3-Axis NCsequences, you can also remove material in depth increments.
• From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-v lines.
• Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, and someintermediate cuts. When the system generates the tool path, it gradually changes theshape of the cuts according to surface topology.
• Projected Cuts—Mill the selected surfaces by projecting their contours on the retractplane, creating a “flat tool path in this plane (using the appropriate scan type), and thenprojecting this tool path back on the original surface(s). This method is available for 3-Axis Surface Milling only.
Depending on the selected method, you have to define the cut by specifyingappropriate parameters and geometric references.
When you redefine a Surface Milling NC sequence, you can change the CutType (that is, select a different method of defining the cut and specify thenew parameters and references) and produce a different tool path.
Certain manufacturing parameters have different values available fordifferent Cut Types. If you change the Cut Type and the parameter valuethat you have previously specified is not available for the new Cut Type, thesystem sets this parameter to a value that is the default for the new CutType. If, however, a parameter value is available for both the old and the newCut Type, the system does not change it. For example, if you redefine fromCut Line to Straight Cut and the SCAN_TYPE value is TYPE_SPIRAL, thesystem changes it to TYPE_1 because TYPE_SPIRAL is not available forStraight Cut. If, however, the SCAN_TYPE value is TYPE_ONE_DIR, thesystem retains this value.
To Create a Surface Milling NC Sequence
When you create a Surface Milling NC sequence, you are given a choice ofseveral methods for defining the cut. Depending on the selected method, thetool path will be different. You can change the Cut Type (that is, select adifferent method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters andreferences) at any time when you redefine a Surface Milling NC sequence.
189
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Click Surface Mill. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable. Click Done.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to be machined.
� Window—Create or select a Mill Window. Appears for 3-Axis NC sequences only.This option and Surfaces are mutually exclusive. If you use the Window option,then all the surfaces within the specified Mill Window will be selected.
� Close Loops—Specify loops to close for Window machining. Appears for 3-Axis NCsequences only.
� ScallopSrf—Select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation ifSCALLOP_HGT is specified.
� Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed.
� Define Cut—Define the method of surface milling and specify the appropriateparameters.
� Axis Def—Control the orientation of the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-axis NCsequences only.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
� Approach/Exit—Specify the approach and exit moves.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, andchoose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
3. Select the surfaces to be milled (or define a Mill Window).
4. When you start to define the cut, the system opens the Cut Definition dialog box.Specify a method of defining the cut by selecting one of the following options:
� Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts.
� From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-vlines.
� Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, andsome intermediate cuts. When generating other cuts, the system gradually changestheir shape to accommodate surface topology.
� Projected Cuts—Mill the selected surfaces by projecting their contours on theretract plane, creating a “flat tool path in this plane (using the appropriate scan
190
type), and then projecting this tool path back on the original surface(s). This optionis available for 3-Axis Surface Milling only.
Depending on the selected method, the system displays the appropriate options in thelower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box.
5. Select the appropriate options in the Cut Definition dialog box and specify geometricreferences to define the cut according to the selected method. Click for details. Whensatisfied with the cut definition, click OK to close the Cut Definition dialog box andgenerate the tool path.
6. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path to verify the tool path automaticallygenerated by the system. Use the Customize functionality, if needed, to adjust the toolpath.
7. Click Done Seq or Next Seq when satisfied.
To Define a Cut Using Straight Cut
Use this method to mill surfaces of a relatively simple shape.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Straight Cut.
2. Select an option to define the direction of cuts:
� Relative to X-Axis—The direction of the cuts is defined by an angle from the x-axisof the NC Sequence coordinate system. The initial value in the Cut Angle text boxcorresponds to that of the CUT_ANGLE parameter. You can change the direction bytyping a different value.
� By Surface—The cuts are parallel to a plane. Select a planar surface or datumplane.
� By Edge—The cuts are parallel to a straight edge. Select an edge.
3. Click to preview the cut direction.
4. Click , if necessary, to reverse the cut direction.
5. When satisfied with the cut direction, click OK.
Straight Cut Surface Milling
Straight Cut surface milling NC sequences generate the tool path which will:
• Completely machine the selected surface(s). If a surface is not bounded by walls on theoutside, the tool will “straddle, that is, overrun the surface boundary by a half diameter.
191
• Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the surface, will beavoided automatically. The stock allowance, if any, will apply to the side walls as well.
• If a surface is selected from model, any slots or holes on the surface will be “patched: thetool path will be generated as if they were not there.
• If you want to eliminate negative Z moves of the tool (for example, when machining hardmaterials), use the ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES parameter. It is applicable for 3-Axis NCsequences only.
• If you want to remove material in depth increments, use the ROUGH_STEP_DEPTHparameter. It is applicable for 3-Axis NC sequences only.
The following illustration shows handling inner loops and outer walls forStraight Cut surface milling.
Select this surface. "Free" outer edgeswill be straddled.
Inner slot will be ignored.
Outer walls will be avoided.Inner protrusion will be avoided.
Note: If an inner protrusion is surrounded by a slot, it will not be avoided automatically.Use Check Surfs to generate the correct tool path.
For 3-Aixs Straight Cut milling, you can control the start point and directionof machining the surface by using a combination of CUT_TYPE,SPINDLE_SENSE, and CUT_DIRECTION parameters (see the followingtable ). The LACE_OPTION parameter must be set to NO.
Parameter Settings Tool Path
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTIONSTANDARD
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTION
192
STANDARD
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTIONSTANDARD
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTIONSTANDARD
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTIONREVERSE
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTIONREVERSE
CUT_TYPE UPCUT
SPINDLE_SENSE CW
CUT_DIRECTIONREVERSE
CUT_TYPE CLIMB
SPINDLE_SENSE CCW
CUT_DIRECTIONREVERSE
You can select any type of end mill, including flat and radius end mills, forStraight Cut surface milling of convex surfaces. The gouge avoidance will becalculated automatically.
To Define a Cut Using Surface Isolines
193
Use this method to mill a single surface, or several continuous surfaces. Themachining direction is defined by the natural u-v contour of the surface to bemilled. If multiple surfaces are selected, the machining direction isdetermined separately for each surface.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select From Surface Isolines.
The system displays the names of the surfaces selected for milling in the Surface Listlist box.
2. Select a surface name in the list box to preview the cut direction.
3. For each selected surface, you are given a choice of two directions, determined by the u-v
lines of the surface. Click , if necessary, to toggle between these directions.
4. If more than one surface is being machined, they will be milled in the same order as theyare listed in the list box. You can reorder the surfaces using the following methods:
� Select a surface name in the list box, then click the Up Arrow and Down Arrowicons to move it up or down in the list.
� Click to reorder the surfaces by selecting them on the screen.
5. If you click , the CNTR ORDER menu appears with the options:
� Next Surface—Select the first surface to be milled. This option will highlightautomatically after each selection allowing you to select surfaces in the order youwant them to be milled.
� Done Order—Select this option when you have specified all the surfaces you wantto be milled in a specific order. You do not have to order all the surfaces selected formilling: when computing the CL data, the system will mill the ordered surfaces first,and then mill any leftover surfaces.
6. When satisfied with the cut direction and the surface order, click OK.
Isolines Surface Milling
For Surface Milling From Surface Isolines, the machining direction is definedby the natural u-v contour of the surface to be milled. If the surface tomachine is at an angle with the coordinate system axes, you may want to usethe From Surface Isolines option rather than Straight Cut.
Isolines Surface Milling NC sequences generate the tool path which will:
• Completely machine the selected surface(s). If a surface is not bounded by walls on theoutside, the tool will “straddle, that is, overrun the surface boundary by a half diameter.
194
• Any inner protrusions, as well as the outer walls extending up from the surface, will beavoided automatically. The stock allowance, if any, will apply to the side walls as well.
• Internal holes and slots will not be “patched. For 3-Axis milling, the tool will move overinternal slots or holes at a constant Z level, plunging or retracting at the lower edge asnecessary. For 4- and 5-Axis milling, the tool will retract at all inner edges. If you don’twant this to happen, use a Mill Surface, or select a surface from a Mill Volume.
The following illustration shows using a Mill Surface for Isolines SurfaceMilling.
Select part surface.Select a Mill Surface createdusing Copy and Fill All.
If you select more than one surface, the surfaces must allow for a continuoustool path. Each surface will be machined separately. You will be able tospecify the machining direction independently for each of the selectedsurfaces. You will also be able to specify the order in which the surfaces willbe milled.
The following illustration shows specifying machining direction for multiplesurfaces.
These surfaces were selectedto change machining direction.
195
To Define a Cut Using Cut Lines
Use Cut Line Surface Milling to produce cuts shaped according to the surfacetopology. This option gives you more control over the actual shape of the cutsthan the From Surface Isolines option.
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Cut Line.
The system displays two tabbed pages, Cut Lines and Options, in the lower portion ofthe Cut Definition dialog box.
2. Select a Cut Line Style option to define whether you are machining an open or closed loopof surfaces.
3. Add cut lines by clicking the Plus (+) icon in the Setup Cut Lines area of the Cut Linestabbed page. You can define cut lines by selecting edges or datum curves, as well as bysketching the cut lines and projecting on the surfaces to be machined.
Once you define a cut line, its name and type are listed in the list box above the actionbuttons.
4. To delete a cut line, select it in the list box and click the Minus (-) icon.
5. To redefine a cut line, select it in the list box and click .
6. To reorder cut lines:
� Select a cut line name in the list box, then click the Up Arrow and Down Arrowicons to move it up or down in the list.
� Click to reorder the cut lines by selecting them on the screen. All the cut linesare highlighted in cyan. Select the cut line to machine first. You can proceedselecting the cut lines in the order you want them to be machined, or click Done Sel.The rest of cut lines will be machined in default order.
7. To change the cutting direction, click . The system displays a red arrow to indicatethe current cutting direction. Use the Flip and Okay options to specify the direction.
8. Click OK when satisfied with the cut line definitions.
Cut Line Definition Options in the Cut Definition Dialog Box
When you select Cut Line as the Cut Type option, the system displays twotabbed pages, Cut Lines and Options, in the lower portion of the CutDefinition dialog box.
The Cut Lines tabbed page contains the following options:
• Machined Surfaces—Define the cut lines by selecting edges or curves that belong tothe surfaces to be machined.
196
• Retract Plane—Define the cut lines in the Retract plane.
• Tool Extent—The system will generate a surface feature representing the zone of theselected surfaces that can be machined using the current tool and parameters. You willthen be able to define the cut lines using the edges of this surface. The surface belongs tothe NC sequence. This option is available for 3-Axis milling only, and it will not beavailable if a Side Mill tool is used.
• Alternate Surfaces—Select surfaces, other than surfaces to be machined, to be used fordefining the cut lines. Once you select the entities to define the cut lines from thesealternate surfaces, these entities will be projected in the direction normal to the alternatesurface on the surfaces to be machined to form the cut lines. This option is available for3-Axis milling only.
The Toolpath Method options specify the mechanism for computing the toolmotion:
• Automatic—The method is determined automatically.
• Tool Contact—A Cut Line represents the trajectory of the tool contact point.
• Tool Centerline— A Cut Line represents the trajectory of the tool center.
Use the Setup Cut Lines area of the Cut Lines tabbed page to add, remove,redefine, or reorder cut lines.
The proper Cut Line Style option depends on whether you are machining anopen or closed loop of surfaces:
• Open Ends—Machine an open surface loop. In this case, the system will expect all cutlines to be open chains of edges, curves, or sketched entities. You will be able to adjustthe ends of the chain if you use curves or sketched entities to create a cut line.
• Closed Loops—Machine a closed surface loop. In this case, the system will expect allcut lines to be closed loops of edges or curves. If the cut line is sketched, its projection onthe selected surfaces must also form a closed loop. You will have to specify a start pointfor the cut motion by selecting on the cut line.
The Options tabbed page contains the following options:
• Auto Inner Cutlines—If this check box is selected, the system will attempt to use edgescrossing all the specified synch lines as inner cut lines.
• Extend Cutlines to Boundary—If this check box is selected, the system will attemptto extend the cut lines up to the boundary of the surface. Use this functionality when acut line does not extend the whole length of the surface selected for machining.
197
• Tool Center Curve—Calculate Machinable Area surface by based on the tool centerlocations when generating the tool path.
The Synchronize Cut Lines area of the Options tabbed page contains thetools for synchronizing cut lines:
• Plus (+) icon—Define the synch lines between the cut lines. Once you add aSynchronizer, its name and type are listed in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
• —Redefine the Synchronizer selected in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
• Minus (-) icon—Delete the Synchronizer selected in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box.
• Auto Synchronize—If there are edges crossing all the selected cut lines, the system willattempt to automatically determine if they should be used as the synch lines. It willhighlight all the synch lines when displaying the intermediate mesh for the tool path. Ifyou are not satisfied with the automatically selected synch lines, clear the AutoSynchronize check box and select the appropriate synch lines manually, by using thePlus (+) icon in the Synchronize Cut Lines area of the Options tab.
Cut Line Surface Milling
Use Cut Line Surface Milling to machine a region between open or closedboundaries, called “cut lines. The “cut lines that you select or sketchdetermine the shape of the first and last passes in the tool path; passes willfirst mimic the shape of the edge or entity specified as the cut line, thengradually change shape as necessary to accommodate different surfacetopology.
Notes:
• You can perform Cut Line Surface Milling in step depth increments by using theOFFSET_INCREMENT and NUMBER_CUTS parameters.
• You can machine undercuts in a 3-Axis NC sequence using a Side Mill tool. The gougeavoidance for the entire tool with respect to cut surfaces will be calculated automatically.The retract motions generated by the system will be checked for gouging, with problemareas highlighted. Specify appropriate Approach and Exit motions if gouging is detected.
Example: Cut Line Machining
The following illustration shows Cut Line machining with Open Ends cutlines.
198
1 2 3
Select thischain as theend cut line.
Select thischain as thestart cut line.
The following illustration shows Cut Line machining with Closed Loops cutlines.
part to machine
Select all the topsurfaces.
Select this contouras the start cut line(use Bndry Chain).
Select this contouras the end cut line(use Bndry Chain).
In some cases, when the surface topology changes abruptly at some pointbetween the start and end cut lines, you may need to specify intermediate cutlines. In some cases, inner cut lines can also be selected automatically byusing the Auto Inner Cutlines option.
199
The following illustration shows specifying intermediate cut lines.
Inner cut linesEnd cut line
Start cut line
To Add a Cut Line
1. In the Setup Cut Lines area, on the Cut Lines tabbed page of the Cut Definitiondialog box, select a Cut Line Style option (Open Ends or Closed Loops) and click Add.
The Add/Redefine Cutline dialog box opens.
2. Select a Cut Line Type option:
� From Edges—Define the cut line by selecting edges either on the surfaces selectedfor milling, or on some other surfaces (specified using the Tool Extent or theAlternate Surfaces option).
� From Curves—Define the cut line by selecting preexisting datum curves.
� Projected—Sketch the cut lines in the retract plane (or specify another sketchingplane). The system will project the sketched cut lines onto the surfaces to bemachined. The projection direction is parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequencecoordinate system.
� From Surfaces—Define the cut lines using surface boundaries. You will beprompted to select the surfaces using the SELECT SRFS menu options and then enterthe offset value for the surface boundaries. This option appears for 4- and 5-Axismachining only.
3. Depending on the selected Cut Line Type option, select the edges, datum curves,surfaces, or sketch the cut lines.
4. For Open Ends cut lines, if you use From Curves or Projected, you can adjust theendpoints of the cut line by clicking Specify Ends.
5. For Closed Loops cut lines, click the Select Start Point button and select on the cutline to specify the start point for machining. If you select somewhere along a cut line
200
entity (other than at an endpoint), you will be prompted to specify the placement of thepoint as a length ratio along the selected entity. The options in the ENTER VAL menuare:
� 0.000000 (corresponding to the first endpoint)
� 1.000000 (corresponding to the second endpoint)
� a value corresponding to the selected point
� Enter, which allows you to enter any length ratio along the entity
6. Click Preview to verify the cut line.
7. When satisfied, click OK. The system lists the name and the type of the newly definedcut line in the list box in the Setup Cut Lines area on the Cut Lines tabbed page of theCut Definition dialog box.
Defining a Cut Line From Edges
One of the methods of defining a cut line is using the edges of either thesurfaces selected for milling, or of some other surfaces (specified using theTool Extent or the Alternate Surfaces option).
When you define a cut line From Edges, the CHAIN menu appears,providing the following methods of edge selection:
• One By One—Select individual edges from the specified surfaces.
• Tangnt Chain—Select a chain of tangent edges by selecting an edge that is a part of atangent chain. The edge must belong to the specified surfaces.
• Bndry Chain—Select boundaries of the specified surfaces. When you choose this option,the whole boundary of the specified surfaces highlights in cyan. The CHAIN OPT menuappears with the following options:
� Select All—Include all the highlighted edges.
� From-To—Select a start vertex (curve end), then an end vertex (curve end). One ofthe chains connecting these vertices highlights. Specify which chain you want toinclude using the Next and Accept options.
• Surf Chain—Select a chain of edges that belong to the same surface. You will beprompted to select a surface, and then specify which edges to include using either theSelect All or From-To options in the CHAIN OPT menu.
• Intent Chain—Select an edge. Based on this selection and the design intent criteria, thesystem selects a chain of edges.
201
The Unselect option in the CHAIN menu allows you to cancel the previousset of selections.
To Adjust Ends of a Cut Line
For Open Ends cut lines, if you create them as From Curves or Projected,you may need to adjust the ends of the cut line to make it meet an edgecorrectly, especially for 4- and 5-Axis machining.
1. Click Specify Ends.
2. Use the following commands on the CUT ENDS menu:
� Start—Specify the end condition for the beginning of the cut motion.
� End—Specify the end condition for the end of the cut motion.
3. Use the following commands on the CUT START or the CUT END menu:
� On—Use the default start point or end point for the cut motion.
� Specify—Manually relocate the start point or end point for the cut motion. You canmove the mouse and extend the starting segment, displayed in green. When youselect a new location for the point, use the commands on the END DIM TYPE menu(Ext Length, Offset Plane, or Offset Csys) to specify the dimension type for theend.
4. When satisfied, click Done/Return on the CUT ENDS menu.
To Synchronize Cut Lines
You can customize synchronization between the cut lines (u-lines) byspecifying synch lines (v-lines). If no synch lines are specified, the points onu-lines are matched according to the length ratio. If there are edges crossingall the selected cut lines, the system will attempt to automatically determineif they should be used as the synch lines. It will highlight all the synch lineswhen displaying the intermediate mesh for the tool path. If you are notsatisfied with the automatically selected synch lines, clear the AutoSynchronize check box on the Options tab of the Cut Definition dialogbox and select the appropriate synch lines manually, as described below.
1. Go to the Options tab of the Cut Definition dialog box and click the Plus (+) icon inthe Synchronize Cut Lines area.
202
The Synchronization dialog box opens.
2. Select an option to define synch lines:
� From Edges—Select edges to be used as a synch line.
� From Curves—Select preexisting datum curves to be used as a synch line.
� Projected—Sketch a synch line in the retract plane (or specify another sketchingplane). The system will project the sketched synch line onto the surfaces to bemachined. The projection direction is parallel to the z-axis of the NC Sequencecoordinate system.
� From Points—Specify synchronization points on the cut lines. Each cut line is inturn highlighted in red. Select a location on the cut line to place a synch point.Repeat for all the other cut lines. The system will create the synch line by connectingthe synch points with straight linear segments.
3. Click OK. The system lists the name and the type of the newly defined synch line in thelist box in the Synchronize Cut Lines list box on the Options tab of the CutDefinition dialog box.
Example: Specifying Synch Lines
Select the edges shown below as synch lines. It is recommended to specifysynch lines, rather than synch points, when a straight line connecting thesynch points would not correspond to the natural flow of surfaces beingmachined.
To Define a Cut Using Projected Cuts
Use Projected Cuts Surface Milling when you need more control over the wayyou scan the surfaces (for example, if you need to generate a spiral tool path).
1. In the top portion of the Cut Definition dialog box, select Projected Cuts.
203
The system redisplays the lower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box to contain thePlus (+) and Minus (-) icons and a list box for defining the contours to be machined, aswell as the following options for defining the contour offsets:
� On—The contour to be machined will coincide with the projected contour of theselected surfaces.
� Left—The contour to be machined will be constructed by offsetting the projectedcontour to the inside by the offset value (Cutter_Diameter/2 plus the BoundaryOffset Value).
� Right—The contour to be machined will be constructed by offsetting the projectedcontour to the outside by the offset value (Cutter_Diameter/2 plus the BoundaryOffset Value).
� Boundary Offset Value—The default offset is Cutter_Diameter/2. You can specifyadditional offset by typing a value in the Boundary Offset Value text box.
2. Click the Plus (+) icon to add the projected contours.
The ADD CONTRS menu opens with the following options:
� Def Contrs—Select the contours to machine either by using the Select option andselecting the contours (all selectable contours are highlighted in cyan), or using theSelect All option. Once a contour is selected, it is projected to the retract plane (theprojected contour is displayed in magenta).
� Def Offsets—If you select this option, you can define the contour offsets by scrollingthrough all the contours being created.
The CNTR OFFSET menu opens. Use the Next and Prev commands to scroll throughthe contours. Other commands on the CNTR OFFSET menu correspond to the optionsfor specifying offset in the Cut Definition dialog box. As you choose Next and Prev,the current projected contour is highlighted in cyan (instead of magenta). As youchoose Left, Right, or change offset, the projection is redisplayed to reflect thechange.
Once you define a contour, its name and offset are listed in the list box.
3. To delete a contour, select it in the list box and click the Minus (-) icon.
4. To redefine the offset of a contour, select it in the list box and use the On, Left, Right,and Boundary Offset Value options to change the offset.
5. When you have defined all the contours, click OK.
Example: Surface Milling by Projecting Tool Path
The following illustration shows surface milling using projected tool path.
204
Flat tool path pattern inretract plane.
Tool path projected backonto the surfaces.
To Specify Entry and Exit Moves
You can define automatic Entry and Exit moves for all types of SurfaceMilling NC sequences and for Swarf Milling.
1. When defining a Surface or Swarf milling NC sequence, select the Approach/Exitcheckbox on the SEQ SETUP menu and click Done.
The Entry/Exit Move dialog box opens.
2. Specify the Entry moves for First Cut and Each Cut, and Exit moves for Each Cut andLast Cut, by selecting options from respective drop-down lists. Click for details. If youselect CUSTOM_ENTRY or CUSTOM_EXIT, you can define Main, First Alternate,and Second Alternate custom strategies for this move using the tabbed pages in theright half of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
3. You can save your Entry and Exit strategies by clicking the Save icon at the top of theEntry/Exit Move dialog box. By default, the file is saved in your working directory withthe .apx extension. When defining Entry and Exit moves for a different NC sequence, youcan retrieve a previously saved strategy file by clicking the Open icon at the top of theEntry/Exit Move dialog box.
4. When satisfied with your Entry and Exit move definitions, click OK.
The Entry/Exit Move Dialog Box
The Entry/Exit Move dialog box contains two group boxes:
• Entry/Exit Type—Lets you select standard strategies for entry and exit. You canspecify different entry strategies for
• Custom Strategies—Lets you define custom strategies for entry and exit.
205
Above the group boxes there are the Open and Save icons, for saving andretrieving your Entry and Exit strategies. The OK and Cancel buttons arelocated below the group boxes.
The Entry/Exit Type group box contains the following drop-down lists.
Under Cut Entry Move:
• First Cut—Select an entry move type for the first cut (approach move). The options are:
� NONE—No entry move.
� CUSTOM_ENTRY—Enter using the custom strategies, specified in the CustomStrategies group box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, thenthe system uses the First Alternate strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategiescause gouging, then no entry move is created.
� AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the entry move type based onthe surrounding geometry of the feature being machined. The entry moves areautomatically degouged. If the first selected move type gouges the part, the systemtries the next logical move type. If all the move types gouge the part, then no entrymove is created.
� LINE_TANGENT—The tool enters in a line tangent to the cut. The length of theline is defined by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
� HELIX—The tool enters along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by theHELICAL_DIAMETER and RAMP_ANGLE parameters.
� RAMP—The tool enters at an angle. The move is defined by the RAMP_ANGLE andCLEAR_DIST parameters.
� ARC_ENTRY—The tool enters along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, thearc is located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinatesystem). The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. Theangle of the arc is 180 degrees.
� ARC_TANGENT—The tool enters along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is,the arc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NCSequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS andENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
� LEAD_IN—The tool leads into the cut. The move is defined by theTANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, andENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
• Each Cut—Select an entry move type for each intermediate cut. The options are:
� NONE—No entry move.
206
� CUSTOM_ENTRY—Enter using the custom strategies, specified in the CustomStrategies group box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, thenthe system uses the First Alternate strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategiescause gouging, then no entry move is created.
� AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the entry move type based onthe surrounding geometry of the feature being machined. The entry moves areautomatically degouged. If the first selected move type gouges the part, the systemtries the next logical move type. If all the move types gouge the part, then no entrymove is created.
� LINE_TANGENT—The tool enters in a line tangent to the cut. The length of theline is defined by the APPROACH_DISTANCE parameter.
� HELIX—The tool enters along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by theHELICAL_DIAMETER and RAMP_ANGLE parameters.
� ARC_ENTRY—The tool enters along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, thearc is located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinatesystem). The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. Theangle of the arc is 180 degrees.
� ARC_TANGENT—The tool enters along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is,the arc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NCSequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS andENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
� LEAD_IN—The tool leads into the cut. The move is defined by theTANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, andENTRY_ANGLE parameters.
Under Cut Exit Move:
• Each Cut—Select an exit move type for each intermediate cut. The options are:
� NONE—No exit move.
� CUSTOM_EXIT—Exit using the custom strategies, specified in the CustomStrategies group box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, thenthe system uses the First Alternate strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategiescause gouging, then no exit move is created.
� AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the exit move type based onthe surrounding geometry of the feature being machined. The exit moves areautomatically degouged. If the first selected move type gouges the part, the systemtries the next logical move type. If all the move types gouge the part, then no exitmove is created.
� LINE_TANGENT—The tool exits in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the lineis defined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
207
� HELIX—The tool exits along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by theHELICAL_DIAMETER, RAMP_ANGLE, and PULLOUT_DIST parameters. The toolleaves the surface in a helical motion at CUT_SPEED until it reachesPULLOUT_DIST, then it retracts at RETRACT_SPEED. If you want the tool to exitcompletely by a helical motion, set the configuration optionuse_old_helical_exit to yes (the default is no).
� ARC_EXIT—The tool exits along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arcis located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system).The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The angle of thearc is 180 degrees.
� ARC_TANGENT—The tool exits along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, thearc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NCSequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS andEXIT_ANGLE parameters.
� LEAD_OUT—The tool leads out of the cut. The move is defined by theTANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, andEXIT_ANGLE parameters.
• Last Cut— Select an exit move type for the last cut (exit move). The options are:
� NONE—No exit move.
� CUSTOM_EXIT—Exit using the custom strategies, specified in the CustomStrategies group box for this cut type. If the Main strategy causes gouging, thenthe system uses the First Alternate strategy, and so on. If all the custom strategiescause gouging, then no exit move is created.
� AUTOMATIC—The system automatically determines the exit move type based onthe surrounding geometry of the feature being machined. The exit moves areautomatically degouged. If the first selected move type gouges the part, the systemtries the next logical move type. If all the move types gouge the part, then no exitmove is created.
� LINE_TANGENT—The tool exits in a line tangent to the cut. The length of the lineis defined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter.
� HELIX—The tool exits along a helix. The geometry of the helix is defined by theHELICAL_DIAMETER, RAMP_ANGLE, and PULLOUT_DIST parameters. The toolleaves the surface in a helical motion at CUT_SPEED until it reachesPULLOUT_DIST, then it retracts at RETRACT_SPEED. If you want the tool to exitcompletely by a helical motion, set the configuration optionuse_old_helical_exit to yes (the default is no).
� ARC_EXIT—The tool exits along a horizontal arc tangent to the cut (that is, the arcis located in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system).The radius of the arc is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter. The angle of thearc is 180 degrees.
208
� ARC_TANGENT—The tool exits along a vertical arc tangent to the cut (that is, thearc is located in a plane tangent to the cut and normal to the XY plane of the NCSequence coordinate system). The move is defined by the LEAD_RADIUS andEXIT_ANGLE parameters.
� LEAD_OUT—The tool leads out of the cut. The move is defined by theTANGENT_LEAD_STEP, NORMAL_LEAD_STEP, LEAD_RADIUS, andEXIT_ANGLE parameters.
The Custom Strategies group box contains three tabbed pages, Main, FirstAlternate, and Second Alternate, for defining the custom strategies foreach cut type.
To Define Custom Entry and Exit Strategies
You can define Main, First Alternate, and Second Alternate customstrategies for any cut using the tabbed pages in the right half of theEntry/Exit Move dialog box.
Note: You can only define custom strategies for a cut if you have selectedCUSTOM_ENTRY or CUSTOM_EXIT for this cut type in the Entry/ExitType group box in the left half of the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
1. Select the text box next to the appropriate cut type (for example, First Cut) on the Main,First Alternate, or Second Alternate tabbed page. Click Change.
The A/E Strategies dialog box opens.
2. To define a new strategy, click New.
The system displays the default strategy name, such as strategy 1 , in the Name textbox in the Strategy Definition group box. You can type a different name.
3. Build the custom strategy by selecting a segment type from the Type drop-down list inthe Segment Definition group box, specifying the appropriate parameter values, andclicking Insert. The following segment types are available:
� Helix—The tool moves along a helix. You have to specify the following parameters:Radius, Ramp Angle, Height, and Direction (Left or Right).
� Line—The tool makes a linear move. You have to specify the following parameters:Length and Slope.
� Arc—The tool moves along an arc. You have to specify the following parameters:Radius and Angle.
As you insert segments, their names are displayed in appropriate order in the list box inthe Strategy Definition group box.
209
4. As you insert segments, their names are displayed in appropriate order in the list box inthe Strategy Definition group box. If you select a segment name in the list box, thesegment definition is displayed in the Segment Definition group box below. You can:
� Change the segment definition. To do this, change the segment type or parametervalues and click again on the selected segment name in the list box.
� Insert another segment before the selected one by defining the segment type andparameters and clicking Insert.
� Delete the segment by clicking Remove.
5. The Available Strategies list box at the top of the dialog box lists all the customstrategies defined for this or any other move type. If you select a strategy name in this listbox, the strategy definition is displayed in the Strategy Definition group box below. Youcan:
� Change the strategy definition by inserting or removing segments.
� Copy the strategy by clicking Duplicate (the strategy is copied with the defaultname such as strategy 1 copy ), then change the strategy name and definitionas needed.
� Delete the strategy by clicking Delete.
6. When satisfied with the custom strategy definitions, click OK to close the A/E Strategiesdialog box and return to the Entry/Exit Move dialog box.
Swarf Milling
About Swarf Milling
Swarf Milling is a different type of Surface Milling, which lets you machine aseries of surfaces by cutting with the side of the tool. By default, SwarfMilling produces a slice-by-slice tool path, with the slice shape correspondingto the 5-axis geometry being machined. You can define other shape for theslices, if desired.
At any point on the tool path, the tool is positioned tangent to the surfacebeing machined. You can change the default axis definitions, as desired, byspecifying a series of axis directions at a number of points selected. Thedefault axis directions correspond to the machined geometry (the axes followthe boundary edges of the surfaces) or follow the ruling lines of the surfacesthat are ruled. If you want to ignore the ruling lines of the ruled surfaces, setthe IGNORE_RULINGS parameter to YES (the default is NO). You can alsochoose between two algorithms for the axis interpolation between thesurfaces to be machined by using the AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter.
Swarf Milling supports tapered tools, as well as the regular (cylindrical) ones.
210
To Create a Swarf Milling NC Sequence
When you create a Swarf Milling NC sequence, you are given a choice ofseveral methods for defining the cut. Depending on the selected method, thetool path will be different. You can change the Cut Type (that is, select adifferent method of defining the cut and specify the new parameters andreferences) at any time when you redefine a Swarf Milling NC sequence.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence. You must be in a 5-Axis Mill orMill/Turn workcell.
2. Click Swarf Mill | Done.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to be machined.
� ScallopSrf—Select surfaces that will be excluded from scallop computation ifSCALLOP_HGT is specified.
� Height—Specify a plane or surface for the tool tip to follow.
� Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed.
� Define Cut—Define the method of surface milling and specify the appropriateparameters.
� Axis Def—Control the orientation of the tool axis.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
� Approach/Exit—Specify the approach and exit moves.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, andchoose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
3. Select the surfaces to be milled.
4. When you start to define the cut, the system opens the Cut Definition dialog box.Specify a method of defining the cut by selecting one of the following options:
� Straight Cut—Mill the selected surfaces by a series of straight cuts parallel to theXY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The cuts are spaced evenly alongthe z-axis in STEP_DEPTH increments.
211
� From Surface Isolines—Mill the selected surfaces by following the surface u-vlines. The user interface is similar to defining the cut for a Surface Milling NCsequence.
� Cut Line—Mill the selected surfaces by defining the shape of the first, last, andsome intermediate cuts. When generating other cuts, the system gradually changestheir shape to accommodate surface topology. The user interface is similar todefining the cut for a Surface Milling NC sequence.
Depending on the selected method, the system displays the appropriate options in thelower portion of the Cut Definition dialog box.
5. Select the appropriate options in the Cut Definition dialog box and specify geometricreferences to define the cut according to the selected method. When satisfied with the cutdefinition, click OK to close the Cut Definition dialog box and generate the tool path.
6. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path to verify the tool path automaticallygenerated by the system. Use the Customize functionality, if needed, to adjust the toolpath.
7. Click Done Seq or Next Seq when satisfied.
Face Milling
About Face Milling
The Face option allows you to face down the workpiece with a flat or radiusend mill. You can select a planar surface, or coplanar surfaces, parallel to theretract plane. All inner contours in the selected faces (holes, slots) will beautomatically excluded. The system will generate the appropriate tool pathbased on the selected surface(s).
To Create a Face Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Face and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select a plane or several coplanar faces parallel to the retract plane.
212
� Start Point—Allows you to start machining at a specified corner of the selectedface. The following options are available:
Define—Select a datum point or vertex to override the system-defined start point.The corner closest to the selected datum point or vertex will be used.
Remove—Revert to the system-defined start point.
Show—Highlight the current start point (available only if a user-defined start pointis specified).
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Using Parameters in Face Milling
You can specify multiple cuts to depth using the STEP_DEPTH andNUMBER_CUTS parameters. The system will compute the number of cutsaccording to STEP_DEPTH, compare with NUMBER_CUTS, and use thegreater value. If you want just one cut at full depth, you can setNUMBER_CUTS to 1 and STEP_DEPTH to a relatively large value (greaterthan thickness of the stock to be removed).
The following illustration shows facing down the workpiece.
STEP_DEPTH = 10 (greater than part thickness)NUMBER_CUTS = 2
Approachmotion
Exit motion
Overtravelmotions
STEP_OVER
Note: For Assembly machining, or workpiece with no geometry, these parameters will beinterpreted differently: NUMBER_CUTS will determine the amount of slices, andSTEP_DEPTH—the offset between slices, that is, the first slice will be offset from theselected face by(NUMBER_CUTS-1)*STEP_DEPTH.
213
The number of cuts per slice is determined in a similar way using thecombination of the STEP_OVER and NUMBER_PASSES parameters.However, if NUMBER_PASSES is set to 1, the STEP_OVER value will beignored and only one pass per slice will be made. This is helpful andmeaningful only when a large enough tool is used.
APPROACH_DISTANCE + START_OVERTRAVEL + tool radius(for ENTRY_EDGE = LEADING_EDGE)
EXIT_DISTANCE + END_OVERTRAVEL + tool radius(for CLEARANCE_EDGE = HEEL)
NUMBER_PASSES = 1
The BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW parameter specifies the stock allowance onthe surface being faced. The default, “-, sets the bottom stock allowance to 0.
The tool path can be extended past the selected surface edges using theSTART_OVERTRAVEL and END_OVERTRAVEL parameters. TheAPPROACH_DISTANCE and EXIT_DISTANCE parameters apply to thefirst approach into a slice and the last exit from a slice, respectively. TheAPPROACH_FEED and EXIT_FEED can be specified for these motions ifdesired, otherwise, CUT_FEED will be used. All these parameters aremeasured with respect to a certain point of the tool, defined by theENTRY_EDGE and CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter values, describedfollowing.
The following graphic illustrates the approach, exit, and overtravel motionsbased on the parameter values.
214
EXIT_DISTANCE + END_OVERTRAVEL
END_OVERTRAVEL
APPROACH_DISTANCE + START_OVERTRAVEL
END_OVERTRAVEL
START_OVERTRAVEL
ENTRY_EDGE = HEELCLEARANCE_EDGE=LEADING_EDGE
Reference part (selected face)
tool
The CLEARANCE_EDGE parameter specifies which point of the tool is to beused for measuring the exit motions and the overtravel motions when the toolleaves the material:
• HEEL (default)—The heel of the tool.
• CENTER—The center of the tool.
• LEADING_EDGE—The leading edge of the tool.
The ENTRY_EDGE parameter is similarly used to measure the motionswhere the tool approaches material. It has the same values asCLEARANCE_EDGE (LEADING_EDGE is the default).
The following illustration shows the overtravel motion depending onCLEARANCE_EDGE.
215
Reference part(selected face)
ToolWorkpiece
END_OVERTRAVEL
END_OVERTRAVEL
END_OVERTRAVEL
CLEARANCE_EDGE = HEEL
CLEARANCE_EDGE = CENTER
CLEARANCE_EDGE =LEADING_EDGE
The entire part is used to calculate tool clearance. That is, whenENTRY_EDGE is LEADING_EDGE or CLEARANCE_EDGE is HEEL, thetool is tangent to the entire section of the part (as shown in the followingillustration).
Part outlineToolCut motion
This NC sequence is intended to be used for facing down the workpiece;therefore, no gouge avoidance checking for internal islands or adjacent walls,will be performed.
Profile Milling
About Profile Milling
Profile milling is used to rough or finish mill vertical or slanted surfaces. Thesurfaces selected must allow for a continuous tool path. The depth of the cutis defined by the depth of the selected surfaces. You can also use theAXIS_SHIFT parameter.
Notes:
� To just make one profile pass around the part at full depth, make STEP_DEPTHgreater than part thickness.
216
� To create a succession of profiling passes with horizontal offset, use theNUM_PROF_PASSES and PROF_INCREMENT parameters.
The following illustration shows 3-Axis Profiling.
Select all theside surfaces.
By default, the system will detect undercuts when degouging a 3-Axisprofiling tool path. If you want to be able to machine an undercut, setGOUGE_AVOID_TYPE to TIP_ONLY. The following illustration showsmachining an undercut.
toolpart
GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE TIP_ONLY
3-Axis profiling will clean up the top horizontal edges of selected surfaces, asshown in the following figure. If there is another surface bounding the topedge, select it as a Check Surface to avoid gouging.
Topmost toolposition (to cleanup the edge)
Select these surfaces forgouge checking.
Surface being profiled(side view)
5-Axis surface profiling can be used for swarf cutting, as shown in thefollowing illustration. The tool axis will stay tangent to the surface beingmachined. Set the AXIS_SHIFT parameter to a positive value.
217
AXIS_SHIFT
To Create a Profile Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Profile from the MILL SEQ menu. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis if applicable(the options available depend on the number of axes specified for the workcell). ChooseDone.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to mill.
� ScallopSrf—Allows you to select surfaces that will be excluded from scallopcomputation if SCALLOP_HGT is specified.
� Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
218
Pocket Milling
About Pocket Milling
Pocketing can be used to finish mill after a Rough Volume operation, or fordirect finishing. The surfaces selected must allow for a continuous tool path.The pocket may include horizontal, vertical, or slanted surfaces. The walls ofthe pocket will be milled as with Profiling, the bottom—as the bottomsurfaces in Volume milling.
To Create a Pocket Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Pocketing and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to mill.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
219
Example: Pocket Milling
Material leftafter Volumemilling
Select all surfaces in thepocket (use Mill Volume).
Trajectory Milling
About Trajectory Milling
Trajectory milling allows you to sweep a tool along any user-definedtrajectory. It can be used for milling horizontal slots: the shape of the toolmust correspond to that of the slot. To define the tool path, you mustinteractively specify the trajectory of the control point of the tool using theCustomize functionality.
To Create a Trajectory Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Trajectory from the MILL SEQ menu. Select 3 Axis, 4 Axis, or 5 Axis ifapplicable (the options available depend on the number of axes specified for theworkcell). Choose Done.
3. If you have specified the tool, site, coordinate systems, and retract surface at setup time,you do not have to select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 4. Ifyou choose Seq Setup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, availablefor all the NC sequence types, and the following specific option:
Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed. If thetool comes in contact with a Check Surface, it will retract to avoid this surface, and thenproceed to the next millable portion of the specified trajectory.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface forall selected options in turn.
220
When specifying the tool for 3-Axis Trajectory milling, selecting Set brings you thefollowing options:
� Edit—Edit parameters file for a standard tool.
� Sketch—Sketch the tool section.
4. Choose Customize and interactively specify the Automatic Cut motions. Connect theAutomatic Cut motions using the Approach and Exit Tool Motions.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Sketching the Tools for Trajectory Milling
For 3-Axis Trajectory milling, you can either use standard tools, or sketchyour own tool for the NC sequence. The tool is sketched as a revolvedprotrusion:
• The sketch represents half of the tool cross-section. The whole sketch must lie on one sideof the axis of symmetry. The axis of symmetry must be vertical, with the sketch lying onthe right.
• The section must be closed.
For a sketched tool, you can specify a control point other than its tip byadding a coordinate system to the tool section sketch, as shown in thefollowing illustration. The tool will then be swept so that its control pointfollows the specified trajectory.
For standard (edited) tools, and for sketched tools with no control pointspecified, the tip of the tool will be used. The tip of a standard tool isdetermined by the tool’s control point. The tip of a sketched tool isdetermined as the lowest point of the tool section sketch (the lower-left ifthere are several equally low vertices).
Note: Make sure to specify the tool offset option correctly when using a control point. Forexample, if you select side edges of the slot and place your control point on the peripheryof the tool, choose None for the tool offset direction. Also make sure to select the cutdirection depending on the orientation of the coordinate system used as the tool controlpoint: when the tool travels along the trajectory, the X-axis must point towards thetrajectory while the Y-axis is pointing up.
The following illustration shows specifying a control point for a sketched tool.
221
Select these edges.
Sketch thistool.
Tool control point
To Create Automatic Cut Motions for Trajectory Milling
The way cut motion is created depends on the cut motion type. The followingprocedure lists the steps common to creating all types of cut motions. Forinformation on specific aspects of creating a cut motion, refer to the followingprocedures.
1. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
3. Select the type of cut motion from the INTERACT PATH menu (Sketch, Edge) and Done.
4. The Cut option in the INT CUT menu is selected automatically. Select the appropriateoptions in the CUT ALONG menu, depending on the cut motion type, and create a cutmotion.
5. Choose Ends if you want to adjust the ends of the cut motion.
6. Choose Corners if you want to apply corner conditions.
7. You can use the Check Surfs option to select surfaces against which gouge checking willbe performed.
8. Choose Play Cut to display the cut motion as it is currently defined. The Info optionbrings up the INFO ITEMS menu. You can use the Parameters option in the INT CUTmenu, if needed, to modify the cut motion parameters.
9. When satisfied with the cut motion, choose Done Cut.
10. If you want to define another cut motion, choose Next Cut from the NEXT SLICED menu,and repeat steps 3 through 9. When finished, choose Done/Return from the NEXTSLICED menu.
If you use the same type of cut motion for a subsequent slice, the CUT ALONGmenu settings will be modal. For example, to mill a horizontal slot in step
222
depth increments, you can define the edges, direction, and offset for the firstcut motion only, and then just change the height for each subsequent cutmotion. Note, however, that whenever you select Edge or Curve from theCUT ALONG menu, the Direction and Offset options will be selectedautomatically.
To Sketch a Cut Motion
1. Choose Sketch and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
2. The Sketch option in the CUT ALONG menu is automatically selected. Choose Done.
3. Set up the sketching plane and the sketcher reference plane. If Height is not specified,the cut motion will be located in the sketching plane.
4. Sketch the cut motion. Dimension and regenerate the sketch. Choose Done.
To Define a Cut Motion Using Edges or Curves
1. Choose Edge (Curve) and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
2. If you use Edge, select one of the following options:
� On/Offset—Drive the tool along selected edges.
� Fit—Fit the tool between surfaces adjacent to specified edges. This option is onlyapplicable when using a ball endmill.
3. The Edge (Curve), Direction, and Offset options in the CUT ALONG menu areautomatically selected. Choose Done.
4. The CHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, Tangnt Chain, BndryChain, Surf Chain, Select, and Unselect. Select edges to follow using the CHAINmenu options. All selected edges must form a continuous tool path.
5. Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
6. Another red arrow appears. Specify the tool offset:
� None—The tool will follow the selected edges.
� Left—The cut motion will be offset to the left.
� Right—The cut motion will be offset to the right.
223
The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of the offset is withrespect to direction of trajectory, selected in the previous step; when you select an offsetoption, the red arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
Tip: Fitting the Tool Between the Surfaces
When you use a ball endmill in a 3-Axis Trajectory milling NC sequence, andcreate a cut motion using Edges, you can use the Fit option to fit the toolbetween surfaces adjacent to specified edges. Another way to produce asimilar tool path (for any type of Mill tool) is to use Cut Line machining withTool Extent.
The following illustration shows fitting the tool between the surfaces whenmilling along an edge.
Select this edge using the Fit option and indicate Rightfor offset direction.
The following illustration shows fitting the tool between the surfaces usingCut Line machining.
Select this surface tomachine.
Select this surface asCheck Surface for CutLine machining.
Select the edge of the surface generated by Tool Extentboth as the Start and the End cut line.
224
To Define a Cut Motion Using Surfaces
1. Choose Surface and Done from the INTERACT PATH menu.
2. The Surface, Direction, and Height options in the CUT ALONG menu are selectedautomatically. Choose Done.
3. Select surfaces to follow. The surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path.
4. Specify direction of cutting motion using Flip and Okay, according to the red arrow.
5. Specify height.
6. The cut motion will be created along the selected surfaces at the specified height.
To Specify Height
You can specify the height of the cut motion using the Height option in theCUT ALONG menu. The height specification is mandatory if you use surfacesto define the cut motion; for other types it is optional.
When you choose Height, the HEIGHT menu appears with the options:
• Add—Brings up the CTM DEPTH menu, containing the commands Specify Plane,Select, and Z Depth. To specify the height or depth of the cut motion, create or select aplane, select nonplanar surfaces, or enter a value for height with respect to the NCsequence coordinate system. The tool trajectory, when defined, will then be projected inthe level of the selected surface or plane.
• Remove—Remove the currently used height reference. You will have a choice ofselecting the reference(s) to delete using Remove Single, or deleting all references usingRemove All.
• Show—Show the plane or surface that is currently used for height reference. If Z depthis used, the appropriate depth will be marked by a cyan rectangle enclosing the contourof the manufacturing model.
225
Example: Specifying Height and Surfaces
Select all the inside surfaces (useLoop, select the bottom surface).
Select bottom surface forHeight. Cut motion
You can select nonplanar surfaces of the part for Height specification. Theseare the surfaces that will be machined by the end portion of the tool, ratherthan its side. The following shows an example of selecting surfaces to createthe desired cut motion for 3-Axis Trajectory milling.
Note: A Height plane will always override the location of CSYS in a Sketched Tool.
Example: Specifying Height and Check Surfaces
The tool fits within theselected surfaces.
Select this surface tocreate the cut motion.
Cut motion
Check surface Height surface
Multi-Step and Multi-Pass Trajectory Milling
Multi-Step Trajectory Milling
226
Multi-step Trajectory milling can be performed by specifying either thedesired STEP_DEPTH (in which case the cuts will be repeated in these stepdepth increments), or the desired NUMBER_CUTS. If both are specified, thehigher of the two numbers of cuts will be used. The last pass will coincidewith the specified trajectory.
The Start Height option in the CUT ALONG menu allows you to specify theheight of the first pass. If Start Height is not specified, the top of theworkpiece will be used. For Assembly machining, or workpiece with nogeometry, you have to either specify the Start Height, or specify both theSTEP_DEPTH and NUMBER_CUTS. In this last case, the parameters areinterpreted differently: NUMBER_CUTS will determine the number ofpasses, and STEP_DEPTH—the offset between the passes, that is, the firstpass will be offset from the specified trajectory by (NUMBER_CUTS-1)*STEP_DEPTH.
Note: The Start Height option is grayed out if neither STEP_DEPTH norNUMBER_CUTS has been specified for the NC sequence.
The user interface for specifying Start Height is the same as specifyingHeight.
Multi-Pass Trajectory MillingMulti-pass Trajectory milling (a succession of trajectory passes withhorizontal offset) can be performed by using the NUM_PROF_PASSES andPROF_INCREMENT parameters. The last pass will coincide with thespecified trajectory.
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Edges or Curves
1. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
3. Choose Curve from the DRIVE ALNG menu.
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing theCUTMOTION SETUP menu to appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
� Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
� Curve—Define the trajectory by selecting edges or datum curves to follow. TheCHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, Tangnt Chain, BndryChain, Surf Chain, Select, and Unselect. Select edges or curves to follow usingthe CHAIN menu options. All selected edges or curves must form a continuous toolpath.
227
� Height—Specify the height of the cut.
� Start Height—Specify the height of the first pass for multi-step Trajectory milling.
� Direction—Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to thered arrow.
� Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
� Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation. Activates the AXISCNTRL menu with the following options:
Along Z—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequence coordinatesystem.
Axis Def—Displays the AXIS DEF menu, which lets you add, remove, redefine, andshow axis definitions at selected locations along the trajectory.
Norm to Part—Select a control surface, which must be adjacent to one of theselected edges. The tool axis will be normal to the control surface.
� Corners—Specify the corner conditions.
� Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset (None, Left, orRight). The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of theoffset is with respect to direction of trajectory; when you select an offset option, thered arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
� Matrl Side—Specify the material side using the Left and Right options in theMATRL SIDE menu.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
� Ends—Adjust the cut motion ends.
5. Choose Done from the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to begin specifying the cut. The systemwill start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Surfaces
1. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
3. Choose Surface from the DRIVE ALNG menu.
228
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing theCUTMOTION SETUP menu to appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
� Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
� Drive Surfaces—Define the trajectory by selecting surfaces that the tool will followwith its side. The surfaces must allow for a continuous tool path.
� From/To Control—If you do not want to machine all the selected surfaces, selectedges to machine. The CHAIN menu appears with the options One By One, TangntChain, Bndry Chain, Surf Chain, Select, and Unselect. Using the CHAIN menuoptions, select edges on drive surfaces. All selected edges must form a continuoustool path. The following illustration shows an example of using From/To Control.
1. Select these two surfaces as drive surfaces.
This portion of the second surface is alsoselected. To avoid machining it, use From/ToControl.
2. Choose From/To Control and select thesetwo edges.
Auto Plunge Automatic Cut
Retract
� Height—Specify the height of the cut.
� Start Height—Specify the height of the first pass for multi-step Trajectory milling.
� Direction—Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to thered arrow.
� Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
� Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation. Another way tocontrol to the tool axis orientation is by using the AXIS_DEF_CONTROL parameter.
� Corners—Specify the corner conditions.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
� Ends—Adjust the cut motion ends.
229
5. Choose Done from the CUTMOTION SETUP menu to begin specifying the cut. The systemwill start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. Once you have specified the cut, the system displays the TRAJ PREVIEW menu with thefollowing opitons:
� Preview—The system shows the edges on surfaces to be machined, and displys thetool axis orientation as vectors along these edges.
� From/To Control—Reselect edges on surfaces to machine, as described in Step 4.
� Axis Control—Apply additional control to tool axis orientation.
If a drive surface can not be machined without gouging, the system outputs theestimated value of possible gouge in the message area at the same time as the TRAJPREVIEW menu appears. The surfaces being gouged are highlighted and the points ofpossible gouge are indicated.
Note: Another way to call up the TRAJ PREVIEW menu is to select Preview from theCUT MTN menu.
To Create Axis Definitions Along the Trajectory
1. Select the Axis Control option in the CUTMOTION SETUP menu. If defining the cutmotion using edges or curves, choose Axis Def from the AXIS CNTRL menu. The systemdisplays the AXIS DEF menu, which lets you add, remove, redefine, and show axisdefinitions.
2. Choose Add.
3. Select a point on a trajectory segment to place the axis definition.
4. Specify a parameter value along this segment to place the point, with 0 corresponding tothe beginning of the segment and 1 to its end. The ENTER VAL menu will contain thevalue corresponding to your select point, as well as 0, 1, and the Enter option, whichallows you to type a value you want.
5. Specify the tool axis orientation at selected point using one of the following options in theAXIS DEF TYPE menu:
� Along Z Dir—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequencecoordinate system.
� Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis to define the tool axis.
� Enter Value—Type the i, j, k values in the appropriate text boxes of the AxisDirection dialog box and click OK.
230
Example: Adding Axis Definitions
The following illustration shows an example of using the parameterAXIS_DEF_CONTROL in combination with adding axis definitions along thetrajectory, to avoid gouging a nondevelopable surface.
Select all these surfaces as DriveSurfaces.
To avoid gouging this nondevelopablesurface, set AXIS_DEF_CONTROL toFROM_AXES_AND_DRIVE_SURFACEand add these axis definitions.
To Create a 5-Axis Cut Motion Using Two Contours
1. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
3. Choose Two Contour from the DRIVE ALNG menu.
4. The CUT MTN menu will appear with Define Cut already chosen, causing theCUTMOTION SETUP menu to appear as well. The following commands will be listed:
� Parameters—Modify manufacturing parameters for the current cut motion.
� Contour1—Sketch or select the first contour in the cut.
� Contour2—Sketch or select the second contour in the cut.
231
� Side Surfs—Indicate the contours of the cut by selecting side surfaces. Thiscommand is used in place of the Contour1 and Contour2 commands.
� Synch—Brings up the SYNCH menu for specifying points to synchronize thepositions on Contour1 and Contour2.
� Direction—Specify direction of trajectory using Flip and Okay, according to thered arrow.
� Check Surfs—Select surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.
� Corners—Specify the corner conditions.
� Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset (None, Left, orRight). The offset distance is half of the CUTTER_DIAM value. The direction of theoffset is with respect to direction of trajectory; when you select an offset option, thered arrow will show the offset direction. Choose Done when satisfied.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
� Ends—Adjust the cut motion ends.
5. Choose Done from the CUT ALONG menu to begin specifying the cut.
6. The TRAJ OPT menu will appear in turn for Contour1 and Contour2; choose Sketch orSelect to indicate the contour.
7. If you are creating synch points, the SYNCH menu appears with the following commands:
� Add—Select a location on a contour to place a synch point.
� Remove—Choose an existing synch point to delete.
� Show—Display existing synch points.
� Done/Return—Quit the SYNCH menu and return to defining the cut motion.
8. Choose Play Cut from the CUT MTN menu to display the cut motion.
Note: If you get an error message “Cut motion cannot be created try adding more synchpoints.
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends
After an Automatic Cut motion is created, its ends can be extended ortrimmed using the following procedure.
232
1. Choose Ends from the INT CUT menu.
2. Choose Start from the CUT ENDS menu to adjust the start point.
3. Choose one of:
� On—Place the start point of the cut motion at the start of the defined trajectory (thedefault).
� Specify—Move the start point along the defined trajectory. When you select thisoption, the start point of the cut motion starts following the mouse (along the cutmotion, if trimmed, and tangent to the first segment, if extended). The new cutmotion definition is temporary highlighted in green for better visibility.
4. If the cut motion is adjusted using Specify, select the dimensioning type:
� Arc Length—Enter arc length along the chain, i.e, length ratio of the added orsubtracted segment to the original length of the cut motion. Positive valuecorresponds to extended cut motion, negative—to a trimmed one.
� Offset Plane—Select a plane to measure offset from, then enter the offset value.Positive value means that the offset is to the positive side of the surface (away fromthe solid material).
� Offset Csys—Select a coordinate system to measure offset from. Select axis alongwhich to measure the offset, then enter the offset value. Positive value means thepositive axis direction.
5. Choose End from the CUT ENDS menu to adjust the end point and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
To Specify Corner Conditions
1. Choose Corners from the INT CUT menu.
2. The CORNER COND menu appears with the following options:
� Add—Select corners to add corner conditions.
� Redefine—Respecify a corner condition.
� Delete—Allows you to select a corner condition to delete.
� Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can usethis option more than once; when there are no more corner conditions left, theDelete Last option becomes inaccessible.
� Delete All—Deletes all the corner conditions.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appearswith the following options:
233
� Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting theappropriate option. After each selection, the corner condition will be added at theselected point. Choose Done Sel when finished.
� Automatic—Corner conditions will be automatically added at all the corners.Corner conditions will be added according to the following rules:
All concave corners will be filleted.
All convex corners on an outside contour of a part will be filleted.
All convex corners on an inside contour of a part will be looped.
If the system is unable to determine the type of the contour, you will be prompted tospecify if this is in inside or an outside contour using the following options:
� Female Part—Inside contour.
� Male Part—Outside contour.
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change themusing the AUTO SELECT menu:
� Next—Display the next assigned corner condition.
� Prev—Display the previous corner condition.
� Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
� Remove—Delete corner condition at the highlighted corner.
� Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Straight cornerconditions will be highlighted in yellow, convex—in red, and concave—in cyan.
� Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the MessageWindow.
Corner Condition Types
Corner conditions can be specified for the vertices of the cut motion createdusing the Edge or Curve option, to avoid gouging sharp corners. Wherever acorner condition is added, a small parallelogram will be incorporated in thecut motion: the tool will continue moving along the first entity, then return toenter tangent to the second entity. The size of the parallelogram is defined bythe path parameter CORNER_LENGTH.
If you add a corner condition along an entity or between two tangent entities,the angle of the parallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLEparameter; if the condition is at a vertex and the corner is sharp, the
234
CORNER_ANGLE value will be ignored and the sides of the parallelogramwill be formed as a continuation of the adjoining entities.
The following graphic illustrates the CORNER_LENGTH andCORNER_ANGLE parameters.
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_ANGLE
The following corner condition types are available:
• Straight—Create a straight corner condition.
• Concave—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is concave.
• Convex—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is convex.
• Chamfer—A chamfer whose size is defined by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, whichrepresents the distance cut on each side of the corner.
• Fillet—Create a fillet corner motion.
• Loop—Create a loop corner motion. Available for convex corner conditions only.
Thread Milling
About Thread Milling
Thread (helical) milling allows you to cut internal and external threads oncylindrical surfaces.
When creating a Thread milling NC sequence, you will have to:
• Use a tool of type THREAD_MILL instead of a regular milling tool.
• When setting parameters, specify THREAD_FEED, THREAD_FEED_UNITS, andTHREAD_DIAMETER (optional).
• Define the thread by specifying whether it is external or internal, specifying the major orminor thread diameter, selecting cylindrical surface(s) to create the thread on, andspecifying the machining and entry/exit parameters.
235
To Create a Thread Milling NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Thread | Done. You must be in a Millor Mill/Turn workcell.
2. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Seq Setup.
In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu contains the following specific option:
Define Cut—Specify the thread parameters and placement references by using theThread Mill dialog box.
The required options are selected automatically. Select additional options, if desired, andchoose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
3. Click Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
4. Click Done Seq or Next Seq when satisfied.
The Thread Mill Dialog Box
The top portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains the following iconsand options:
—Copy rules from a previously defined Thread Milling NC sequence.
—Show the currently used rules.
Thread Style—Specify the thread orientation:
• Internal—For internal threads, you have to specify Major Diameter, located on theDefine Thread tabbed page.
• External—For external threads, you have to specify Minor Diameter, located on theDefine Thread tabbed page.
The middle portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains four tabbed pages:Define Thread, Place Thread, Mill Thread, and Thread Entry & Exit.
236
The Define Thread tabbed page contains the following options:
• Thread Hand—Specifies the thread hand: Righthand or Lefthand.
• Major Diameter—If the Thread Style is specified as Internal, type a value for thethread's major diameter. If you have specified a value for the manufacturing parameterTHREAD_DIAMETER, this value appears as the default in the Major Diameter textbox.
• Minor Diameter—If the Thread Style is specified as External, type a value for thethread's minor diameter. If you have specified a value for the manufacturing parameterTHREAD_DIAMETER, this value appears as the default in the Minor Diameter textbox.
• Thread Series—The possible values are: UNC, UNF, M_COARSE, M_FINE.
• Pitch—The thread pitch. Corresponds to the manufacturing parameterTHREAD_FEED.
• Pitch Units—Corresponds to the manufacturing parameter THREAD_FEED_UNITS.The possible values are TPI (threads per inch), MM (millimeter per revolution), andINCH (inch per revolution).
• Thread Depth—Defines the thread depth:
� Auto—The system automatically determines the thread depth based on itsplacement references, and taking into consideration the tool parametersInsert_Length and End_Offset.
� Blind—Specify the initial and final depth for the thread by selecting planar surfacesor creating datum planes parallel to the retract plane.
The Place Thread tabbed page contains the options for thread placement.You can also set the order of machining for multiple threads.
You can use the following methods of thread placement:
• Diameter—Place threads on all the cylindrical surfaces (Internal or External) of aspecified diameter.
• Collect On Surface—Place threads on all the holes or cylindrical bosses on a specifiedsurface.
• Feature Parameter—Place threads on features that have certain parameter values.When you select this method, the Feature Parameter list box contains a list of allfeature parameters associated with Hole and Cosmetic Thread features in the model.When you select a parameter name in the list, the Value text box below will contain adrop-down list of all the currently present values for this parameter. Select an operator
237
(such as "=") and a value. The system displays the selected parameter and its value inthe list box below and selects all features with the appropriate parameter value.
• Datum Axes—Select the datum axes that belong to the holes or cylindrical protrusionswhere you want to place the threads.
Placing threads by Diameter, Collect On Surface, and FeatureParameter implies specifying a rule for the placement surface selection. Forexample, if you cut an Internal thread and specify a diameter value, thesystem will search the model for the holes of this diameter. If you select asurface, the system will include all holes on this surface. If you specify acombination of rules, the system will look for holes that satisfy all of them;that is, if you specify a diameter value and select a surface, the system willinclude only the holes of the specified diameter that are located on theselected surface. The Datum Axes method lets you explicitly select andunselect datum axes, regardless of other rules used in thread placement.
Once you have selected a thread placement method, click the Plus (+) icon toadd references of the appropriate type (for example, select the diameters ordatum axes). All the selected references are listed in the list box in themiddle of the Place Thread tabbed page. To remove a reference, click theMinus (-) icon and select the reference to remove in the list box.
If you place threads by Datum Axes, selecting the Thread patternedfeatures checkbox and selecting an axis belonging to a pattern of featureswill place threads on all the features in this pattern.
The lower portion of the Place Thread tabbed page contains the options forsetting the order of machining for multiple threads:
• Closest—The system determines which order results in the shortest machine motiontime. You can click the Start hole/boss for scan selection arrow and select the first holeor boss to be machined.
• Pick Order—The threads are cut in the same order as the holes or bosses are selected.If one choice results in more than one hole or boss being selected (for example, CollectOn Surface selection), these features are scanned by incrementing the Y coordinate andgoing back and forth in the X direction. Then the pick order is resumed.
The Mill Thread tabbed page describes the cut motion:
• Continuous—The thread is machined by one continuous cut motion, regardless of thenumber of inserts on the thread tool.
• Interrupted—For multiple insert threads, the thread is machined by a series of cutmotions. A single full thread (plus the overlap value) covers the entire length of the tool.You can specify the overlap values:
� Thread Overlap—Type a value (in degrees) for thread overlap. If a value is otherthan 0 (the default), the start and end of the cut for each tooth are not coincident.
238
� Pickup Overlap— Type a value (in threads or degrees) for pickup overlap. If avalue is other than 0 (the default), the next cut will start earlier than the coincidentposition.
These options control where the material is relative to the tool:
• Climb— The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).Corresponds to the CLIMB value of the CUT_TYPE manufacturing parameter.
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation). Corresponds to the UPCUT value of the CUT_TYPE manufacturing parameter.
The following options define the beginning and end of the cut motion:
• Start Overtravel—Specifies the initial height of the tool above the start surface at thebeginning of the tool path.
• End Overtravel— Specifies the height at the end of the tool path that the toolovertravels below the end surface.
• Thread Start Angle—Specifies the angle in the XY plane that determines where thethread mill starts to cut the thread.
The Thread Entry & Exit tabbed page contains the options and parametersfor defining the Entry and Exit moves:
• Entry—Specify the type of the entry move. The values are:
� None—No entry move is generated.
� Helical—The tool approaches the start of the cut motion in a helical motion.
� Normal to Thread—The entry motion is a straight line normal to the cut motion.
• Exit—Specify the type of the exit move. The values are:
� None—No exit move is generated.
� Helical— The tool exits the cut motion in a helical motion.
� Normal to Thread—The exit motion is a straight line normal to the cut motion.
The following parameters define the Entry and Exit moves (the initial valuescorrespond to those specified when defining the manufacturing parametersfor the NC sequence):
• Approach Distance—Specifies the length of the entry move.
• Exit Distance—Specifies the length of the exit move.
239
• Lead Radius—The radius of the tangential circular movement of the tool when leadingin or out.
• Entry Angle—Defines the angle of the helical entry motion.
• Exit Angle—Defines the angle of the helical exit motion.
• Normal Lead Step—The length of the linear movement that is normal to the tangentportion of the lead-in or lead-out motion.
• Tangent Lead Step—The length of the linear movement that is tangent to the circularlead-in or lead-out motion.
The lower portion of the Thread Mill dialog box contains the OK, Canceland Preview buttons.
Cutter Compensation in Thread Milling
To provide cutter compensation output in Thread milling, set the CUTCOMparameter to ON and specify a value for CUTCOM_REGISTER. The systemwill determine the cutcom direction (LEFT or RIGHT) based on the materialside, which you specify using the Internal or External option in the ThreadMill dialog box, and the direction of the tool movement.
In order to invoke cutter compensation, a linear motion in the XY-plane isrequired:
• When APPROACH_TYPE or EXIT_TYPE is set to HELICAL or NONE, use theNORMAL_LEAD_STEP and TANGENT_LEAD_STEP parameters to specify the lengthof this linear motion. The linear motion will be created at the Z level of the initial (forapproach) or final (for exit) point of the thread motion. The segment defined byTANGENT_LEAD_STEP will be tangent to projection of tool path at this point. IfTANGENT_LEAD_STEP is not defined, the segment defined by NORMAL_LEAD_STEPwill be normal to projection of tool path at this initial/final point; otherwise it will benormal to the tangent linear segment and attached to its end. Cutcom is invoked on thefirst linear move, and turned off on the last linear move.
• When APPROACH_TYPE or EXIT_TYPE is set to RADIAL, the CUTCOM statementwill be placed on the radial approach or exit motion. The distance is determined by theAPPROACH_DIST/EXIT_DIST value.
Example: Thread Milling
The following illustration shows a Thread milling tool path.
240
Minor DiameterHelical toolpath
End plane Thread cylinder
Start plane
Tool
The following illustration shows Approach and Exit motions for threadmilling.
Exit Distance
Helicalapproachmotion
Radial exitmotion
Entry Angle
Engraving
About Engraving
Engraving NC sequences are generally created by the tool following a Groovecosmetic feature. The tool diameter determines the width of cut, and theGROOVE_DEPTH parameter determines the depth of cut. Engraving can bespecified as 3- or 5-Axis.
For 5-Axis Engraving, there are two ways to specify the tool trajectory:
• By selecting a reference Groove feature to follow. The tool axis will be normal to thesurface that the reference Groove feature is projected onto.
• By selecting a set of edges for the tool to follow. In this case, you will have to select acontrol surface, that is, a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. The control surfacemust be a surface adjacent to one of the edges selected for the tool trajectory. For allother edges, the surface to the same side of the edge will be used as control surface.
241
To Create an Engraving NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Engraving and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Groove Feat—Select a reference Groove feature.
� Edges—Select the edges for the tool to follow. Available for 5-Axis Engraving only.Must be used together with the following Norm Surf option.
� Norm Surf—Select a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Available for 5-Axis Engraving only. Must be used together with the Edges option above.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Plunge Milling
About Plunge Milling
Plunge milling lets you roughly machine deep cavities by a series ofoverlapping plunges into the material. The tool makes its first plunge intothe material along a predrilled axis, parallel to the Z-axis of the NC Sequencecoordinate system, then retracts to the level specified byCLEAR_DISTANCE, moves over in the XY-plane and makes the next plunge.Distance between the successive plunges is controlled by the PLUNGE_STEPparameter.
You can use flat and radius end mills, as well as plunge milling tools, tocreate Plunge milling NC sequences.
Note: Ball end mills can not be used for Plunge milling.
242
To Create a Plunge Milling NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Mill or Mill/Turnworkcell.
2. Choose Plunge and Done from the MILL SEQ menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Surfaces—Select surfaces to mill.
� Window—Create or select a Mill Window. This option and Surfaces are mutuallyexclusive. If you use the Window option, then all the surfaces within the specifiedMill Window will be selected.
� Start Axes—Specify predrilled axes to define the start point for every plunge region.
� Check Surfs—Select additional surfaces against which gouge checking will beperformed.
� Build Cut—Access the Build Cut functionality.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality toadjust the tool path.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Specifying Start Axes
Plunge milling tools can not cut with their centers. Therefore, in Plungemilling the tool makes its first plunge within a region along a predrilled axis,which must be located at the deepest point of the region.
When you choose Start Axes from the SEQ SETUP menu, the system displaysthe START AXES menu with the following options:
• Add—Select or create a datum axis to serve as a predrilled axis.
• Remove—Select a previously defined Start Axis to remove.
243
• Remove All—Remove all Start Axis definitions.
• Show—The system highlights all Start Axes in cyan.
You have to specify a Start Axis for each milling region. The system will thencompute the tool path for the region based on the SCAN_TYPE and using theStart Axis as a start point.
Example: Plunge Milling
Select thesesurfaces.
Select theseaxes as StartAxes.
CUT_ANGLE 90PLUNGE_STEP
Mill Geometry
About Mill Geometry
To create a milling NC sequence, you have to define geometry that you wantto mill. Pro/NC provides several tools that let you define mill geometry as aseparate feature, and then use this definition repeatedly for various NCsequences within the manufacturing model.
244
The simplest way to define geometry for a Volume or a 3-Axis ConventionalSurface milling NC sequence is by using a Mill Window, that is, by sketchingor selecting a closed contour in the retract plane. All surfaces visible withinthe contour will be milled. Mill Windows are separate features that can becreated at setup time, as well as at the time of defining an NC sequence.
Another way to define a Volume NC sequence is a Mill Volume. This is thevolume to be removed during an NC sequence. The tool will always be withinthe Mill Volume, that is, by default the tool can not penetrate any surfaces ofthe volume, except its top surfaces (at the time of creating an NC sequence,you can also explicitly specify side surfaces of a Mill Volume that can beviolated during tool approach and exit). To define the Mill Volume, you canreference geometry of design model, sketch volume to be machined orexcluded, intersect the volume with the workpiece or reference model, offsetsurfaces (for example, by tool radius). This set of tools can be used in anycombinations to define a single Mill Volume.
You can also select surfaces from a Mill Volume when defining Surfacemilling NC sequences (Conventional or Contour Surface milling, Facing,Profiling, and Pocketing).
Another tool for defining a milling NC sequence is creating a Mill Surface.This is a user-defined surface quilt that can be referenced by Surface millingNC sequences or by Mill Volumes.
Mill Window
About Mill Window
A Mill Window can either be defined during the time of creating an NCsequence, or predefined using the MFG GEOMETRY menu option MillWindow. To access this option, choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTUREor MACHINING menu, then Mfg Geometry.
When you choose Mill Window from the MFG GEOMETRY menu, theDEFINE WIND menu appears with the options:
• Redef Wind—Redefine a pre-existing Mill Window. Select the window to redefine from anamelist menu.
• Create Wind—Create a new Mill Window.
To Create a Mill Window
1. Choose Create Wind from the DEFINE WIND menu.
2. Enter a name for the window.
245
3. The feature creation dialog box appears. The elements are:
� Csys—Specify the coordinate system. When you create an NC sequence, the NCSequence coordinate system is the default.
� Plane—Specify the start plane, parallel to the XY plane of the coordinate system.When you create an NC sequence, the retract plane is the default.
� Window—Sketch or select a closed contour to define the window.
� Tool Side (Optional)—Specify how far the tool will go with respect to the windowoutline. The default is Tool In.
� Depth (Optional)—Specify the depth of the window. If you do not specify this, thesystem performs milling up to the surfaces visible from the Mill Window; through-allvertical and slanted surfaces will be milled up to the bottom of the reference part.
4. When you start defining Window, the MILL WIND menu appears with the followingoptions:
� Sketch—Define the window by sketching a closed contour. The system uses thestart plane as the sketching plane and orients the sketch so that the X-axis of thecoordinate system points to the right, and the Y-axis points up.
� Select—Define the window by selecting edges or curves that form a closed contour.This contour is then projected on the start plane to form the window outline.
5. If you choose to redefine the Tool Side, the TOOL SIDE menu appears with the followingoptions:
� To—The tool will always be completely within the window outline. Thecorresponding value in the dialog box is Tool In.
� On—The tool axis will reach the window outline. The corresponding value in thedialog box is Tool On.
� Past—The tool will go completely past the window outline. The corresponding valuein the dialog box is Tool Past.
Tool In Tool On Tool Past
6. If you choose to define Depth, the WND DEPTH menu appears with the following options:
246
� Define—Specify the window depth either by selecting a plane parallel to the startplane (Specify Plane), or by entering a Z value with respect to the windowcoordinate system (Z Depth).
� Remove—Remove the depth definition, that is, revert to the default depth.
� Show—Show the current depth definition. The system will display a cyan rectangleat the level of the current window depth.
To Use Reference Quilts
You can specify reference quilts to define the depth of your Mill Window. Usethis functionality if the surfaces below the window contain multiple smallpatches at different depths (for example, geometry created as a result ofIGES import).
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Machining > Mfg Setup > Ref Quilts.
2. Use the following options:
� Add—Select quilts (surface features) to use as machining references.
� Remove—Remove previously selected quilts.
� Show—Show selected quilts.
3. Click Done/Return when finished.
Mill Volumes
About Mill Volumes
A Mill Volume can either be defined during the time of creating an NCsequence, or predefined using the MFG GEOMETRY menu option MillVolume. To access this option, choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTUREor MACHINING menu, then Mfg Geometry.
If defining the volume at setup time, you have to specify the upwarddirection:
1. Select a planar surface, or create/select a datum plane that will be parallel to the XYcoordinate plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
2. A red arrow appears showing the current upward direction. Set the desired upwarddirection using Flip and Okay options.
247
To Gather a Mill Volume
Gathering allows you to reference surfaces and edges of the design model.
Generally, the gathering process includes several steps:
1. Select surfaces to be machined. The Select option provides multiple ways of surfaceselection, which are described below. All surfaces included in the volume definition willbe “sewn together to form a single quilt, and the system will “close the volumeautomatically by extruding the boundaries of this quilt vertically up to the retract plane(or, if defining the volume at setup time, the plane selected for upward direction).
2. If selected surfaces contain inner loops (holes, slots), that you want to ignore, use the Filloption. You can fill loops by individually selecting them, or by selecting a surface to fillall internal loops on it.
3. If you want to ignore some outer loops or exclude some of the selected surfaces from thevolume, use the Exclude option.
4. If you want to specify ways of “closing the volume, other than the default way describedabove, use the Close option.
As you modify the surface quilt and closing instructions, the volume isrecalculated. It can be displayed at any time using the Show Volumeoption.
You can repeatedly redefine the volume by adding more references of acertain type, or removing certain references. Whenever you select referencesfor gathering, the FEATURE REFS menu appears with the options:
• Add—Select additional references (this is the only option available when you startdefining the volume).
• Remove—Unselect some of the references. select surfaces or loops you want to unselect.
• Remove All—Unselect all references of the current type. For example, if the BndrySrfs option is highlighted, choosing Remove All will clear the definition of boundingsurfaces.
To Select Surfaces for a Mill Volume
When you choose Select for the first time and start selecting surfaces to beincluded in a volume definition, the following options are available:
248
• Surf & Bnd—Select one of the surfaces to be machined (“seed surface), and the boundingsurfaces. The system will include the selected surface and all its neighboring surfacesuntil the ones selected as bounding. You will be prompted to select the seed surfaceimmediately after you choose Surf & Bnd for the first time. Then use the followingoptions:
� Seed Surface—Change the seed surface, if needed.
� Bndry Srfs—Select bounding surfaces.
� Bndry Loops—Add outer loops of edges to boundary.
• Surfaces—Select continuous surfaces to be machined. All the selected surfaces will beincluded in the volume definition.
• Features—Select features to be machined. All the surfaces of selected features will beincluded in the volume definition.
• Mill Surf—Select a pre-defined Mill Surface from a namelist menu.
Repeatedly choosing Select will bring up the GATHER SPEC menu with theoptions:
• Type—Respecify the type (for example, Surf & Bnd instead of Surfaces). If you changethe type, all previous selections will be discarded. Therefore, whenever you attempt tochange the type, the system will prompt for confirmation.
• References—Reselect the feature references. This will bring up the SURF BND menu ifthe gather type is Surf & Bnd, and the FEATURE REFS menu in all other cases.
Once the surfaces are selected, the other options in the GATHER menubecome available. You can unselect surfaces, fill or exclude loops of edges,and otherwise enhance the volume definition created in the first step. Theways to do it depend on the option which you have used for surface selection:volumes gathered using Surf & Bnd follow different rules than thosecreated using one of the other options.
At any point, you can display the currently selected surfaces using the ShowSelect option. Outer (bounding) edges of selected surfaces will be displayedin yellow; inner (two-sided) and silhouette edges—in magenta.
Examples: Selecting Surfaces for a Mill Volume
The following illustration shows using Surfaces vs. Surf & Bnd whengathering a Mill Volume:
249
Select bounding surfaces (use Query Sel for hidden surfaces).
Mill Volume
Surf & Bnd
Surface
Select seedsurface
hidden
Select this surface. Mill Volume
Hidden
The following illustration shows using the Features option when gathering aMill Volume:
Selectthisfeature.
The following illustration shows using the Mill Surf option when gathering aMill Volume:
These surfaces are included in the MillSurface. Select any one.
250
To Exclude Surfaces and Outer Loops
The Exclude option is available only if you gather using an option other thanSurf & Bnd (for example, Surfaces). It allows you to:
• Surfaces—Exclude some of the chosen surfaces by selecting each of them individually.This is especially convenient when gathering using Features or Mill Surf.
• Loops—Exclude outer loops. Use this option to delete unwanted portions of surfacesselected for gathering.
Example: Excluding Outer Loops
The following illustration shows excluding outer loops:
Selecting this surfacecreates an unwanted portionof volume on the left,because its bottom is part ofthe same surface.
Mill VolumeMill Volume
Exclude this loop.
To Fill Inner Loops
When you fill an inner loop of edges on a surface selected for gathering it isequivalent to “patching the base quilt of the Mill Volume. The volume will bebuilt as if there was a smooth surface with no perforations. The Fill optionbrings up the GATHER FILL menu:
• All—Fill all loops on a selected surface. Select a surface. All inner loops on this surfacewill be filled, whether they belong to bounding surfaces or not.
251
• Loops—Select loops to be filled. For each loop to be filled, you have to select only oneedge. If you gather using Surf & Bnd, the edges must lie on the bounding surfaces.Select additional bounding surfaces if necessary.
Examples: Filling Inner Loops
The following illustration shows filling loops when gathering using Surf &Bnd:
1) Select seedsurface.
2) Select four sidesurfaces as bounding.
3) Select surfaces of the hole(both halves) as boundingsurfaces.
4) Fill this loop(Select edge of the hole). The hole will not
be milled.Mill Volume
The following illustration shows filling loops when gathering using Surfaces:
Mill Volume
The whole volume willbe milled.
Select this surfaceusing Surfaces.
This volumewill not bemilled.
Fill this loop.
Edges of the internal loopare also extended upward.
The internal loop will not be consideredwhen building the Mill Volume.
252
Note: A loop can not be filled if it belongs to more than two adjoiningsurfaces.
This loop can be fil led.
This loop cannot be filled(suppress the feature beforecreating the volume).
To Close a Mill Volume
The system will close the volume automatically, by extruding the boundariesof the selected surface quilt vertically up to the retract plane (or, if definingthe volume at setup time, the plane selected for upward direction). If youwant to specify a different way to close the volume, select Close. Thefollowing options are available:
• Define—Create a closure definition to replace the one supplied by the system.
• Delete—Remove the current closure definition (revert to the system-supplied one).
• Redefine—Respecify the closure definition references when a user definition alreadyexists.
• Show—Display the current closure definition.
When you choose Define or Redefine, the following options are available:
• Cap Plane—Select a planar surface or datum plane to be used for closing the volume.
• All Loops—All boundary loops in the current quilt will be extended to the cap plane.
• Sel Loops—Select loops to be extended to the cap plane. You have to select only oneedge in each loop.
Example: Closing a Volume when Milling a Through Pocket
When milling through pockets, you have to extend the edges at the bottom ofthe pocket downward, to indicate that the tool must go through, as shown inthe following illustration:
253
Select top of workpiece as CapPlane, then select top edgeusing Sel Loops.
Select bottom of workpieceas Cap Plane, then selectbottom edge using SelLoops.
Select boundingsurfaces(top and bottom).
Select seed surface.
The pocket isextended down.
hidden
To Show a Mill Volume Definition After Gathering
The Show Volume option allows you to check the current volume definition,to see if you need to exclude more loops, close differently. The Mill Volumewill be displayed in magenta. As you gather more references, the volumedisplay will change. To view the changes, repaint the screen and select ShowVolume again.
After you choose Done from the VOL GATHER menu, the Mill Volume youhave defined will be displayed in magenta. You can add and remove volumesto mill using Sketch, offset the sides, round some edges.
To Sketch a Mill Volume
1. Choose Sketch from the CREATE VOL menu.
2. If a volume is already present in the current definition, choose Add or Remove. Addwill add a “protrusion to the current volume, Remove will subtract the sketched volumefrom the current volume (as a “cut). If no volume is present, a volume “protrusion will beautomatically created.
Note: Think of Sketch as creating a protrusion or cut in a part that consists of just theMill Volume itself.
3. Choose options from the SOLID OPTS menu:
254
� Extrude—Creates a feature that is formed by projecting the section straight awayfrom the sketching plane.
� Revolve—Creates a feature by revolving the sketched section around a centerlinefrom the sketching plane into the part.
� Sweep—Creates a feature by sketching a trajectory and then sweeping a crosssection along it.
� Blend—Creates a feature that consists of a set of planar sections that are connectedby transition surfaces to form a solid.
� Use Quilt—Creates a feature by referencing a surface feature.
� Advanced—Creates a complex shape feature, for example, using datum curves ormultiple trajectories.
� Solid—Default for the above forms; creates solid geometry.
� Thin—Creates a thin feature.
4. Choose attributes appropriate for the selected form, such as depth option, degrees ofrotation.
5. Set up the Sketcher: select or create the sketching plane, choose the feature direction,specify the sketcher reference plane.
6. Sketch the section. Volume sections are sketched the same as for regular features(protrusions and cuts). Sketched entities can be aligned and dimensioned both to partgeometry and to the entities of other volume “chunks.
7. Regenerate and choose Done. The volume is added or subtracted.
The Sketch option can be used as many times as you like within a singlevolume definition.
Sketching a Mill Volume
Mill Volume can be defined by sketching, very much like you create regularfeatures (protrusions and cuts) in Pro/ENGINEER. If Sketch is selected asthe first option from the CREATE VOL menu, the sketched volume will beautomatically added. If a volume is already present in the current definition,you will have to specify if you wish to Add or Remove the volume you areabout to sketch.
Do not confuse removing volume by sketch, and removing workpiece materialby machining. Since you are defining a volume to be machined, that is,
subtracted from the workpiece, adding to this volume will increase theamount of material to be removed, and vice versa.
255
Examples: Combining Sketch and Gather
Sketch can be used after gathering part references to extend the MillVolume, or to exclude some areas from milling.
The following illustration shows an example of adding a sketched volume:
Mill Volume
Resulting volume
Section sketch (Use Edge)
Use Gather,Surfaces, selectthis surface.
Use Sketch,Add.
Mill ing NC sequencecompleted.
The following illustration shows an example of removing a sketched volume:
256
Gather, Surf & Bnd
Bounding surfacesSeed surface
Bottom edge
Sketch, RemoveFinal Mill Volume
Sectionsketch
Mill Volume goes all the waythrough.
To Trim a Mill Volume
A sketched volume can be trimmed by the reference model using the Trimoption in the CREATE VOL menu. When you select Trim, the system willautomatically subtract the reference model from the current volumedefinition. Only the remaining volume will be machined.
To make sure there will be no gouging, this option can also be used afteroffsetting all surfaces.
Note: Using Trim after defining the volume by gathering only does not make sense:Trim will use the same references as Gather does, so nothing will change.
257
Example: Trimming a Mill Volume
area toremove
The top surface and all three pockets will bemachined in a single NC sequence, as shown.
Step 1:Sketch extruded Thru All volume.Make sure it is deeper than thepockets to mill.
Step 3: Select Trim from theCreate Vol menu. Thereference part is subtractedfrom the volume to mill.
Step 2:Remove extra volume outside theworkpiece by sketching. This step canbe omitted if TRIM_TO_WORKPIECEis set to YES.
Section sketch
Millingvolume
Sectionsketch
Tip: Combining Sketch and Trim
A sketched section does not have to correspond exactly to the desired MillVolume. It can be sketched larger than needed, and then “trimmed to sizeusing:
• The Trim option—To subtract the reference model from the sketched volume.
• The TRIM_TO_WORKPIECE parameter—To confine the volume to be milled to thatinside the workpiece boundaries, in order to avoid air machining.
To Offset a Mill Volume
The options for offset are:
• Walls—All the side surfaces will be offset.
• Surfaces—Select surfaces to offset.
258
• Tool Radius—The offset distance will be equal to the tool radius.
• Value—The offset distance will be user-defined. Enter the offset value.
Note: In order to offset by tool radius, you have to create the volume at the time ofcreating the NC sequence, after the tool is specified.
• Horizontal—The bottom surface edges will be offset parallel to the XY plane.
• Tangential—The bottom surface edges will be offset tangent to the surface.
Offsetting a Mill Volume
Gathered or sketched volume can be extended by offset. Because the tool isalways inside the defined volume, this option can be used, for example, toclean the border edges of the workpiece.
Note: In this case, make sure to set the parameter TRIM_TO_WORKPIECEto NO.
If the volume is offsetby the tool radius, theborder edge will becleaned.
Machinedvolume
Tool
Example: Offsetting a Mill Volume
Horizontal Tangential
259
To Create Rounds on a Mill Volume
As a refining touch, you can create rounds on some of the volume edges. Thisis another way to simulate the tool geometry as it cuts the material.
To Copy a Mill Volume
The Copy Volume option in the CREATE VOL menu allows you to copy anexisting volume definition as the “start point for defining a new volume, toavoid time-consuming repetitions.
To Shade a Mill Volume
In order to see a Mill Volume definition better, you can shade the volume.This functionality is available only at setup time (you cannot shade a volumewhen creating an NC sequence).
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then MfgGeometry.
2. Choose Mill Volume from the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
3. Choose Shade from the MILL VOLUME menu.
4. Select the name of the volume to shade.
The screen is repainted to display only the shaded image of the selected volume.
5. Choose Continue from the CntVolSel menu to select another volume for shading, orchoose Done/Return to finish.
To Modify a Mill Volume
1. Choose Mfg Setup > Mfg Geometry > Mill Volume > Modify Vol.
2. Select the name of the volume from the namelist menu. The current volume definition isdisplayed in magenta.
3. Use options from the CREATE VOL menu to change the volume as desired: add andremove pieces, offset.
260
During the time of creating an NC sequence, you can similarly modify avolume using the Modify Vol option in the DEFINE VOL menu.
Modifying a Mill Volume
Mill Volume is not a single feature: it is a set of features that will bereferenced by a milling NC sequence. All “chunks of volume will be machinedby generating a continuous tool path, but each “chunk of Mill Volume isconsidered as a separate feature. For example, if you gather references, add asketched volume, and offset walls, three features will be added to theworkpiece. After an NC sequence is created, one more feature is added to theworkpiece.
Mill Volumes, or their portions, can be deleted or suppressed bydeleting/suppressing the appropriate feature(s) on the workpiece. Volume“chunks can be chosen by selecting on them (use Query Sel if necessary), orby feature number.
Note: There is a special technique of reordering Mill Volumes. Click for details.
You can modify any volume using the Modify Vol option under the MILLVOLUME menu.
You can also modify dimensions of a volume (such as sketch dimensions,offsets, round radii), using the Modify Dim option. Select volume features asyou would select regular part features (the volume must be unblanked first).
When not needed, volume display can be turned off using the Blank option.After you choose it, the namelist menu of displayed volumes and MillSurfaces appears; select the volume name. Blanked volumes can later bedisplayed again using the Unblank option.
To Rename a Mill Volume
1. Choose Set Up from the MANUFACTURE menu.
2. Choose Name, then Other.
3. Choose the volume by clicking on the screen (the volume must be unblanked). To selectby menu, choose Quilt from the SELN OPTION menu, then select the volume name.
4. Enter the new name. The volume is renamed.
261
Mill Surfaces
About Mill Surfaces
A Mill Surface is a special surface feature, created by the set of techniquesdescribed below, which can be used in Surface milling NC sequences. MillSurfaces can also be used to define Mill Volumes. You can use anycombination of the tools in the SURF DEFINE menu to create a single MillSurface.
Note: Milling surfaces are a good tool for defining complex Mill Volumes.
To Create a Mill Surface
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose MfgGeometry.
2. Choose Mill Surface from the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
3. Choose Create and enter a name for the surface.
4. When the SURF DEFINE menu comes up for the first time, the only option available isAdd. It allows you to create the base patch of the Mill Surface.
5. Once the first surface patch is created, you can use other SURF DEFINE options: extendits edges, trim it, or add other patches and include them in the Mill Surface definition bymerging.
Note: Mill Surface can also be created “on the fly when defining a Surface milling NCsequence. The techniques are the same.
Adding Surface Patches
The Add option in the SURF DEFINE menu brings up the SRF OPTS menuwith the following options:
• Extrude—Create the surface by extruding the sketched section to a specified depth inthe direction normal to the sketching plane.
• Revolve—Create the surface by rotating the sketched section by a specified anglearound the first centerline sketched when sketching the section.
• Sweep—Create the surface as a result of sweeping a sketched section along a specifiedtrajectory.
• Blend—Create a smooth surface connecting several sketched sections.
262
• Flat—Create a planar datum surface by sketching its boundaries.
• Copy—Create a datum surface by copying surfaces of the reference part.
• Fillet—Create a surface-to-surface round between the surfaces of the reference part orbetween other patches of the Mill Surface.
• Advanced—Create a complex surface, for example, using datum curves, multipletrajectories.
The Copy option is especially instrumental in Pro/NC, since it allows you toreference geometry of the design model.
Example: Gathering a Mill Surface
The following illustration shows an example of gathering a Mill Surface usingSurf & Bnd.
Select boundingsurface.
Resulting Mill SurfaceSelect seed surface.
NOTE: Surfaces are meshed for better visibility.You will not see the Mill Surface like this:it will be indicated by "open" edges displayed in yellow,and silhouette and intersection lines—in magenta.
To Create a Sloped Mill Surface
1. On the MFG GEOMETRY menu, click Mill Surface > Create and type a name for theMill Surface.
2. On the SURF DEFINE menu, click Add > Advanced | Done > Sloped | Done.
The Mill Surface for Slope Control dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Surfaces—Specify the set of surfaces to be initially included in the Mill Surfacedefinition.
� Direction—Specify a direction for measuring the slope angle.
263
� Angle—Specify the slope angle.
� Steep/Shallow—Specify whether you want to keep the steep or the shallow side.
3. Define the Surfaces element. You can include the surfaces using any combination of thefollowing options:
� Indiv Surfs—Select individual surfaces one-by-one.
� Surf & Bnd—Gather surfaces to be included by selecting the seed surface and thebounding surfaces.
� Loop Surfs—Include a closed loop of surfaces by selecting a face they surround.
� Quilt Surfs—Select a Surface feature (for example, an existing Mill Surface) toinclude all of its patches.
� Solid Surfs—Select a part to include all of its surfaces.
On the SURF SELECT menu, click Done when finished.
4. Define the Direction element using one of the following options:
� Plane—Select a plane. The system displays a red arrow normal to the plane.Finalize the direction by using the Flip and Okay options.
� Crv/Edg/Axis—Select a straight edge, curve segment, or a datum axis. The systemdisplays a red arrow along the selected entity. Finalize the direction by using theFlip and Okay options.
� Csys—Select a coordinate system; then specify which of its axes to use. The systemdisplays a red arrow along the selected axis. Finalize the direction by using the Flipand Okay options.
5. Define the Angle element by typing a value at the prompt.
6. Define the Steep/Shallow element using one of the following options:
� Keep Steep Side—The system keeps only those portions of the selected surfaceswhere the angle between the surface normal and the Direction vector is greater thanthe specified Angle value.
� Keep Shallow Side—The system keeps only those portions of the selected surfaceswhere the angle between the surface normal and the Direction vector is less than thespecified Angle value.
7. Click Preview to view the Mill Surface. If satisfied, click OK.
264
Sloped Mill Surfaces
With Sloped Mill Surfaces you can easily adjust machining strategy for finishmilling based on the orientation of the surface.
When you need to machine a cavity, you may want to use ConventionalSurface milling on the bottom of the cavity and other near-horizontalsurfaces, and profile surfaces that are near-vertical, such as cavity walls.
To automate surface selection for each of these machining strategies, use aSloped Mill Surface. Indicate all the surfaces that you want to consider formachining (for example, all the surfaces inside a cavity, or even all thesurfaces of the part), and specify a direction vector and the desired slopeangle. The system filters selected surfaces based on the angular orientation ofthe surface normal with respect to the direction vector. You can then specifywhether you want to keep the “shallow portion of the surfaces (forConventional Surface milling), or the “steep portion (for Profiling).
You can use similar technique when machining the outside of a part.
Example: Creating a Sloped Mill Surface
1. Create a parent Mill Surface by gathering all surfaces in the pocket, as shown below.
Seed surface
Bounding surfaces
The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the next illustration.
2. Create a new Mill Surface using the Sloped option. To define the Surfaces element, usethe Quilt Surfs option and select the parent Mill Surface. Use the Z-axis of the
265
coordinate system to define Direction (the direction vector is shown in red) and type 45to specify Angle.
3. Choose Keep Shallow Side. The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the followingillustration.
266
4. To define a complementary Mill Surface for Profiling, repeat Step 2 and then choose KeepSteep Side. The resulting Mill Surface is shown in blue in the following illustration.
5. Create the NC sequences using the appropriate Sloped Mill Surface.
To Define Mill Surface as Machinable Surface
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose MfgGeometry.
2. Choose Mill Surface from the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
3. Choose Create and enter a name for the surface.
4. When the SURF DEFINE menu comes up for the first time, the only option available isAdd. It allows you to create the base patch of the Mill Surface.
Once the first surface patch is created, you can use other SURF DEFINE options: extendits edges, trim it, or add other patches and include them in the Mill Surface definition bymerging.
Note: Mill Surface can also be created “on the fly when defining a Surface milling NCsequence. The techniques are the same.
5. From SRF OPTIONS choose Advanced, and from ADV FEAT OPT, choose MachinableArea. The SURFACES: Machinable Area Dialog Box will open.
6. Define the following elements: Machine Srf, Check Srf, Tool Radius, Tool Axis. Notethat Srf Option is already defined.
267
7. After all elements have been defined you can examine the created surface by clicking thePreview button. Click the OK button to confirm that the surface has been createdsuccessfully.
Machinable Area Mill Surface
There are cases where you may wish to add your own toolpath strategies tothe internal surface model, An advanced mill surface type “by tool contactwill give you access to the mechanisms that create explicit surfacerepresentations of the local machining remainder area and to the cutlinemilling machinable area. This mill surface is made available under theAdvanced option of the mill surface definition. Elements defined that youdefine include: Selected Surface, Check Surface, Tool Radius, and ToolOrientation.
To Extend Edges of a Mill Surface
The Extend option allows you to extend all or specified edges of the currentMill Surface by a specified distance or up to a selected planar surface ordatum plane.
To Merge Patches of a Mill Surface
When you create additional patches using the Add option, they are notautomatically included into the Mill Surface definition. You have to connectthem with the base quilt (the one that includes the first added surface) byjoining or intersecting.
To Trim a Mill Surface
The Trim option allows you to access the Surface Trim functionality.
To Shade a Mill Surface
In order to better see a Mill Surface definition, you can shade the surface.This functionality is available only at setup time (you cannot shade a surfacewhen creating an NC sequence).
268
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then MfgGeometry.
2. Choose Mill Surface from the MFG GEOMETRY menu.
3. Choose Shade from the MILL SURFACE menu.
4. Select the name of the surface to shade.
The screen is repainted to display only the shaded image of the selected surface.
5. Choose Continue to select another surface for shading, or choose Done/Return tofinish.
To Modify a Mill Surface
1. Choose Mfg Setup, Mfg Geometry, Mill Surface, then Modify Surf.
2. Select the name of the Mill Surface from the namelist menu. The current surfacedefinition is displayed.
3. Use options from the SURF DEFINE menu to change the surface definition.
Note: A Mill Surface created or selected for a Surface milling NC sequence can bemodified “on the fly using the Modify Srf option in the DEFINE SRF menu. All changesmade at this time will stay after the NC sequence is completed.
You can turn off the Mill Surface display using the Blank option. After youchoose it, the namelist menu of displayed Mill Surfaces and volumes appears;select the surface name. A blanked Mill Surface can later be displayed usingthe Unblank option.
Mill Surfaces can be renamed using the same procedure as Mill Volumes.
Modifying Mill Surfaces
A Mill Surface is not a single feature: rather, it is a name of a set of featureswhich will be referenced by a Mill Volume or by a milling NC sequence. Eachaction used in creating a Mill Surface (adding, merging, extending) willproduce a separate feature (similar to Mill Volumes). For example, if you adda surface, silhouette trim it, and then extend the edges, three features will beadded to the workpiece.
269
Mill Surfaces, or their portions, can be deleted or suppressed bydeleting/suppressing the appropriate feature(s) on the workpiece. Featurescan be selected by clicking on the patches (use Query Sel if necessary), or byfeature number. Dimensions of a Mill Surface can be modified using theModify Dim option.
Note: There is a special technique of reordering Mill Surfaces. Click for details.
You can modify any Mill Surface using the Modify Surf option in the MILLSURFACE menu.
Turning
About Turning NC Sequences
To access Turn type NC sequences, you must be in a Lathe or Mill/Turnworkcell (if Mill/Turn, choose TURN when starting to create an NCsequence). The following NC sequence types are available:
• Area—Define the area in the model cross section where you want the material to beremoved. The tool path will be generated by scanning this area to remove material instep depth increments. Use for rough cut turning.
• 4 Axis Area—(Appears in 4-Axis workcells only.) Define the NC sequence the same asregular Area turning, above. The system will automatically generate the tool path for twosynchronized heads.
• Profile—Interactively define the cut motion(s) by either sketching or using surfaces ordatum curves.
• Groove—Turn narrow grooves using a tool with cutting edges on both sides and a peck-type motion.
• Thread—Cut threads on a lathe.
• Holemaking—Drill, bore, and so on.
For each of the turning NC sequences, you define the cut geometry bycreating or selecting a Turn Profile. The system will attempt to automaticallydetermine the location of the area of the cut with respect to the Turn Profile;in case of ambiguity, it will prompt you to select the material side by flippingan arrow. The cut will be created on the opposite side of the Turn Profile.Depending on the type of NC sequence, you may then have to further definethe cut by specifying the stock boundary and cut extensions.
To Set Up the Coordinate System for Correct CL Output
In Pro/NC, the NC Sequence coordinate system must have the Z-axis colinearwith the turning axis; thus the turning cut is sketched in the ZX plane. If
270
your post-processor requires XY input, set up separate Machine and NCSequence coordinate systems, with the Machine coordinate system axespointing in the desired directions for correct post-processing. In this case thesystem will output CL data in the XY coordinates without the transformationvector (i,j,k).
The following illustration shows setting coordinate systems for XY output.
NC Sequence coordinate systemorientation
Machine coordinate system orientation
The Machine coordinate system can be created at any location and using anyoption, as long as its axes point in the appropriate directions. An easy way tocreate a Machine coordinate system by referencing the NC Sequencecoordinate system is described below.
1. Orient the NC Sequence coordinate system so that the Z-axis is colinear with the turningaxis and points away from the lathe headstock.
2. Create another coordinate system using the Offset option and select the NC Sequencecoordinate system.
3. Choose Rotate from the MOVE menu.
4. Choose Y Axis and enter [-90 ].
5. Choose Z Axis and enter [-90 ].
6. Choose Done Move from the MOVE menu. The coordinate system is created.
Note: If there is no translational offset, the NC Sequence coordinate system will not bevisible after the Machine coordinate system is created. Use Sel By Menu for coordinatesystem selection.
!AL("About_Turning_NC_Sequences",0,`',`')
To Define a Turning Envelope
271
1. On the MANUFACTURE menu, click Mfg Model > Turning Envelope.
The ROT ENVLP menu opens with the following commands:
� Create Envelope—Create a Turning Envelope of the reference part or theworkpiece.
� Redefine Envelope—Redefine an existing Turning Envelope. You can eitherchange the name of the envelope or redefine the envelope itself by using a differentcoordinate system.
� Delete Envelope—Delete an existing Turning Envelope.
2. Click Create Envelope.
3. Select what type of envelope you want to create:
� Ref Envlp—Create a Turning Envelope of the reference part.
� Stock Envlp— Create a Turning Envelope of the workpiece.
Click Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens. It contains the following elements:
� Name—The Turning Envelope is created with a default name, such asREF_ENVLP_00or STOCK_ENVLP_00. To change the default name, select the Nameelement, click Define, and type the new name.
� Csys—Specify the coordinate system.
4. Select or create the coordinate system.
The system generates the Turning Envelope by intersecting the rotational outline of thespecified model with the XZ plane of the selected coordinate system.
5. Click Preview to view the Turning Envelope.
6. Click OK.
Using Turning Envelopes
Turning Envelopes are intended for use primarily when machining partswith a non-circular cross section. The system generates a Turning Envelopeby rotating the reference part or the workpiece about the turning axis (thatis, about the z-axis of the Turning Envelope coordinate system), and thenintersecting the outside perimeter of the rotated shape with the XZ plane ofthis coordinate system. The resulting chain of entities can be used to define aTurn Profile or a Stock Boundary.
272
You can also use the Turning Envelope functionality if you are machining acircular part with a very complex profile. To simplify defining the TurnProfiles for such a part, you can create a Reference Envelope and then definethe Turn Profiles by using the Select Ref Envlp command and selecting theappropriate chains on the Reference Envelope.
To Define the Stock Boundary
1. On the INT CUT menu, click Stock Bound.
2. The ADD BOUND menu opens with the following commands:
� Select—(Available for Assembly machining only.) Select a workpiece whose crosssection will define the stock boundary. If only one workpiece is present in themanufacturing model, it will be selected automatically.
� Sketch—Sketch the stock boundary. Pro/NC reorients the model so that the XZplane of the NC Sequence coordinate system is parallel to the screen and displaysthe Sketcher side bar. Select the Sketcher references, sketch the outward boundaries
of the cut, dimension as necessary, then click on the Sketcher side bar.
� Stock Envelope—Create a rotational envelope of the workpiece and use it as thestock boundary. Pro/NC will automatically use the NC Sequence coordinate systemas the Turning Envelope coordinate system. Click for details.
Stock Boundary and Cut Extensions
The Turn Profile for Area and Groove turning is defined by specifying thefinal stock outline. The system then determines the area of the cut byextending the two endpoints of this outline in the specified direction up to theboundaries of the workpiece cross section. However, if the workpiece has nogeometry, or in case of assembly machining, the system cannot make anyassumptions as to the current workpiece outline. Therefore, you will have toexplicitly define the stock boundary, that is, the outward boundaries of thecut, by using the Stock Bound option in the INT CUT menu. The graphicbelow illustrates how the cut area is determined.
Note: Turning NC sequences intersecting workpiece boundaries can not be created on amanufacturing model with multiple workpieces, unless you define a stock boundarysection. However, if a manufacturing model has multiple reference parts and a singleworkpiece, turning NC sequences can be created without sketching a stock boundary.
273
Regular part manufacturing:the workpiece cross section isautomatically used as stockboundary.
Workpiece has no geometry:you have to sketch the stockboundary.
Cut extensionsCut extensions
Reference partCut area
Workpiece
Stock boundary sketch
Cut sketch Cut sketch
Reference part
Defining the Stock Boundary in Part and Assembly Machining
With the Stock Bound option, you can sketch the outward boundaries of thecut for an Area or Groove turning NC sequence. In Assembly machining, youalso have an option to select a workpiece whose cross section will define thestock boundary. For Assembly machining, or if the workpiece has nogeometry, the Stock Bound option is selected automatically. It can also beused in regular part manufacturing if you don’t want to use the workpiececross section to determine the area of the cut.
Note: Since the area of the cut is determined using the workpiece cross section, it isrecommended that you perform material removal for each NC sequence right after it iscreated, to avoid air machining in subsequent NC sequences. If you do not want toperform material removal, use the Stock Bound option to define the new stock outline.
274
Example: Using Stock Boundary for Area Turning
Cut extensions
Reference part
Stock boundary sketch
Cut sketch
To Change the Stock Boundary Outline
You can change the stock boundary outline at any time; however, it willautomatically cause the cut definition to be regenerated. The system willissue a warning and prompt if you want to continue. If you answer “yes, theSTOCK BOUND menu will appear:
• Add—Modify the stock boundary definition. You will have a choice of Select (forAssembly machining only), Sketch, and Stock Envelope options. If you use Sketchand the current stock boundary is sketched, the old sketch will be retrieved for you tomodify (if you want to start a new sketch, use the Remove option first). Note that onlyone stock boundary definition can exist at a time; therefore, choosing Add actuallyreplaces the old definition with a new one.
• Remove—Remove the stock boundary definition. In regular Part machining (when theworkpiece has geometry), the system will the use the workpiece cross section as a stockboundary. In assembly machining, or if the workpiece does not have geometry, you haveto supply another definition using the Add option.
• Show—Display the current stock boundary definition.
• Done—The system recalculates the cut area using the new stock boundary definition.
To Define the Cut Extensions
Cut extensions have to be specified for Area and Groove turning NCsequences. They define the area of the cut and the approach of the tool. Afteryou define the cut by either creating or selecting a Turn Profile, endpoints of
275
the cut are highlighted, an arrow shows the default cut extension direction,and you are prompted to specify the cut extensions. You can do this byselecting options from the EXT DIR menu:
• Positive Z—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint parallel to the turning axis, inthe direction of the Z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• Negative Z—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint parallel to the turning axis, inthe direction opposite to that of the Z-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• Positive X—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint perpendicular to the turningaxis, in the direction of the X-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• Negative X—Extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint perpendicular to the turningaxis, in the direction opposite to that of the X-axis of the NC sequence coordinate system.
• None—Do not extend the cut at the highlighted endpoint. None is generally used withfacing NC sequences to specify no cut extension at the endpoint closest to the turningaxis. The tool retracts once the cut reaches this endpoint.
Note: If the cut endpoint for a facing NC sequence is located on the turning axis, youhave to specify None for cut extension at this point.
To Adjust Cut Motion Ends
You can extend or trim the ends of a cut motion after selecting or creating theTurn Profile using the following procedure.
1. On the INT CUT menu, click Ends.
2. Click Start to adjust the start point.
3. Choose one of:
� On—Place the start point of the cut motion at the start of the defined trajectory (thedefault).
� Specify—Move the start point along the defined trajectory. When you select thisoption, the start point of the cut motion starts following the mouse (along the cutmotion, if trimmed, and tangent to the first segment, if extended).
4. If the cut motion is adjusted using Specify, select the dimensioning type:
� Ext Length—Type the extension length along the chain, that is, length ratio of theadded or subtracted segment to the original length of the cut motion. Positive valuecorresponds to extended cut motion, negative—to a trimmed one.
276
� Offset Plane—Select a plane to measure offset from, then type the offset value.Positive value means that the offset is to the positive side of the surface (away fromthe solid material).
� Offset Csys—Select a coordinate system to measure offset from. Select axis alongwhich to measure the offset, then type the offset value. Positive value means thepositive axis direction.
5. Click End to adjust the end point and repeat Steps 3 and 4.
To Specify Corner Conditions
1. On the INT CUT menu, click Corners.
2. The CORNER COND menu appears with the following options:
� Add—Select corners to add corner conditions.
� Delete—Allows you to select a corner condition to delete.
� Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can usethis option more than once; when there are no more corner conditions left, theDelete Last option becomes inaccessible.
� Delete All—Deletes all the corner conditions.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appearswith the following options:
� Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting theappropriate option. After each selection, the corner condition will be added at theselected point. Choose Done Sel when finished.
� Automatic—Corner conditions will be automatically added at all the corners. Youwill be prompted to specify the desired type of corner condition for all concavecorners, then for all convex corners.
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change themusing the AUTO SELECT menu:
� Next—Display the next assigned corner condition.
� Prev—Display the previous corner condition.
� Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
� Remove—Delete corner condition at the highlighted corner.
277
� Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Convex cornerconditions will be highlighted in red, concave—in cyan.
� Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the MessageWindow.
Corner Condition Types
Corner conditions can be specified for Area, Profile, and Groove turning, toavoid gouging sharp convex corners, as well as to easily add necessary filletsand chamfers at the time of machining.
The following types of corner conditions are available in Turning:
• Fillet—A fillet which can be added both at concave and convex corners. The fillet radiusis defined by either the CONCAVE_RADIUS or the CONVEX_RADIUS parameter,depending on the type of the corner.
• Chamfer—A chamfer which can be added both at concave and convex corners. Thechamfer size is defined by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, which represents thedistance cut on each side of the corner.
The graphic below illustrates the corner condition types.
Part Part
Tool path Tool path
Fillet Chamfer
d = CHAMFER_DIMR = CONVEX_RADIUS
R
d
d
For Area turning, both the rough and profile passes will take the cornercondition into account.
Profile pass Rough passes
Part
Chamfer corner condition added here.
278
To Specify Local Stock Allowance
1. On the INT CUT menu, click Stock Allow.
2. Click Define. In Area, 4 Axis Area, and Groove Turning, you can specify separate localstock allowance for Rough and Profile cuts by using the Rough Portion or ProfilePortion option, respectively.
3. Select a chain of entities on the Turn Profile by using the From-To option and selectingtwo vertices (or choose Select All), and enter a value for local stock allowance.
The system displays the expected final tool pass by applying the values listed below andthe local stock allowance you specified to the Turn Profile:
� For Rough Portion and for Profile Turning—Ends adjustments, corner conditions,ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, Z_STOCK_ALLOW.
� For Profile Portion—Ends adjustments, corner conditions, PROF_STOCK_ALLOW,Z_STOCK_ALLOW.
4. Repeat Step 3 to apply other local stock allowances, or choose Done/Return to finish.
Note: You can not apply more than one local stock allowance to the same entity.
5. The following options are available to manipulate existing local stock allowances:
� Modify—All local stock allowance values are displayed. Use the Dimension option,select a value you want to modify, and enter a new value. You can also modify theunderlying parameter values: use the Parameter option, check off the stockallowance parameter(s) you want to modify, and enter the new value(s).
� Remove—Select the pair(s) of vertices where local stock allowance is specified (youcan also use Select All). Once you remove a pair, stock allowance control reverts toparameter values.
� Info—Displays the expected final tool pass, along with stock allowance values.
Local Stock Allowance
In general, the amount of stock left after a rough cut or semi-finish NCsequence is controlled by the following manufacturing parameters:ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, PROF_STOCK_ALLOW, and Z_STOCK_ALLOW.They specify the stock allowance for all the surfaces machined in this NCsequence. In some cases, however, you may need to specify a different valueof stock allowance for certain surfaces; for example, to leave extra stock forsubsequent grinding operations, or adjust stock allowance prior to heattreatment.
279
You can specify local stock allowance by selecting a chain of segments on aTurn Profile and entering a value that will apply to this chain only. Thisfunctionality is available for Area, 4 Axis Area, Groove, and Profile Turning.
To Specify the Tool Orientation
The orientation of a Turning tool can be controlled by the NC sequenceparameter TOOL_ORIENTATION. The default value for this parameter is 90degrees, which in most cases orients the tool properly to machine the outsideand face surfaces of the workpiece. To machine the inside surfaces of a coredworkpiece, you may need to change the TOOL_ORIENTATION value to 0.The actual tool orientation is also affected by the turret head number (Head 1or Head 2), as well as the holder type (Left or Right). You can preview thetool orientation in the Preview window of the Tool Setup dialog box.
You can mirror the tool about its vertical axis by setting the Holder_Typeparameter to Right. This allows you to perform back turning of diametersbehind the shoulders of parts.
Holder_TypeRight
Holder_TypeLeft
To Use Multi-Head Turning
If 4-Axis turning is available in the current workcell, the HEAD 1 andHEAD 2 options will allow you to specify which head is to be used for the NCsequence (HEAD 1 is the default).
You can synchronize CL output of NC sequences created using Head1 withNC sequences performed on Head2 by using the Synchronize option in theMACHINING menu.
If you perform 4 Axis Area turning, the HEAD1 and HEAD2 options aregrayed out, because the system will automatically use both heads for this NCsequence.
280
To Create an Area Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Area | Done. You must be in a Latheor Mill/Turn workcell.
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not haveto click Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click SeqSetup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NCsequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for allselected options in turn.
3. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Customize.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
5. If the stock boundary is not defined, the system selects the Stock Bound command onthe INT CUT menu. Specify the stock boundary.
6. The system selects the Turn Profile command on the INT CUT menu and displays theTURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
7. The system selects the Extensions command on the INT CUT menu and displays theEXT DIR menu. Specify the cut extensions.
8. You can use the other commands on the INT CUT menu:
� Ends—Extend or trim the ends of the cut section. Turning extensions will be appliedto the adjusted ends of the cut section, as specified.
� Corners—Specify the corner conditions, if desired.
� Stock Allow—Specify local stock allowances, if desired.
� Parameters—Adjust the cut motion parameters, if necessary.
9. Click Done Cut. The system creates an Automatic Cut and a Follow Cut motion.
10. Create additional Approach and Exit motions, if needed, by selecting the appropriateoptions from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box.
11. When satisfied with the tool path, click OK.
12. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Done Seq or Next Seq.
281
Area Turning
Area turning allows you to define the area in the model cross section whereyou want the material to be removed. The tool path will be generated byscanning this area to remove material in step depth increments.
You can control how the intermediate reference part diameters are machinedusing the combination of the STEP_DEPTH and MIN_STEP_DEPTHparameters. Pro/NC will generate passes at STEP_DEPTH until a referencepart diameter is located. It will then calculate the depth of a pass at thisdiameter plus stock allowance, and compare the distance between that passand the previous one to MIN_STEP_DEPTH. If this distance is more thanMIN_STEP_DEPTH, the system will make the pass along the diameter, andthe scanning algorithm will start from this pass. If the distance is smallerthan MIN_STEP_DEPTH, the diameter pass is ignored and the scanningalgorithm continues from the previous pass.
The MIN_STEP_DEPTH parameter values have the following meaning:
• MIN_STEP_DEPTH = 0—Machine all diameters to stock allowance. This is the default(“-).
• 0 < MIN_STEP_DEPTH < STEP_DEPTH—Intermediate diameters will be machined tostock allowance if the distance from the previous pass is more than MIN_STEP_DEPTH.
• MIN_STEP_DEPTH = STEP_DEPTH—Only the final diameter will be machined to stockallowance. All the other passes will be at STEP_DEPTH distance from each other. If youspecify MIN_STEP_DEPTH > STEP_DEPTH, an error message will be issued, and allthe passes will be at STEP_DEPTH.
Example: Face Area Turning
The following illustration shows an example of face Area turning. Sketch theTurn Profile above the centerline representing the turning axis. Specify thecut extensions as shown.
282
Turn Profile
Positive X
None
Example: Outside Area Turning
The following example shows Area turning of the outside surfaces of theworkpiece. In this example, the area of the cut is extended past the surfaceboundary of the reference model by adjusting the Ends of the Automatic Cutmotion.
7. Define the Turn Profile by selecting surfaces of the reference part and specify the cutextensions as shown in the following illustration.
Turn ProfilePositive X
Positive Z
8. On the INT CUT menu, click Ends > Start > Specify | Done. Use the mouse to extendthe Turn Profile to the left, as shown in the following illustration. On the END DIMTYPE menu, click Ext Length and accept the default value.
283
The resulting tool path is shown in the following illustration.
Example: Inside Area Turning
To turn the inside surfaces of a cored workpiece, set theTOOL_ORIENTATION parameter value to 0. Then define the Turn Profileand cut extensions as shown in the following illustration.
284
Turn Profile
Positive ZNegative Z
To Create a 4 Axis Area Turning NC Sequence
With the 4 Axis Area option, available in 4-axis workcells only, you candefine an Area turning NC sequence with two synchronized headssimultaneously machining the area.
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > 4 Axis Area | Done. You must be in a2-turret Lathe or a Mill/Turn workcell. Note that once you click 4 Axis Area, theHEAD1 and HEAD2 options become unavailable, because the system will use bothheads for this NC sequence.
2. Follow the procedure for defining an Area turning NC sequence. When you are finished,the system automatically generates the tool path for two synchronized heads.
Example: 4 Axis Area Turning
Tool path display inprocess
Tool path displaycompleted
285
To Create a Profile Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Profile | Done. You must be in aLathe or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not haveto click Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click SeqSetup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NCsequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for allselected options in turn.
3. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Customize.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
5. The system displays the TURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
6. By default, the cut motion will be offset from the Turn Profile by NOSE_RADIUS (if theOUTPUT_POINT parameter is set to CENTER). If you want the Turn Profile torepresent the trajectory of the tool control point, rather than the finished geometry, onthe INT CUT menu, click On/Offset > On. The cut motion will then coincide with theTurn Profile.
7. Adjust the cut motion ends, if needed, and specify corner conditions. You can also specifylocal stock allowances, if desired. Connect the cut motions using the Tool Motionfunctionality.
8. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
9. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Profile Turning
Profile turning allows you to interactively specify the cut motion trajectory.When defining cut motions, the On/Offset option in the INT CUT menuprovides you with the following choice:
• Offset (default)—The turn profile represents the finished geometry, that is, thetrajectory of the tip of the tool cutting material. This means that if the OUTPUT_POINTparameter is set to CENTER (the default), the cut motion will be automatically offset byNOSE_RADIUS in the appropriate direction from the specified trajectory (up for outsideturning, down—for inside, to the right—for face turning). If OUTPUT_POINT is TIP, nooffset will be applied.
286
• On—The turn profile represents the trajectory of the tool control point. No offset will beapplied when creating the cut motion.
Example: Profile Turning
The following illustration shows Profile turning of outside surfaces using theOffset option.
Automatic Cut motion 1
Automatic Cut motion 2
To Create a Groove Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Groove | Done. You must be in aLathe or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not haveto click Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 3. If you click SeqSetup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NCsequence types.
Select the desired options and click Done. The system will start the user interface for allselected options in turn.
3. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Customize.
4. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
5. If the stock boundary is not defined, the system selects the Stock Bound command onthe INT CUT menu. Specify the stock boundary.
6. The system selects the Turn Profile command on the INT CUT menu and displays theTURN PROFILE menu. Select or create a Turn Profile.
287
7. The system selects the Extensions command on the INT CUT menu and displays theEXT DIR menu. Specify the cut extensions.
8. You can use the other commands on the INT CUT menu:
� Ends—Extend or trim the ends of the cut section. Turning extensions will be appliedto the adjusted ends of the cut section, as specified.
� Corners—Specify the corner conditions, if desired.
� Stock Allow—Specify local stock allowances, if desired.
� Parameters—Adjust the cut motion parameters, if necessary.
9. Click Done Cut. The system creates an Automatic Cut and a Follow Cut motion.
10. Create additional Approach and Exit motions, if needed, by selecting the appropriateoptions from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box.
11. When satisfied with the tool path, click OK.
12. On the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Done Seq or Next Seq.
Groove Turning
Groove turning is performed with a different type of tool, which has cuttingedges on both sides. Note that the tool origin is at the center of the left-sidenose radius.
For Groove turning, the tool always cuts normal to the groove bottom. Thedistance between two neighboring cuts is defined by the STEP_OVERparameter, the height of retract between the cuts (the system start level) isset to CLEAR_DIST. The final retract is controlled by the PULLOUT_DISTparameter. If you specify the ROUGH_OPTION parameter value asROUGH_&_PROF, the tool will also make a profiling pass across the groove.The ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW and PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parametersdefine the amount of stock to be left for the finishing NC sequence.
PULLOUT_DIST
Profiling pass
STEP_OVER
CLEAR_DIST
System start level
288
The SCAN_TYPE value TYPE_ONE_DIR allows you to start the roughgrooving NC sequence at one side of the groove and move to the other side,while with TYPE_1 (the default) the tool starts in the middle and moves toeach of the sides in turn. If you want to start from the other side, setCUT_DIRECTION to REVERSE. To ensure uniform stock allowance on thesides of the groove after the rough pass, set SCAN_TYPE toTYPE_1_CONNECT.
The following illustration shows scan types for Rough Groove turning.
12 34 5 34 25 1 ProfilingpassProfiling
pass
SCAN_TYPETYPE_1
SCAN_TYPETYPE_ONE_DIR
Peck CycleThe peck cycle (illustrated by the following graphic) will be performed forrough groove turning only if the PECK_DEPTH parameter is set to a valueother than 0 (0 is the default):
1. The tool is positioned at the CLEAR_DIST level above the top of the groove.
2. Cut to the PECK_DEPTH offset below the top of the groove.
3. Retract by PULLOUT_DIST.
4. Cut to the (PECK_DEPTH * 2) offset below the top of the groove, retract byPULLOUT_DIST.
5. If FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH is other than 0 (the default), the tool will retract all the wayback to CLEAR_DIST upon reaching this depth below the top of the groove. Afterretracting, the tool will return rapidly and proceed cutting at peck increments.
6. Upon reaching the bottom of the groove (plus ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW, if any), the toolwill dwell (if DELAY is not “-), retract back to the CLEAR_DIST level (8), step over (9),and continue from Step 1.
289
1 2
34
56
78
CLEAR_DIST
PECK_DEPTH
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
STOCK_ALLOW
PULLOUT_DIST
STEP_OVER
CLEAR_DIST
CLEAR_DIST CLEAR_DIST
PECK_DEPTH
FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
Finish Groove TurningTo perform finish Groove turning, set the ROUGH_OPTION parameter toPROF_ONLY. The tool then starts at CLEAR_DIST above the top of thegroove, goes down one side of the groove, cuts across the bottom, and retractsby PULLOUT_DIST, leaving a quality surface finish. TheGROOVE_FINISH_TYPE parameter allows you to specify an intermediateretract when the tool goes along the profile. If it is set to CONTINUOUS, thetool will enter the groove on one side, cut across, and exit on the other side. IfNO_BACKCUT (the default) is set, the tool will enter the groove on one side,retract at some intermediate point along the groove profile, enter on the otherside and complete the cut. The retract point can be controlled by parameterSIDEWALL_OFFSET, which specifies the length of the second portion of thecut, that is, the distance between the point of retract and the end of thebottom of the groove. If the SIDEWALL_OFFSET is “- (the default), it will beignored and the tool will retract at the midpoint of the bottom entity. TheGROOVE_FINISH_TYPE and SIDEWALL_OFFSET parameters have thesame effect on the profiling pass of a rough groove turning NC sequence (ifROUGH_OPTION is set to ROUGH_&_PROF).
Note: Finish turning NC sequences created prior to Release 12.0 cannot be redefined.
The following illustration shows Finish Groove turning.
290
ROUGH_OPTION PROF_ONLYGROOVE_FINISH_TYPE CONTINUOUS
CLEAR_DISTCLEAR_DIST
PULLOUT_DIST
PULLOUT_DIST
SIDEWALL_OFFSET
ROUGH_OPTION PROF_ONLYGROOVE_FINISH_TYPE NO_BACKCUT
To Create a Thread Turning NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click NC Sequence > Thread | Done. You must be in aLathe or Mill/Turn workcell.
2. Specify the thread type by selecting Unified, Acme, Buttress, or General; the threadorientation by selecting Outside, Inside, or Face; and the output type by selecting ISOor AI Macro; then click Done.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
4. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific option:
Turn Profile—Select or create a Turn Profile. The Turn Profile must consist of a singleline, which represents the first tool motion. For an external thread, the line mustcorrespond to the major diameter; for an internal thread—to the minor diameter.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path automatically generated by the system. If notsatisfied, you can either modify the parameters, or use the Customize functionality.
Note: By default, thread cutting is performed in the negative Z-direction of the NCsequence coordinate system. To reverse the direction, use a right-handed tool.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Thread Turning
Thread NC sequences are used to cut threads on a lathe. The threads can beexternal and internal, blind and through. This NC sequence does not remove
291
any material from the workpiece on the screen. The proper cutter path will,however, be generated.
A Thread NC sequence is defined by sketching the first tool movement, whichcorresponds to the major diameter for an external thread and to the minordiameter for an internal thread. The final thread depth is calculated usingthe THREAD_FEED parameter.
Pro/NC supports ISO standard thread output as well as AI Macro output.
You can reference geometry of existing Thread cosmetic features, created inPart mode. It is especially convenient for blind threads.
Examples: Thread Turning
The following illustration shows defining a Thread NC sequence for anexternal blind thread.
Sketch this line.
The following illustration shows defining a Thread NC sequence for aninternal through thread.
Use Edge
The following illustration shows referencing a Thread cosmetic feature.
292
Use Edge
To Create a Facing Thread Turning NC Sequence
A facing thread NC sequence, consisting of a single radial tool move, can becreated using the general procedure of creating a Thread Turning NCSequence. Choose Face as the tread orientation option, and sketch the linerepresenting the tool movement at the final thread depth off the face of thepart. This NC sequence will output the OP / THREAD, FACE, andappropriate GOTO commands instead of THREAD/AUTO. You must specify anonzero value for THREAD_FEED.
To Perform the Remainder Material Analysis
When turning complicated parts that contain a number of shoulders or smallconcave elements, it is likely that certain tools will not be able to completelymachine a selected turn profile because of reach problems. In addition, poorslice distribution may result in larger material remainder values than thosespecified in the parameter settings. When displaying the tool path for aTurning NC sequence, you can now perform a color-coded graphical analysisof the remaining material.
1. Display the tool path.
2. In the PLAY PATH dialog box, click View > Show Remaining Material.
The system highlights the portions of the Turn Profile where the tool path did notprovide specified stock allowance and displays an error dialog box that explains themeaning of the different color-coded segments. If there is no remainder material left, thesystem displays a message "No under-machined regions found."
Turn Profile
About Turn Profile
To define cut geometry for a Turning NC sequence, you have to create a TurnProfile. A Turn Profile is a separate feature (similar to a Mill Volume or MillWindow), which you can define either at setup time or when you define an
293
NC sequence. You can then reference the Turn Profile in more than oneTurning NC sequence. This functionality enables you to define the cutreferences once, and then use this definition to create rough, semi-finish, andfinish NC sequences.
You can predefine Turn Profiles by choosing the Turn Profile option in theMFG GEOMETRY menu.
A Turn Profile defines the cut geometry for various types of Turning NCsequences in the following manner:
• For Area and Groove turning, you must define the area of the cut by specifying the finalstock outline; usually this is done by specifying the part edges or surfaces to bemachined. You can use part edges or surfaces for rough cuts as well, since the amount ofstock left after the rough cut for the finish cut is defined by theROUGH_STOCK_ALLOW and PROF_STOCK_ALLOW parameters.
• For Profile turning, you must specify the trajectory of the cut motion for the tool. Then, ifthe OUTPUT_POINT parameter is set to CENTER (the default), the cut motion will beautomatically offset by NOSE_RADIUS in the appropriate direction from the specifiedtrajectory (up for Outside turning, down—for Inside, to the right—for Face). IfOUTPUT_POINT is TIP, no offset will be applied.
• For Thread turning, you must specify the first tool movement, which corresponds to themajor diameter for an external thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread.
To Define a Turn Profile
When you choose Turn Profile from the INT CUT or the MFG GEOMETRYmenu, the TURN PROFILE menu appears with the following options:
• Create Profile—Create a new Turn Profile.
• Select Profile—Select a predefined Turn Profile. Available only at the time of definingan NC sequence.
• Redefine Profile—Redefine an existing Turn Profile. Choose the profile name from anamelist menu.
• Delete Profile—Delete an existing Turn Profile. Available only at setup time. Choosethe profile name from a namelist menu.
To Create a New Turn Profile:
1. Click Create Profile.
2. Select a method of creating the Turn Profile by using one of the following commands onthe CREATE PROFILE menu:
294
� Sketch—Sketch the profile in the XZ plane of the profile coordinate system.
� Select Surface—Select From and To surfaces, and specify on which side of thecenterline the profile is to be located. The system creates the profile at theintersection of the selected chain of surfaces and the XZ plane of the profilecoordinate system.
� Select Curve—Select segments of a datum curve. You must create the curve beforeyou define the Turn Profile, for example, by using the Use Xsec option. With thisoption, you can also select segments of existing Turn Profiles.
� Section—The system generates a model cross section in the XZ plane of the profilecoordinate system. Select From and To vertices of this cross section, then toggle thechain, if necessary.
� Select Ref Envlp—Select an existing Reference Envelope, then select From and Tovertices to specify the desired portion of this envelope.
� Create Ref Envlp—Create a Reference Envelope, then select From and To verticesto specify the desired portion of this envelope.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens. Depending on the selected method, it willcontain some specific elements, as well as the following common elements:
� Name—The Turn Profile is created with a default name, such as TURN_PROF_000,TURN_PROF_001, and so on. To change the default name, select the Name element,click Define, and type the new name.
� Csys—Specify the coordinate system. This element is available only at setup time.When you create a Turn Profile while defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC uses the NCSequence coordinate system. If you are creating the Turn Profile by selecting aReference Envelope, Pro/NC uses the coordinate system of the Reference Envelope.
� Adjust Turn Profile—Trim or replace selected portions of the Turn Profile.
3. Define the required elements of the CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box.
4. Click Preview to verify the Turn Profile. Adjust the Turn Profile, if necessary.
5. Click OK.
To Define a Turn Profile by Sketching
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Sketch | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
295
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequencecoordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC reorients the model so that the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system isparallel to the screen and displays the Sketcher side bar.
3. Select the Sketcher references, sketch the Turn Profile, and dimension as necessary. Thesketch must consist of a single chain of entities. Click Continue to exit Sketcher.
4. Specify the material side by using the Flip and Okay commands. The arrow must pointtowards the reference part.
5. Click OK.
Sketching a Turn Profile
When sketching a Turn Profile, keep in mind that the sketch must lie in theXZ plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system and completely on one side ofthe x-axis (either positive or negative).
The default orientation of the model upon entering Sketcher is as follows:
• If the workcell is defined as Horizontal—with the z-axis pointing to the right and x-axispointing up.
• If the workcell is defined as Vertical—with the z-axis pointing up and x-axis pointing tothe right.
However, you can sketch in any view orientation of the model provided theXZ plane is parallel to the screen and the sketch is completely on one side ofthe NC Sequence x-axis.
The following illustration shows sketching the cut in various vieworientations.
Section sketch Section sketch
Section sketch
Define a Turn Profile by sketching using the Sketch option in the CREATEPROFILE menu:
• For Area and Groove turning, sketch the final stock outline.
296
• For Profile turning, sketch the cut motion.
• For Thread turning, sketch the first tool movement, which corresponds to the majordiameter for an external thread and to the minor diameter for an internal thread.
Multiple loops or chains are not allowed when sketching the Turn Profile,that is, the sketch can only contain one continuous chain of entities. However,you can sketch the final outline for Area or Groove turning so that it crossesthe workpiece boundary (or the Stock Bound section) more than once, thusforming multiple machining areas.
Workpiece boundary
Section sketch
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces
A Turn Profile can also be defined by selecting the start and end surfaces onthe reference part. The system will then machine these two surfaces and allthe surfaces in between. If you want to machine one surface only, select ittwice.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Select Surface | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequencecoordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
3. Select the From surface.
4. Select the To surface.
5. Choose one of:
� Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in thepositive X area.
� Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in thenegative X area.
297
6. Click Done. The system creates an internal cross section of the reference part in the XZplane of the Turn Profile coordinate system and selects the appropriate chain of entitiesin this cross section (between the selected surfaces in either positive or negative X area)as the Turn Profile.
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Selecting Surfaces
The following illustration shows Area turning using surfaces.
Cut extensions
To surface From surface
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting Curves
Turn Profiles are datum curves. With the Select Curve option, you candefine new Turn Profiles by selecting segments from existing Turn Profiles.You can also select segments of other types of datum curves; however, thesedatum curves must lie in the XZ plane of the Turn Profile coordinate system.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Select Curve | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequencecoordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
3. Use the commands on the CHAIN menu to select segments of a datum curve, for example,of an existing Turn Profile. All segments must form a single continuous chain. ClickDone.
4. Specify the material side by using the Flip and Okay commands. The arrow must pointtowards the material.
5. Click OK.
298
To Define a Turn Profile by Section
If a reference part for turning has a complex contour, the process of definingthe cut by selecting edges, or sketching and aligning, can be time consuming.You can accelerate this process by using the following technique.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Section | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequencecoordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC generates a cross section of the model in the XZ plane of the Turn Profilecoordinate system and displays it as a closed loop of cyan entities, with all verticeshighlighted in green.
3. Select the From and To vertices on the model cross section.
7. Choose one of:
� Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in thepositive X area.
� Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in thenegative X area.
4. Click Done.
Pro/NC displays a chain of entities between the selected vertices.
5. If the system selected the wrong portion of the cross section loop, click Toggle Profile.
Pro/NC displays the new chain of entities.
6. On the SEL PROFILE menu, click Done/Return.
7. Click OK.
Example: Defining a Turn Profile by Section
The following illustration shows Area turning with the Turn Profile definedusing Section.
299
To vertex From vertex
To Define a Turn Profile by Creating a Reference Envelope
Use this technique if your reference part has a non-circular cross section.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Create Ref Envlp | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
2. If you are defining the Turn Profile at setup time, select or create the coordinate system(at the time of defining an NC sequence, Pro/NC automatically uses the NC Sequencecoordinate system as the Turn Profile coordinate system).
Pro/NC generates a Turning Envelope of the reference part and displays it as a closedloop of cyan entities, with all vertices highlighted in green.
3. Select the From and To vertices on the Turning Envelope.
9. Choose one of:
� Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in thepositive X area.
� Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in thenegative X area.
4. Click Done.
Pro/NC displays a chain of entities between the selected vertices.
5. If the system selected the wrong portion of the Turning Envelope, click Toggle Profile.
Pro/NC displays the new chain of entities.
6. On the SEL PROFILE menu, click Done/Return.
7. Click OK.
300
To Define a Turn Profile by Selecting a Reference Envelope
This option is available only when you have defined a Reference TurningEnvelope at setup time. You can then use this envelope to create multipleTurn Profiles by selecting appropriate chains of entities from the TurningEnvelope.
1. On the CREATE PROFILE menu, click Select Ref Envlp | Done.
The CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box opens.
2. Select the name of the Reference Envelope from the Names dialog box.
Pro/NC displays the Turning Envelope as a closed loop of cyan entities, with all verticeshighlighted in green.
3. Select the From and To vertices on the Turning Envelope.
8. Choose one of:
� Above CtrLn—The cut motion will be created above the centerline, that is, in thepositive X area.
� Below CtrLn—The cut motion will be created below the centerline, that is, in thenegative X area.
4. Click Done.
Pro/NC displays a chain of entities between the selected vertices.
5. If the system selected the wrong portion of the Turning Envelope, click Toggle Profile.
Pro/NC displays the new chain of entities.
6. On the SEL PROFILE menu, click Done/Return.
7. Click OK.
To Adjust a Turn Profile
You can trim or replace portions of a Turn Profile, for example, to eliminateundercut regions or to simplify avoiding small grooves.
1. In the CURVE: Turn Profile dialog box, select the Adjust Turn Profile element andclick Define.
The Adjust Profile dialog box opens. It contains the following adjustment options:
� Line Connect—Replace a chain on the Turn Profile with a straight line. Specify thechain to replace by selecting the From and To vertices.
301
� Trim in Z—Trim the Turn Profile by extending an entity from the selected vertex inthe Z direction until it intersects the Turn Profile.
� Trim in X—Trim the Turn Profile by extending an entity from the selected vertex inthe X direction until it intersects the Turn Profile.
� Trim to Corner—Extend two segments of the Turn Profile at selected endpointsuntil they form a corner.
2. To add an adjustment to the Turn Profile, select the desired adjustment option, click theSelect arrow next to the Adjust Profile label, select the appropriate vertices on theTurn Profile, and click Add.
The system displays the name of the adjustment in the list box at the top of the AdjustProfile dialog box.
3. Click Preview to view the adjusted Turn Profile.
4. To remove an adjustment, select its name in the list box at the top of the Adjust Profiledialog box and click Remove.
5. When satisfied with the adjustments, click OK.
Holemaking
About Holemaking
A Holemaking NC sequence is created by selecting the cycle type andspecifying the holes to drill by defining the Hole Set(s). The order ofmachining the holes is defined by the SCAN_TYPE parameter value; you canalso build the traversal path between the selected holes either by sketchingor by connecting the hole axes.
A Hole Set includes one or more holes to be drilled; each Hole Set has adrilling depth specification or countersink diameter value associated with it.You can include more than one Hole Set in a single Holemaking NCsequence; this allows drilling of holes with different depth specifications, aswell as having multiple countersink diameter values, within a single NCsequence.
There are various methods of selecting the holes to be included in a Hole Set:
• By selecting individual hole axes
• By including all holes on a specified surface
• By including all holes of a specified diameter
• By including all holes with a certain value of a feature parameter
• By including all holes with chamfers machinable by the current tool (for countersinking)
302
• By selecting individual datum points to mark the drill locations
• By including all datum points on a specified surface
• By reading in a file containing the datum points’ coordinates with respect to a specifiedcoordinate system
If you need to perform a series of Holemaking NC sequences on the samegroup of holes, you can define a Drill Group using the techniques above, andthen reference this Drill Group when defining Hole Sets. This simplifies theselection process; you can also parametrically update all the NC sequences bymodifying the Drill Group.
To Create a Holemaking NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a Lathe, Mill, orMill/Turn workcell.
2. Choose Holemaking and specify the number of machine axes, if applicable. ChooseDone.
3. Select the holemaking type and choose Done.
4. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
5. In addition to the common options, available for all the NC sequence types, the SEQSETUP menu will contain the following specific options:
� Holes—Select holes to drill by defining the Hole Sets.
� Check Surfs—Select the surfaces against which gouge checking will be performed.Use this option if there are obstacles (protrusions) along the traversal path betweenthe holes. When the tool traverses from hole to hole and a motion will result ingouging a surface selected as Check Surface, the system will issue the CYCLE / OFFcommand after machining the previous hole, the tool will retract along Z axis to theheight of CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW above the obstacle height, and move atFREE_FEED in XY-plane to the location above the next hole, then reissue theCYCLE / ... statement. This functionality is available for all 3-Axis Holemaking NCsequences except Back boring.
The required options are checked off automatically. Select additional options, if desired,and choose Done. The system will start the user interface for all selected options in turn.
6. The tool path is created automatically depending on the SCAN_TYPE parameter value.Choose Play Path to verify the tool path. If not satisfied, you can either modify theparameters, or choose Customize to specify the traversal path between the selectedholes.
7. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
303
Holemaking Cycle Types
The following holemaking types are available:
• Drill—Drill a hole. Depending on the additional option selected, the following statementwill be output to the CL file:
� Standard (default)—CYCLE / DRILL
� Deep—CYCLE / DEEP
� Break Chip—CYCLE / BRKCHP
� Web—CYCLE / THRU (for multiple plates)
� Back—A series of GOTO and SPINDLE statements to perform back spotting
• Face—Drill a hole with an optional dwell at final depth to help assure a clean surface atthe bottom of the hole. The CYCLE / FACE statement will be output to the CL file.
• Bore—Bore a hole to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. The CYCLE /BORE statement will be output to the CL file.
• Countersink—Drill a chamfer for a countersunk screw. The CYCLE / CSINK statementwill be output to the CL file. If the Back option is selected together with Countersink,the system will perform back countersinking.
• Tap—Drill a threaded hole. Pro/NC supports ISO standard thread output. The CYCLE /TAP statement will be output to the CL file. Two additional options are available:
� Fixed—The feed rate is determined by the combination of thread pitch and spindlespeed.
� Floating—Allows you to modify the feed rate using the parameterFLOAT_TAP_FACTOR.
• Ream—Create a precision finish hole. The CYCLE / REAM statement will be output tothe CL file.
Tools Used for Holemaking Cycle TypesThe table below summarizes which type of tool can be used for each cycletype:
304
TOOLS CYCLE TYPES
Drill
Deep
Breakchip
Web
Back
Face
Bore
Countersink
Tap Ream
Drill • • • • • • • •
Countersink • • • • • • • •
Tap •
Ream • • • • • • •
Bore • • • • • • •
Center Drill • • • • • • • •
Back Spotting •
End Mill • • • • • • •
Three and Five Axis Holemaking
3-Axis Holemaking is available from any type of workcell (Lathe, Mill, orMill/Turn). When creating a 3-Axis Holemaking NC sequence, all holes mustbe oriented parallel to each other and normal to the retract plane.
5-Axis Holemaking allows you to drill holes with axes not necessarily normalto the retract surface. 5-Axis Holemaking is available only when you are in a4- or 5-Axis Mill, or a Mill/Turn workcell.
Note: 5-Axis Holemaking is allowed on a Mill/Turn workcell, even if it is defined as 2- or3-Axis. Select Head1 Mill in the LATHE TYPE menu, and then select MILL from the SELMENU when creating the NC sequence.
If 4-Axis Turning is available, the HEAD 1 and HEAD 2 options in the TURNSEQ menu will allow you to specify which head is to perform the HolemakingNC sequence.
For 5-Axis Holemaking, if you use a retract plane, the tool moves as shown inthe following drawing: it rapids to the point defined by theCLEARANCE_OFFSET parameter above the intersection of the hole axiswith the start surface, orients itself parallel to the hole axis, drills the hole(stopping at the offset defined by the CLEAR_DIST parameter), then retractsback to the CLEARANCE_OFFSET, and traverses to the next hole.
305
Tool is positioned for drillingthe second hole.
for drilling the second hole.
Drilling cycle finished forthe first hole.
Tool startsdrilling.
CLEAR_DIST
CLEARANCE_OFFSET
start surface forthe first hole CLEAR_DIST
Tool retractsafter drilling
after drilling.
start surface forthe second hole
If you define a retract surface of revolution for 5-Axis Holemaking, the toolretracts to this surface after drilling a hole, moves along this surface andnormal to it to the point above the next hole, orients itself parallel to the holeaxis, rapids to CLEAR_DIST, drills the hole, then retracts back to the retractsurface.
To Set Up a Peck Table
1. Choose Peck Table from the PARAM SETUP menu or the MFG PARAMS menu. ThePECK TABLE menu appears with the following options:
� Create—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to create a new peck table. An empty tableof the proper format will be displayed.
� Modify—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to modify the peck table values. Thecurrent peck depth table will be displayed for editing.
� Delete—(Available only at setup time.) Delete the current peck table. You will beasked to confirm your command to delete the table.
� Show—Brings up the Information Window, displaying the values in the peck table.
2. Choose Create or Modify from the PECK TABLE menu. The Pro/TABLE editor windowappears. Enter values for Low Diameter, High Diameter, Peck Depth Ratio, and FeedRate.
3. When you are finished entering values, exit the Pro/TABLE editor and save the changes.
Peck Table
For Deep Drilling, two additional options are available in the HOLE MAKINGmenu:
306
• Constant Peck—Causes the NC sequence to be executed using a single peck depth.
• Variable Peck—Causes a peck table to be used for controlling the peck depth. Whenusing a peck table, the PECK_DEPTH parameter will not be included in the list of CutParameters.
Variable peck depths are specified in a peck table as a function of tooldiameter (CUTTER_DIAM). A peck table contains four parameters:
• Low Diameter—Low end of the tool diameter range. This value must be less than the tooldiameter, and cannot be equal to the High Diameter.
• High Diameter—High end of the tool diameter range. This value must be greater than orequal to the tool diameter.
• Peck Depth Ratio—The ratio of the peck depth to the tool diameter.
• Feed Rate—The speed of the tool while drilling.
If you have specified Variable Peck for the NC sequence, and the peck tablehas not been set up, you will not be allowed to quit the MFG SET UP menuunless you have entered values in the peck table.
Peck tables can also be created, modified, or deleted at setup time.
Example: Peck Table
An example of a peck table is shown below:
LOWDIAMETER
HIGHDIAMETER
PECKDEPTHRATIO
FEED RATE
0.600000 0.950000 0.400000 12.000000
- - 0.350000 12.000000
- - 0.300000 12.000000
- - 0.200000 12.000000
- - 0.100000 10.000000
0.960000 1.100000 0.500000 8.000000
- - 0.400000 8.000000
- - 0.100000 8.000000
307
This table will produce the following CL output:
$$-> SETSTART / 0.00, 0.00, 1.00
RAPID
GOTO / -5.45, 2.15, 1.00
CYCLE / DEEP, DEPTH, 1.285409, STEP, 0.380000, $
STEP, 0.332500, STEP, 0.190000, IPM, 12.000000, $
STEP, 0.095000, IPM, 10.000000, CLEAR, 1.000000
GOTO / -5.45, 2.15, 0.00
CYCLE / OFF
$$-> END /
FINI
STEP value in the CYCLE command is calculated by multiplyingPECK_DEPTH_RATIO by CUTTER_DIAM.
Example: CUTTER_DIAM = .95
PECK DEPTHRATIO
STEP
.5 .95 * .5 = .475
.4 .95 * .4 = .38
.3 .95 * .3 = .285
To Define Hole Sets
The Hole Set option in the HOLES menu allows you to define and modifyHole Sets. If no Hole Sets have been defined, selecting it will immediatelystart creating a new Hole Set; otherwise, a selection menu will appear.Selecting an existing Hole Set name will allow you to modify this Hole Set,choosing the New Set option will allow you to create a new Hole Set.
1. Choose Hole Set from the HOLES menu. If the SEL MENU appears, choose New Set.
308
2. The system displays the HoleSet dialog box.
The upper portion of the dialog box contains six tabulated pages that provide means ofhole selection:
� Axes—Specify holes by selecting individual hole axes.
� Groups—Select predefined drill groups.
� Points—Specify drill locations by selecting datum points or reading in a file withdatum point coordinates.
� Diameters—Specify holes by entering diameter value(s). The system automaticallyincludes all Hole or round Slot features of specified diameter(s).
� Surfaces—Specify holes by selecting surfaces of the reference part or workpiece.The system automatically includes all Hole or round Slot features located on selectedsurfaces.
� Parameters—Select holes with a certain parameter value.
3. Specify the holes to be drilled using any combination of methods listed above. SeeCombining Selection Methods for information on how to use more than one selectionmethod for defining a Hole Set.
Note: Selection by Points can not be used in combination with any of the other selectionmethods.
4. Click Depth to select the desired depth option and specify references as appropriate tothe depth type.
You can also use the following options, located in the lower portion of the Hole Set dialogbox:
� Use Prev—Select a Hole Set used in a previous NC sequence. You can then modifythis Hole Set for the current NC sequence.
� Auto Chamfer—If the checkmark is on, the system will automatically include allholes with chamfers that can be machined with the current tool, and automaticallydetermine depth and direction for Countersink drilling.
� Start hole for scan—If the SCAN_TYPE parameter is set to SHORTEST orTYPE_SPIRAL, lets you select the first hole to be machined.
Note: If you set the CUT_DIRECTION parameter to REVERSE, this hole will bemachined last.
� Direction for 5-axis drilling—Allows you to flip the direction of drilling for aselected axis (except axes selected with Auto Chamfer).
309
� Show rules used in selection—Displays an Info Window listing all the axes,surfaces, diameters, and so on, selected or explicitly unselected in the current HoleSet.
The Preview button at the bottom of the Hole Set dialog box highlights the axes orpoints selected so far, as well as the start and end surfaces, if appropriate. The drillingdepth will be listed in the message window.
5. Click OK at the bottom of the Hole Set dialog box when finished selecting the holes.
Hole Sets can be deleted using the Delete option in the HOLES menu. TheShow option in the HOLES menu will highlight the axes included in aselected Hole Set, as well as start and end surfaces, if appropriate. Thedrilling depth will be listed in the message window.
Combining Selection Methods
Selecting holes by Diameters, Surfaces, Parameters, and Auto Chamferimplies specifying a rule for hole selection. For example, if you specify adiameter value, the system will search the model for the holes of thisdiameter and include them in the Hole Set. If you select a surface, the systemwill include all holes on this surface. If you specify a combination of rules, thesystem will look for holes that satisfy all of them; that is, if you specify adiameter value and select a surface, the system will include only the holes ofthe specified diameter that are located on the selected surface.
The Axes method lets you explicitly select and unselect hole axes, regardlessof other rules used in Hole selection.
When you select Groups, the system copies the rules used for defining theselected Drill Group, as well as explicitly selected and unselected axes, intothe current Hole Set, and applies them to the model according to theprinciples described above.
Selection by Points can not be used in combination with any of the otherselection methods.
To Define Depth
All Hole Sets (except for Countersink drilling), require specifying the drilldepth type. To define the depth type and references, click Depth in theHoleSet dialog box. The system displays the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Useone of the following Hole Depth option buttons:
• Blind—Drill from the start surface (or Z height) to specified depth. Specify the Start andEnd surfaces (by either selecting a surface or entering a Z depth). If you select the
310
checkbox next to the Use breakout distance option, the system adds theBREAKOUT_DISTANCE parameter value when calculating depth.
• Auto—Depth of drilling is determined automatically, by referencing hole geometry. Ifthe selected axis is associated with several coaxial hole features, the maximum depth willbe selected as long as the tool fits inside the hole diameter.
Note: Auto depth is not available for Tap and Ream tools.
• Thru All—Drill a through hole, from the retract surface all the way through theworkpiece(s) or reference part(s) that the hole intersects. By default, all the referenceparts and workpieces are used for depth calculation; you can unselect some of the parts,if desired, or explicitly select parts, by using the Select and Unselect buttons in theHole Set Depth dialog box. Select All selects all the reference parts and workpieces.
The Tool Depth option buttons, Shoulder and Tip, available for Blind andAuto drilling, determine if the drilling depth will be with reference to theshoulder or the tip of the tool.
Drill up to this
Shoulder Tip
DTM1 DTM1
To Define the Starting Point for Drilling
For each hole selected to be drilled, the system has to determine the startingpoint for drilling (output in the GOTO statement). This point is determineddifferently for different drilling types.
For Countersink drilling, and for other types with the drill depth Blind,you have to specify the start surface. You can specify one of:
311
• Surface—Select a surface or create a datum plane whose intersection with the hole axiswill be used as the starting point.
• Z Depth—Enter the Z coordinate with respect to the NC Sequence coordinate system.An imaginary plane will be created at this level and its intersection with the hole axiswill be used as the starting point.
For other depth types, the starting point will be automatically determined asthe point of intersection of the axis with the topmost surface among theworkpiece(s) and reference part(s) that the hole intersects.
By default, all the reference parts and workpieces are used for determiningthe starting point; you can unselect some of the parts, if desired, or explicitlyselect parts, by using the Select and Unselect buttons in the Hole Set Depthdialog box. Select All selects all the reference parts and workpieces. Whenyou select a hole to drill, the system will look for the appropriate surfaceamong the selected parts, and use its intersection with the hole axis as thestarting point.
Unselect theworkpiece.
Default starting point(both the workpieceand the reference partare considered; top ofworkpiece is used)
New starting point(top of referencepart is used)
Selected axis
To Define Depth for Blind Drilling
For Blind drilling, after you specify the starting point you have to also definethe end surface, to determine the drilling depth. Use one of:
• Surface—Select a surface or create a datum plane to drill up to. If you select a non-planar surface, the depth is defined by the point of intersection of this surface with thehole axis.
• Z Depth—Enter an offset value from the starting point (the offset will automaticallypoint towards the workpiece, that is, in the negative Z direction).
To Select Holes by Axes
The Axes tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to select or unselectindividual hole axes.
312
Click Add and select hole axes to add them to the Hole Set.
When you have a pattern of holes, it is not necessary to select all the holeaxes. Select Pattern to indicate that you want all the pattern members to bedrilled, then select any axis belonging to a pattern. You can drill only someholes in the pattern using the Single option.
All axes currently included in the Hole Set are listed in the central list box. Ifyou have selected holes using a different method (for example, Diameters),the names of these axes also appear on the Axes tab.
To remove a previously selected axis from the Hole Set, highlight its name inthe central list box and click Delete. Similar to adding axes, you can use thePattern button to remove a whole pattern of holes.
To Select Holes by Surfaces
The Surfaces tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to include all holeson the selected surface.
Select this surface.
Retractplane
Click Add and select surfaces to add all holes located on these surfaces to theHole Set.
The names of selected surfaces are listed in the central list box on theSurfaces tab. To remove all holes located on a surface, select its name in thelist box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes on a surface, use theAxes tab.
To Select Holes by Diameters
The Diameters tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to include allholes of a specified diameter.
When you click Add, the Select hole diameter dialog box appears. It lists allthe hole diameters present in the model. Select a diameter from the list, orclick Select and select a cylindrical surface on the model to specify thediameter. The system adds all holes of the specified diameter to the Hole Set.
313
The diameter values selected so far are listed in the central list box on theDiameters tab. To remove all holes of a specified diameter, select its value inthe list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes of a specifieddiameter, use the Axes tab.
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters
The Parameters tab in the Hole Set dialog box enables you to include holesthat have certain parameter values.
You can create and modify feature parameters in Part, Assembly, orManufacture mode.
When you go to the Parameters tab, the Feature Parameter list boxcontains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and CosmeticThread features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list,the Value text box below will contain a drop-down list of all the currentlypresent values for this parameter.
1. Select a name of parameter in the Feature Parameter list box.
2. Select an operator from the drop-down list. For parameter types Integer and Real, theoperators available are: “=, “!=, “>, “<“. For other parameter types, the only operatorsavailable are: “= and “!=.
3. Select a value from the drop-down list, or type a value.
4. Click Add.
5. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in the list box below andincludes all holes with the appropriate feature parameter values in the Hole Set.
To Select Holes by Points
Holemaking NC sequences can reference datum points instead of axes. If youspecify a datum point, the system will create a temporary datum axisthrough this point and normal to a certain projection surface, which can bedefined implicitly or explicitly as explained below. This axis will then be usedto build the tool path.
Notes:
� If you use the Points method, Auto drill depth is not available.
� The Points method can not be combined with other methods of hole selection. If youtry using Points when some of the holes have already been selected using anothermethod (or vice versa), the system will ask you if you want to discard the previousselections.
314
There are three ways to select points for drilling:
• By Points—Select individual datum points, or collect all datum points belonging to afeature.
• On Surface—Collect all datum points on selected surfaces.
• File—Specify a coordinate system to be used as origin for the datum point array file (thecoordinate system is assumed to be Cartesian), then either read in a file with the datumpoints’ coordinates using the Browse button (the expected file extension is “.pts), orenter the coordinate values from the keyboard using the Edit button. The Edit buttonalso allows you to edit an existing datum point array file after it has been read in.
Projection surfaces are defined differently, depending on the points selectiontechnique:
• On Surface—Surfaces selected for collecting the datum points will also be used asprojection surfaces.
• By Points or File—For 3-Axis Holemaking, the projection surface is the retract surface.For 5-Axis Holemaking, you have to explicitly select projection surfaces.
When selecting using By Points or File, entering a value for MaximumDistance lets you specify how far the points can be from the projectionsurfaces. If some or all of the input points are too far from projection surfaces,they will be disregarded and the system will issue a message.
To Define the Countersink Diameter
Depth for countersink drilling is defined by the start surface and thecountersink diameter value, entered at the time of defining the Hole Set.Instead of entering a countersink diameter, you can specify that the systemautomatically finds all the applicable chamfers and makes the necessarycalculations.
Countersink diameter is the final diameter of the hole after drilling,measured in the start surface. Tool parameter Point_Angle defines thechamfer angle.
Start surface
Csink Diam
315
To Use the Automatic Chamfer Selection
If your design model contains Chamfer features that you need toCountersink, you can automate the selection process by using the AutoChamfer option, as described below.
1. Create a Countersink NC sequence and set up a tool with the Point_Angle correspondingto the chamfer geometry that you want to machine (see example).
2. When defining the Hole Set, select the checkbox next to the Auto Chamfer option inthe Options section of the dialog box (this option is available for Countersink drillingonly).
3. The system evaluates all the holes in the manufacturing model, and machines only thosewith chamfers corresponding to the Point_Angle of the current tool. The names of theaxes to be machined are listed in the central list box of the Axes tab.
Notes:
• You can apply another rule if you want to narrow the selection. For example, if you wantto machine only chamfered holes on a certain surface, use Surfaces and select thesurface you want.
• If you change the tool to a one with a different Point_Angle, the system willautomatically update the Hole Set to include the holes matching the new tool.
Example: Automatic Chamfer Selection
CHAMFER 45 x .2
CHAMFER 30 x .16CHAMFER 30 x .2
Countersinksequence #1use tool withPoint_Angle 90
Countersinksequence #2:use tool withPoint_Angle 120
316
To Define Plates for Web Drilling
Web drilling enables you to drill holes through two or more plates, separatedby a certain distance, with the tool moving with FEED_RATE while drilling aplate, and then making a RAPID motion along the tool axis to position abovethe next plate.
If you perform Auto or Thru All drilling, the system will determine start andend of drilling for each plate based on the intersection of the hole axes withthe parts selected for depth calculation. By default, all the reference partsand workpieces are used for depth calculation; you can unselect some of theparts, if desired, or explicitly select parts, by using the Select and Unselectbuttons in the Hole Set Depth dialog box. Select All selects all the referenceparts and workpieces.
If you perform Blind drilling, the Hole Set Depth dialog box contains an extrasection at the bottom, Plate Selection, which lists all the plates defined sofar, and has the following buttons:
• Add—Adds a new plate. Define the Start and End surfaces for a new plate, then clickthis button. The system adds the plate name to the list in the Defined Plates for WebDrilling box.
• Change—Changes the Start and End surfaces for an existing plate. Highlight the platename in the Defined Plates for Web Drilling list box and respecify the Start and Endsurfaces for this plate, then click this button.
• Delete—Deletes the highlighted plate.
Back Spotting Specifics
The Back cycle allows you to perform back bore and countersink NCsequences with a special type of tool, called Back Spotting.
Back drilling is always Blind. You have to specify a start surface or Z depth,and then either select a surface or enter an offset value to define the drillingdepth. Unlike other types of drilling, the offset will automatically point in thepositive Z direction. See the example for more information on setting up anNC sequence and resulting tool motions for Back drilling and countersinking.
Example: Back Spotting
The following illustration shows an example of setting up a Back Spottingtool based on geometry to be machined, and specifying the start and enddepth for a Back Drill NC sequence.
317
Cutter_Diam 2.4Length 4Csink_Angle 30Cutting_Offset 0.4Body_Diameter 1.3Insert_Length 0.6
Select this surface (hidden) asstart surface.Type an offset value of 0.75 tospecify dril ling depth.
The resulting sequence of tool motions is shown in the following diagram.
318
For Back Countersink drilling, you have to specify a start surface and acountersink diameter, similar to regular countersink drilling. The illustrationbelow shows a Back Countersink NC sequence performed with the same toolas in the previous example.
319
Select this face as the start surface (similar tothe previous example).Type 2.2 for countersink diameter.
You can also use the Auto Chamfer option for Back Countersink drilling, inwhich case the system will automatically include all holes with chamfers thatcan be machined with the current tool, that is, with the chamfer anglecorresponding to the Csink_Angle of the tool.
Drill Groups
About Drill Groups
You can define groups of hole axes at setup time for later use in HolemakingNC sequences. Drill Groups allow you to:
• Simplify the hole selection. Once a Drill Group is defined, it can be selected for anyHolemaking NC sequence by just selecting its name from a namelist menu.
• Modify Holemaking NC sequences by adding or excluding holes. Modifying a Drill Groupwill automatically update all NC sequences that reference this group.
Defining Drill GroupsTo access the Drill Group functionality, choose Drill Group from the MFGGEOMETRY menu. The following options are available:
• Create—Define a new Drill Group.
• Delete—Delete an existing Drill Group. Select the name of the group from a namelistmenu.
• Modify—Modify a Drill Group definition.
320
• Blank—Blank a Drill Group which was previously displayed. Select a name (onlyunblanked Drill Groups are shown in the namelist menu), the axes are displayed in thedefault color (yellow).
• Unblank—Display a Drill Group as it is currently defined. Once you select a Drill Groupname from the namelist menu, all axes included in the group are displayed in magenta.
To Define a Drill Group
1. Choose Mfg Setup, Mfg Geometry, then Drill Group.
2. Choose Create and enter a name for the Drill Group.
3. The system displays an abbreviated version of the Hole Set dialog box. It has four tabbedpages: Axes, Surfaces, Diameters, and Parameters, to let you select holes to beincluded in the Drill Group. The mechanism of hole selection for Drill Group is the sameas when creating a Hole Set.
4. Click OK when finished. To display the Drill Group definition, choose Unblank andselect the group name.
To Modify a Drill Group
Modifying a Drill Group will automatically update all NC sequences thatreference this group.
1. Choose Mfg Setup, Mfg Geometry, then Drill Group.
2. Choose Modify and select the Drill Group name from the namelist menu.
3. The system again displays the abbreviated version of the Hole Set dialog box, as whendefining a Drill Group, allowing you to select more holes or unselect some of them. ClickOK when finished.
Using Drill Groups
When you select holes for a Holemaking NC sequence, the Drill Group tabin the Hole Set dialog box lets you select all holes included into an existingDrill Group.
Drill Groups can not be modified at the time of creating an NC sequence. Youcan select more holes to be included in the Hole Set, but they will not beincluded in the Drill Group. You can also remove some of the holes from the
321
Hole Set, either by adding more rules or by explicitly removing axes in theAxes tab.
If a hole in the selected Drill Group is not selectable for the currentHolemaking NC sequence (for example, its axis is not parallel to the Z-axis ofthe NC Sequence coordinate system for 3-Axis Holemaking), this hole will beignored. The rest of the group, however, will be included.
If a Drill Group is later modified, the Holemaking NC sequences thatreference this group will be updated accordingly. The rules to remember are:
• If you remove a hole from a Drill Group, it will not be drilled.
• If you add a new hole to the Drill Group and the Customize functionality has not beenutilized (that is, the holes are drilled according to the SCAN_TYPE), the NC sequencewill be automatically updated to drill the new hole.
• If you add a new hole to the Drill Group and the Customize functionality has beenutilized, the new hole will not be drilled until you adjust the Tool Motions.
Auto Drilling
About Auto Drilling
Auto Drilling is an advanced way of creating Holemaking NC sequences. It iseasy to use and reduces the time required to program multiple tool paths.
The Auto Drilling user interface is based on a single dialog box. The systemautomatically identifies all the holes present in the model and lists them in asingle table. You can customize the look of the table by selecting theparameters you want to display and changing the width of the columns.
To create Holemaking NC sequences, you select the holes to machine, andspecify which drilling method to use for each hole by selecting from a list ofpreset Hole Strategies. These Hole Strategies are based on ManufacturingUDFs.
You can also edit the values of hole parameters, such as hole dimensions,upper and lower tolerances, or thread parameters. These values override thedesign part information when you are creating the Auto Drilling sequences.
To Create an Auto Drilling NC Sequence
1. On the MACHINING menu, click Auto Drilling.
322
The system displays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, which shows the names of the defaultNC Sequence coordinate system and retract plane. You can select a different coordinatesystem or retract plane, if desired.
2. Click View > Auto-Drilling Table to list all the holes that can be auto drilled using thiscoordinate system and retract plane. The auto-drilling table lists the holes with theirparameters, as well as the existing hole machining strategies. You can further filter theholes (for example, by specifying a starting surface or a diameter), edit hole parameters,or add more machining strategies. You can also customize the table format by selectingthe parameters to display, and change the sorting order.
3. Select the hole(s) you want to machine; then select the desired drill method in the rightpane and click << to apply this method to the selected holes. Proceed applying drillmethods to machine all the holes.
4. Click OK to create the NC sequences.
The system again displays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, which now shows all the NCsequences being created as a result of applying the drill methods. For each NC sequence,the system displays the pocket number, the tool name, the cycle type, the sequence name,as well as the minimum diameter and maximum length. You can reorder the NCsequences, if desired.
5. Click OK when finished.
To Select a Coordinate System and Retract Plane
You must specify the coordinate system (Program Zero) and retract plane tobe used for Auto Drilling. The system automatically finds all the holes withthe axes parallel to the z-axis of the specified coordinate system and liststhem in the Auto-Drilling table. You can further filter these holes, if desired,and then apply drilling methods to some or all of them.
1. Click View > Select Csys.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays the names of the currently selected coordinatesystem and retract plane in text boxes labeled NC Sequence Program Zero and NCSequence Retract Plane, respectively. There is a Select icon next to each text box.There are also three buttons below the text boxes: Apply, Default, and Previous. Thelist box on the right contains all the previously specified combinations of the Programzero coordinate system and retract plane.
2. To change the coordinate system, click the Select icon and select a coordinate system onthe screen (or create a new one).
3. To change the retract plane, click the Select icon use the following options in the RetractSelection dialog box:
� Select—Select a datum plane. It must be normal to the z-axis of the currentlyselected coordinate system.
323
� Along Z Axis—Type the offset value along the z-axis of the currently selectedcoordinate system.
4. You can also select an existing combination of the Program Zero coordinate system andretract plane from the list box on the right.
5. Click one of the three buttons below the text boxes:
� Apply—Accept the currently selected combination of the coordinate system andretract plane.
� Default—Use the default coordinate system and retract plane.
� Previous—Ignore the current selections and return to the previous Auto-Drillingtable.
The Default Coordinate System and Retract Plane
When you create an Auto Drilling NC sequence, the system uses the currentmodal settings for the coordinate system and the retract plane.
If you have specified different Machine and NC Sequence coordinate systems,the system uses the NC Sequence coordinate system to filter holes accordingto the machining direction. If the NC Sequence coordinate system is notdefined, the system uses the Machine coordinate system.
Note: Unlike other types of NC sequences, you must define a validcombination of the coordinate system and retract plane before you selectAuto Drilling from the MACHINING menu. You can later change yourselections while defining the Auto Drilling NC sequence.
To Filter Rows
The Auto-Drilling table initially lists all the holes with the axes parallel tothe z-axis of the specified coordinate system. You can apply further filteringrules to these holes, if desired.
1. Click View > Filter Rows.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays three list boxes: the Filter by box, on the left, listsall the available filters; the middle box lists the values available for the filter selected inthe left box; and the Selected Filters box, on the right, lists the currently selectedfiltering rules. There are three buttons between the middle and right boxes: >>, <<, andPreview; and three buttons below the list boxes: OK, Apply, and Cancel.
2. Select a name of the filter in the Filter by box. The central box is updated to list thevalues available for the current filter (for example, diameter of the holes present in themodel).
324
3. Select the desired value and click the >> button. The filtering rule appears in theSelected Filters box under the appropriate heading.
4. To view the holes that correspond to the current combination of filtering rules, clickPreview. The system highlights the appropriate holes on the screen (move the dialogbox, if necessary, to view the model).
5. To remove a filtering rule, select it in the Selected Filters box and click the << button.To remove all the filtering rules, select Default in the Filter by box.
6. To complete the filtering process, click one of the three buttons below the list boxes:
� OK—Accept the current filtering rules and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
� Apply—Apply the current filtering rules.
� Cancel—Ignore the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
Filters Available for Auto Drilling
The following filters are available:
• Surface—Filters holes based on their start surface. The middle list box contains a list ofthe existing start surfaces.
• Diameter—Filters holes based on their diameter. The middle list box contains a list ofthe existing hole diameters.
• Hole Style—Filters holes based on the assigned drilling method. The middle list boxcontains a list of the existing Hole Strategies.
• Parameters—Filters holes based on the specified parameter value. The middle list boxcontains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and Cosmetic Threadfeatures in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list, the Value text boxbelow will contain a drop-down list of all the currently present values for this parameter.Select the desired operator (for example, “!=) from the drop-down Operator list, and avalue from the Value drop-down list to specify a relation. The system displays theresulting relation in the bottom list box.
• Status—Filters holes based on their machining status. If you select Incomplete,displays only those holes that have not been programmed.
• Default—Filters holes based on the machining direction of the coordinate system(equivalent to removing all the selected filters).
If you specify a combination of filters, the system searches for holes thatsatisfy all of them; that is, if you specify a diameter value and select asurface, the system includes only the holes of the specified diameter that arelocated on the selected surface.
325
To Edit Hole Parameters
You can edit the values of hole parameters, such as drilling depth, upper andlower tolerances, or thread parameters. These values override the design partinformation when you are creating the Auto Drilling sequences.
1. Click View > Edit Hole Dimensions or View > Edit Thread Parameters. While inEdit mode, you can toggle between editing the hole dimensions and the threadparameters by selecting either Edit Hole Parameters or Edit Cosmetic ThreadParameters in the right pane of the Auto-Drilling dialog box.
The system displays the text boxes for the appropriate parameters in the right pane.
2. Select a hole in the Auto-Drilling table by clicking in the appropriate row.
3. To change the start surface, click the Select icon below the Start Surface label andselect the desired surface on the screen.
The surface name appears in the text box below the Start Surface label.
4. To edit other parameters, type the new values in the appropriate text boxes.
5. Click Apply to apply the new values to the selected hole.
The system updates the fields in the Auto-Drilling table to reflect the new parametervalues.
6. To revert to the design part parameters, select the hole in the Auto-Drilling table andclick Reset. To reset only one parameter, select From Reference Model in theappropriate text box and click Apply.
To Apply Hole Strategies
You can specify which drilling method to use for each hole by selecting from alist of preset Hole Strategies.
1. Click View > Apply Drilling Method.
2. Select the hole(s) in the Auto-Drilling table. To select one or more holes, click in theappropriate row(s). To select a range of holes, select the first hole in the range, then holddown the SHIFT key and select the last hole in the range. Once you select a hole, its rowis highlighted. To unselect a single hole and retain the rest of selections, click again inthe highlighted row.
3. Select the Hole Strategy you want to apply to these holes. The existing Hole Strategiesare listed in the right pane of the Auto-Drilling dialog box. You can browse through thedirectory structure to search for the Hole Strategies. By default, the search starts in thedirectory specified by using the configuration option autodrill_udf_dir <pathname> ,or, if not specified, in your working directory.
4. Select one of the depth options on the Hole Strategies tab:
326
� From Table—The drill depth is defined by the Depth parameter in the Auto-Drilling table. If you select this option, the Hole Strategy will have the <T> prefixwhen it is listed in the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table.
� From Param—The drill depth is defined either by the table or by the UDF NCsequence, depending on the DEPTH_BY_TABLE parameter value. This featureparameter of type Yes or No must be assigned to the UDF NC sequence before youcreate the UDF. If the parameter is set to Yes, then the drill depth is defined by theDepth parameter in the Auto-Drilling table; if it is No, then the drill depth is definedby the UDF NC sequence. If you select this option, the Hole Strategy will have the<P> prefix when it is listed in the Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table.
� From Seq—The drill depth is defined by the UDF NC sequence. If you select thisoption, the Hole Strategy will have the <S> prefix when it is listed in the Hole Stylefield of the Auto-Drilling table.
5. Click << to apply the selected strategy to the highlighted holes.
The system displays the name of the Hole Strategy with the appropriate depth prefix inthe Hole Style field of the Auto-Drilling table and changes the Status field fromIncomplete to Complete.
6. To remove a previously applied Hole Strategy, select the hole(s) in the Auto-Drillingtable and click Remove.
7. To exit the Auto-Drilling dialog box and create the appropriate Holemaking NCsequences, click OK.
Defining Your Hole Strategies
You can define your Hole Strategies by creating Manufacturing UDFs basedon Holemaking NC sequences.
The Holemaking NC sequence used to define a UDF for Auto Drilling has thefollowing characteristics:
• Can machine only one hole (including any coaxial holes, bores, countersinks, and so on)
• Cannot itself be created from a UDF (must be a regular Holemaking NC sequence)
When defining the UDF, you must specify the following references:
• operation—The operation.
• oper_csys—The Machine coordinate system.
• csys—The NC Sequence coordinate system.
• oper_retract—The Operation retract.
• retract—The NC Sequence retract.
327
• axis—The hole axis.
• start_surface—The start surface for the drilling sequence.
The syntax of these UDF references must be exactly as shown above.
To Customize the Table
You can customize the look of the table by selecting the parameters you wantto display and changing the names and width of the columns.
1. Click View > Customize Columns.
The Auto-Drilling dialog box displays a list of available parameters, with a check boxlocated to the left of each parameter label. Using the text box located to the right of theparameter label you can switch between two names for this parameter, one long and oneshort. This name will be used as a heading in the Auto-Drilling table. If you select shortnames, you can later manually change the width of the appropriate columns to make thetable more compact.
Immediately below the list of parameters there are two icons: Select All and UnselectAll. Immediately below these icons there are three buttons: OK, Cancel, and Defaults.
Parameters that are currently displayed in the Auto-Drilling table have their checkboxes selected.
2. Select or clear the check boxes as desired, to specify which parameters are to bedisplayed in the Auto-Drilling table. You can use the Select All and Unselect All iconsto speed up the selection process.
3. To change the name of a column, switch the parameter name by clicking the drop-downarrow next to the text box.
4. When finished, click one of the three buttons:
� OK—Accept the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table. The tabledisplay will be updated to reflect the new parameter selections and column widths.
� Cancel—Ignore the current selections and return to the Auto-Drilling table.
� Defaults—Use the default set of parameters and the default column widths.
To Reorder the NC Sequences Created by Auto Drilling
When you apply the drilling methods to the selected holes and click OK, thesystem redisplays the Auto-Drilling dialog box, and shows all the NCsequences being created as a result of applying the drill methods. For eachNC sequence, the system displays the pocket number, the tool name, thecycle type, the sequence name, as well as the minimum diameter and
328
maximum length. You can reorder these NC sequences both automaticallyand manually.
1. Click Auto Reorder to automatically reorder the NC sequences based on:
a. Process order in UDF
b. Limiting tool changes
If the Consider Orientation checkbox is selected, the system will reorder based on thecoordinate system associated with the holes being drilled.
2. To manually reorder the NC sequences, highlight the appropriate row(s), click Cut, thenplace the cursor in the new location and click Paste.
The system inserts the row(s) immediately above the new cursor location.
3. Click Undo or Redo to roll the reordering changes back or forward.
4. Click OK when finished.
Wire EDM
About Wire EDM NC Sequences
Wire EDM is the NC sequence performed by Wire Electric DischargeMachines. Pro/NC lets you create 2- and 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences,depending on the number of axes specified when defining the workcell.
To Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence
Use 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences for any type of 2-axis contouring,including Wire EDM, flame cut, water jet, and laser.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a WEDM workcell.
2. The MACH AUX menu appears. If in a 4-Axis workcell, choose 2 Axis.
3. Choose Contouring and Done.
4. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not haveto select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 5. If you choose SeqSetup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NCsequence types.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface forall selected options in turn.
5. Choose Customize and interactively specify the tool path.
329
General techniques for creating Automatic Cut motions in Wire EDM are similar to thatin Trajectory Milling. You can automatically create Rough, Finish, and Detach motionsreferencing the same contour. You can also create No Core cut motions. Connect the cutmotions using the Tool Motion functionality.
6. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
7. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
Contouring and No Core Cut Motions
There are two general types of 2-Axis Wire EDM cut motions:
• Contouring—The tool will follow a specified trajectory. You can create Rough, Finish, andDetach cut motions by referencing the same contour.
• No Core—All material within a specified contour will be removed.
To Create Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions
For 2- and 4-Axis Contouring, the INTERACT PATH menu is called WEDMOPT, because it contains additional options that allow you create Rough andFinish motions within the same NC sequence and using the same contour, aswell as create separate Detach motions to cut off previously machined parts.These options also appear in the CUT ALONG menu for 2- and 4-AxisContouring.
If you check off the Rough option, a single Cut Motion will be created. If youalso check off the Finish option, the system will additionally create as many
330
Finish motions as specified by the NUM_PROFILE_PASSES parametervalue. If the appropriate information is present in the register table, it will beused; if the information is missing, the remaining passes will be computedusing the PROF_INCREMENT parameter value.
Rough and Profile Cut Motions
REVERSE_DISTATTACH_WIDTH
Approach move Thread Point
PROF_INCREMENT
STOCK_ALLOW + SPARK_ALLOW + 0.5*CUTTER_DIAM
NUM_PROFILE_PASSES 2
Contour ofthe part tobe machined
Rough cutmotion
1st Finishcut motion
2nd Finishcut motion
The APPROACH_MOVE parameter allows you to specify if the Approachmove will be created (you must also select or create a start point for theApproach move using the Thread Point or Approach Point option in theCUT ALONG menu, described below). If you specify the machining offset(CUTCOM), the system automatically determines the correct application ofCUTCOM, based on the location of the start point with respect to the contourto be machined, as shown in the following illustration.
331
Example 1:Machine outside the contour(punch), start point outside thecontour
Example 2:Machine outside the contour (punch),start point inside the contour
Example 3:Machine inside the contour (die),start point outside the contour
Example 4: Machine inside thecontour (die), start point insidethe contour
referencepart
referencepart
Reference part
Referencepart
Thread point
Threadpoint
Threadpoint
Threadpoint
ContourCUTCOM RIGHT
ContourCUTCOM RIGHT
ContourCUTCOM
LEFT
contourCUTCOM
LEFT
approachCUTCOM
RIGHT
ApproachCUTCOM
RIGHT
ApproachCUTCOM
LEFT
approachCUTCOM LEFT
Note: If CUTCOM_MOVE is specified, it will use the CUTCOM direction for the cutmotion, as before. It is not recommended to specify CUTCOM_MOVE for cases 2 and 3shown in the illustration above.
The Connect moves between multiple cut motions are defined by theparameter CUT_MOTION_CONNECT.
If you check off the Detach option, a Detach motion will also be created. Itwill have the same shape as the Rough motion for which it is created, with itslength being equal to (REVERSE_DIST + ATTACH_WIDTH).
Example: Rough, Finish, and Detach Cut Motions
The following two illustrations show an example of creating multiple Roughcut motions within the same NC sequence and then cutting off the parts in aseparate NC sequence referencing the previously created cut motions.
The following illustration shows multiple Rough cut motions with Approachmoves.
332
REVERSE_DIST
ATTACH_WIDTH
Approach move
ThreadPoint
Rough cut motionCUT_MOTION_CONNECT CUT_WIREAPPROACH_MOVE YES
The following illustration shows Detach motions.
Create the Detach motions usingthe Use Prev option, andreference the NC sequence shownin the previous illustration.
ATTACH_WIDTH +REVERSE_DIST
APPROACH_MOVE NO
Detach cut motion
To Specify Thread Point and Approach Point
When you create Automatic Cut motions in Wire EDM, the CUT ALONGmenu contains the following additional options:
• Thread Point—Specify the point for threading in the wire by selecting or creating adatum point. By default (that is, unless you specify a separate Approach point using theoption below), the Thread point is also used as a start point for the Approach move, asdescribed above.
• Approach Point—Specify a datum point, other than the Thread point, to serve as astart point for the Approach move. If you specify both a Thread point and an Approachpoint, the system will load wire at the Thread point, invoke initial power, flush, and feedregisters, move the wire directly to the Approach point, and then make the shortest movefrom the Approach point to the cut contour. The system will apply the number of cutcompoints and invoke the cutcom and taper registers on this move.
333
Example: Specifying Thread Point and Approach Point
Thread Point Thread Point
Approach Point
ATTACH_WIDTH +REVERSE_DIST
To Specify Taper Angle for 2-Axis Contouring
The Taper Angle option in the INT CUT menu, available for 2-AxisContouring Wire EDM only, allows you to select pairs of points on the toolpath: the first point is where the taper angle is turned on, and the second—where it is turned off.
1. Choose Taper Angle from the INT CUT menu.
2. The TAPER ANGLE menu appears with the options:
� Add—Add pairs of taper points.
� Remove—Delete a previously defined pair of taper points by selecting one of thepoints.
� Show—Display the currently defined pairs of taper points.
� Redefine—Modify location of taper points or the taper angle value.
3. Choose Add.
4. Select an option from the NOW/NEXT menu to specify when the tool axis position is to bechanged:
� Now—At the selected point.
� Next—At the next GOTO point.
5. Select a point on the cut motion to specify where the taper angle is to be turned on.
334
6. Select the appropriate option from the NOW/NEXT menu, if needed, and select anotherpoint on the cut motion to specify where the taper angle is to be turned off.
7. Choose Enter and enter a value for the taper angle for this pair of points. Previouslyspecified values, if any, will be available for selection.
To Specify Corner Conditions
1. Choose Corners from the INT CUT menu.
2. The CORNER COND menu appears with the following options:
� Add—Select corners to add corner conditions.
� Redefine—Respecify a corner condition.
� Delete—Allows you to select a corner condition to delete.
� Delete Last—Deletes the corner condition that has been added last. You can usethis option more than once; when there are no more corner conditions left, theDelete Last option becomes inaccessible.
� Delete All—Deletes all the corner conditions.
3. When you choose Add from the CORNER COND menu, the CORNER ADD menu appearswith the following options:
� Specify—Select points on the cut motion and specify type by selecting theappropriate option. After each selection, the corner condition will be added at theselection point. Choose Done Sel when finished.
� Automatic—Corner conditions will be automatically added at all the corners.Corner conditions will be added according to the following rules:
All concave corners will be filleted.
All convex corners on an outside contour of a part will be filleted.
All convex corners on an inside contour of a part will be looped.
If the system is unable to determine the type of the contour, you will be prompted tospecify if this is in inside or an outside contour using the following options:
� Female Part—Inside contour.
� Male Part—Outside contour.
After the corner conditions are automatically added, you can review and change themusing the AUTO SELECT menu:
335
� Next—Display the next assigned corner condition.
� Prev—Display the previous corner condition.
� Change Type—Specify a different corner condition type for the highlighted corner.
� Remove—Delete corner condition at the highlighted corner.
� Show All—Display all the currently added corner conditions. Straight cornerconditions will be highlighted in yellow, convex—in red, and concave—in cyan.
� Info—List information about the highlighted corner condition type in the MessageWindow.
Corner Condition Types
Corner conditions can be specified for the vertices of the cut motion createdusing the Edge or Curve option, to avoid gouging sharp corners. Wherever acorner condition is added, a small parallelogram will be incorporated in thecut motion: the tool will continue moving along the first entity, then return toenter tangent to the second entity. The size of the parallelogram is defined bythe path parameter CORNER_LENGTH.
If you add a corner condition along an entity or between two tangent entities,the angle of the parallelogram will be defined by the CORNER_ANGLEparameter; if the condition is at a vertex and the corner is sharp, theCORNER_ANGLE value will be ignored and the sides of the parallelogramwill be formed as a continuation of the adjoining entities.
The following graphic illustrates the CORNER_LENGTH andCORNER_ANGLE parameters.
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_LENGTH
CORNER_ANGLE
The following corner condition types are available:
• Straight—Create a straight corner condition.
• Concave—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is concave.
336
• Convex—Create a round corner motion for a corner that is convex.
• Chamfer—A chamfer whose size is defined by the CHAMFER_DIM parameter, whichrepresents the distance cut on each side of the corner.
• Bisect—The tool makes a straight cut into the material, bisecting the angle betweenadjacent (non-tangent) edges. The length of the cut is defined by the CORNER_LENGTHparameter. Cutter compensation will be turned off for the corner creation motion andreactivated for the continuation of cut motion. This type of corner is used to allow thepart to flex and spring back during subsequent assembly.
• Fillet—Create a fillet corner motion.
• Loop—Create a loop corner motion. Available for convex corner conditions only.
Example: Corner Conditions
The following illustration shows straight and round corner conditions.
cut motion with corner conditionsdisplayed
Straight corner condition
Round (Loop) corner conditionat convex corner
design part assembledto workpiece
To Create No Core Cut Motions
No Core cut motions remove all material within a specified contour.
1. Create a 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence, specify the tool and manufacturing parameters.
2. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
3. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
4. Choose No Core from the WEDM OPT menu. Select the type of geometric references touse (Sketch, Edge, or Curve) and choose Done.
337
5. Use the Thread Point and Approach Point options in the CUT ALONG menu if youare not satisfied with the system default start point. To specify a Thread point or anApproach point, select or create a datum point, then choose Done/Return from theDEFN POINT menu.
6. Define a closed contour to be machined by either sketching or selecting edges or curves,based on the type of geometric references selected in step 4:
� For Sketch—Sketch a closed contour in the XY-plane of the NC Sequence coordinatesystem.
� For Edge—Select edges to define the area to be removed. The edges must form aclosed contour.
� For Curve—Select curves to define the area to be removed. The curves must form aclosed contour.
This contour will then be scanned according to the specified scan type (similar to a singleslice in milling).
7. Choose Done Cut or Next Cut from the INT CUT menu.
Specifying a Start Point for No Core Cut Motions
When you create a No Core cut motion, the system calculates a default startpoint, based on the specified contour and the spiral step. You can specify adifferent start point for a No Core cut motion by using the Thread Pointoption in the CUT ALONG menu and creating or selecting a datum point; thesystem will then calculate the scan trajectory and the default start point, andmove the wire from the user-defined start point (Thread point) to the defaultstart point by tracing along the connection portions of the scan pattern.
Default startpoint
User-definedstart point
RETURN_TO_START YES
If the RETURN_TO_START parameter is set to YES (the default is NO), thewire will return to the start point upon completing the cut motion.
The connection move is defined by the CUT_MOTION_CONNECTparameter. When CUT_MOTION_CONNECT is set to CUT_WIRE (the
338
default), the wire will be unloaded and fed at FREE_FEED rate along astraight line to the start point of the subsequent cut motion. If set toCONTINUOUS, the wire will move from the end of the No Core motion to thestart point of the subsequent motion at the CUT_FEED rate.
If you specify both a Thread point and an Approach point, the system willload wire at the Thread point, move it directly to the Approach point, andthen use the Approach point as a user-defined start point.
To Use Previous Cut Motions
You can create new Automatic Cut motions by following previously createdones. When you choose Use Prev from the WEDM OPT menu, the USE PRVOPT menu will appear with the options:
• By NC Seq—If you choose this option, a namelist menu of all applicable NC sequenceswill appear. Once you select an NC sequence name, all Automatic Cut motions present inthis NC sequence will be listed in a checkmark menu. You can check off as many motionsas you like, or use Select All.
• By Cut—If you choose this option, all applicable Automatic Cut motions in all thepreviously created NC sequences will be listed. You can select one Automatic Cut motion.
When you redefine an Automatic Cut motion, the Ref Cut Mtn option in theCUT ALONG menu allows you to select a reference Automatic Cut motionusing the same interface as the By Cut option above.
To Mirror Cut Motions
In Wire EDM, you can create Automatic Cut motions by mirroring previouslycreated cut motions. The mechanism for selecting a cut motion to mirror isthe same as when you create cut motions using the Use Prev option.
Note: You cannot mirror a cut motion that was created using the Mirror option.
1. Choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu.
2. Choose Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
3. Choose Mirror from the WEDM OPT menu. Notice that Use Prev highlightsautomatically and all the other options become dimmed. Choose Done.
4. Using either By Cut or By NC Seq, select the cut motion to mirror from a namelistmenu. The selected cut motion highlights on the screen.
339
5. Select or create a plane to mirror about.
6. The mirror cut motion is created.
Example: Mirroring Cut Motions
The following illustration shows mirroring previous cut motions.
Reference cutmotion
Create a datumplane Mirror cut motion
created
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Taper Angle Format
To create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence with CL data output in XYZ / IJKformat or using the STAN statement, follow the procedure below.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a 4-axis WEDMworkcell.
2. Choose Taper Angle, 4 Axis, and Done from the MACH AUX menu.
3. If you have specified the tool, site, and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not haveto select Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 5. If you choose SeqSetup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NCsequence types.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface forall selected options in turn.
4. Choose Customize and interactively specify the tool path. You can automatically createRough, Finish, and Detach motions referencing the same contour.
5. Choose Play Path to verify the tool path generated by the system.
6. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
340
To Create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC Sequence in Head1/Head2 Format
To create a 4-Axis Wire EDM NC sequence with CL data output inHead1/Head2 format, follow the procedure below.
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You must be in a 4-axis WEDMworkcell.
2. Choose XY-UV Type, 4 Axis, and Done from the MACH AUX menu.
3. Choose Seq Setup from the NC SEQUENCE menu. The SEQ SETUP menu will includethe following commands:
� XY Plane—Specify the bottom plane for Head2 output.
� UV Plane—Specify the top plane for Head1 output.
Note: The XY Plane and UV Plane settings are modal. That is, you have to specifythe top and bottom planes for the first 4-Axis WEDM NC sequence in themanufacturing model; for subsequent sequences, the system will automatically usethe previous top and bottom planes unless you explicitly change them.
The CTM DEPTH menu will appear twice to allow you specify both planes. Use:
� Specify Plane—To select or create a plane.
� Z Depth—To locate the plane by entering a value for depth with respect to the NCsequence coordinate system.
� Use Prev—To use a top or bottom plane from one of the previous NC sequences.Select the sequence name from a namelist menu.
4. Choose Customize, then select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in theCustomize dialog box, and click Insert.
5. The INT CUT menu will appear with Cut already chosen, causing the CUT ALONG menuto appear as well, with Drive Surf already chosen. The following commands will also belisted:
� Thread Point—Select or create a datum point as the loading point for the wire andstarting location of the tool path.
� Approach Point—Select or create a datum point as the alternate starting locationof the tool path. The system will load wire at the Thread point, move it directly to theApproach point, and then start cutting from the point on the contour closest to theApproach point.
� Contour1—Sketch or select the first contour in the cut.
� Contour2—Sketch or select the second contour in the cut.
341
Note: When creating the cut motion, the system will attempt to synchronize theentities in the two contours in the order they were sketched or selected: the firstentity of the first contour with the first entity of the second contour, and so on. Keepthis in mind when sketching or selecting the contours, or supply manualsynchronization.
� Side Surfs—Indicate the contours of the cut by selecting side surfaces. Thiscommand is used in place of the Contour1 and Contour2 commands.
� Synch—Brings up the SYNCH menu for specifying points to synchronize thepositions of Head1 and Head2.
� Direction—Indicate the direction the tool will travel in to make the cut.
� Offset—Specify the direction in which the cut motion will be offset.
6. Choose Done from the CUT ALONG menu to begin specifying the cut.
7. Select or create a datum point to use as the Thread point. If you selected ApproachPoint as well, select or create another datum point to use as the Approach point.
8. The TRAJ OPT menu will appear in turn for contour1 and contour2; choose Sketch orSelect to indicate the contour.
9. If you are creating synch points, the SYNCH menu appears with the following commands:
� Add—Select a location on a contour to place a synch point.
� Remove—Select an existing synch point to delete.
� Show—Display existing synch points.
� Done/Return—Quit the SYNCH menu and return to defining the cut motion.
10. An arrow appears, originating at the start point that you created in step 7. Choose Flipor Okay to indicate the direction of the cut motion.
11. The SLOT OFFSET menu appears with the options None, Left, and Right. Choose anoption to indicate the direction of the tool offset.
12. The INT CUT menu reappears; choose Show to display the cut motion.
Note: If you get an error message “Cut motion cannot be created try adding more synchpoints.
Automatic Synchronization of Start and End Points
The start and end points of a 4-Axis Wire EDM Automatic Cut motion can beautomatically synchronized using the AUTOSYNCH_START_ENDparameter, available both at the NC sequence and the Customize levels. This
342
functionality applies to 4-Axis Automatic Cut motions defined using theContour1/Contour2 or Side Surfs options.
By default (AUTOSYNCH_START_END YES), the two heads will beautomatically synchronized at the beginning and the end of each cut, asexplained below.
At the beginning of cut, the start of the1st contour is auto synchronized withthe closest point of the 2nd contour.
At the end of cut, the end of the contourcompleted first is auto synchronized withthe closest point of the other contour.
Here, the default synchronization isstill used.
As the cut starts, use defaultsynchronization.
1
2
3
4
Lower contour
Upper contour
The illustration above shows how automatic synchronization works. The cutfor the lower guide is the larger rectangular contour. The cut for the upperwire guide is the smaller contour. On the initial engagement of the wire tothe lower contour, the upper contour will be synchronized automatically byfinding the shortest distance between the two contours. As the wire goesaround the profiles, they will automatically be synchronized by findingcorresponding vertices on each. If the vertices are at tangent edges, you havean option to automatically synchronize the vertices between contours withthe same number of entities by setting the AUTO_SYNCHRONIZEparameter to YES (the default is NO). You can also provide additionalsynchronization by manually specifying Synch points.
As the wire approaches the end of the pass on the cut motion, the endpointsynchronization will take effect. In this example, the wire will complete theupper contour before the lower contour; therefore, a synchronization pointwill be automatically made to swing the lower wire in line with the upperwire using the shortest distance between the two contours. The wire will thenstep in to the next pass and repeat the process.
Note: If an approach is made on a non-planar surface (for example, a cone), orienting thewire axis as described above may cause a gouge because the axis may not line up withthe u-v lines of the surface.In this case, you will get a message: “WARNING: Approach is made on non-planarsurface and may cause gouge. Based on this warning, you can either setAUTOSYNCH_START_END to NO or change the Thread (Approach) point.
343
If you set AUTOSYNCH_START_END to NO, the start and end points of theupper and lower contours will be mapped by cut entities; therefore, the upperand lower contours will have different start and end points in XY.
To Set Up the Register Table(s)
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu.
2. Choose Param Setup from the MFG SETUP menu.
3. Choose Register from the PARAM SETUP menu.
4. The following options are available:
� Create—Create a new register table. Enter the name for the table, then edit it inPro/TABLE. You have to store this table on disk using the Save option below inorder to use it in other models.
� Modify—Modify an existing register table. In order to be modifiable, the table has toeither be created in the model, or added to it using the Retrieve option below.
� Retrieve—Read an existing register table from disk to add it to the currentmanufacturing model.
� Save—Save a register table on disk to use it in another model.
� Delete—Delete an existing register table.
� Show—Display a register table in the Information Window. Select a register tablename from a namelist menu. Only tables that exist in the model can be displayed.
More than one register table can be added to the model. You can specifywhich table is to be used in an NC sequence by supplying the name of thetable as the REGISTER_TABLE parameter value.
At the time of defining the NC sequence, the Register option appears in theMFG PARAMS menu. It brings up the CR/SEL RGR menu with the followingoptions:
• Set Up—Brings up the REGISTER menu to allow you to create, read, or modify registertables.
• Select—Select an existing register table. This sets the REGISTER_TABLE parametervalue. In order to be selectable, the table has to either be created in the model, or addedto it using the Retrieve option.
344
Register Tables
You can specify generator, cutcom, technology, offset, and flush registers, aswell as taper and feed values, for Wire EDM NC sequences by using aregister table. This allows you to set different register, taper, and feed valuesfor each cut motion type (Approach, No Core, Rough, up to 16 Finish motions,and Detach). Register tables can be created either at setup time, or at thetime of defining the NC sequence.
Note: Cutcom and Taper registers are not supported for No Core motions.
If a register table is specified for an NC sequence (either by setting theREGISTER_TABLE parameter or using the Select option in the CR/SEL RGRmenu), then register values for each cut motion specified in the register tablewill be output to the CL data file. These values take precedence over theregister values and feeds specified in the NC sequence parameters file.
To Set Up the Radius Substitution Table(s)
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu.
2. Choose Param Setup from the MFG SETUP menu.
3. Choose Radius Subst from the PARAM SETUP menu.
4. The RAD SETUP menu comes up with the following options:
� Create—Create a new radius substitution table. Enter the name for the table, thenselect the radial type: Concave or Convex. This table will be used for corners of thespecified type only, and the appropriate suffix (“_cvv or “_cvx) will be added to thetable name. The Pro/TABLE comes up; edit the table by entering the radius valuesas described in the reference topic. You have to store this table on disk using theSave option below in order to use it in other models.
� Modify—Modify an existing radius substitution table. In order to be modifiable, thetable has to either be created in the model, or added to it using the Retrieve optionbelow.
� Retrieve—Read an existing radius substitution table from disk to add it to thecurrent manufacturing model.
� Save—Save a radius substitution table on disk to use it in another model. The filewill be saved with the extension “.rdl.
� Delete—Delete an existing radius substitution table.
� Show—Display a radius substitution table in the INFO window. Select the tablename from a namelist menu. Only tables that exist in the model can be displayed.
345
Any number of radius substitution tables can be added to a model. To specifywhich table is to be used, choose Radius Subst from the MFG PARAMS menueither when setting up the NC sequence or when defining a cut motion. Itbrings up the CR/SEL RAD menu with the following options:
• Set Up—Brings up the RAD SETUP menu with the options described above.
• Select—Select existing radius substitution tables from a namelist menu: you can selectone for the concave and one for the convex corners. In order to be displayed in thenamelist menu, a table has to either be created in the model, or added to it using theRetrieve option.
To perform radius substitution, choose Corners from the INT CUT menu,then Table Corners from the CORNER ADD menu. The corner radii on thetool path will be substituted according to the table values.
Radius Substitution Tables
Certain wire EDM machines are difficult to control when machining corners;as a result, parts are often overcut during initial passes that are created at ahigh power setting. Radius substitution allows you to modify selectedreference part radii on a pass-by-pass basis, in order to achieve propermachining of the parts.
Radius substitution is performed by setting up radius substitution tables andassociating them with 2-Axis Wire EDM NC sequences at the time of creatingthe Rough and Finish cut motions.
Radius substitution tables provide the value of the radius to be used in thetoolpath generation depending on:
• The type of the corner (concave or convex)
• The value of the radius of the selected contour to be machined
• The number of the pass (a Rough and up to 16 Finish)
When a table is used, the corner to be cut is evaluated to determine its typeand the current pass. The toolpath for that pass is modified to have theradius from the table rather than that of the contour. The table isinterpolated for contour radii not explicitly listed. Value of 0 (zero) meanssubstituting a sharp corner for the radius. There is no interpolation between0 and another substitution value. When a column has zeros in it, sharpcorners are substituted for all values up to that where a non-zero substitutionradius is listed. In the example below, sharp corners will be substituted onthe Rough pass for all radii up to 0.007.
346
Auxiliary NC Sequences
About Auxiliary NC Sequences
Auxiliary NC sequences produce a point-to-point tool path. They can be usedto specify the connecting tool motions and change the tool axis orientation, ifneeded, between two machining NC sequences. They also allow you to accessthe on-machine probe functionality. Auxiliary NC sequences are available forany workcell type, and can be performed with any type of tool.
You do not have to specify a tool for an Auxiliary NC sequence. You will beable to create Tool Motions even though no tool is specified.
To Create an Auxiliary NC Sequence
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You can be in any type of workcell.
2. Choose Auxiliary and Done.
3. If you have specified the site and coordinate systems at setup time, you do not have toselect Seq Setup at this point, and can proceed directly to step 4. If you choose SeqSetup, the SEQ SETUP menu will contain the common options, available for all the NCsequence types.
Select the desired options and choose Done. The system will start the user interface forall selected options in turn.
4. Choose Customize to specify the auxiliary tool motions (the only Tool Motion typesavailable for Auxiliary NC sequences are Goto Point, Go Delta, Go Home, and FollowSketch), or to access the on-machine probe functionality by inserting CL Commands inthe Customize dialog box.
5. Choose Done Seq or Next Seq from the NC SEQUENCE menu when satisfied.
User-Defined NC Sequences
About User-Defined NC Sequences
NC sequences and material removal features can be grouped, the same aspart features.
This functionality, in particular, allows you to create the NC sequencesnecessary to manufacture a group of features (design UDF) only once. Youcan then group these NC sequences (and material removal features, ifdesired), and place this manufacturing group in any other models containingthe same reference features’ group.
347
If you do not reference a design UDF, the information about the referencepart will be stored with the group. If you then place the group in anothermanufacturing model containing the same reference part, you will have anoption to automatically resolve the placement references.
Note: If you include a child NC sequence in a group (for example, local milling), makesure the parent NC sequence is also included. Otherwise, the system will not know whichNC sequence to reference when making the group.
To Define a Manufacturing UDF
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then UDF Library from the MFG UTILSmenu.
2. Choose Create from the UDF menu.
3. Enter the name for the group.
4. Select an option from the UDF OPTIONS menu:
� Stand Alone—The UDF will be functional by itself.
� Subordinate—The UDF will be driven by the current model.
5. Define the UDF elements as you would when creating a group of part features. Selectmanufacturing features (NC sequences and material removal features) to be grouped.
6. If there is a features’ group referenced by selected NC sequences, the MFG UDF REFmenu will appear:
� Design UDF—Use a reference group of features for resolving references. If only onedesign UDF is referenced, it will be selected automatically, otherwise select a groupto use.
� Ref Part—Use the reference part for resolving references. For assembly machining,you will have to select a part.
� None—No reference information will be stored.
If no design UDF is referenced, the MFG UDF REF menu will not appear. In regularmanufacturing, the reference part information will be automatically stored. In assemblymachining, you will have to select a reference part to use. If you do not want to select areference part, choose Done Sel without selecting a part.
7. When the group is successfully defined, the information is automatically stored.
Note: If you have specified a reference design UDF, you will not be prompted for thecorresponding placement references; they will be resolved automatically.
348
Including Operations, Workcells, and Reference Superfeatures in aManufacturing UDF
Operation and workcell features can also be included when creating amanufacturing UDF. When you place such a group:
• The default names for the operation and workcell created in the new model will beOP_CPY### or MACH_CPY##, respectively (for example, OP_CPY010 andMACH_CPY01).
• All the parameters and tools associated with the workcell will be copied. If tools with thesame IDs already exist in the new model, a message will appear and the workcell toolswill not be copied.
• The NC sequences that referenced this operation and workcell in the original model willautomatically retain these references.
Including Reference SuperfeaturesIf an NC sequence references a Mill Volume, Mill Surface, or Drill Group,there are two ways to define a group:
• If you include the reference superfeature (Mill Volume, Mill Surface, or Drill Group) inthe group definition, then, at the time of defining the group, you will be requested toenter prompts for the geometric references used to create this superfeature. When youmake this group in another model, you will be prompted to select these references, andthe superfeature of the same name (complete with all component features such asGather, Trim) will be created in the new model, then the NC sequence will be createdbased on this superfeature.
• If you do not include the reference superfeature, then, at the time of defining the group,you will be requested to enter prompt for the superfeature itself. When you make thisgroup in another model, you will be prompted to select a pre-existent superfeature ofappropriate type, and the NC sequence will be created using the superfeature in the newmodel.
349
Example: Manufacturing a Group of Features
Make the group here.You will only beprompted for operationand workcell names, thecoordinate system, andthe retract plane offset.
Define a group ofNC sequencesand materialremoval features.
Use Design UDF
To Place a Previously Defined Group in Another Manufacturing Model
1. Choose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu. You can be in any type of workcell.Choose User Defined from the MACH AUX menu and enter the name of a previouslydefined group.
...or...
From the MFG UTILS menu, choose Group > Create > From UDF Lib and retrieve thegroup by name.
2. As when placing a group of features, you will have to select if the group is to beIndependent or UDF Driven, and will be prompted for the group elements. If thecheckmark next to the Use CurOper option is on, all the NC sequences in the groupwill be placed in the currently active operation. If the Use CurOper option is notselected, you will be prompted to select a parent operation in the new model, unless theoperation is included in the group. When all the prompts are answered successfully, themanufacturing group will be placed.
Note: The Use CurOper option is available only for UDFs created in Release 16.0 andlater.
When you are answering the prompts for group elements, the WHICH REF menu willappear with the following options:
� Alternate—Select a reference for the current element.
350
� Same—Use the same reference as in the reference part. This option appears only ifthe group contains a reference part information, and this reference part is present inthe current manufacturing assembly.
� Skip—Skip the current prompt without selecting a reference. After you haveanswered all the other prompts, the system will allow you to redefine the skippedelement.
Note: The Skip option is not available for UDFs created prior to Release 16.0.
3. After the UDF placement is completed, a namelist menu of all NC sequences included inthe group will appear. Check off the NC sequence(s) whose tool or parameters you wantto modify (you can use Select All). The MOD NC SEQ menu will appear with thefollowing options:
� Tool—Change the tool.
� Parameters—Modify the NC sequence parameters.
Choose Done when finished.
4. If some of the prompts have been skipped, the system starts the appropriate userinterface to allow you redefine the skipped element. Then the GRP PLACE menu willappear with the following options:
� Redefine—Redefine all elements related to skipped prompts.
� Show Result—Preview the group.
� Info—Display information about the group being created in the InformationWindow.
Choose Done from the GRP PLACE menu to finalize the group.
5. The group is placed in the new model.
Example: Using a Manufacturing UDF with Pro/PROGRAM
This example illustrates creation and use of a manufacturing UDF withimbedded logic, which chooses a tool for drilling based on the diameter of thehole and decides between reaming and boring to finish the hole. It alsoincludes the use of the Evaluate functionality to capture geometry from thereference part into the UDF.
351
1: Center Drilling 2: Deep Drilling
3: Reaming 4: Boring
5: Countersinking
The manufacturing model shown in the illustration above has five NCsequences defined:
• Center drilling
• Deep drilling
• Reaming
• Boring
• Countersinking
It also has the following relations set up for the workpiece:
352
These relations:
• Set the diameter of the hole based on the results of Evaluate
• Set the value of a user-defined parameter “bore_ream based on the value of the holediameter
• Select a drill based on the value of the hole diameter
To utilize this logic, define a manufacturing UDF (group). Include theworkcell and all the five NC sequences. Create the group using theSubordinate and Pro/Program options (using Subordinate ensures that modelrelations are carried into the UDF). Enter prompts required to place the NCsequences.
Note that both Bore and Ream NC sequences are included in the UDF. Thesystem is going to determine which one to perform based on Pro/PROGRAMlogic.
How to Set Up the Bore/Ream Choice1. Choose Edit Design from the PROGRAM menu.
2. Before FID 117 (Ream NC sequence), add the line:
353
IF BORE_REAM = fl"REAM"
3. Before FID 160 (next NC sequence, Bore), add the lines:
ENDIF
IF BORE_REAM = fl"BORE"
4. After FID 160, add the line:
ENDIF
5. Save and exit from Pro/PROGRAM editor.
6. Incorporate changes into the model by typing “y in response to the prompt.
7. Choose Normal and Done from the REGEN TYPE menu.
Retrieve another model and place the group there using the Group optionfrom the MFG UTILS menu. Choose UDF Driven and Read Only, thenfollow the placement prompts. Regenerate the model.
You can now modify the diameter of the hole in the new model (regeneratetwice) and see how the system performs different NC sequences and selects adifferent tool based on the built-in logic.
The Customize Dialog Box
About the Customize Dialog Box
When you choose Customize from the NC SEQUENCE menu, the systemdisplays the Customize dialog box. The box enables you to create, modify, anddelete the Tool Motions and CL Commands. At the same time, the systemdisplays the NC sequence CL file, as it currently looks, in the NCL Filewindow.
Depending on the type of NC sequence, the system may have automaticallygenerated some default Tool Motions (for example, Auto Plunge, AutomaticCut), based on the parameter values and selected geometry. In this case, theTool Motions will be listed in the upper portion of the Customize dialog box.You can redefine these motions, as necessary, or delete them and create newones. For other NC sequence types (such as Trajectory Milling, ProfileTurning, or Wire EDM), you have to explicitly create all the Tool Motions;therefore, when you first enter the Customize dialog box, its upper portioncontains only the <end of tool path> line. Creating a new Tool Motion or CLCommand adds it to the list in the upper portion of the Customize dialog box.
To select an item (Tool Motion or CL Command) in the upper portion of theCustomize dialog box, click on it. To select multiple items, click on the firstone, then hold the <SHIFT> or <CTRL> key and click on the last one; the
354
system highlights these items, and all items in between, in the list box. Italso highlights the portion of the toolpath on the screen corresponding to allthe selected items, and highlights the first and the last CL lines for the blockof selected items in the NCL File window. The tool is positioned at thebeginning of the first selected Tool Motion.
The middle portion of the Customize dialog box contains the followingbuttons:
• Insert—Add a Tool Motion or CL command before the selected item in the list box above.Select the type of entity to insert from the drop-down list to the right of the Insert button,then click Insert.
• Copy—Copy the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s) and place them on theClipboard, to insert them at a different control point.
• Paste—Insert the contents of the Clipboard at a specified control point.
• Cut—Remove the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s) and place them on theClipboard, to insert them at a different control point.
• Delete—Remove the selected Tool Motion(s) and CL command(s).
• Modify—Modify dimensions associated with the selected Tool Motion.
• Redefine—Change the selected Tool Motion or CL command.
• Params—Modify parameters of the selected Tool Motion.
• Clipboard—Show the current contents of the Clipboard.
The bottom portion of the Customize dialog box contains the OK and Cancelaction buttons.
Tool MotionsYou can insert the following types of Tool Motions:
• Automatic Cut—Reference model geometry to generate the path followed by the toolwhile actually cutting workpiece material.
• Follow Sketch—Set up the sketching plane and sketch the tool path.
• GoTo Point—Go to a datum point or to a point on the tool path. For 4- and 5-Axis NCsequences, you can also specify the tool axis orientation.
• Go Delta—Allows you to specify tool motions in terms of increments along the axes ofthe NC sequence coordinate system (with respect to the current position of the tool).
• Go Home—Go directly to the Operation HOME point (if specified, using the Homeoption, when creating the operation).
355
• Plunge—Create a plunge before another Tool Motion. The tool will move horizontally(that is, at its current Z depth) straight to the location directly above the start of theselected motion and then plunge down.
• Retract—Go from the current location vertically up to the retract plane.
• Appr Along Tool Axis—Create an approach motion along the tool axis. Appears for 4-and 5-axis NC sequences only.
• Exit Along Tool Axis—Create an exit motion along the tool axis. Appears for 4- and 5-axis NC sequences only.
• Tangent Approach—Create an approach motion tangent to the Automatic Cut motion
• Tangent Exit—Create an exit motion tangent to the Automatic Cut motion.
• Normal Approach—Create an approach motion normal to the direction of theAutomatic Cut motion.
• Normal Exit—Create an exit motion normal to the direction of the Automatic Cutmotion.
• Lead In—Approach the Automatic Cut motion tangentially, along an arc of specifiedradius.
• Lead Out—Exit from the current point tangentially to the Automatic Cut motion alongan arc of specified radius.
• Helical Approach—Create a helical approach motion. This option is available forMilling NC sequences, except Thread milling. For Thread milling, you can automaticallygenerate helical approach exit motions using the APPROACH_TYPE parameter.
• Helical Exit—Create a helical exit motion. This option is available for Milling NCsequences, except Thread milling. For Thread milling, you can automatically generatehelical exit motions using the EXIT_TYPE parameter.
Generally, you create the Automatic Cut motions first, and then connectthem using other types of tool motions.
Notes:
� The Tool Motion functionality is slightly different for Holemaking NC sequences.
� For Automatic Cut motions composed of closed loops, an approach motion will resetthe start point of the loop.
To Create a Control Point
356
A control point is an internal datum point on the tool path that you canreference as a target point for tool motions. Control points can be created “onthe fly as necessary when creating tool motions.
Whenever you need to reference a control point (to define a Follow Sketchmotion, specify the portion of an Automatic Cut motion to follow), the CTRLPNT menu will appear with following options:
• Select—Select an existing control point.
• Create—Create a control point by selecting a point on an Automatic Cut motion. Adatum point is created at the select point; you will also see a tiny axis that is tangent tothe Automatic Cut motion at the control point. The point and axis will be displayed onlywhile in the Customize mode.
Once a control point is created, you will be able to select it for reference inother steps.
There are no dimensions connected to a control point, its location isdetermined by the select point.
To Create an Offset Control Point
1. Press the Offset button in the appropriate dialog box.
2. The Offset From Goto Point dialog box appears.
3. Enter offsets along the axes of the NC Sequence coordinate system.
4. Click OK to create the offset point, Cancel—to quit. The Reset button resets all theoffsets to 0.
Offset Control Points
It may be desirable that the tool comes close to the final point at high speed,and then changes speed just for the final motion to the point. To achieve this,you can create on-the-fly a point “offset from your final destination point, anduse this new point as a target for the current motion. This functionality isavailable for the following types of tool motions:
• GoTo Point
• Plunge
• Tangent Approach
• Normal Approach
357
To Create an Automatic Cut Motion
The types of Automatic Cut motions depend on the type of the NC sequence;refer to the topic describing NC sequences of a particular type for informationon the Automatic Cut motions for this NC sequence. Once an Automatic Cutmotion is generated, you can incorporate it in the tool path fully or partially.
1. Select Automatic Cut from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The system displays the menus appropriate for creating Automatic Cut motions withinthe current NC sequence type. Create an Automatic Cut motion.
The system creates an implicit Follow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motionfrom start to end.
3. If you want to the tool to follow only certain portions of the Automatic Cut motion, or tochange the Follow Cut parameters, redefine the Follow Cut motion. Click for details.
4. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Implicit Tool Motions
In order to automate the process of customizing a tool path as much aspossible, the following Tool Motions are implicitly created in Milling:
• A Retract motion is implicitly created before an Automatic Cut motion if other toolmotions are already present.
• An implicit Plunge motion (Auto Plunge) is created where the tool automatically plungesto the beginning of an Automatic Cut.
If you are not satisfied with the implicitly created motions, you can delete orredefine them.
To Redefine a Follow Cut Motion
When you create an Automatic Cut motion, the system creates an implicitFollow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion from start to end.If you want to the tool to follow only certain portions of the Automatic Cutmotion, or to change the Follow Cut parameters, redefine the Follow Cutmotion.
1. Select the Follow Cut motion in the list box at the top of the Customize dialog box andclick Redefine.
358
The Follow Cut dialog box opens.
2. Redefine the Follow Cut motion as needed. You can:
� Change the Follow Cut limits, that is, specify the start and end points for the tool, tomake it follow only a portion of the Automatic Cut motion.
� Reverse the cut direction.
� Modify the Follow Cut motion parameters.
� Split the Follow Cut motion into multiple segments.
� Add other Follow Cut motions (for example, following a different portion of the sameAutomatic Cut motion).
� Remove some of the segments of the Follow Cut motion.
3. Click OK to finish redefining the Follow Cut motion and close the Follow Cut dialog box.If you created multiple segments of a Follow Cut motion, they will all be listed in theCustomize dialog box below the Automatic Cut motion that they follow.
The Follow Cut Dialog Box
The top portion of the Follow Cut dialog box contains a list box with thenames of all the Follow Cut motion segments. Below this list box there arethe following action buttons:
• Split—Split the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion into multiple segments.
• Add—Add a Follow Cut motion segment. When you click Add, the system adds a defaultFollow Cut motion that follows the Automatic Cut motion from start to end. ClickRedefine to change the Follow Cut limits as needed.
• Remove—Delete the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion.
• Redefine—Redefine the selected segment of the Follow Cut motion.
The middle portion of the Follow Cut dialog box contains the options forredefining a Follow Cut motion:
• Name—Displays the name of the selected Follow Cut segment. This name is displayed
for information purposes only; you can not modify it. Click next to the Name labelto preview the Follow Cut segment as it is currently defined.
• Follow Cut Limits—Change the start and end points of the Follow Cut motion:
359
� First Point—Specify a different start point for the Follow Cut motion. You canselect or create a datum point on the tool path, or select Start of Cut to make theFollow Cut segment start at the Start point of the Automatic Cut motion.
� Second Point— Specify a different end point for the Follow Cut motion. You canselect or create a datum point on the tool path, or select End of Cut to make theFollow Cut segment end at the End point of the Automatic Cut motion.
• Reverse Cut Direction—Select this option to reverse the direction of the Follow Cutmotion.
• Follow Cut Parameters— Edit the Follow Cut motion parameters. Click the Rightarrow next to the label to expand this field; then click the Feed, Spindle, or Coolantbutton to open the appropriate dialog box and edit the parameter values.
Once you redefined a Follow Cut segment, click Apply to finalize the changesyou made. To discard these changes, click Reset.
To Split a Follow Cut Motion
If you need to insert a CL command (for example, GOTO/x,y,z ) in the middleof a Follow Cut motion, it is recommended that you split the Follow Cutmotion first.
1. Select the Follow Cut motion segment in the list box at the top of the Follow Cut dialogbox and click Split.
The Create Split Point dialog box opens.
2. Click Add and select a point on the tool path where you want to split the Follow Cutmotion.
The system creates a datum point at the selected location.
3. If you want to split the Follow Cut motion into more than two segments, repeat Step 2 tocreate additional split points.
4. Once a split point is created, you can select its name in the list box at the top of theCreate Split Point dialog box and click one of the following buttons:
� Remove—Delete the selected split point.
� Move—Move the selected split point. The system highlights the selected point.Select the new location on the tool path.
5. Click Preview to view the results. If satisfied, click OK.
360
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion
Follow Sketch motions let you sketch the tool path that the tool will follow.You can change the tool axis orientation at selected points along the sketchfor 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences.
1. Choose Follow Sketch from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The Follow Sketch dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Click Sketch to sketch the tool motion. The sketching plane setup depends on thefollowing selection:
� If the Control Point option button is selected, you will be prompted to select orcreate a control point. The sketching plane will pass through the specified controlpoint. The axis belonging to the control point will lie horizontally in the sketchingplane.
� If the Setup Plane option button is selected, use the regular sketcher setuptechnique to select or create the sketching plane and the Sketcher orientationreference.
5. Once the model is reoriented, sketch the tool motion. The SKETCHER menu will containtwo additional options, specific to sketching the Tool Motions:
� Tool Kerf—Creates a construction circle with the diameter equal to theCutter_Diam of the tool, centered at the location you select on the screen. You canreference this entity when sketching the tool path.
� CL Command—Insert CL commands along the sketched tool path. You will beprompted to select location for the CL commands by selecting on a sketched entity.Then supply the contents of the CL command using the Sketcher CL Commanddialog box. The system places a Sketcher point at the location of the CL command. Ifyou later modify the sketch, the CL command placement will be determined by thenew location of this point entity.
Note: Sketcher CL commands are listed in the Customize dialog box under theFollow Cut motion they belong to. They are indented to show that their placement iscontrolled by the sketch. To modify placement of such a command, redefine theFollow Sketch motion and modify dimensions of the point entity corresponding to theCL command.
6. Choose Done from the SKETCHER menu.
7. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation atselected points along the sketch using the Specify Axis button.
The AXIS DEF menu then appears with the following options:
361
� Add—Add an axis orientation definition.
� Remove—Remove an axis orientation definition.
� Redefine—Respecify the axis orientation at an existing location.
� Show—Display existing axis definitions. The SHOW menu appears with the listingof existing axis definitions (Axis Def #1, Axis Def #2, ...). Placing the cursor over adefinition name in the menu displays the corresponding axis definition as a cyanvector, which disappears once you move the cursor away from the menu item.
To add an axis definition, choose Add and select a point on the sketched tool motionwhere you want to specify the tool axis orientation. Once you selected a point, you will beprompted to enter a parameter value along the entire sketch (with the start point of thesketch 0.0 and the end point 1.0). The parameter value corresponding to your selectionwill appear as an option in the selection menu, or you can choose Enter and enteranother value.
Once you specified the location, the DEFINE AXIS menu will appear with the followingoptions:
� Along Z Dir—The tool axis will be parallel to the Z-axis of the Machine coordinatesystem.
� Datum Axis—Select or create a datum axis that the tool axis will be parallel to,then specify the axis direction using Flip and Okay options.
� Enter Value—Specify tool axis orientation be entering i,j,k values with respect tothe Machine coordinate system.
8. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Example: Using Tool Kerf and CL Command
The following is an example of using the Tool Kerf and CL Commandfunctionality in Follow Sketch motions.
Sketchingplane
362
To produce the tool path shown above, where the tool machines the edge andstops right before touching the part to check gauge, create a Follow Sketchmotion, as shown in the following illustration.
1. Add Tool Kerf entit ies and dimension as needed.
3. At the Tool Kerf center, add CL Command:PPRINT / CHECK GAUGESTOP
2. Sketch two tool motionsegments between the ToolKerf entit ies' centers.
The resulting CL data is listed below:
To Create a Follow Sketch Motion in Holemaking
You can sketch the traversal path between the holes’ axes by following theprocedure below.
363
1. Choose Follow Sketch from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The Follow Sketch dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Click the Sketch button to sketch the tool motion. The location of traversal path willdepend on the following:
� If the At Retract Plane option button is selected, the traversal path will lie in theretract plane. If you later modify the retract plane height, the traversal path willupdate automatically.
� If the Specify Plane option button is selected, you will have to select a planeparallel to the XY plane of the NC Sequence coordinate system and enter offset fromthis plane in the indicated direction. The traversal path will lie in the offset plane.
As you start sketching, all selected holes are automatically marked by Sketcher points atthe selected axes’ locations. The sketched path may contain as many entities as youwant. If the sketched path passes through the Sketcher point that marks a selected axis,this hole will be drilled (you do not have to break the sketched entity at this point, oralign it to the hole axis—the system will automatically make these assumptions). Allentities included in the same sketch are parts of a single Tool Motion segment. A validsketch must pass through at least one hole axis.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
The following illustration shows sketching the traversal path.
Previous pathsegment
Sketch
To Create a Connect Motion
Connect the hole axes by selecting them in the same order you want them tobe drilled. As you select an axis, the current tool location is connected withthis axis by a straight line parallel to the retract plane. Each selection createsa separate Connect segment. Note that the level of a Connect segment isdetermined by the level of the endpoint of the previous segment.
364
The following illustration shows creating the traversal path using theConnect option.
Select this axis.
To Redefine the Connect Motions
The Redefine button in the Customize dialog box allows you to respecify anyof the traversal path segments created so far. When you choose Redefine, anamelist menu of the Tool Motion segments appears. Select a segment youwant to redo. The selected segment and all the subsequent Tool Motionsegments temporarily disappear.
• If it is a sketched segment, you can re-specify your sketching plane, then sketch the toolpath (note that the old sketch is deleted automatically).
• If it is a Connect segment, select a hole axis to go to.
Once you are finished, the rest of the tool path is regenerated. Thesubsequent Connect segments may change depending on modifications to thecurrent segment. If you redefine a segment immediately preceding a sketchedone, it is your responsibility to place the end of the segment being redefinedat the beginning of the next sketched segment, or to redefine the sketchedsegment as well.
The following illustration shows modifying the traversal path.
Select thisaxis.
Redefine DRL CONN #3.
365
To Create a GoTo Point Motion
GoTo Point motions enable the tool to go to any datum point (not just acontrol point). You can restrict moves along some of the axes of the NCsequence coordinate system. For 4- and 5-Axis NC sequences, you can alsochange the tool axis orientation.
1. Choose GoTo Point from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The Goto Point dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Click Specify Point to create or select the control point. The CR/SEL POINT menuappears with the options:
� Select—Select an existing control point or datum point.
� Create—Create a new control point or datum point:
On Toolpath—Create a new control point by selecting on the tool path.
Datum Point—Create a new datum point using the regular functionality forcreating datum points. The datum point will belong to the workpiece in Partmachining, and to the manufacturing assembly in Assembly machining.
5. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the controlpoint created using the Specify Point button, described above.
6. The next portion of the dialog box allows you to restrict moves along some of the axes ofthe NC Sequence coordinate system:
� If the Simultaneous option button is selected, then, depending on whether the Xaxis, Y axis, or Z axis checkbox is selected or unselected, the tool is allowed ordisallowed to move along this axis. By default, all the axes are allowed; the tool thenmoves directly from the current position to the target point. If some of the axes aredisallowed, the final tool position is computed based on the current point and theaxes allowed. For Turning, only the X axis and Z axis buttons will appear in thedialog box.
� If the Z First option button is selected, the tool moves along the Z-axis from thecurrent position to the level of target point; it then moves using all remainingavailable axes to the target point (for Turning, this is the X-axis; for other types ofNC sequences, this is the XY plane).
� If the Z Last option button is selected, the tool moves along the X-axis (for Turning),or in the XY plane (for other types of NC sequences), from the current position to thelocation of the selected point, and then moves along the Z-axis to arrive at selectedpoint.
366
7. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation attarget point:
� Along Z Axis—Use the default orientation of the tool (parallel to the Z-axis of theNC Sequence coordinate system).
� Use Previous—Use the previous tool orientation.
� Specify New Axis—Click Specify Axis and select an edge or axis that the tool axiswill be parallel to, or a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Finalize the toolorientation using Flip and Okay options; note that the red arrow must point fromthe tool tip towards the toolholder.
8. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Go Delta Motion
Go Delta motions enable you to specify tool motions in terms of incrementsalong the axes of the NC sequence coordinate system (with respect to thecurrent position of the tool).
1. Choose Go Delta from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Go Delta dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Enter offsets along the axes of the NC Sequence coordinate system. The Reset buttonresets all the offset values to 0.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can also change the tool axis orientation attarget point:
� Along Z Axis—Use the default orientation of the tool (parallel to the Z-axis of theNC Sequence coordinate system).
� Use Previous—Use the previous tool orientation.
� Specify New Axis—Click Specify Axis and select an edge or axis that the tool axiswill be parallel to, or a surface that the tool axis will be normal to. Finalize the toolorientation using Flip and Okay options; note that the red arrow must point fromthe tool tip towards the toolholder.
6. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
367
Modifying the Go Delta Increments
You can later modify all the increments for a Go Delta motion using theModify button in the Customize dialog box. The Go Delta increments canalso be included in relations. To find out the dimension symbolscorresponding to the Go Delta increments, use the Seq Info option, chooseList and select the GO DELTA motion from the menu. The informationdisplayed will include the increment values and dimension symbols assignedto the increments.
To Create a Go Home Motion
Go Home motions make the tool go directly to the Operation HOME point (ifspecified, using the Home option, when creating the operation).
1. Choose Go Home from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Go Home dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Plunge Motion
1. Choose Plunge from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Plunge dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start pointof the Tool Motion that you plunge to.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
368
6. Edit the Clear Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Plunge Motions
Plunge motions make the tool plunge before a selected Automatic Cut motion(or another approach motion).
The tool will perform the following motions:
• Move at RAPID speed along the retract surface to the location directly above the startpoint of the next Tool Motion. This location is determined as follows:
� In case of a retract plane, the projection of the start point of the next Tool Motion onthe retract plane.
� In case of a retract surface of revolution, the intersection of the tool axis at the startpoint of the next Tool Motion with the retract surface.
• Plunge at RAPID speed to the location offset from the start point of the next Tool Motionby (CLEAR_DIST + a), where a is an extra offset value, which depends on the type of NCsequence. It is:
� STEP_DEPTH—For Volume, Local, Face, Profile, Pocket, and Trajectory milling.
� ROUGH_STEP_DEPTH—For Conventional Surface milling.
� OFFSET_INCREMENT—For Surface-by-Surface Contour milling and Cutlinemachining.
� 0—For all other types of NC sequeences.
• Move at PLUNGE_FEED to the start point of the next Tool Motion.
To Create a Retract Motion
A Retract motion makes the tool go from the current location vertically up tothe retract plane.
1. Choose Retract from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Retract dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
369
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Tangent Approach Motion
Tangent Approach motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cutmotion (or another approach motion) in the direction tangent to the motion atits start point. The length of the approach motion is determined by theAPPROACH_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Tangent Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, andclick Insert.
2. The Tangent Approach dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, andCutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start of theselected Automatic Cut motion.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
6. Edit the Approach Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Tangent Exit Motion
Tangent Exit motions let you make the tool exit from the current point in thedirection tangent to the Automatic Cut motion at this point. The length of theexit motion is determined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Tangent Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The Tangent Exit dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
5. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
370
6. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Normal Approach Motion
Normal Approach motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cutmotion (or another approach motion) in the direction normal to the motion atits start point. The length of the approach motion is determined by theAPPROACH_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Normal Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, andclick Insert.
2. The Normal Approach dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, andCutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. The Specify Offset button allows you to specify a target point offset from the start of theselected Automatic Cut motion.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
6. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicatesfrom which side the tool will approach the control point.
7. Edit the Approach Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
8. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Normal Exit Motion
Normal Exit motions let you make the tool exit from the current point in thedirection normal to the Automatic Cut motion at this point. The length of theexit motion is determined by the EXIT_DISTANCE parameter value.
1. Choose Normal Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The Normal Exit dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
5. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
371
6. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicatesthe exit direction.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Lead In Motion
1. Choose Lead In from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Lead In dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, andCutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicatesfrom which side the tool will approach the control point.
6. Edit the Entry Angle, Tangent Lead Step, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values inthe corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath aparameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to thisparameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in thetext box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
Lead In and Lead Out Motions
Lead In motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cut motion (oranother approach motion) tangentially along an arc of specified radius. Theradius of the arc is determined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter value, thelengths of the preceding linear segments—by TANGENT_LEAD_STEP andNORMAL_LEAD_STEP, the angle of the arc is defined by theENTRY_ANGLE parameter value.
Lead Out motions let you make the tool exit from the current pointtangentially to the Automatic Cut motion along an arc of specified radius.The radius of the arc is determined by the LEAD_RADIUS parameter value,the lengths of the linear segments—by TANGENT_LEAD_STEP andNORMAL_LEAD_STEP, the angle of the arc is defined by the EXIT_ANGLEparameter value.
The following diagram illustrates Lead In and Lead Out motions.
372
Lead Out
NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
LEAD_RADIUS
EXIT ANGLEENTRY_ANGLE
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
Automatic Cut motion
Lead In
To Create a Lead Out Motion
1. Choose Lead Out from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and click Insert.
2. The Lead Out dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicatesthe exit direction.
6. Edit the Exit Angle, Tangent Lead Step, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values inthe corresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath aparameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to thisparameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in thetext box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Helical Approach Motion
Helical Approach motions let you make the tool approach an Automatic Cutmotion (or another approach motion) along a helix. The ENTRY_ANGLEparameter defines the angle of the helical approach motion. CLEAR_DISTcontrols the height of the helical approach motion.
1. Choose Helical Approach from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, andclick Insert.
2. The Helical Lead In dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, Coolant, andCutcom buttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
373
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicatesfrom which side the tool will approach the control point.
6. Edit the Entry Angle, Clear Distance, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in thecorresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath aparameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to thisparameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in thetext box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create a Helical Exit Motion
Helical Exit motions let you make the tool exit an Automatic Cut motion (oranother exit motion) along a helix. The EXIT_ANGLE parameter defines theangle of the helical exit motion. PULLOUT_DIST controls the height of thehelical exit motion.
1. Choose Helical Exit from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The Helical Lead Out dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. If this is a 4- or 5-Axis NC sequence, you can specify the tool axis orientation using theSpecify Axis button.
5. Select the arrow direction using the Left and Right option buttons. The arrow indicatesthe exit direction.
6. Edit the Exit Angle, Pullout Distance, Normal Lead Step, and Lead Radius values in thecorresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath aparameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to thisparameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in thetext box.
7. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create an Approach Motion Along Tool Axis
You can create the Approach motions Along Tool Axis for 4- and 5-axis NCsequences.
1. Choose Appr Along Tool Axis from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, andclick Insert.
2. The Approach for Along Tool Axis dialog box appears.
374
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Edit the Approach Distance, Clear Distance, and Pullout Distance values in thecorresponding text boxes, if needed. If the Use Default checkbox underneath aparameter text box is selected, the system will automatically assign a value to thisparameter. If you clear the checkbox, you will be able to edit the parameter value in thetext box.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Create an Exit Motion Along Tool Axis
You can create the Exit motions Along Tool Axis for 4- and 5-axis NCsequences.
1. Choose Exit Along Tool Axis from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, andclick Insert.
2. The Exit for Along Tool Axis dialog box appears.
3. Edit the Tool Motion parameters, if desired, using the Feed, Spindle, and Coolantbuttons in the top portion of the box.
4. Edit the Exit Distance value in the corresponding text box, if needed.
5. The Preview button allows you to preview the tool motion defined. Click OK if satisfied,Cancel—to quit creating the tool motion.
To Specify Parameters for a Tool Motion
By default, tool motion parameter values are inherited from the NC sequenceparameters. You can change the parameter values for a tool motion by usingthe following procedure.
1. Press the appropriate button (Feed, Spindle) in the Tool Motion dialog box.
2. Another dialog box pops up with input fields for all parameters in the selected group. Forexample, if you press Spindle for a Tool Motion in a Volume milling NC sequence, theSpindle Parameters dialog box will contain input fields for:
� Spindle Speed
� Spindle Control
� Spindle Sense
� Max Spindle RPM
375
� Range Number
� Spindle Range
Each of the input fields contains the current parameter value. Inherited values areshown in parentheses.
3. You can either enter the new value directly in the corresponding input field, or press thedown arrow to the right of the input field to select from a drop-down list of values.
For FEED_RATE, for example, you can either enter numeric values, or use one of thefollowing keywords: APPROACH, EXIT, RETRACT, PLUNGE, CUT, FREE (only thosethat are applicable for the current NC sequence will appear in the drop-down list in thedialog box).
4. When finished modifying the parameters, press OK in the dialog box used for editing.The new parameter values will appear in the read-only fields in the Tool Motion dialogbox.
When you change Feed or Machine parameters at the Tool Motion level, theappropriate statements (SPINDL, COOLNT, CUTCOM, or FEDRAT) will beoutput in the CL data file before the GOTO commands of the Tool Motion.
If you insert a CUTCOM, SPINDL, or COOLNT statement using the CLCommand functionality, it will overwrite the Tool Motion parameter valuefrom the insertion location to the end of the Tool Motion.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Youcan either select a location on the tool path, or insert a command at thecurrent tool position. Additional location options, Near Datum Point andOn Surface, are available if you associate the CL Command with a FollowCut motion. In order to do this, highlight the name of the Follow Cut motionin the list box at the top of the Customize dialog box before inserting the CLcommand.
1. Choose CL Command from the drop-down list in the Customize dialog box, and clickInsert.
2. The CL Command dialog box opens.
3. Select location for the CL command by using the following option buttons:
� Current—The CL command will be output at the current tool position.
� On Tool Path—Click Select and select a location on the tool path. You can selectanywhere on the tool path as it is defined so far.
For WEDM NC sequences with multiple passes, you can place the CL command onall the passes in the selected location, or on some of the passes, by using an
376
additional button, Multi Passes. When you click Multi Passes, the Select Passesdialog box opens with a list of all the passes and the Select All and Unselect Allicons. Select the passes where you want to insert the CL command and click OK. Ifyou use Select All, and later add some more passes, the CL command will be placedon the new passes as well.
� Near Datum Point—The CL command will be placed on the tool path at the closestlocation to a datum point. You can either create a datum point, or select an existingpoint.
� On Surface—The CL command will be placed on the tool path relative to selectedsurface(s). You can also select whether you want the CL command to be placed onthe First Pass, Last Pass, or All Passes.
4. Specify the command contents using one of the following methods:
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Notethat this method does not provide syntax checking.
� Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from thesyntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
� Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser windowwill appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Notes:
� You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing thecursor in it and using the keyboard.
� If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a “block, that is,you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
5. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location tolet you preview the result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location,Cancel—to quit inserting the command.
CL Commands
The CL Command option in the drop-down list of the Customize dialog boxallows you to add the specific post-processor words required for correct NCoutput. These commands will be output to the NC sequence CL file. If youadd a tool motion command, the corresponding motion will be also shown inthe tool path display on the screen.
When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters,preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If there is a corresponding parameterdefined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If theparameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s type
377
and value, and this parameter will be added to the relations. This way, theCL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
Modifying CL Commands
Once you insert a CL command, its first line appears in the list in the upperportion of the Customize dialog box.
You can modify both the contents and the placement of a previously addeduser-defined CL command by selecting it in the list and clicking Redefine.This will bring up the CL Command dialog box. Use the same techniques forspecifying the new location or editing the contents, as when inserting a CLcommand.
Note: This way, you can also modify contents of a Sketcher CL command (that is, acommand added while creating a Follow Sketch motion). However, if you modifyplacement of such a command, it will no longer be connected with the sketch. To modifyplacement of a Sketcher CL command and retain associativity, redefine the FollowSketch motion and modify dimensions of the point entity corresponding to the CLcommand.
You can also copy, cut, paste, and delete previously added CL commands byusing the appropriate command buttons in the Customize dialog box.
Customizing the Operation Tool Path
About Customizing the Operation Tool Path
The following options allow you to apply more control to the tool path at theoperation level:
• Output Order—Specify order of tool path output for the NC sequences.
• Synchronize—Synchronize output of NC sequence tool paths.
• CL Command—Add CL commands along the tool path. You can place CL commands onspecific instances of a pattern and Pro/NC will remember the commands parametrically.
Note: These options apply to the current operation. Before selecting these options,activate the operation whose tool path you want to customize.
To Reorder Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths
The Output Order option in the MACHINING menu allows you to specify theorder of tool path output for the NC sequences within the operation. This
378
affects the order of CL data output only. It does not reorder the NC sequencesin the feature list; use the Reorder functionality to change the order in whichthe NC sequences are regenerated.
1. Choose Output Order.
2. Choose Define from the OPER ORDER menu.
3. The following options are available:
� By Rule—NC sequences included in the operation will be sorted automatically:
By FeatList—Output NC sequences in the same order as they appear in the featurelist.
By Tool—Minimize the tool changes. All tools used within the operation will belisted in the ORDER TOOL menu. You will be prompted to select the tools in desiredorder. The system will output the tool paths for all NC sequences using the firstselected tool, then move to the next tool. NC sequences using the same tool will beoutput in the order they appear in the feature list.
� By Pick—Explicitly specify the order of output by selecting NC sequence namesfrom the ORDER PICK menu.
The Info option in the OPER ORDER menu displays the current order of theNC sequence output. The following information is provided for each NCsequence:
• Order of CL data output
• Sequence type
• Sequence number in the model
• Tool ID
• Feature number
• Feature ID
To Synchronize Output of NC Sequence Tool Paths
The Synchronize option in the MACHINING menu allows you to synchronizeoutput of NC sequence tool paths created using HEAD1 and HEAD2 optionsin the MACH AUX menu. These options are available for 4-Axis Turning andHolemaking.
1. Choose Synchronize.
379
2. Select which head will control the spindle speed by selecting HEAD1 or HEAD2 fromthe HEAD SELECT menu.
3. The system displays the SYNCH OPER menu with the following options:
� Define—Select a group of NC sequences, first on Head1 and then on Head2, to besynchronized with each other.
� Remove—A namelist menu of synchronized groups of NC sequences appears. Selecta group to remove.
� Synch Points—Define synchronization points (synch points) for CL output ofsynchronized NC sequences. Click for details.
4. Choose Define.
5. The system displays the HEAD1 NCSEQ menu containing the names of all NC sequencescreated using Head1. Put checkmarks next to NC sequences you want to synchronizewith sequences on Head2 (you will have the options to Select All and Unsel All), thenchoose Done Sel.
6. The system displays the HEAD2 NCSEQ menu containing the names of all NC sequencescreated using Head2. Again, select the NC sequences to synchronize and choose DoneSel.
7. The system creates a synchronized group with a default name (SYNCHRONIZE #1,SYNCHRONIZE #2).
To Specify Synch Points
1. Choose Synch Points from the SYNCH OPER menu.
2. A namelist menu of synchronized groups of NC sequences appears. Select a group whereyou want to define synch points.
3. The system displays the tool paths of synchronized NC sequences and the SYNCHPOINTS menu with the following options:
� Add—Define pairs of synchronized points on tool paths for Head1 and Head2.
� Move—Modify location of an existing synch point. Select a synch point, then select anew location for it on the appropriate tool path.
� Remove—Remove a pair of synch points. Select a synch point. The systemhighlights the second synch point in the pair and prompts you for confirmation.
� Show—Show the synch pairs currently defined. You can either show them in turnby using the Next and Previous options, or use Show All.
380
4. Choose Add.
5. The system displays the tool paths for Head1 in cyan. Select a point on the tool path.
6. The system displays the tool paths for Head2 in cyan. Select a point to be synchronizedwith the first point.
7. Repeat Steps 4 through 6 to define other pairs of synch points.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Foryour convenience, separate options allow you to insert CL commands at thebeginning and at the end of the tool path, or at the current tool position.
1. Choose Create from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. The LOCATE CMD menu appears with the options:
� Select—Select on the tool path to specify the command placement.
� Beginning—The CL command will be output before the first cutter position of theNC sequence (or the first cutter position of the operation if you are optimizing anoperation tool path).
� End—The CL command will be output after the last cutter position of the NCsequence (or the last cutter position of the operation if you are optimizing anoperation tool path).
3. The CL file in the Info Box is scrolled to the appropriate line. The CREATE CMD menuappears with the options:
� Add—Enter the command using one of the following options:
Menus—Compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from the syntaxmenus.
Keyboard—Enter the command line-by-line using the keyboard. This method doesnot provide syntax checking, as opposed to the method above.
From File—Read in a file containing the CL command lines. The file must have anextension “.cmd.
� Edit—Brings up a system window to allow you to edit the command using thesystem editor. No checking as to the syntax, is done at this point.
� Show—Display all the lines currently included in the user-defined command in anInformation Window (separate from the NCL File Window containing the CL file).
381
4. Enter the command line(s) using the options above, then choose Done from the CREATECMD menu. The command line(s) are inserted in the CL file at the selected location.
Notes:
• If you add more than one command line at a certain point, they will be treated as a“block, that is, you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of commandlines.
• Only one CL command can be specified as located at the beginning or end of the tool path(it can have multiple lines). Therefore, if you try to repeatedly select the Beginning orEnd option, a message will inform you that a command already exists at this location,and you can modify it. Add the appropriate lines to the existing CL command using theCommand option in the MODIFY CMD menu, described below.
Adding CL Commands at the Operation Level
When you choose CL Command from the MACHINING menu, the current CLdata file is displayed in the NCL File window, and the CL COMMAND menuappears with the options:
• Create—Insert a new user-defined command.
• Modify—Modify placement or contents of an existing user-defined command.
• Copy—Copy an existing user-defined command to another location.
• Delete—Delete an existing user-defined command.
• Find—Search for CL text strings or locate previously entered user-defined commands.
To Modify a CL Command
You can modify either the contents or the placement of a previously addeduser-defined CL command by following the procedure below.
1. Choose Modify from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. Locations of the previously added user-defined CL commands are highlighted in cyan andall the commands are listed in a namelist menu. You can select a command by eitherselecting on the screen or from the menu. Once a command is selected, it issimultaneously highlighted on the screen and in the menu. Choose Done Sel if that isthe command you want.
3. The MODIFY CMD menu appears with the options:
382
� Placement—Relocate the command using the LOCATE CMD options describedabove.
� Command—Add more lines or edit the command text using the CREATE CMDoptions described above.
4. Check off either one or both options and choose Done. If both options are checked off, thesystem will start the appropriate user interface in turn.
To Find a CL Command
A command location is not marked by a control point, and is normallyinvisible. A quick way to display all the CL command locations along the toolpath is to choose Delete. This will highlight all the points where CLcommands are added. To find a particular CL command, use the Find optionin the CL COMMAND menu. You can also use this option to search throughthe whole CL file for a particular command (for example, to check values, orto determine where to insert a user-defined command).
1. Choose Find from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. The FIND COMMAND menu appears with the following options:
� Enter String—Enter a string to search for. The system will search through all thecommands in the Info Box (both system-generated and user-defined). You can viewthe results using the Next, Previous, and Show All options in the SHOW DATAmenu.
� UserDefCmd—Find a previously inserted user-defined CL command. A namelistmenu with all the inserted commands appears. Put checkmarks next to thecommand(s) you want to find, or choose Select All to display all the commandlocations.
If a block of commands has been added, only the first command will appear in the searchlist, followed by the number of lines in the block. For example, if you choose“FEDRAT/1.000000, IPR (2 lines) from the namelist menu, locations of all two-line blocksstarting with the “FEDRAT/1.000000, IPR command will be shown, even if the othercommands in the block are different.
To Delete a CL Command
You can only delete user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commandspreviously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
1. Select a user-defined CL command.
2. Click NCL File > Delete CL Command.
383
3. The system deletes the selected command from the CL file listing.
To Copy a CL Command
Instead of adding a new command, you can copy an existing CL command toa new location by following the procedure below.
1. Choose Copy from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. A namelist menu with all the inserted commands appears. Select a command you want tocopy. A block of commands is selected by the first command and number of lines. Thesystem will highlight in red the location where the selected command or block iscurrently inserted (that is, where it will be copied from).
3. Select a new location on the tool path. The command is added, with a cyan pointindicating the new location.
CL Data
About CL Data
Cutter Location (CL) data files are generated from the cutter paths specifiedwithin Pro/NC NC sequences. Each NC sequence generates a separate CLfile. You can also create a single file for a whole operation. These CL datafiles can then be passed to machine-specific or generic post-processors for NCtape generation or DNC communications.
To Write CL Data to a File
When writing CL data to a file, you have an option of immediately post-processing the data and creating an MCD file, or writing a CL file, which canbe post-processed later.
1. Choose Output from the CL DATA menu.
2. Choose one of:
� Select Set – Select a set of NC sequences.
� Select One – Select an NC sequence. Selecting an operation (using the Operationoption in the SELECT FEAT menu) will output merged CL data of all NC sequencesincluded in the operation.
384
3. Choose File to print the CL data to a file.
4. Choose an option from the OUTPUT TYPE menu:
� CL File – Generate a CL data file. Type a filename, or press ENTER to accept thedefault filename generated by the system.
� MCD File – Generate an MCD file. If you select this option, the system will firstgenerate a CL file (you will be prompted for the file name), and then post-process it.This option is not available with the Batch option below.
� Interactive – Perform toolpath computation within your current session.
� Batch – Perform toolpath computation as a separate process in batch mode.
Default CL File Names
The CL file name format is CLfile.ncl.#, where CLfile is the name of the file, #is the version number. CL file extension can be set to something differentthan “.ncl. Use the configuration file option:
ncl_file_extension file_extension (without ncl ext)
Notes:
� File extension length is limited to 3 characters. If you specify a longer file extension,it will be truncated and a warning will be issued.
� Do not change the CL file extension if you are using a default post-processor, adedicated post-processor, or a post-processor created with Pro/NCPOST.
When you output CL data to a file, the system generates a default name forthis file, based on the following rules:
• If you output CL data for an operation, the default name will be the operation name. Forexample, if the operation name is OP010, the default CL file name is op010.ncl.1.
• If you output CL data for an NC sequence that has a name, the default name will be theNC sequence name. For example, if the NC sequence name is volume01, the default CLfile name is volume01.ncl.1.
• If you output CL data for an NC sequence that does not have a name, the default namewill be seq#####, where ##### is the sequence number. For example, for the 5th NCsequence in the manufacturing model, the default CL file name is seq00005.ncl.1.
• If you output CL data for a set of NC sequences, the default name will be the set name.For example, if the set name is nc_set, the default CL file name is nc_set.ncl.1.
You can customize the default CL file name for an operation or NC sequenceusing the NCL_FILE parameter at the appropriate level. If the NCL_FILE
385
parameter is set to something other than the default (-), the system will usethe parameter value as the default name for CL data output (and add theextension and version number to it).
When the system suggests a default name, you can either accept it bypressing ENTER, or type a different name. The system will add the extensionand version number to the name you typed.
To Create a Set of NC Sequences
1. Choose CL Data > Output > Select Set.
2. Choose Create from the OUTPUT SET menu.
3. Enter a name for the set.
4. The system brings up a namelist menu containing all operation and NC sequence names.Put the checkmarks next to the NC sequences you want included in the set. When youselect or unselect an operation makes the system automatically select or unselect all theNC sequences in this operation. You can also use the Select All and Unsel All options.
5. Choose Done Sel when finished selecting NC sequences.
Sets of NC Sequences
When outputting CL data, you generally select either a single NC sequence,or an operation, which outputs to a single file CL data for all the NCsequences in this operation. The Select Set option in the OUTPUT menuallows you to output to a single file CL data of only certain NC sequenceswithin an operation, or even NC sequences that belong to differentoperations, by creating sets of NC sequences.
Note: When outputting a set of NC sequences, you have to add the appropriateconnection moves, if needed.
When you choose Select Set from the OUTPUT menu, the system displaysthe OUTPUT SET menu with the following options:
• Create—Create a new set of NC sequences.
• Modify—Modify an existing set of NC sequences:
� Name—Enter a new name for the set.
� Content—Add or remove NC sequences by selecting or unselecting them, similar towhen creating a set.
386
• Delete—Delete an existing set of NC sequences (this option deletes the name of the set;it does not affect the NC sequences themselves).
• Info—Display information about the NC sequences included in a set.
• Output—Output CL data for a set of NC sequences.
To Output CL Data for a Set of NC Sequences
1. Choose CL Data > Output > Select Set.
2. Choose Output.
3. Select a name of an existing set from the namelist menu.
4. Choose the desired output type option (such as File or Display) from the PATH menu,then follow the appropriate procedure, as if outputting a single operation or NCsequence.
To Process CL Data on a Remote Machine
The Batch option in the OUTPUT TYPE menu allows you to perform the toolpath computation in the background, as a separate process, and even on aseparate host machine, which lets you do other work while the tool pathcomputation occurs. It is your responsibility to avoid working on a modeluntil its toolpath computation is complete.
The Queue Manage option in the CL DATA menu enables you to performmanagement of the jobs in the queue:
• Delete—Enables deletion of jobs that you have submitted.
• Fetch—Enables fetching of completed jobs.
• Update—Shows status of all jobs in queue.
• Close—Closes the dialog box.
Remote batch processing requires a separate Pro/ENGINEER license. Thehost machine for remote toolpath computation must have prorembatch andproremd executables installed, and certain environment variables set. This isdone automatically at installation time when you designate a machine as aremote host for processing CL data.
387
To enable toolpath computation on a separate host machine, set up thefollowing configuration option on your machine:
prorembatch_queue_manager proc_name : host :0: proc_num :1
where:
proc_name = the processor name (any descriptive name)
host = the remote machine hostname
0 = type of transport, always set to 0
proc_num = RPC number of processor (must match the PRORB_RPCNUM environmentvariable on remote machine; if you specify 0, the system will use the default RPCnumber)
1 = version of queue manager, currently 1
To Input a CL Data File
You can “play an existing CL file by reading it in. The system will display thecorresponding tool path.
1. Choose Input from the CL DATA menu.
2. Enter the filename of the CL file.
Note: If the first feature in a CL data file is a 4-axis Wire EDM NC sequence, and thefile contains any NC sequence other than a Wire EDM NC sequence, the input processwill be quit.
To Display CL Data for an Operation, NC Sequence, or a Set of NC Sequences
You can display the tool path for an operation or an NC sequence by followingthe procedure below.
1. Choose Output from the CL DATA menu.
2. Choose one of:
� Select Set—Select a set of NC sequences.
� Select One—Select an NC sequence or operation.
3. Choose Display from the PATH menu to display the tool path on the screen.
388
4. Use the DISPLAY CL menu options to customize the tool path display and click Done.Click for details.
If you are displaying tool path for an operation, all NC sequence tool paths will bedisplayed in turn. Synchronized display for HEAD1 and HEAD2 will be used for 4-Axisturning where appropriate. VERIFY and PROBE statements will be graphicallysimulated during CL data display.
When displaying the tool path, the solid line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts thematerial (kerf display is available for certain NC sequence types). The tool pathdisplayed as a dotted line corresponds to the RAPID movements (that is, whenFREE_FEED is 0). If you specify a nonzero FREE_FEED, rapid traverse will bedisplayed as a solid line.
Notes:
� In some cases, the display may not reflect the exact coordinates in the generatedPro/CLfile.
� You can display tool motions in different colors according to their feed values.
The configuration option cl_arrow_scale allows you to control the size ofthe tool path arrow. The default is 1. If you set it to 0, the arrows will not bedisplayed. Specifying any other positive number will scale the arrowaccordingly.
You can abort the cutter path display at any time by clicking on the STOPsign in the bottom-right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
The DISPLAY CL Menu
The DISPLAY CL menu contains the following options:
• Tool—Depending on whether the checkmark is on or off, display or do not display thetool.
• Disp Cycles—Appears only for Holemaking NC sequences and Thread Turning. If thecheckmark is on, all the tool motions included in the CYCLE command or in the threadcycle will be displayed. If the checkmark is off, a simplified display will be used.
• Status Box—When you display the tool path, additional information appears in the InfoBox, such as the feedrate, the spindle speed, the current XYZ coordinates of the tool, thecurrent IJK coordinates of the tool axis. This option causes the cutter coordinates in theInfo Box to update with each GOTO statement, to reflect the intermediate cutterpositions during the tool path display.
389
• StopAtStart—Makes the tool stop at the beginning of the tool path, to allow you checkthe cutter location coordinates in the Info Box. Choose Continue from the CL CONTROLmenu when you are ready to proceed displaying the tool path.
• Compute CL—Forces the system to recompute the CL data at this time; if this option isnot selected, the system will use CL data stored in the “manufacturename.tph file andonly recompute it if you made changes affecting the CL data (such as changing themanufacturing parameters or model geometry) after the tool path has last been stored bythe system.
The next two options represent two ways to control the frequency ofconsecutive tool displays on the tool path. They are mutually exclusive; theone that you select last will be used.
• Time Increment—Puts the tool display in the real time mode. Enter a value for thetime increment (in seconds) between two consecutive tool displays.
• Cutter Step—Displays the tool at uniform distances along the tool path. Enter a valuefor step size (in the units of the workpiece). If you enter a large value for step size, thetool will be displayed at the GOTO locations only.
Notes:
� If a solid tool model is used when creating the NC sequence, you will have an optionto display model geometry instead of the default tool.
� Once you display a tool path, Pro/NC will remember the options used and selectthem as defaults when next displaying a tool path within the manufacturing session.If the options last used are inapplicable for a particular NC sequence type (forexample, you used Kerf display before, and now are displaying a Turning tool path),the system will automatically reset the default as appropriate.
Once you have set up the CL display environment, choose Done CL. Thetool path is displayed according to the specified options. Then the CLCONTROL menu appears with the following options:
• Position—Select a point along the tool path. The tool will be positioned at this point.
• Next—The tool is displayed at the location corresponding to the next GOTO command.
• Prev—The tool is displayed at the location corresponding to the previous GOTOcommand.
• CL Measure—Access the Pro/ENGINEER Measure functionality to compute toolinterference, clearance. If a solid tool model is used, its geometry can be selected formeasuring. If the tool is defined by a parameter file, it will be temporarily converted intoa “dummy part whose geometry is defined by the appropriate tool parameters: the toolsection for a turning tool will be extruded by 0.1 of the tool length; for all other tool typesthe tool section will be revolved around the center axis.
• Time Increment and Cutter Step—The same as in the DISPLAY CL menu.
390
• Continue—Proceed with the tool path display from the current position of the tool.
• Done—Display the tool path for the next NC sequence, or, if only a single NC sequenceis present, exit the CL CONTROL menu.
• Quit—Exit the CL Control menu. This command will appear only if multiple NCsequences are present.
Note: The tool will always be displayed while you move it using the CL CONTROL menuoptions, even if the Tool checkmark in the DISPLAY CL menu was turned off. Once youchoose Continue from the CL CONTROL menu, the tool display will again be controlledby the CL display environment.
You can interrupt the cutter path display at any time by clicking on theSTOP sign in the lower-right corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window.
To Display Tool Path for an NC Sequence
You can display the cutter path and a simulation of the tool prior tocompleting the NC sequence, to verify the tool path and make a visual checkfor interference with fixtures and model features. All simulated tooldimensions represent the parameters defined during tool setup. All toolsexcept turning appear three dimensional in isometric or trimetric views.
When you choose Play Path from the NC SEQUENCE menu, the PLAY PATHmenu appears with the following options:
• Compute CL—Forces the system to recompute the CL data at this time; if this option isnot selected, the system will use CL data stored in the “manufacturename.tph file andonly recompute it if you made changes affecting the CL data (such as changing themanufacturing parameters or model geometry) after the tool path has last been stored bythe system.
• Screen Play—Display the tool path on the screen and view the contents of the CL datafile using the PLAY PATH dialog box. Click for details.
• Play Steps—Appears only if the tool path has been customized. Allows you to displaythe tool path step-by-step. Use Continue to display the next step, Quit—to quit thedisplay process.
• NC Check—Access the NC Check functionality.
• Gouge Check—Access the Gouge Check functionality. Available for Milling NCsequences only.
391
To Rotate or Translate CL Data
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select aset of NC sequences.
2. Choose Rotate or Translate from the PATH menu.
3. Choose the NC Sequence coordinate system axis to rotate or translate about from the CLTRANSF menu.
4. Enter a value for rotation or translation.
5. Choose File or Display from the PATH menu.
CL data rotations and translations are cumulative. You can repeat Steps 2–4as many times as necessary to change the CL output location. To changerotation or translation value back to 0, choose Quit from the CL TRANSFmenu.
Rotating and Translating CL Data
CL data can be rotated and translated before sending it to file or displaying iton the screen. It is especially useful for machining patterned features.
Example: Translating CL Data
CL data translated along Y-axis bythe amount of pattern dimensionincrement
CL data for the millingNC sequence without translating
Create a mill ing NC sequence.
To Mirror CL Data
392
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select aset of NC sequences.
2. Choose Mirror from the PATH menu.
3. Select a plane, or create a datum, to mirror the CL data about.
4. The CL data is mirrored. Choose File or Display from the CUT PATH menu.
Mirroring CL Data
CL data can also be mirrored before sending it to file or displaying on thescreen.
Example: Mirroring CL Data
Create a mill ing NC sequence Mirror CL data about this datum
To Scale CL Data
The Scale option in the PATH menu allows you to scale CL data beforedisplaying it or writing to a file.
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select aset of NC sequences.
2. Choose Scale from the PATH menu.
3. Enter the scaling factor.
4. The CL data is scaled. Choose File or Display from the CUT PATH menu.
To Output CL Data in Different Units
393
When an NC sequence is created, the CL data is generated in the units of theworkpiece. Later, however, CL data can be output in any units.
1. Choose CL Data, Output, and select the NC sequence or operation. You can also select aset of NC sequences.
2. Choose Units from the PATH menu.
3. Select the units for CL data to be output in from the LENGTH menu.
4. Choose File from the PATH menu.
Note: You can use only standard units. The Other unit option is inapplicable for CLdata output.
To Edit CL Data Files
The Edit option in the CL DATA menu allows you to edit CL data for anoperation, or view CL data for an NC sequence. Changes to CL data areplayed back only when the CL data for the operation is output.
When editing an operation, you will be asked if you want to create a new file.This will output the current CL data for this operation in a file (you will beprompted for the file name), and then bring it up for editing in a text windowat the top of the screen.
If you answer [n], you can edit an existing CL file for this operation (you willbe prompted for the file name). In this case, however, it is the file and not thecurrent operation data that will be edited. For example, if some changesoccurred to the CL data after it was last output, these changes will be lost forediting. It is therefore recommended to output the CL data to a new file, tomake sure that all the latest changes are reflected.
Operations remember changes on a per NC sequence basis; if the CL data forone of the NC sequences in an operation changes, the other NC sequenceswill not be affected.
Note: The first four lines of a CL file act as a header, and must be kept intact if the file isto be read in during editing or inputting CL data. Changing or reordering these lines willcause an error message to appear.
The editor commands available are:
• Insert File—Insert a move into the CL file, before the current line.
• Save File—Save the CL file (as is). You can enter a different file name.
• Show Path—Show tool path from the start of file to the current position.
394
• Show Edits—Bring up the Information Window, listing all of the changes that havebeen made in the CL data file. The information will include the line number, the editingfunction that was performed, and the CL commands that were added.
• Clear Edits—Delete any changes you have made to the CL data file.
• Screen Edit—Enter the screen editing mode.
• Insert—Add any valid line to the CL file, before the current line.
• Append—Add any valid line to the CL file, after the current line.
• Delete—Delete the specified number of lines, starting from the current line. Enter thenumber of lines to delete (the default is 1). If you enter 0, no lines will be deleted.
• Change—Change the current line. The CL command must be the same.
• Copy Text—Copy lines in the CL file to another location. Select the range of lines tocopy by entering the first and the last line number (to copy one line only, enter itsnumber for both prompts). Then enter the number of the destination line.
• Move Text—Move lines in the CL file to another location. Works the same as CopyText, the difference being that with Move Text selected lines will be deleted from theoriginal location.
• Search/Repl—Start the automatic replacement procedure.
• Step—Move through the CL file step-by-step, displaying tool and path for every line onyour way.
• Jump—Move directly to the specified line without displaying the tool path. The tool willbe immediately displayed in its new position.
• Position—Position the file by line number or by selecting a point. When you choosePosition, you will have two options:
� Line—Position the cursor in the CL file (and the tool on the screen) by entering theline number to go to. The valid range is shown in the prompt.
� Pick—Select an approximate point on a surface being machined where you want toposition the tool. The system will interpolate the coordinates of your selection todetermine the nearest available tool location. It will then display the tool coordinatesin the prompt and ask for confirmation. If you answer [y], the tool will be moved tothis location and the cursor positioned on the appropriate line in the CL file. If youanswer [n], the position will not be changed; and you can make another selection.
• Next—Go to the next line.
• Prev—Go to the previous line.
• FF—Search forward to a particular text pattern.
395
• Rew—Search backward to a particular text pattern.
• Measure—Access the Pro/ENGINEER Measure functionality to compute toolinterference, clearance. This works similar to the CL Measure option in the CLCONTROL menu.
• NC Check—Access the NC Check functionality.
As you step through the file, the cutter location updates accordingly. TheSTOP sign is displayed at the right end of the message window. You can clickon it at any moment to interrupt scrolling the file and stop at the currentcursor position.
In Holemaking NC sequences, for deep and break chip cycles, the cycles willbe displayed as you edit the CL file.
To Perform Screen Editing of CL Data
The screen editing mode allows you to use the cursor, arrow keys, and somebuilt-in functions directly in the text editor window.
1. Choose Screen Edit from the CL EDIT menu.
2. Edit the CL data using the following function keys:
� <F2>—ToggleInput—Alternates between editing and browsing. In browse mode, youcan walk through the file but cannot change it. In edit mode, the whole line that yourcursor is on will be highlighted and you can edit it by typing.
� <F5 >—Line#—Display/remove line numbers in front of the lines.
� <F6>—DelLine—Delete the current line (edit mode only).
� <F7>—Cut—Cut the highlighted lines (edit mode only). To highlight several lines,press the LEFT mouse button and hold it down while dragging the mouse across thefile.
� <F9>—Search—Search for a text string. Enter the string. The file is repositionedwith the cursor on the first occurrence of the search pattern.
You can use the mouse to position the cursor and move through the file using the arrowkeys, <PgDn> and <PgUp>, scroll bar at the side of the window.
3. When done, hit <F1> or <ESC> to quit the screen edit mode and return to the CL EDITmenu. Whichever key you use, all changes made in the screen edit mode will stay in thefile. If you do not want to keep the changes, choose Quit from the CL EDIT menu.
Note: If you are running on a SUN workstation, you may need to modify your “.xinitrcfile to allow the use of function key <F1> by your applications.
396
To Perform Search/Replace
The automatic replacement procedure allows you to search the CL data filefor a text pattern and replace all or some occurrences with another string.
1. Choose Search/Repl from the CL EDIT menu.
2. Choose All or Some.
3. Enter the search string.
4. Enter the replacement string.
5. If you have chosen All, all the occurrences of the search string will automatically bereplaced. If Some has been chosen, each occurrence will be highlighted in turn. Use oneof:
� Replace—Replace the highlighted string.
� Skip—Move to the next occurrence without replacing the current one.
� Done—Stop the search/replace process.
To Perform CL Data Gouge Checking
Gouge checking capabilities are provided to allow you a quick check of CLdata for Milling NC sequences.
1. Choose Gouge Check from the CL DATA menu.
2. The SEL/CR NCL menu appears with the options:
� Select—Select a preexistent CL file to run from a namelist menu.
� Create—Create a new file. Select an NC sequence or operation, then enter a namefor the CL file.
3. The SELECT SRFS menu appears. Select the surfaces you want to check for gouging. Thefollowing options are available:
� Add—Select surfaces to check for gouging. You can select:
Surface—Individual surfaces.
Part—All surfaces on a part.
397
� Remove—Unselect some of the selected surfaces. You can also use the Surface andPart options above.
� Remove All—Restart the surface selection process.
� Show—Show the surfaces selected so far. The surfaces will be highlighted in blue.
4. Choose Done/Return from the SELECT SRFS menu when finished selecting surfaces.
5. Choose Run from the GOUGE CHECK menu to start the gouge checking process. You caninterrupt this process at any time by clicking on the STOP sign at the right end of themessage window. If you press the STOP sign, the following options will be available:
� Continue—Continue gouge checking.
� Abort—Abort gouge checking.
� Show—Show gouges detected so far.
6. If no gouges are detected upon completing the check, the system will inform you with amessage. Otherwise, the first detected gouge will be shown and the SHOW GOUGE menuwill appear with the following options:
� Show All—Show all detected gouges.
� Next—Show next gouge.
� Previous—Show previous gouge.
� Info—Output clearance between the tool and check surfaces, as well as informationabout all detected gouges, to a file. The number of decimal places output for cutterposition will be defined by the configuration option “mfg_xyz_num_digits (this optionalso defines the number of decimal places when outputting tool coordinates in CLdata files). If this option is not specified, the default number of decimal places forGouge Checking is 4.
7. You can check another NC sequence by choosing Filename from the GOUGE CHECKmenu and selecting or creating another CL file. The Surfaces option in the GOUGECHECK menu allows you to add or remove surfaces to check for gouging. You can alsochange the accuracy of system calculations by selecting Tolerance and entering thegouge tolerance value. The smaller the tolerance value, the greater the accuracy.
Note: The tolerance value specified for Gouge Checking should not be less than theTOLERANCE value used when creating the NC sequence. A good “rule of thumb is to setthe gouge check tolerance to 1.5 times the NC sequence tolerance for the tool path beingchecked.
The Step option in the GOUGE CHECK menu allows you to change the step size for gougechecking (that is, the tool positions where gouge checking is performed). You can eitherenter a value for step size, or let the system automatically calculate the value tomaximize the speed of display. Entering a smaller step size will increase the number ofgouge check positions.
398
8. Choose Done/Return from the GOUGE CHECK menu when finished.
To Specify an NC Alias
1. Choose Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURE or MACHINING menu, then choose CLSetup.
2. Choose NC Alias from the CL SETUP menu. The NC ALIASES menu appears with thefollowing commands:
� Modify—Bring up the Pro/TABLE editor to define aliases.
� Retrieve—Choose from a list of previously saved “.ncd files. Bring a previouslysaved NC alias table into the model.
� Save—Save the NC alias table in the current directory. NC alias tables are savedwith the extension “.ncd.
� Show—Bring up the Information Window to list all of the NC aliases specified forthe manufacturing model.
3. Choose Modify. The Pro/TABLE window appears. The table contains two columns,labeled “CL Command and “User Command. The CL commands that are supported foraliasing are listed under “CL Command.
4. For each supported CL command that you want to assign an alias to, enter the alias inthe corresponding cell in the “User Command column.
5. Exit Pro/TABLE and save the file.
NC Aliases
The NC Alias option in the CL SETUP menu enables you to establish aliasesfor CL commands. NC aliases are useful if the post-processor that you areusing does not support the default CL commands output by Pro/ENGINEER;the NC aliases will substitute a command you have provided into the CLdata. The NC alias may also include additional CL data associated with thecommand, as well as dimensions, user-defined parameters, and text. NCaliases are saved in a file with the extension “.ncd. NC alias files will bestored automatically whenever the manufacturing model is saved.
Four CL commands are supported for aliasing: MFGNO, PARTNO, LOADTL,and TURRET. You cannot enter additional CL commands into this list toassign them aliases. NC aliases employ functionality similar to that ofdrawing notes: you can specify dimensions, parameters, or other fields to beoutput in the CL command.
399
For example:
CL Command(system default)
User Command(NC alias)
LOADTL MACRO_LOAD :&nc_full_arg with &d1and ¶m1 and ¶m2
where:
• “LOADTL is the default CL command output by Pro/NC. For this example, the completeoutput statement is: “LOADTL / 3, LENGTH, 5.0.
• “MACRO_LOAD is the CL command being substituted for “LOADTL.
• “&nc_full_arg is the output which follows the “/ in the output. In this example, it is “3,LENGTH, 5.0. The individual fields in this string can be output using“&nc_arg[arg_num] (with “arg_num beginning at 1). For instance, “&nc_arg2 wouldoutput “LENGTH.
• “d1 is a dimension value.
• “param1 / “param2 are user-defined parameters; “& indicates that their values should bedisplayed (as in drawing notes). For this example, the value of “param1 is “BLUE andthe value of “param2 is “GREEN.
The output in the CL data file will read: “MACRO_LOAD : 3, LENGTH, 5.0,with 10.00 and BLUE and GREEN
Note: When using Pro/TABLE to define an NC alias, it must be contained on a singleline.
To Include Pre- and Post-Machining Files
You can include user-defined macros, like setting the post-processor registers,at the very beginning and the very end of a CL file, using two parameters:
PRE_MACHINING_FILE—Enter the name of the file you want to be included at thevery beginning of the CL file (after the PARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands).
POST_MACHINING_FILE—Enter the name of the file you want to be included at thevery end of the CL file.
Filenames are entered without the extension, and should have the extension“.ncl, or the default CL file extension if specified in the configuration file.
The contents of these files will be included in the CL file of the current NCsequence between “$$ —> BLOCK_START and “$$ —> BLOCK_END. These
400
contents will be ignored when reading a CL file using the Input option in theCL DATA menu.
Notes:
• Both these files are included into a CL file before it goes to the post-processor.
• If you set the Startup and Shutdown files at the operation level, these files will be addedonly when outputting CL data for the operation. The Startup file is output right after thePARTNO, MACHIN, and UNITS commands, before the pre-machining file for the firstNC sequence; the Shutdown file is output at the very end of the CL file, after the post-machining file for the last NC sequence.
To Convert a CL File
1. In the directory where your CL file resides, type:
pro_ncl_cvt
2. Enter the CL file name.
3. Enter a different name for the output file.
Converting CL Files
The Pro/ENGINEER editor can handle lines up to 80 characters long.Therefore, the CIRCLE statements and GOTO statements with an axis (i, j, kvector) will be broken in two lines, with the continuation character ($) outputautomatically at the end of the first line.
Before sending CL files to the post-processor, you may need to convert themto the format without the continuation character using the “pro_ncl_cvtcommand.
Using the PLAY PATH Dialog Box
About the PLAY PATH Dialog Box
When you display a tool path, the system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box.The collapsible upper portion of this dialog box lists the cutter location (CL)data for the NC sequence or operation. You can save this CL data in a CL fileor an MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box, by clicking theappropriate option in the File menu.
The lower portion contains the following buttons:
401
Name Description
Play Back Display the tool motion going back fromthe current position of the tool.
Stop Stop displaying the tool path.
PlayForward
Display the tool motion going forwardfrom the current position of the tool.
Go ToPreviousCL Record
Go to the previous CL record in the file.
Rewind Rewind to the start of the tool path.
FastForward
Fast forward to the end of the tool path.
Go To NextCL Record
Go to the next CL record in the file.
The Tool Clearance button lets you access the Measure functionality, tocompute tool interference, and clearance. If a solid tool model is used, itsgeometry can be selected for measuring. If the tool is defined by parameters,it will be temporarily converted into a “dummy part, with geometry based onthe appropriate tool parameters.
The Position Cutting Tool button lets you select a point on the tool path toposition the cutting tool. To position the cutting tool at a certain CL data line,click NCL File > Position Tool.
At the bottom of the dialog box, there is a slider to adjust the display speed.Moving the slider to the right makes the display faster; moving it to the leftslows the display.
The Close button closes the PLAY PATH dialog box.
When displaying the tool path, you can make the tool stop at certain pointsby adding break points. You can also insert customized CL commands, suchas the specific post-processor words required for correct NC output, at desiredlocations within the CL file. When you save the CL data, these commandswill be output to the CL file. If you add a tool motion command, the
402
corresponding motion will be also shown in the tool path display on thescreen.
To Display the Tool Path
1. When defining an NC sequence, on the NC SEQUENCE menu, click Play Path > ScreenPlay.
The system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box and displays the cutting tool simulation inthe initial location.
2. Click the Play Forward button to start playing the tool motion.
The system starts scrolling through the CL data file, moving the tool to reflect its currentposition on the screen. The solid red line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts thematerial.
3. Click the Stop button to stop the tool motion display. The tool also stops upon reaching abreak point placed in the CL file (indicated by a red downward arrow appearing to the leftof the CL record). Use the other tool positioning options in the PLAY PATH dialog box, asneeded.
4. You can save the current tool path to a CL or an MCD file. To do this, click File > Save orFile > Save As MCD, respectively.
5. To finish displaying the tool motion and close the PLAY PATH dialog box, click Close.
To Add a Break Point
When displaying the tool motion, you can make the tool stop at certain pointsby adding break points in the CL file listing.
1. In the CL data listing, select a line where you want the tool to stop.
2. Click NCL File > Add break point.
3. The system indicates the break point by placing a red downward arrow to the left of theselected CL line.
When you play the tool motion, the tool stops upon reaching the break pointline. You can, for example, click Tool Clearance at this point, to measuretool interference or clearance. To resume playing the tool path, click the PlayForward button again.
Manipulating Break Points
When you add break points in a CL file listing, the system indicates them byplacing a red downward arrow to the left of the appropriate CL line. When
403
you play the tool path, the tool stops upon reaching the break point line inthe CL data listing.
To display the tool motion without stopping at break points, click NCL File >Suppress all break points. The break point information, however, will beretained; when you click NCL File > Resume all break points, all thebreak points will reappear.
To delete an existing break point, select the appropriate line in the CL datalisting, then click NCL File > Delete break point.
To Position the Tool
When you play the tool path, the position of the cutting tool on the screencorresponds to the position of the cursor in the CL data listing in the topportion of the PLAY PATH dialog box.
To change the tool position, use one of the following methods:
• Click the Position Cutting Tool button in the lower portion of the PLAY PATH dialogbox and select a point on the tool path to position the cutting tool.
• Select a line in the CL data listing, then click NCL File > Position Tool to position thetool at this line.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Usethis functionality to add the specific post-processor words required for correctNC output.
1. Click NCL File > Insert CL Command.
The CL Command dialog box opens.
2. To select location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the tool pathon the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
3. Specify the command contents using one of the following methods:
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Notethat this method does not provide syntax checking.
� Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from thesyntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
� Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser windowwill appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
404
Notes:
� You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing thecursor in it and using the keyboard.
� If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a “block, that is,you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
4. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location tolet you preview the result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location, Cancel—to quit inserting the command.
Using Parameters in CL Commands
When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters,preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If there is a corresponding parameterdefined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If theparameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s typeand value, and this parameter will be added to the relations. This way, theCL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
To Delete a CL Command
To delete a previously inserted user-defined command, follow the procedurebelow.
1. Choose Delete from the CL COMMAND menu.
2. All the CL command locations are indicated by cyan points and all the commands arelisted in a namelist menu. You can select a command by either selecting on the screen orfrom the menu. Once a command is selected, it is simultaneously highlighted on thescreen and in the menu. Choose Done Sel if that is the command you want.
If the selected location contains a block of commands, the whole block will be deleted. Asingle command can be deleted from the block using the Modify option.
To Redefine a CL Command
You can only redefine user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commandspreviously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
1. Select a user-defined CL command.
2. Click NCL File > Redefine CL Command.
405
The CL Command dialog box opens.
3. To select a new location for the CL command, click and select either a point on thetool path on the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
4. To edit the command contents, use one of the following methods:
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and edit the command. Note that thismethod does not provide syntax checking.
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from thesyntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser windowwill appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Note: If you do not delete the contents of the Command text box before using the Menuor File option, you will create additional command lines. From then on, these lines willbe treated as a “block, that is, you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the wholeblock of command lines.
5. The Preview button lets you preview the result. Click OK to complete redefining thecommand, Cancel—to quit.
To Save CL Data in a File
When you display a tool path, you can save the current CL data in a CL fileor an MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box:
1. On the top menu bar of the PLAY PATH dialog box, click File.
2. Click one of the following options:
� Save—Output CL data to a CL file, with the name corresponding to the name of theTool Path feature.
� Save As—Output CL data to a CL file with a different name. Type the new name inthe browser window.
� Save As MCD—Post-process CL data and output it as an MCD file. The PostProcessor Options window opens. Select the desired options and click Output.
406
Subroutine Programming
About Subroutine Programming
Subroutine programming enables you to create NC sequences, place them asmacros at the beginning of the CL file, and then call them from the mainbody of the CL file as many times as needed. This enhancement reduces thesize of CL files, making them easier for the controller to handle and for theprogrammer to read and edit. Typical applications include tombstone work,multiple parts setup on a pallet, and turbine impellers where each blade isthe same.
When you select Subroutines from the MACHINING menu, theSUBROUTINES menu appears with the following options:
• Create—Create a new subroutine pattern.
• Redefine—Redefine a subroutine pattern.
• Delete—Delete a subroutine pattern.
• Info—Obtain information about subroutine patterns.
To Create a New Subroutine Pattern
1. Choose Create from the SUBROUTINES menu.
2. To select NC sequences to be patterned, place a checkmark next to their names in thenamelist menu (which also provides Select All and Unselect All options). Choose DoneSel when finished.
3. The system displays the Subroutines dialog box.
4. The top portion of the dialog box contains the option buttons and checkboxes that allowyou to specify the type of subroutine pattern and desired CL output format:
� If you select the Group option button, the sequences you have selected will bepatterned as a group. This means that the selected sequences and all the sequencesin between form a patterned internal group. If you select Individual, each selectedsequence is patterned individually; the sequences in between are not affected.
� If you select the Absolute option button, CL data for the subroutine will be outputin absolute mode. If you select Incremental, the system will output theMODE/INCR and MODE/ABSOL commands for each NC sequence that is placed ina subroutine.
407
� If you select the Multax checkbox, the system will output transformed CL datarather than outputting Rotate Table commands.
� If you select the Copy CL checkbox, the system will output CL data without thesubroutine definitions and calls. Redefine a pattern to use this option if you want totemporarily suppress subroutine pattern definitions in CL output.
5. The 1st Direction tab lets you define the pattern in the first direction:
� Pattern Type—Use one of the following option buttons:
Translate—Translate the CL data along the axes of the base coordinate system.Type the translation values in the X value, Y value, and Z value text boxes.
Rotate—Rotate the CL data about one of the axes of the base coordinate system.Specify the desired axis by selecting the X, Y, or Z option button. Type the rotationvalue in the Angle text box.
Csys—This option enables you to select or create coordinate systems for placinginstances of the subroutine. The system calculates the correct TRANS/ROTATEstatements for each instance, based on the location of the coordinate system specifiedfor this instance with respect to the base coordinate system. Click Select to create,select, remove, or show the coordinate systems.
� Base Coordinate System—Specify which coordinate system, Machine or NCSequence, is to be used as the base coordinate system for patterning CL data.
� Number—Specify the number of instances in the first direction.
5. The 2nd Direction tab lets you define the pattern in the second direction. It containsthe same options as the 1st Direction tab, except the Csys option button is replaced byNone, which means no pattern in this direction (this is the default).
6. The Fixture tab lets you increment the fixture offset register value.
If you select Use Fixture Compensation, the system will output the “SET/OFSETL, ncommand for each patterned sequence, where n is the fixture offset register number,defined as follows:
� Initial Register specifies the fixture offset register number for the first instance.
� 1st Direction Increment specifies the incremental value for each subsequentinstance in the first direction.
� 2nd Direction Increment specifies the incremental value for instances in thesecond direction. This text box only appears if the subroutine pattern is bidirectional.
� If you click Custom, the system displays the Subroutine Fixture Offsets Setupdialog box, where it lists all instances of the pattern (based on the number ofinstances in each direction), and current register numbers for each instance (basedon the values for Initial Register, 1st Direction Increment, and 2nd DirectionIncrement).
408
Select an instance where you want to customize the fixture offset and type the new valuein the Fixture Offset text box. The Reset button resets all the offsets back to defaultvalues. Click OK to finish customizing the offsets.
7. Click OK in the Subroutines dialog box to create the subroutine pattern.
Note: NC sequences included in a subroutine pattern cannot be selected for anothersubroutine pattern. Redefine the existing pattern instead.
Limitations
If subroutines are present, the following limitations on modifying CL dataexist:
• The CL Edit functionality lets you display and scan CL data, but you cannot modify it.
• The CL Command option in the MACHINING menu will be disabled.
Examples: Subroutine Programming
Example 1: Group vs. IndividualIf an operation contains four NC sequences, and you selected sequences 1 and3 for subroutine patterning with number of instances equal to two, the outputwill look like this:
Group Individual
CALSUB / 1
CALSUB / 2
CALSUB / 3
CALSUB / 1
CALSUB / 2
CALSUB / 3
SEQ4
CALSUB / 1
CALSUB / 1
SEQ2
CALSUB / 3
CALSUB / 3
SEQ4
Example 2: Incremental Output
409
If Incremental is selected, the system outputs two additional commands,MODE/INCR and MODE/ABSOL, for each NC sequence that is placed in asubroutine. This triggers the post processor to process and output the data asincremental moves (the output in the subroutine is still absolute):
DEFSUB / 1
MODE / INCR
GOTO ... (absolute output)
MODE / ABSOL
ENDSUB
To Redefine a Subroutine Pattern
1. Choose Redefine from the SUBROUTINES menu.
2. Select the name of the pattern to redefine.
3. The REDEF SUB menu appears with the following options:
� Sequences—Reselect sequences to be included in the pattern.
� Pattern Def—Brings up the Subroutines dialog box to let you redefine the pattern.
4. Select the desired option(s) from the REDEF SUB menu, then choose Done. The systemwill start the user interface for all the selected options in turn.
NC Post-Processing
About NC Post-Processing
Pro/NC generates cutter location (CL) data files in an ASCII format that needto be post-processed to create Machine Control Data (MCD) files before anymachining operation occurs.
Each Pro/NC module includes a standard set of NC post-processors that canbe executed directly or modified using an optional module. You can controlwhich post-processing module to use by setting the configuration optionncpost_type. The values are:
• gpost (default)—Use the G-Post™ post-processors provided by Intercim Corporation.
410
• ncpost—Use the Pro/NCPOST post-processors.
Other post-processors are certified for use with Pro/NC CL data files.
External Post-ProcessorsThe following post-processors are certified for use with Pro/NC CL Data files:
Post-Processor Supplied byCAM-POST® ICAM Technologies CorporationIntelliPost® Software Magic, Inc.NC Post Plus™ CAD/CAM Resources, Inc.
Other post-processor reading APT should also, with little additional code, beable to process Pro/NC CL files.
Execution of the Post-ProcessorFrom within Pro/NC, you can:
• Select which post-processor to use.
• Execute post-processors with option to run CL file.
• Execute post-processors with options directly upon output of tool path.
To Generate a CL File and an MCD File at the Same Time
1. On the CL DATA menu, click Output.
2. Select an NC sequence. Selecting an operation (using the Operation option in theSELECT FEAT menu) will output merged CL data and MCD of all the NC sequencesincluded in this operation.
3. Click File to create the CL and the MCD file.
4. The OUTPUT TYPE menu opens with the following options:
� CL File—Generate a CL data file only.
� MCD File—Generate a CL file and then post-process it into an MCD file.
5. Select MCD File and click Done.
411
6. Type a filename. The files will be named <fname>.ncl.# for the CL file and <fname>.tapfor the MCD file (where <fname> is the name you typed and # is the version number).
7. The PP OPTIONS menu opens with the following options:
� Verbose—Start the verbose display of post-processing.
� Trace—Trace all macros and CL records in the listing file.
� MACHIN—Use the post-processor file for the machine specified in the MACHINstatement of the CL file. If this option is not checked off, you will be prompted toselect a post-processor from the namelist menu of all available post-processors.
� PID—If this option is checked off, you will be prompted for the process identificationstring. The string should not contain any spaces.
8. Select the desired options and click Done.
9. The post-processor is started with the specified options. The post-processed file will benamed <fname>.tap, where <fname> is the name of the CL file being processed.
To Generate an MCD File from an Existing CL File
1. On the CL DATA menu, click Post Process.
The system opens a browser window with a listing of CL data files, starting from thecurrent directory.
2. Select a CL file name.
The PP OPTIONS menu opens.
3. Select the desired options and click Done.
4. The post-processor is started with the specified options. The post-processed file will benamed <fname>.tap, where <fname> is the name of the CL file being processed.
CL Output
About CL Output
A subset of the Automatically Programmed Tools (APT) commands isautomatically sent by Pro/NC to a CL data file. These commands are shownbelow with their associated parameters and definitions.
Other commands can be included in the CL data files using the Edit or CLCommand functionality. Please refer to your post-processor documentationfor description of the commands available.
412
Supported CL Data Commands
$$—any line or portion of a line preceded by “$$ is a comment or commandfor the use of Pro/NC.
Command Description Attributes
CALSUB/a where:
a=subroutine name.
CIRCLE/ x, y, z {, i, j, k} , r output for circularinterpolated toolmovement
COOLNT / type, pressure where:
type = ON, OFF, FLOOD,MIST, TAP, or THRU.
pressure = LOW, MEDIUM, orHIGH (if the value for theCOOLANT_PRESSUREparameter is NONE, it will notbe output).
CUTCOM / LEFT {,n} where:
LEFT, RIGHT = the direction ofcutter compensation offset.
n = the number of the registerof the machine controller thatholds the tool compensationdata. If CUTCOM_REGISTERis 0, it is not output.
CUTCOM / RIGHT {,n}
CUTCOM / OFF
CYCLE / type output for Holemakingcycles
413
DEFSUB / a start of a subroutinedefinition
where:
a = subroutine name (bydefault, the number of thecorresponding NC sequence).
DELAY / t where:
t = delay in seconds
ENDSUB end of a subroutinedefinition
FEDRAT/f,units where:
f = feedrate value in thespecified units.
units = units for feedrate. Canbe FPM, IPM, FPR, IPR,MMPM, MMPR.
FEDRAT / INVERS, AUTO specifies the inverse timefeed rate, or the rate ofrotation, for machineswith rotary axes (if youset INVERSE_FEED toYES)
FEDRAT / INVERS, OFF output at the end of anNC sequence withinverse time feed rate.
FINI last statement in theprogram.
FLUSH / ON, a where:
a = flush register (if specified)
FROM / x, y, z {, i, j, k} where:
x, y, z—coordinates of the toolcontrol point.i, j, k—the tool axis vector.
414
GENRTR / genrtr register
GOTO / x, y, z {, i, j, k} where:
x, y, z—coordinates of the toolcontrol point.i, j, k—the tool axis vector.
HEAD / n, OPTION, # output for multipleturrets
HEAD / BOTH output before a pair ofsynchronized NCsequences.
HEAD / OFF output after a pair ofsynchronized NCsequences.
LINTOL / r where:
r—the value of themanufacturing parameterLINTOL. Used by post-processor for interpolation. Willbe output only if the LINTOLparameter value is other thandash (-).
LOADTL / n, LENGTH, l,OSETNO, o
where:
n = TOOL_POSITION (definedusing the tool table). If the toolis not included in the tool table,its TOOL_ID (as set in theparameters file) will be used.
LENGTH, l = gauge lengthvalue for a tool. Will be outputonly if GAUGE_Z_LENGTH isother than dash (-).
OSETNO, o = tool offset changespecified in the tool table (ifany).
415
MACHIN / name, m where:
name = the NC sequenceparameter MACH_NAME
m = the NC sequenceparameter MACH_ID
MODE/INCR andMODE/ABSOL
output inside subroutinedefinitions to make thepost transform thesubroutine data intoincremental data.
MODE/MILL andMODE/TURN
output for the Mill/Turncenters.
MULTAX / ON puts the post-processorin the multi-axis outputmode (to process the i,j,kvector). When in multi-axis output mode,Pro/NC outputs the i,j,kvector even when the toolis in 0, 0, 1 orientation.
OP / THREAD, TURN,DEPTH, totdepth, TPI,thread_feed, MULTRD, t,CUTS, c, FINCUT, n,CUTANG, a
ISO output for ThreadTurning.
where:
DEPTH, totdepth = the depth ofcut for the thread.
TPI (or MMPR, or IPR),thread_feed = thread pitch(parametersTHREAD_FEED_UNITS,THREAD_FEED).
MULTRD, t = number ofthreading starts in multiplestart threading.
CUTS, c = the number of timesthe tool is positioned to amultiple cut (parameterNUMBER_CUTS).
FINCUT, n = the number ofpasses made at the final thread
416
depth(NUMBER_FIN_PASSES).
CUTANG, a = angle at whichthe tool begins the cut(INFEED_ANGLE).
OP / THREAD, NOMORE designates the end of ISOthread output
PARTNO part name
PIVOTZ / z2, z1, z2, z1, z1 output for 4-Axis WireEDM only.
z2 = the highest mid-point ofthe surfaces traversed
PPRINT output modelinformation. In order toissue this command, youhave to set up thePPRINT table.
PROBE / ON, OFF,RANGE, CALIB
probe statements.
RAPID next motion statementwill be a rapid traversefeed.
ROTATE / AAXIS|BAXIS|CAXIS, INCR, a,CLW|CCLW
rotational transitionbetween the Machineand NC Sequencecoordinate systems ifCL_DATA_MODE isTRANS_ROTABL
where:
AAXIS, BAXIS, CAXIS—rotateabout X, Y, or Z axisrespectively.
a = rotation angle value.
CLW = clockwise motion.
CCLW = counter-clockwisemotion.
SET / OFSETL, n and SET/ OFSETL, OFF
where:
n = FIXT_OFFSET_REG
output only if theFIXT_OFFSET_REGparameter value is other thandash (-).
SPINDL / RPM, s,CLW|CCLW, MAXRPM, m,
417
RANGE, r
SPINDL / SFM or SMM, v,CLW| CCLW, MAXRPM,m, RANGE, r
SPINDL / ON
SPINDL / OFF
SPINDL / PARLEL,XAXIS|ZAXIS (Mill/Turnmilling only)
m = MAX_SPINDLE_RPM. IfMAX_SPINDLE_RPM is set todash (-), “MAXRPM, m will notbe output.
r = range value(SPINDLE_RANGE). Can beLOW, MEDIUM, HIGH. IfSPINDLE_RANGE isNUMBER, then r is equal tothe RANGE_NUMBERparameter value. IfSPINDLE_RANGE isNO_RANGE, “RANGE, r willnot be output.
PARLEL indicates which axisthe milling spindle is parallelto.
STAN / a, [ LEAD | LAG, b], [ NOW | NEXT ]
output for tool axis inWire EDM, ifCL_OUTPUT_MODE isset to TAPER
NOW—Update the tool axisposition at the current point(available for 2-Axis Wire EDMonly).
NEXT (default)—Update thetool axis position at the nextGOTO point.
THREAD/AUTO, x1, y1, z1,TO, x2, y2, z2, TPI,thread_feed, AT, percent,DEEP, depth, LAST, n,TYPE, 0, totdepth, angle,IPM, ipm, FEDTO, d, x,TIMES, t, OFSETL, n, o
AI Macro output forThread Turning,
where:
TPI(or MMPR, or IPR),thread_feed = thread pitch(parametersTHREAD_FEED_UNITS,THREAD_FEED).
418
AT, percent = the percentage ofremaining metal to be removedwith each pass(PERCENT_DEPTH).
DEEP, depth = determines thefinal programmed thread depth(STOCK_ALLOW).
LAST, n = the number of passesmade at the final thread depth(NUMBER_FIN_PASSES).
TYPE, 0, totdepth, angle =provides thread depth andinfeed angle.
IPM, ipm = feedrate usedduring each threading cycle.
FEDTO, d = the clearancedistance from the workpiece.
x = IN (internal thread), OUT(external thread—default),FACE (facing thread).
TIMES, t = the number ofthreading starts.
OFSETLn = the number of times the toolis positioned to a multiple cut.o = offset distance between eachof the cuts.
TRANS / x, y, z linear translation between theMachine and NC Sequencecoordinate systems ifCL_DATA_MODE isTRANS_ROTABL.Will be commented out if theFIX_OFFSET_REGISTERparameter value is other thandash (-).
TURRET / n, XAXIS, x,ZAXIS, z, OSETNO, o
output for turning NCsequences, and for Milland Holemaking NCsequences performed onlathes and Mill/Turncenters, instead of
419
LOADTL.“XAXIS, x and “ZAXIS, zwill only be output ifGAUGE_X_LENGTHandGAUGE_Z_LENGTH forthe tool are other thandash (-).
UNITS / u length units used for theNC sequence (INCHES,MM, etc.)
VERIFY / CORNER, PNT,RCTNGL, ROUND, XYZ
probe statements.
CL Output for Holemaking Cycles
If the configuration option “cycle_format is set to “fixed, the following outputwill be generated for all Holemaking cycles:
CYCLE / type, z, f, units, t, r, i
where:
type = DRILL, DEEP, BRKCHP, THRU, FACE, CSINK, TAP, BORE, REAM, OFF.
z = the depth to feed the tool to.
f = feedrate.
units = units for cycle feedrate. Can be IPM, IPR, MMPM, MMPR.
t = threads per inch (applies to TAP cycle only).
r = rapid to r depth.
i = depth increment (applies to DEEP cycle only).
If the configuration option “cycle_format is set to “couplet (the default), theCL output for Holemaking cycles is described below.
DRILL CycleOutput when using the cycle type options Drill, Standard.
CYCLE / DRILL, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
420
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
b—The value of CUT_FEED.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
DEEP CycleOutput when using the cycle type options Drill, Deep. The deep cycle allowsfor incremental steps into a deep hole.
CYCLE / DEEP, DEPTH, a, STEP, b, IPM, c, CLEAR, d, RAPTO, e,RETURN, f
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
b—Given by PECK_DEPTH.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
c—The value of CUT_FEED.
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
BREAKCHIP CycleOutput when using the cycle type options Drill, Break Chip. The breakchipcycle is similar to the deep cycle, except that the retraction at each incrementdoes not come all the way out of the hole. A full retraction out of hole is alsoallowed.
CYCLE / BRKCHP, DEPTH, a, STEP, b, IPM, c, CLEAR, d, RAPTO, e,RETURN, f, DWELL | BACK | REV, g, TIMES, h
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
b—Given by PECK_DEPTH.
421
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
c—The value of CUT_FEED.
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
h—Provides a full retract out of hole as in deep cycle; calculated based onFULL_RETRACT_DEPTH/ PECK_DEPTH.
The choice of DWELL, BACK, and REV is as follows:
• If the parameter INTER_RET_HEIGHT is programmed, the chipbreak couplet will be:BACK, g (“g is the value of INTER_RET_HEIGHT)
• If INTER_RET_HEIGHT is “- and a non-zero DELAY is programmed, the couplet will be:DWELL, g—if DELAY_UNITS is SECONDSREV, g—if DELAY_UNITS is REVS(“g is the value of DELAY)
THRU CycleOutput when using the cycle type options Drill, Web. It enables you to drillholes through two or more plates, separated by a certain distance, with thetool moving with FEED_RATE while drilling a plate, and then making aRAPID motion along the tool axis to position above the next plate.
CYCLE / THRU, DEPTH, a1, a2, a3, ..., IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d,RETURN, e
where:
a1—The depth value of the first plate, calculated by Pro/NC.
a2—The depth value to top of the second plate, calculated by Pro/NC.
a3—The depth value of the second plate, calculated by Pro/NC.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
b—The value of CUT_FEED.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
422
FACE CycleOutput when using the cycle type option Face. It is essentially the same asthe drill cycle, except face allows for an optional dwell at depth.
CYCLE / FACE, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e,DWELL | REV, f
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
b—The value of CUT_FEED.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
f—The value of DELAY.
DWELL or REV will be based on DELAY_UNITS set to SECONDS or REVS,respectively.
COUNTERSINK CycleOutput when using the cycle type option Countersink. Allows the additionof a chamfered edge to a hole. It also provides for dwell at depth to assuregood finish.
CYCLE / CSINK, DIAMET, a, TLANGL, b, IPM, c, CLEAR, d, RAPTO, e,RETURN, f, DWELL | REV, g
where:
a—The outside diameter of the chamfer (Csink Diam).
b—The value of the countersink tool parameter POINT_ANGLE.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
c—The value of CUT_FEED.
d—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
e—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
423
f—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
g—The value of DELAY.
DWELL or REV will be based on DELAY_UNITS set to SECONDS or REVS,respectively.
TAP CycleOutput when using the cycle type options Tap and either Fixed or Floating.Allows the creation of a threaded hole. Floating tap cycle allows a modifiedfeed rate other than that given by the combination of thread pitch andspindle speed.
CYCLE / TAP, DEPTH, a, TPI | MMPR | IPR, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d,RETURN, e
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
TPI | MMPR | IPR—Determined by THREAD_UNITS.
b—The value of THREAD_FEED.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
BORE CycleOutput when using the cycle type option Bore. Used to create a finish holediameter with high precision. In order to assure good quality finish, there areprovisions to allow dwell at depth and to back an asymmetric tool away fromthe finished wall before retraction.
CYCLE / BORE, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c1, c2, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e,ORIENT, f, DWELL | REV, g
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
b—The value of CUT_FEED.
c1—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
424
c2—Given by JOG_DIST, if programmed.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
f—Given by ORIENT_ANGLE, if programmed.
g—The value of DELAY.
DWELL or REV will be based on DELAY_UNITS set to SECONDS or REVS,respectively.
REAM CycleOutput when using the cycle type option Ream. An alternative for creating aprecision finish hole. It creates the good surface finish by feeding out of thehole with the spindle turning.
CYCLE / REAM, DEPTH, a, IPM, b, CLEAR, c, RAPTO, d, RETURN, e,DWELL | REV, f
where:
a—The depth value calculated by Pro/NC.
IPM—Given by the parameter CUT_UNITS.
b—The value of CUT_FEED.
c—Given by CLEAR_DIST.
d—Given by RAPTO_DIST; allows for further rapid advance as measured fromCLEAR_DIST toward the cycle control point (optional).
e—Given by PULLOUT_DIST; allows for an optional return to a point other than theCLEAR_DIST (optional). If programmed at 0, retract to the retract plane.
f—The value of DELAY.
DWELL or REV will be based on DELAY_UNITS set to SECONDS or REVS,respectively.
CL Output for Circular Interpolation
You can specify circular interpolation for tool motion in Pro/NC by using theparameter CIRC_INTERPOLATION. If POINTS_&_ARC or ARC_ONLY isspecified, the CL file will contain the following lines for each arc or circleencountered:
425
GOTO / x, y, z
CIRCLE / x, y, z, i, j, k, r
GOTO / x, y, z
x, y, z
x, y, z
.
.
.
x, y, z
The GOTO statement preceding the CIRCLE command specifies the startpoint of the arc. The following GOTO statements specify the points on thearc, the last line specifying the arc end point. For POINTS_&_ARC, thenumber of points output is controlled by the tolerance (the smaller thetolerance, the greater the number of points). For ARC_ONLY, a minimumnumber of points, determined by the NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS parametervalue, is output.
Note: The GOTO statements have the format shown above if the tool axis is parallel tothe Z-Axis of the Machine coordinate system; otherwise, the tool axis vector will also beoutput.
The CIRCLE command specifies circular interpolated tool movement, where:
x, y, z—Coordinates of the center.
i, j, k—Plane vector.
r—Radius.
The plane vector determines the plane and direction using the “right handrule:
i j k Plane Direction
0 0 1 XY CCW
0 0 -1 XY CW
0 1 0 ZX CCW
0 -1 0 ZX CW
1 0 0 YZ CCW
-1 0 0 YZ CW
APT Format
426
If CIRC_INTERPOLATION is set to APT_FORMAT, the CL output for eacharc or circle encountered will be in the auxiliary format:
INDIRV / i, j, kTLONGOFWD / (CIRCLE / x, y, z, r), ON, (LINE / x1, y1, z1, x2, y2, z2)
where:
i, j, k—The unit vector.
x, y, z—Coordinates of the circle center.
r—Circle radius.
x1, y1, z1 and x2, y2, z2—Coordinates of the two points defining the exit line.
Helical InterpolationHelical interpolation is provided for Thread Milling. Output format usesCIRCLE with differing Z coordinates at the start and end point. Difference inZ values is based on the thread pitch and the fraction of the distancetravelled around the helix. For the CIRCLE statement, Z dimension used isthe same as the initial point. Sample output is shown below:
...
FEDRAT / 12.000000, IPM
GOTO / 8.198000, 0.000000, -0.625000
FEDRAT / 8.000000, IPM
CIRCLE / 8.000000, 0.000000, -0.625000, $ $$ 1ST ORBIT
0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000, 0.198000
GOTO / 8.198000, 0.000000, -0.583333
CIRCLE / 8.000000, 0.000000, -0.583333, $ $$ 2ND ORBIT
0.000000, 0.000000, 1.000000, 0.198000
GOTO / 8.198000, 0.000000, -0.541667
FEDRAT / 12.000000, IPM
...
Synchronized Output for XY-UV 4-Axis Wire EDM
The following commands apply to 4-Axis Wire EDM output:
427
Command DescriptionSET/ UPPER, a, LOWER, b Indicates the Z values of the upper and lower
contours. “a and “b are real numbers.
CLDIST / c Indicates the distance that the top head is abovethe upper contour
nLOAD / WIRE, n Indicates that wire “n should be threaded. “n is
an integer.
GENRTR / n Indicates the power setting for subsequentmotions.
SYNCTR / NEXT, n Indicates a position where the two heads shouldbe located simultaneously. There will bematching statements in the output of each head.
SYNCTR / LOWER|UPPER Indicates that subsequent motions will be forlower or upper contour respectively.
UNLOAD / WIRE Indicates that the wire should be cut.
OPSTOP May be added automatically to indicate anoptional stop.
NC Check
About NC Check
NC Check is a dynamic simulation of material removal on the computerscreen. It allows you to view a step-by-step simulation of material removal asthe tool is cutting the workpiece.
428
Do not confuse the automatic material removal simulation with the NCCheck process:
Material Removal NC Check
Permanently removes materialfrom the workpiece; creates anew feature.
Simulates material removalfor display purposes only; doesnot create geometry.
Is based on a set ofassumptions and may producesimplified representation ofmaterial removal, dependingon the NC sequence type.
Always takes into account theactual tool path and shape.
NC Check can be performed:
• At the time of creating an NC sequence (from the PLAY PATH menu) to check the currenttool path.
• From the CL DATA menu after the NC sequence or operation is created. You will beprompted for a CL file name. At this point, you can either select an existing file, or createa new one.
• When editing CL data.
You can control which NC Check simulation module to use by setting theconfiguration option nccheck_type. The values are:
• vericut (default)—Use Vericut™ provided by CGTech.
• nccheck—Use Pro/NC-CHECK.
Modifying NC Sequences
About Modifying NC Sequences
NC sequences and material removal features can be deleted, suppressed, orresumed, as any other workpiece or assembly features. These topics describespecific techniques of modifying, redefining, and patterning NC sequencesand material removal features.
To Modify an NC Sequence
429
1. Choose Modify from the MFG UTILS menu and NC Sequence from the MOD PROCESSmenu.
or
Choose Modify from the MANUFACTURE menu, then choose Mod NC Seq from the MFGMODIFY menu.
2. Select the NC sequence to be modified from the namelist menu.
3. The MOD NC SEQ menu appears with the following options:
� Tool—Modify the tool used for the NC sequence. You can retrieve another tool ormodify parameters of the current tool.
� Dimensions—Modify the Tool Motion dimensions. Select which Tool Motions youwant to modify using the namelist menu (you can select all). The appropriatedimensions are displayed. Select the dimension you want to modify and enter a newvalue.
� Parameters—Modify parameters of the NC sequence. You can also modifyparameters of any or all Automatic Cut motions. Select which parameters you wantto modify by checking the appropriate entries in the namelist menu (you can selectall). If more than one NC sequence component is selected at once, you can only usethe Set option, otherwise you will have the regular MFG PARAMS menu options.
� Motion Params—Modify parameters of the Tool Motions.
4. Choose Done/Return from the MOD NC SEQ menu when finished.
5. Regenerate the manufacturing model.
Modifying Parameters of Multiple Automatic Cut Motions
If several NC sequence components (e.g., the NC sequence itself and some ofthe Automatic Cut motions) have been selected for modifying parameters, amulti-column table will appear in the Param Tree dialog window to let yousimultaneously modify parameters of any or all the components selected.
To Change a Parameter Value for All Cut Motions at Once
If you want to change a parameter to the same value for all the selectedcomponents, you can use the following shortcut. It copies the contents of thehighlighted cell and applies this value to all cells in the current row.
1. Type the new value in a cell (for example, in the first column).
2. Choose Edit > Copy.
3. Choose Edit > Paste Row.
430
4. The system changes the parameter values for the whole row, that is, in all the columns ofthe table.
To Redefine an NC Sequence
The MFG UTILS menu option Redefine allows you to modify how an NCsequence is created. When the NC sequence has children (e.g., materialremoval), you will be prompted to delete all the children before proceedingwith the NC sequence redefinition.
Note: If an NC sequence has been patterned, it cannot be redefined. Use DelPattern first.
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then choose Redefine.
2. Choose NC Sequence from the SELECT FEAT menu and select the NCsequence to be redefined.
4. Select from the following options in the REDEF NC SEQ menu:
� Attributes—Allows you to redefine the NC sequence attributes, such as 5 Axis to 4Axis, Holemaking cycle type (e.g., Drill to Tap). After redefining the Attributes, youwill have to redefine References as well.
� References—Brings you directly to the NC SEQUENCE menu. You can redefinesequence references, change the tool motions.
� Operation—Specify another parent operation and workcell for the NC sequence.The operation must be older than the NC sequence (reorder the features first, ifnecessary). The system will also check that the NC sequence is compatible with theworkcell type.
The NC sequence will be recreated using the new definitions. If any changes are made tothe NC sequence that cause its regeneration to abort, then the redefining process willabort and the NC sequence will return to its original references.
Note: If you want to just redefine References of an existing NC sequence, you canchoose NC Sequence from the MACHINING menu and then select the name of the NCsequence from the namelist menu.
To Reorder an NC Sequence
The order in which NC sequences are regenerated can be changed throughNC sequence reorder. Choose Reorder from the MFG UTILS menu and followthe regular procedure for reordering features.
431
Note: If you want to just change the order of outputting CL data for the NC sequenceswithin an operation, it is not necessary to reorder the NC sequences themselves. TheOutput Order functionality provides multiple ways of reordering the tool path output: bypick, as well as sorting by tool.
Reordering an NC sequence means moving the whole set of featuresassociated with the NC sequence (tool motions) to the new location in theworkpiece feature sequence.
Note: If you reorder an NC sequence for which a material removal feature has beencreated, the material removal feature will not be reordered automatically. The materialremoval feature must also be reordered if it is to immediately follow the NC sequence.
All features associated with an NC sequence form an internal NC group. TheNC sequence feature is ordered first and the Tool Path feature, containing allTool Motions,is ordered last.
Cut motions can be reordered within the NC sequence (to select a cut motion,use Sel By Menu and feature number), but no Cut Motion or Tool Pathfeature can be reordered to a place outside its NC group.
Similarly, no other feature can be reordered to fall inside an NC group. If youtry to enter a location within an NC group, an error message: “Can notinsert into this group of features , will appear and you will beprompted to enter another location.
Mill volumes and surfaces can also be reordered using the Reorder option inthe MFG UTILS menu. The whole set of features included in thevolume/surface will be moved to the specified position in the workpiecefeature sequence.
To select a volume/surface for reordering, you can either select its firstfeature (base volume or quilt), or use Sel By Menu and select thevolume/surface name.
To Suppress or Delete Mill Volumes and Surfaces
When suppressing or deleting features in a manufacturing model, twoadditional options will appear in the SELECT FEAT menu to simplify theselection process:
• User Def Vol—Select a name of a Mill Volume from the namelist menu to suppress ordelete all features included in the Mill Volume.
• User Def Srf— Select a name of a Mill Surface from the namelist menu to suppress ordelete all features included in the Mill Surface.
432
Patterning NC Sequences
About Patterning NC Sequences
You can create patterns of NC sequences using the Pattern option in theMFG UTILS menu. These patterns can be either Coordinate or Reference(similar to Dimensional and Reference patterns in regular Pro/ENGINEER):
• Coordinate patterns are created using the Csys Pattern option by translating orrotating CL data with respect to either the NC Sequence or the Machine coordinatesystem.
• Reference patterns are created using the Ref Pattern option. This type of pattern can becreated only if the NC sequence to be patterned references a patterned feature (e.g.,Holemaking).
Info about patterns is shown in the Manufacture Info.
A pattern can be deleted using the Del Pattern option in the MFG UTILSmenu.
Note: Operations cannot be patterned.
Patterning NC Sequences with ToolMotionsNote: If an NC sequence has Tool Motion features, it cannot be referencepatterned.
You can create Coordinate patterns of NC sequences that have Tool Motionfeatures. You can also create a regular Dimensional pattern of an NCsequence if it contains a Tool Motion with dimensions that can be used todrive the pattern.
If you try to pattern an NC sequence that has Tool Motions, the systemcreates an internal local group containing these features and patterns thislocal group. If the NC sequence references another feature, such as MillVolume or Drill Group, two situations are possible:
1. If the reference feature immediately precedes the NC sequence in the feature list, thesystem will prompt you if you want to include the reference feature in the pattern or not.
2. If there are other features in between the reference feature and the NC sequence, thesystem will issue a warning and the reference feature will not be patterned. If you wantthe reference feature to be patterned along with the NC sequence, reorder it to beimmediately before the NC sequence in the feature list before creating the pattern.
433
To Create a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then choose Pattern.
2. Select the NC sequence to pattern.
3. Choose Csys Pattern and Done.
4. Select patterning type in first direction by choosing Rotate or Translate from the PATTYPE menu.
� If you have chosen Translate, choose either NCSeq Csys or Mach Csys and enterdisplacements in X, Y, and Z directions.
� If you have chosen Rotate, enter rotation angle, then specify which coordinatesystem to use, and which axis to rotate about, by selecting options from the ROTTYPE menu.
5. Enter total number of instances in this direction.
6. Select patterning type in second direction, or if you want a unidirectional pattern, chooseNone. If you want a bidirectional pattern, repeat actions in steps 4 and 5 for the secondpattern direction.
7. You can abort the patternization of an NC sequence about a coordinate system bychoosing Quit from the PAT TYPE menu.
Note: Patterning in second direction will use the same coordinate system as specified forthe first direction.
If you select for patterning an NC sequence that already has a patterndefined, an error message will appear. You can modify the existing pattern,or delete the existing pattern using the Del Pattern option and then define anew pattern.
Coordinate System Patterns
Coordinate patterns can reference either the NC Sequence or the Machinecoordinate system. They can be unidirectional or bidirectional. For eachdirection you can specify either displacement along the X,Y,Z axes, orrotation about any axis. When the pattern is created, appropriate CL pathsare generated and can be displayed or written to file by choosing CL Data> Output and selecting the patterned NC sequence.
434
Using Relations
You can use relations when specifying displacements and rotation angles. Forexample, when prompted to enter displacement in the Y direction, you canenter:
STEP_OVER:FID_# / 2
(where # is the internal feature ID of the NC sequence)
All displacements and rotation angles will be treated as dimensions andassigned dimension IDs; number of instances will be treated as an integerparameter (similar to the number of instances in Pro/ENGINEER featurepatterns). All the pattern information (including the pattern type, dimensionand parameter values and IDs, and relations used, if any) will be listed in theNC Sequence info.
To Create a Rotary Table Pattern of an NC Sequence
When creating a rotational pattern of an NC sequence, you have an option touse an Index table. Index tables currently work for rotation about one axiswith patternization in one direction.
Note: The Index Table patterns can be created only with respect to the Machinecoordinate system.
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then choose Pattern.
2. Select the NC sequence to pattern.
3. Choose Csys Pattern and Done.
4. Choose Rotate from the PAT TYPE menu as the patterning type in first direction.
5. Enter the rotation angle.
6. Choose Mach Csys, Index Table, and the axis to rotate about from the ROT TYPEmenu.
7. Choose None as the patterning type in second direction.
8. Enter the number of instances. The pattern is created.
If you use a Rotary table, CL Data for all instances of the pattern will bedisplayed at the same location (that of the first instance), with the NCSequence coordinate system rotating appropriately for each instance.Thefollowing graphic illustrates the difference in CL Data display depending onthe ROT TYPE option used.
435
Tool moves frominstance to instance.
Coordinate systemrotates for each instance.
Rotate CL Index Table
To Modify a Coordinate Pattern of an NC Sequence
1. Choose Modify from the MANUFACTURE menu, then choose Mod Pattern.
2. Select NC sequence to modify the pattern.
3. Choose appropriate options from the PAT MODIFY menu:
� First—Modify the first pattern direction.
� Second—Modify the second pattern direction.
� Num Inst—Modify only the number of instances in the selected direction. If thenumber of instances is modified to 1, the pattern in this direction will be deleted.
� All Opts—Modify all options for this direction. If you choose it, the PAT TYPE menucomes up.
4. Choose Done from the PAT MODIFY menu.
5. Depending on the selected option, either enter number of instances, or select thepatterning type and enter all the necessary values.
Only one pattern direction can be modified at a time. To modify the seconddirection, choose Mod Pattern again.
To Create a Reference Manufacturing Pattern
1. Choose Utilities from the MACHINING menu, then choose Pattern.
2. Select an NC sequence that references a patterned feature, or an Automatic materialremoval feature that references a patterned NC sequence.
436
3. Choose Ref Pattern, and Done.
4. The pattern is created automatically.
To Reference pattern a Milling NC sequence that uses a Mill Volume or MillSurface, you have to pattern the Mill Volume/Mill Surface first. For example,to perform Volume milling on a pattern of slots, follow the procedure below.
Reference Patterns
A Reference manufacturing pattern can be created when the NC sequence tobe patterned references a patterned feature. The functionality is similar tocreating Reference patterns of features in regular Pro/ENGINEER.
NC sequences with a sketched cut section may be Reference patterned only ifthe section sketch for the NC sequence is created with Use Edge andreferences edges of a patterned feature.
Note: If silhouette edges are used by the sketch, the Reference pattern will not becreated. For Turning, the work-around would be to use datum curves.
After an NC sequence is patterned (using either pattern type), an Automaticmaterial removal feature based on it can be reference patterned.
Reference manufacturing patterns cannot be modified using the ModPattern option. They automatically follow the pattern of the referencedfeature.
To Reference Pattern a Volume Milling NC Sequence
1. Create a Mill Volume by referencing slot geometry. You can either Gather, or Sketchwith Use Edge.
2. Reference pattern the volume. Choose Utilities, Pattern, Sel By Menu, and select thevolume name.
3. Create a Volume milling NC sequence by selecting the original volume.
4. Reference pattern the milling NC sequence.
To Create a Dimension Pattern of an NC Sequence
Dimension patterns of NC sequences can be created if the NC sequencescontain a Tool Motion with dimensions that can be used to drive the pattern.
437
Changing Feed Colors
About Changing Feed Colors
The Feed Color option in the CL SETUP menu (accessible by choosing CLSetup from the MFG SETUP menu) allows you to display tool motions indifferent colors depending on the feed value.
The system default feed ranges and the corresponding colors are:
• Rapid—Yellow (motions corresponding to the RAPID command)
• Default—Red (feeds not falling into any of the specified ranges)
• < 20—White
• 20-40—Blue
• 40-60—Green
• 60-80—Cyan
• 80-100—Magenta
• > 100—Orange
You can at any time modify both the range limits and the color correspondingto a certain range.
To Change a Feed Color
The procedure below shows you how to use a different color to display acertain feed range. You can not mix your own colors for this purpose; thesystem will let you choose from a built-in set of predefined colors. You can setthe same color to more than one range, if desired.
1. Choose Feed Color from the CL SETUP menu.
2. Choose Set Colors. The COLOR/RANGE menu appears; for each feed range, the currentcolor definition is shown in a small window inside the menu button.
3. Select which feed range color you want to modify.
4. You will have eight preset color definitions to choose from:
� Color 1—Red
� Color 2—Yellow
438
� Color 3—White
� Color 4—Blue
� Color 5—Green
� Color 6—Cyan
� Color 7—Magenta
� Color 8—Orange
5. Choose a color definition. It will be used to display tool motions in the appropriate rangeof feeds.
To Change a Feed Range
When modifying range limits, keep in mind that ranges cannot overlap. Ifyou try to enter a minimum or maximum value that falls into any of thecurrently specified ranges, the system will not accept it. Therefore, the orderof modifying range limits is important: for example, if you have two ranges,20-40 and 40-60, and want to modify them to be 20-30 and 30-60, modify the20-40 range first.
1. Choose Feed Color from the CL SETUP menu.
2. Choose Set Range. The COLOR/RANGE menu appears; for each color definition, thecurrent feed range is shown.
3. Select which feed range you want to modify.
4. Enter the minimum value for feed range (the current minimum value is shown as defaultin the prompt). Entering [0] will make the range start with a “less than sign.
5. Enter the maximum value for feed range (the current maximum value is shown asdefault in the prompt). Entering [0] will make the range start with a “greater than sign.
6. The new feed range is shown in the COLOR/RANGE menu. All tool motions in thespecified feed range will be displayed in the color shown in a small window inside themenu button.
Model Tree
About Model Tree
You can display a graphical hierarchy of a manufacturing model in the formof a Model Tree Window.
439
When you create or retrieve a manufacturing model, the system displays theModel Tree Window.
To Display the Manufacturing Features
1. Choose Tree > Show.
2. Put the checkmark next to Features. By default, the system displays all themanufacturing features in the Model Tree window.
3. Choose Tree > Expand > All to see all the manufacturing features at all levels.
To Select the Features to Display
1. Choose Tree > Show > MFG Features.
2. The system displays the MFG Features Filter dialog box. Put a checkmark next to thefeature type(s) you want to appear in the Model Tree Window:
� Operation
� Workcell
� Sequence
� Mfg Geometry
� Material Removal
� Show all features—If you select this option, the checkmarks next to all the opitonsabove disappear. The Model Tree Window will contain all the features (includingregular Pro/ENGINEER features) in the manufacturing assembly and in all thecomponents.
3. Press OK to display the selected feature types in the Model Tree Window.
To Display the Manufacturing Parent/Child Relationships
1. Choose Tree > Show.
2. Put the checkmark next to Mfg Owner.
3. The Model Tree Window displays the name of the parent in square brackets after thename of each manufacturing feature. For example, the operations will list the name ofassociated workcell, the NC sequences—the name of the parent operation.
440
The Add/Remove Columns dialog box in Pro/NC contains an additionaloption, Machining Params, which allows you to add columns with themanufacturing parameter values to the Model Tree Window.
To Add Manufacturing Parameters
1. Choose Tree > Columns > Add/Remove.
2. Under the Type panel, scroll to the Machining Params filter. All the parameter namesappear in the Available panel below. Selecting one of the filters below MachiningParams (such as Names. Feeds, Cut Options) will display only the appropriate subsetof the parameter names.
3. Select a parameter name in the Available panel and move it to the Current panel bypressing the << button. After selecting all the parameters you want to add, press the OKbutton.
To remove an unwanted parameter from the Model Tree Window, select it inthe Current panel and move it to the Available panel by pressing the >>button.
Process Information
About Process Information
These topics describe various ways of delivering information about yourmanufacturing process and producing in-process documentation.
To Output Manufacturing Information
1. Choose Info > Manufacturing from the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar.
2. The system displays the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
3. Select the type of report you want using the option buttons in the top portion of thedialog box:
� Manufacturing Model—Output information about the whole manufacturingprocess. You can configure types of information to output using the Filter button.All operations and all NC sequences will be output according to their current Filterconfigurations. NC sequences will be sorted by operations.
� Operation—Output information about selected operation(s). Select the operationnames from the list box. You can configure types of information to output using the
441
Filter button. All NC sequences included in the selected operations will be outputaccording to the current Filter configuration for the NC sequence.
� NC Sequence—Output information about selected NC sequence(s). You canconfigure types of information to output using the Filter button.
� Manufacturing Geometry—Output information about the following types ofmanufacturing geometry (select the desired type from the Geometry Type drop-downlist):
Mill Window—Output information about Mill Windows existing in the model.
Mill Volume—Output information about Mill Volumes existing in the model.
Mill Surface—Output information about Mill Surfaces existing in the model.
Turn Profile—Output information about Turn Profiles existing in the model.
Drill Group—Output information about Drill Groups existing in the model.
Machined Geometry—Output information about machined geometry.
Hole Set—Output information about Hole Sets existing in the model.
Process Refs—Output information about process references.
� Route Sheet—Output the route sheet. Click for details.
4. Use the Screen and File checkboxes to specify if you want to output information on thescreen, to a file, or both.
5. Click Apply to output information.
6. Click Close to close the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
To Set Up Filter Configuration
1. Click Filter in the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
2. The system displays the Manufacturing Information: Filters dialog box.
3. Select one of the option buttons in the top portion of the dialog box:
� Manufacturing Model—Set Filter configuration to output information about thewhole manufacturing process.
� Operation—Set Filter configuration to output information about operations.
� NC Sequence—Set Filter configuration to output information about NC sequences.
442
4. The system displays the applicable filters in the middle portion of the dialog box. If afilter has a checkmark next to it, this type of information will be output. Select and clearthe checkboxes as appropriate to set up the desired Filter configuration (you can use theSelect All and Unselect All buttons to speed up the process).
5. Click Apply to set the Filter configuration.
6. Click Close to return to the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
To Generate a Route Sheet
1. Choose Info > Manufacturing from the top bar of the Pro/ENGINEER Main Window.
2. Select the Route Sheet option button in the Manufacturing Info dialog box.
3. The system displays the route sheet in an editor window. You can edit the route sheet asdesired, then save it. The route sheet is saved in the current directory asmanufacturename.ppl.
The default route sheet consists of three sections. The first section identifiesthe route sheet by supplying the design model name. You can edit the routesheet to add the name of the author in the first section.
The second section describes the NC sequences for a particularmanufacturing process. The route sheet lists the description of the machiningNC sequences, the volume of material removed by each NC sequence, thetime it takes to set up for the NC sequence (entered by choosing Setup Timefrom the FIX SET menu when defining a fixture setup), and the time toperform each NC sequence. You can edit the route sheet to add the tool nameand additional set up time.
The third section consists of totals for removed volume, set up time, and runtime. You can edit the route sheet to account for additional set up time.
Route Sheet
A route sheet is a list of all NC sequences performed on the workpiece andthe associated setup and cutting times for a particular manufacturingprocess. The route sheet can be edited within Pro/NC, as well as outside,using the system editor.
To Create a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process
1. Choose Report from the MODE menu.
2. Choose Create and enter the report name.
3. Select the paper size.
443
4. Choose Views from the REPORT menu and enter the name of the manufacturingassembly as a model name.
5. Proceed creating views and detailing the report as desired.
6. Choose Table from the REPORT menu. Create a table.
7. Define the repeat regions using the Repeat Region option in the TABLE menu.
8. Choose Enter Text option in the TABLE menu. Enter the table headings using theKeyboard option. Use the Report Sym option to enter the report symbols in the repeatregion cells.
9. To fill in the table, choose Repeat Region from the TABLE menu, then Update Tables.
Using Pro/REPORT in Pro/NC
You can generate customized reports on your manufacturing processes usingthe Pro/REPORT functionality. Pro/REPORT allows you to accessmanufacturing parameters for documentation and customize the reportformat to suit your specific needs. For more information on usingPro/REPORT and the complete list of parameters available, refer to theappropriate help topics in the Drawings domain. Parameters specific toPro/NC are listed in the table below.
Parameter Name Definition&mfg.oper.name Lists the operation names.&mfg.oper.User Defined Lists the specified operation
parameters.&mfg.oper.workcell.name Lists the workcell names.&mfg.oper.workcell.User Defined Lists the specified workcell
parameters.&mfg.oper.workcell.head.head_number Displays the workcell head
number.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_id Lists the tools in the turret.&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_comment
Lists the tool comments for theturret.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_position
Lists the tool pocket locations inthe turret.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_register
Lists the tool registers in theturret.
&mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.User Defined Lists the specified toolparameters.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.holder_size Lists the holder sizes for theturrets.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.index Lists the turret indices.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.indexable Lists the turret indexability.
444
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.offset_reg Lists the offset registers for theturrets.
&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.orient Lists the turret orientation.&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.standard Lists the turret standard.&mfg.oper.workcell.turret.tool_name Lists the tool names for the
turret.&mfg.oper.ncseq.name Lists the NC sequence names.&mfg.oper.ncseq.User Defined Lists the specified NC sequence
parameters.&mfg.oper.ncseq.cutmtn.name Lists the cut motion names.&mfg.oper.ncseq.cutmtn.User Defined Lists the specified cut motion
parameters.
You can access any manufacturing parameter for an operation, NC sequence,or cut motion by selecting User Defined at the appropriate level andentering the parameter name.
Examples: Creating a Customized Report on a Manufacturing Process
Example 1: Tool Listing
Example 2: Accessing NC Sequence Parameters
Example 1: Tool ListingTo produce the tool listing for a manufacturing model, define your repeatregions as shown in the following illustration (enter report symbols into cellsas shown).
445
TOOL LISTING for &asm.name
OPERATION MACHINE TOOL COMMENT POCKET #
mfg.oper.name
Outer region Inner region
mfg.oper.workcell.name
mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_id
mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_comment
mfg.oper.workcell.head.tooltbl.tool_pocket.tool_position
The resulting table may look like the one shown below.
TOOL LISTING for SUPPORT_PLATE
OPERATION MACHINE TOOL COMMENT POCKET #
OP010 Makino T0001 1" FEM 12
T0003 0.550 Std Tooling 13
T0003 0.550 Std Tooling 2
OP020 Cincy D0004 5
A0010 7
Example 2: Accessing NC SequenceParametersTo produce a listing of all NC sequences along with selected parameters,define your repeat regions as shown in the following illustration (enter reportsymbols into cells as shown).
446
OPERATION SEQUENCE NAME TOOL FEED COOLANT
mfg.oper.name mfg.oper.ncseq.name
mfg.oper.ncseq.tool_id
mfg.oper.ncseq.coolant_option
mfg.oper.ncseq.cut_feed
Outer region Inner region
Note: To enter TOOL, FEED, and COOLANT symbols in the example above, chooseReport Sym from the ENTER CELL menu, then choose mfg, oper, ncseq, UserDefined, and type tool_id , cut_feed , or coolant_option , respectively.
The resulting table may look like the following.
OPERATION SEQUENCE NAME TOOL FEED COOLANT
OP010 1: Volume T0001 12 FLOOD
2: Cleanup T0003 10 OFF
3: Profile T0003 15 OFF
OP020 6: Holemaking D0004 8 FLOOD
8: Countersink A0010 9.5 OFF
Naming Conventions
About Naming Conventions
The following naming conventions are used in this optional module:
.asm Assembly file
.aux Auxiliary parameter data file
.cel Machine parameter data file
.cmd File containing the CL command lines to insert
.dat Data files created for editing, such as relations data
447
.drl Holemaking parameter data file
.drw Drawing file
.edm Wire EDM parameter data file
.gph User-defined feature file (including workcells)
.grv Mill grooving parameter data file
.inf Information data file
.memb Assembly member information file
.mfg Manufacturing process file
.mil Milling parameter data file
.mtn Tool motion parameter file
.ncd CL syntax alias file
.nck NC Check image file
.ncl CL data file (including pre- and post-machiningfiles)
.plt Plot file
.ppl Route sheet data file
.ppr PPRINT settings table file
.prt Part file
.ptd Part family table file
.sec Section file
.shd Shade display file
.sit Site parameter data file
.tph Tool path storage file
.tpm Tool parameter file
.trn Turning parameter data file
Expert Machinist
Getting Started with Expert Machinist
About Expert Machinist
A typical Expert Machinist process may contain the following basic steps:
1. Set up the NC Model. Bring in the reference model and create stock.
2. Set up the database. It may contain such items as machine tools, cutting tools, fixtureconfigurations, or machining templates. This step is optional. If you do not want to set upall your database first, you can go directly into the machining process and later define anyof the items above when you actually need them.
3. Define an operation. An operation setup may contain the following elements:
� Operation name
448
� Machine tool
� Program Zero (coordinate system for CL output)
� Stock material specification
� Fixture setup
� FROM and HOME points
� Names used in Cutter Location (CL) data output and PPRINT
� Operation comments
You have to define a machine tool and a Program Zero coordinate system before you canstart creating machining features. Other setup elements are optional.
4. Define the machining features for the specified operation. Machining features establishwhat material needs to be removed from the stock to achieve the reference modelgeometry. Each closed volume of material to be removed comprises a separate machiningfeature.
Define the machining features in the order you want them machined (one exception:create an Entry Hole feature after you have created the closed feature for which you needit). As you define machining features, the system allocates the appropriate material to beremoved, and calculates the subsequent feature geometry based on existing machiningfeatures.
5. Create tool paths for each machining feature. Once the features are defined, you canmachine them, that is, create the appropriate tool paths, at any time and in any order.You can also machine the features by applying predefined machining templates. Thesetemplates represent certain frequently used machining strategies; each strategy containsa complete set of the machining options and values that you would normally define whenmachining a feature.
6. After you have defined all the machining features and created the appropriate tool paths,output the complete operation to a CL file and postprocess it, or output the tool path datadirectly in the MCD format.
Modal SettingsMost of the machining setup elements are modal: that is, all subsequentmachining features will use this setting until you explicitly change it. Amongthose are:
• Operation setup (including the machine tool and Program Zero coordinate system)
• Tool (provided the tool type is compatible with the machining feature type)
449
• Program Zero coordinate system within the machining feature (for the first machiningfeature, the Program Zero coordinate system specified at the time of setting up theoperation will be implicitly used, unless you explicitly specify another one)
To Create a Machining Process
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click File > New (or click the Create new objecticon). The New dialog box opens.
2. Select the Manufacturing option under Type.
3. Select the Expert Machinist option under Sub-Type.
4. Unless you want to accept the default, type a name for the new machining process in theName text box.
5. Click OK.
6. The system displays the Model Tree and adds the Expert Machinist-specific menus to thePro/ENGINEER menu bar. Use the NC Setup menu commands to define the NC modeland the operation.
To Retrieve a Machining Process
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click File > Open (or click the Open icon). Thebrowser window opens.
2. By default, all files are listed in the browser window. To narrow the search, chooseManufacturing from the Type drop-down list. The browser window then lists all theprocess files in the Manufacturing family of products, that is, all the objects that have the“.mfg extension (including Cast, Mold, Sheet Metal manufacturing, and so on). If you havevarious types of manufacturing processes, and want to filter out inapplicable types, selectNC Assembly from the Sub-type list. The browser window then lists all the Assemblymanufacturing models, both for the Expert Machinist and Pro/NC processes.
3. Select the name of the process to retrieve from the browser window.
The system displays the NC model and the Model Tree, and adds the Expert Machinist-specific menus to the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar.
Note: In order to retrieve processes into the Expert Machinist application by default, setthe configuration option assy_mfg_open_mode to feature . Otherwise, the systemopens the process using the Pro/NC application (you will see the MANUFACTURE menuinstead of the Expert Machinist-specific menus and icons). To switch to the ExpertMachinist application, on the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click Applications > ExpertMachinist.
450
To Create a New NC Model
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click NC Setup > NC Model > Create Model.
2. Type the NC Model name, or press RETURN to accept the default name.
The system opens a new Pro/ENGINEER window, the NC MODEL menu with the AddRef Model option already selected, and the browser window listing all parts andassemblies in the current directory.
3. Select the reference model in the browser window.
The system retrieves the selected model and displays it in the Pro/ENGINEER window.
4. Define stock by using one of the following commands:
� Create Stock—Create a new part by selecting a default billet or bar and specifyingstock allowance with respect to the reference model.
� Retrieve Stock—Retrieve an existing stock part and assemble it to the referencemodel.
5. On the NC MODEL menu, click Done.
The system closes the Pro/ENGINEER window used for defining the model and displaysthe NC Model in the original window.
The NC MODEL Menu Commands
The following commands are available on the NC MODEL menu:
• Add Ref Model—Retrieve an existing Pro/ENGINEER part or assembly to machine it.This part or assembly is called a reference model, because the machining process willreference its geometry. If you add more than one reference model, you have to assemblesubsequent reference models to the first one.
• Replace Ref Model—Replace a reference model with another member of the samefamily.
• Delete Ref Model—Remove a reference model from the NC model.
• Create Stock—Create a new part by selecting a default billet or bar and specifyingstock allowance with respect to the reference model.
• Retrieve Stock—Retrieve an existing part and assemble it to the reference model.
• Modify Stock—Modify the stock shape or size.
451
• Delete Stock—Remove a stock part from the NC model.
Tip: Creating NC Models
NC models are assemblies. You can create them outside of an ExpertMachinist machining process, as well as during NC Setup. Once you store anNC model to disk, you can use it in more than one machining process.
To create an NC model outside of a machining process:
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click File > New (or click the Create new objecticon). The New dialog box opens.
2. Select the Assembly option under Type.
3. Select the NC Model option under Sub-Type.
4. Unless you want to accept the default, type a name for the new NC model in the Nametext box.
5. Click OK.
6. Proceed creating the NC model using the NC MODEL menu commands.
7. When finished, store the NC Model on disk by clicking the Save icon on the top toolbar.The model is saved in a file called <modelname>.asm , where <modelname> is the nameof the NC model.
To retrieve a previously created NC model into a machining process:
1. On the Pro/ENGINEER menu bar, click NC Setup > NC Model > Add Model.
2. The browser window opens listing all models of type Assembly and sub-type NC Modelpresent in the current directory.
3. Select the NC model in the browser window.
The system retrieves the selected model and displays it in the Pro/ENGINEER window.
To Replace a Reference Model
You can replace a reference model of type Part by a member of the same partfamily.
1. On the NC MODEL menu, click Replace.
2. Select the reference model to replace.
452
3. INSTANCES menu opens with a list of instances (including the generic part) and twoadditional options Show Table and Edit Table.
4. Select the replacement instance from the menu.
5. Regenerate.
Part Family Tables in Expert Machinist
The Replace option in the NC MODEL menu lets you replace a referencemodel by a member of the same part family. You can create machiningfeatures for one member of the family, and then generate tool paths for othermembers by replacing the reference model and regenerating themanufacturing model.
When you replace a reference model and regenerate the stock, the tool pathsand material removal are updated according to the new model. You can nowoutput the NC or MCD data for machining the new reference model.
Creating and Modifying Stock
To Create Stock
While you are creating or redefining stock, it is displayed in cyan. Wheneverthe edges of the stock coincide with the edges of the reference model, they aredisplayed in green. The system also displays in red a default Stock Origincoordinate system. This coordinate system is used for default placement ofstock with respect to the reference model, as well as for specifying plus (+)and minus (-) allowances and for using Modify Outline techniques.
As you modify the stock shape, size, allowances and so on, the systemdynamically updates the stock display.
1. On the NC MODEL menu, click Create Stock.
The Create Stock dialog box opens.
2. Use the options in the Setup Stock area of the dialog box to specify the stock shape andsize.
3. For custom-size stocks, use the options in the Stock Size area of the dialog box to modifythe stock size, if necessary.
4. When in Envelope mode, modify the stock allowances as needed by clicking theAllowances field in the Options area of the dialog box.
5. If you are not satisfied with the default stock placement with respect to the referencemodel, click the Modify Outline field in the Options area of the dialog box. You can
453
then rotate stock about the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system, or align the axesof the Stock Origin coordinate system to the entities of the reference model geometry.
6. As you modify the stock allowances or outline, you can use the Undo, Redo, and UndoAll buttons to cancel or repeat your changes.
7. When satisfied with the stock shape, size and location, click OK.
8. Type the name for the stock part, or press RETURN to accept the default name.
The system closes the Create Stock dialog box and displays the stock in green.
The Create Stock Dialog Box
The Setup Stock area of the Create Stock dialog box contains the followingoptions.
• Default Billet—Create a billet-shaped stock. The Stock Instance drop-down listcontains the following options:
� Envelope—The stock size is based on the envelope of the reference model; that is,the system generates the smallest billet-shape outline that totally encloses thegeometry of the reference model. If, at a later time, you modify the shape or size ofthe reference model and switch back to Envelope mode, the system will update thestock size based on the new reference model geometry and the stock allowancevalues (as specified using the Allowance Rules option, described below).
� Custom—Specify the stock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area ofthe Create Stock dialog box. You can then use the Allowance Rules option tolocate stock with respect to the reference model.
� Standard sizes, such as 10x10x10 or 10x10x20—The system lists only thosestandard sizes that are large enough to completely encase the reference model. Youcan modify the stock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area of theCreate Stock dialog box. You can also set up your own default stock sizes bymodifying the dimensions of the system-supplied stock parts. These parts are locatedin the directory <loadpoint>/text/ncmdl_data , where <loadpoint> is thePro/ENGINEER load point directory.
• Default Bar—Create a bar-shaped stock. The Stock Instance drop-down list containsthe following options:
� Envelope—The stock size is based on the envelope of the reference model; that is,the system generates the smallest bar-shape outline that totally encloses thegeometry of the reference model, while the stock axis is coincident with the axis ofrevolution of the reference model. If the reference model has no axis of revolution,the system places the Stock Origin coordinate system at one of the vertices. Use theModify Outline options, if needed, to move the stock origin to a desired location.
If, at a later time, you modify the shape or size of the reference model and switchback to Envelope mode, the system will update the stock size based on the new
454
reference model geometry and the stock allowance values (as specified using theAllowance Rules option, described below).
� Custom—Specify the stock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area ofthe Create Stock dialog box. You can then use the Allowance Rules option tolocate stock with respect to the reference model.
� Standard sizes, such as 10x10 or 10x20—The system lists only those standard sizesthat are large enough to completely encase the reference model. You can modify thestock dimensions by typing values in the Stock Size area of the Create Stockdialog box. You can also set up your own default stock sizes by modifying thedimensions of the system-supplied stock parts. These parts are located in thedirectory <loadpoint>/text/ncmdl_data , where <loadpoint> is thePro/ENGINEER load point directory.
• Other—Retrieve a previously created stock part (of any shape and size). For example,you can retrieve a part that has been partially machined elsewhere, and bring it into thecurrent NC Model. You can also use the Open icon in the Setup Stock area of theCreate Stock dialog box to access this functionality.
The Stock Size area of the Create Stock dialog box contains the stockdimensions. When you create stock using the Envelope option, thedimensions are listed for information purposes; you cannot modify them. Forother types of stock, you can modify the stock dimensions by typing a value inthe appropriate text box.
• For billet-shaped stock:
� Length—The stock dimension along the x-axis of the Stock Origin coordinatesystem.
� Width—The stock dimension along the y-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate system.
� Thickness—The stock dimension along the z-axis of the Stock Origin coordinatesystem.
• For bar-shaped stock:
� Length—The stock dimension along the z-axis of the Stock Origin coordinatesystem.
� Diameter—The stock bar diameter.
The Options area of the Create Stock dialog box contains the followingoptions.
• Allowances—Click this option to expand the Allowances area of the dialog box, whichlets you specify Allowance Rules and change current stock allowances.
455
• Modify Outline—Click this option to expand the Modify Outline area of the dialog box,which lets you change the position of the stock with respect to the reference model byrotating the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system or aligning them to the referencepart geometry.
The lower part of the Create Stock dialog box contains the followingbuttons:
• Undo—Cancel the latest change to the stock. You can click this button repeatedly,canceling a series of previous changes.
• Redo—Repeat the last canceled change to the stock. You can click this buttonrepeatedly, recreating the cancelled changes in the same order they were made initially.
• Undo All—Cancel all changes to the stock that you made since you opened the CreateStock dialog box.
• OK—Complete creating or modifying stock and close the Create Stock dialog box.
• Cancel—Quit creating or modifying stock and close the Create Stock dialog box.
• Preview—Display the stock geometry as it is currently defined.
Example: Creating a Default Billet
This example shows creating a Default Billet Envelope stock for the referencemodel shown in the following illustration.
1. On the NC MODEL menu, click Create Stock.
456
The Create Stock dialog box opens. The default options are Default Billet andEnvelope. The system creates a default billet just big enough to enclose the referencemodel, as shown in the next illustration. Stock edges are displayed in green where theycoincide with the reference model edges, otherwise in cyan. The Stock Origin coordinatesystem is displayed in red.
2. Click Allowances in the Options area of the dialog box.
The Allowances area of the dialog box opens, with the Allowance Rules option selectedby default.
3. To add a .4 stock allowance at the top (that is, along the positive z-axis of the Stock Origincoordinate system), type 0.4 in the plus (+) text box for Thickness.
The system dynamically updates the stock display, as shown in the next illustration.
457
4. Click OK.
5. Type the name for the stock part, or press RETURN to accept the default name.
The system closes the Create Stock dialog box and displays the NC model with thestock in green, as shown in the next illustration.
To Modify Stock Allowances
Stock allowances are added along the Stock Origin coordinate system axes.For Length, Width, and Height, typing a value in the plus (+) textboxspecifies the stock allowance on the positive side of the corresponding axis,while typing a value in the minus (-) textbox specifies the stock allowance onthe negative side of the same axis. There is only one textbox for Diameterstock allowance (for a Default Bar stock).
1. Click the Allowances field in the Options area of the Create Stock dialog box.
The Allowances area of the dialog box expands. It contains the following options:
� Allowance Rules—Define the minimum stock allowances with respect to thereference part envelope. This option is primarily used with Envelope stocks.
� Current Allowance—Show the current stock allowance values. For Custom stocks,you can redistribute the current extra material among the stock faces, that is, shiftthe stock with respect to the reference model. For Envelope stocks, the current stockallowances are listed for information purposes only; you cannot change them. ForDefault Bar stocks, the Diameter stock allowance is also listed for informationpurposes only.
458
2. For Envelope stocks, select Allowance Rules and type the desired stock allowancevalues in the plus (+) and minus (-) textboxes for Length, Width, and Thickness, and inthe Diameter textbox.
As you change a value, the system adds the stock allowance along the appropriate axis ofthe Stock Origin coordinate system (x-axis for Length, y-axis for Width, and z-axis forThickness) and updates the stock display.
3. For Custom stocks, you can also specify Allowance Rules, if desired. This does notdirectly affect the stock size. However, if you define Allowance Rules for a Custom stockand later modify the Stock Size, the system will not let you decrease the stockdimensions to violate these rules. For example, if your reference model length is 10.000inches, and you specified both a plus (+) and minus (-) stock allowance for Length as0.500, the system will not let you decrease the Length value in the Stock Size area ofthe dialog box to less than 11.000 inches.
4. For Custom stocks, you can change current stock allowances to shift the stock withrespect to the reference model. To do this, select Current Allowance and type the desiredvalue in one of the textboxes, for example, in the plus (+) textbox for Length.
The system updates the value in the second textbox and shifts the stock (in this example,along the x-axis of the Stock Origin coordinate system).
To Modify Stock Outline
You can change the position of the stock with respect to the reference modelby rotating the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system or aligning them tothe reference part geometry.
1. Click the Modify Outline field in the Options area of the Create Stock dialog box.
The Modify Outline area of the dialog box expands. It contains the following options:
� Rotate—Rotate stock about the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system.
� Align Axis—Align the axes of the Stock Origin coordinate system to the entities ofthe reference model geometry. If the Move to axis checkbox is selected, the StockOrigin coordinate system will be moved to the selected reference, otherwise it isrotated about its origin to align the direction of the coordinate system axis with theselected reference.
2. Click Rotate, select an axis option (X, Y or Z), and move the slider below to the desiredangle. The current slider position is shown in the Value text box. You can also type thedesired rotation angle in the Value text box.
The system rotates the stock and displays the Stock Origin coordinate system in the neworientation.
3. Click Align Axis, select an axis option (X, Y or Z), select or clear the Move to axischeckbox, as necessary, then click the button with the Select arrow.
The GEN SEL DIR menu opens with the following commands:
459
� Plane—Use a plane normal to specify direction.
� Crv/Edg/Axis—Use a straight edge or curve segment or a datum axis to specifydirection.
� Csys—Use a coordinate system axis to specify direction.
4. Click the command you want on the GEN SEL DIR menu and select an entity on thereference model. Then use the Flip and Okay commands to reverse or accept thedirection (shown by a red arrow).
The system moves the stock and displays the Stock Origin coordinate system in the newposition.
Operations
To Create an Operation
You have to create an operation before you can start defining machiningfeatures. When creating the operation, the required elements are themachine tool name and the Program Zero coordinate system.
1. Click NC Setup > Operation.
The Operation Setup dialog box opens. It contains the default settings for the operationname and output parameters. To change the default name, type the new name in theOperation Name text box.
Note: If you already have defined some operations for the current machining process,click the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new operation.
2. Select or create a machine tool. If you have set up some machine tools prior to creatingthe operation, their names appear in the NC Machine drop-down list. To create amachine tool, click the Machine button.
3. Define the Program Zero. Click next to the Program Zero text box and select orcreate a coordinate system. Once the Program Zero is defined, the name of the coordinatesystem appears in the Program Zero text box, and clicking the Show button next to itwill highlight the coordinate system on the screen.
4. Use any of the other, optional, elements of operation setup, if needed. You can:
� Click Fixture Setup to assemble and set up the fixtures.
� Select a name of the stock material type and condition, if you have a preset Materialdirectory structure.
460
� On the From/Home Locations tab, specify datum points to serve as FROM andHOME locations.
� On the Output tab, change the output parameters or type the operation comments,to be output using PPRINT.
5. Click OK to finalize creating the operation and close the dialog box.
6. If you want to immediately create another operation, click Apply, and then click the Newicon at the top of the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Operation Setup Dialog Box
The Operation Setup dialog box contains the following elements:
• Operation Name—The operation name identifies the operation within themanufacturing process. The default operation names have the format OP010, OP020,where the number gets automatically incremented by the system. You can type anyname.
• NC Machine—The name of the machine tool used to perform the operation. If you haveset up some machine tools prior to creating the operation, their names appear in the NCMachine drop-down list. To create or redefine a machine tool, click the Machine button.
In the lower portion of the Operation Setup dialog box there are three tabs:General, From/Home Locations, and Output. They contain the followingelements:
The General tab
• Defaults—Opens the Expert Machinist - Defaults dialog box, which lets you specifythe default template to be used for machining of every type of feature. You can launchthe Template Manager directly from the Expert Machinist - Defaults dialog box, tocreate the templates you need. As you save new templates to disk, you can read theirnames into the appropriate lists in the Expert Machinist - Defaults dialog box byclicking the Refresh icon at the top of the dialog box. Other icons at the top of the dialogbox let you save the default settings to a file (with the .tda extension), which can be laterretrieved into a different operation; read a previously saved file into the currentoperation; and reset all the default template types to Unspecified.
Notes:
� The name of a .tda file can not be longer than 31 characters and must all belowercase.
� Expert Machinist uses the concept of a modal tool; that is, once you specify a cuttingtool, all subsequent machining features will use this tool until you explicitly changeit. (Look in the Index for details on other modal settings in Expert Machinist.)
461
Therefore, when you use a Default template to create a Tool Path, the system doesnot copy the tool information from the template; instead, it uses the modal tool.
• Program Zero—Select or create a coordinate system used for NC output and for othermachining references.
• Stock Material—Select a name of the stock material.
Note: You have to set up the material directory structure up front; otherwise, the onlyoption available in the Stock Material drop-down list is Unspecified.
The From/Home Locations tab
• FROM Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the FROM location. Once set,the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking Show highlights thedatum point on the screen. Clicking Remove cancels the FROM setting.
• HOME Point—Create or select a datum point to serve as the HOME location. Once set,the name of the datum point appears in the text box. Clicking Show highlights thedatum point on the screen. Clicking Remove cancels the HOME setting.
The Output tab
• Part Name—The part name, output with the PARTNO command, as well as usingPPRINT. You can type any name. Clicking Reset sets it back to the system default.
• NCL File Name—The default name for the operation cutter location (CL) data file. Youcan type any name. Clicking Reset sets it back to the system default.
• Comments—Type the operation comments in the text box below. These comments canbe output using PPRINT.
To Define Program Zero
To define Program Zero, you have to create or select a coordinate system,which will define the orientation of the stock on the machine and act as theorigin (0, 0, 0) for CL data generation. The Program Zero coordinate systemcan belong to the reference model, stock, or the NC Model assembly; it can becreated in Part or Assembly mode, outside of Expert Machinist, or directly atthe time of defining Program Zero.
Program Zero for an operation or a machining feature is specified in a similarway, as described in the following procedure.
1. To define Program Zero at the operation level, click Program Zero in the OperationSetup dialog box.
To define Program Zero at the feature level, click Program Zero in the appropriatemachining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature).
462
2. The MACH CSYS or the SEQ CSYS menu, respectively, appears with the followingcommands:
� Create—Select which model the coordinate system will belong to, then create thecoordinate system.
� Select—Select an existing coordinate system, either by selecting on the screen or byusing the Sel By Menu command.
� Use Prev—Lets you select a coordinate system used for an earlier operation ormachining feature.
3. Click Done.
If you click Show, the operation Program Zero is highlighted in red; if you specify adifferent Program Zero at the feature level, it is highlighted in magenta.
Program Zero Usage
You can define Program Zero at the operation level or at the machiningfeature level:
• Operation Program Zero—Specified at the time of operation setup; acts as the defaultorigin for the NC output. All machining features created within a certain operation willuse the same operation Program Zero.
• Feature Program Zero—Specified at the time of defining a feature; defines theorientation of the stock on the machine and affects the tool path creation, such as retractand cut feed direction. The feature Program Zero coordinate system must be oriented in acertain way, as described in the following section.
If you do not explicitly define a feature Program Zero, the system willimplicitly use the operation Program Zero to define the orientation of thestock on the machine and generate tool path. However, the Program Zerosetting is modal, that is, once you specify a separate Program Zero for afeature, it will stay for all subsequent features until you change it.
If the operation and feature Program Zeroes are different, then, uponcreating the tool path for a feature, all the cutter location (CL) data will betransformed and output in the coordinates of the operation Program Zerocoordinate system. If the z-axes of the two coordinate systems are notparallel, the tool orientation vector (i,j,k) or table rotation will be provided.This functionality allows you to postprocess 3-axis operations to be performedon the 5-axis machines.
Note: You can specify that the linear and rotational transitions between thetwo Program Zero coordinate systems be output in the CL file, instead oftransforming all CL coordinates, by using the Multiple Axis Output optionsin the Machine Setup dialog box.
463
Z-axis OrientationThe Program Zero coordinate system at the feature level should be orientedso that the positive z-axis points away from the holding fixtures of themachine. For example, on a vertical milling machine, the positive z-axispoints up, away from the table surface. The following illustration shows thez-axis orientation for milling.
Machine Tools
To Create a Machine Tool
1. Click NC Setup > Machine Tool Manager. Another way to access this functionality isto click the Machine button in the Operation Setup dialog box.
The Machine Tool Settings dialog box opens. It contains the default settings for themachine name, type, and parameters. You can click OK or Apply at this point to create amachine tool with default name and parameters, and no cutting tools associated with it.
Note: If you already have defined some machine tools for the current machining process,click the New icon at the top of the dialog box to start creating a new machine tool.
2. To change the machine name, type the new name in the Machine Name text box.
3. To change the number of axes, use the Number of Axes drop-down list.
4. To change the parameters, use the tabs located in the lower portion of the dialog box.
5. To set up the cutting tools for the machine, click the Cutting Tool Setup button locatedon the Cutting Tools tab. You can also set up the tools later by clicking NC Setup >Cutting Tool Manager.
6. Click OK to finalize the machine tool creation and close the dialog box.
7. If you want to immediately create another machine tool, click Apply, and then click theNew or the Open icon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box.
464
You can save the current machine tool, along with its parameters, by clicking the Saveicon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box. You can then use the Openicon at the top of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box to create a new machine toolwith the same parameters, whether in this or in another NC process.
Machine Tool Settings
A machine tool is identified by the following elements:
• Machine Name—The machine name identifies the machine tool within themanufacturing process. The default machine names have the format MACH01, MACH02,where the number gets automatically incremented by the system. You can type anyname.
When you save the machine tool data on disk, the system uses the Machine Name as afilename (with the .cel extension).
• Machine Type—The machine type is Mill.
• Number of Axes—Can be 3 Axis (default), 4 Axis, or 5 Axis.
• CNC Control—The controller name (optional).
• Location—The location of the machine tool (optional).
The tabs on the Machine Tool Settings dialog box enable you to specify thefollowing parameters of a machine tool.
The Output tab
Post Processor Options
• PP Name—The name of the default postprocessor associated with the machine. Type thename in the text box. The Reset button lets you change the name back to the systemdefault.
• ID—The postprocessor ID.
PPRINT—Opens the PPRINT menu to let you set up your PPRINT options.
CL Command Output Options
• FROM—Specifies how the FROM statement will be output to an operation CL data file:
� Do Not Output (default)—No FROM statements are output. If a From point isspecified, its location is output as a GOTO statement at positioning feed.
� Only At Start—A FROM statement is output at the beginning of the file. Itcorresponds to the location of the From point, if specified, or to the first location on
465
the tool path for the first machining feature. All other tool paths are added to theoperation without a FROM statement.
� At Every Tool Path—FROM statements are output at the beginning of each toolpath for a machining feature. For the first tool path, this FROM statementcorresponds to the location of the operation From point, if specified, or to the firstlocation on the tool path for this machining feature.
• LOADTL—Controls the output of the LOADTL command in the operation CL data file:
� Modal (default)—The LOADTL command is output at the beginning of CL data for afeature tool path only if a tool change is needed.
� Not Modal—Outputs the LOADTL statement at the beginning of each feature toolpath, regardless of whether the tool is the same or changed.
• COOLNT/OFF—Controls the output of the COOLNT/OFF statement.
� Output (default)—The COOLNT/OFF statement is output at the end of each featuretool path.
� Do Not Output—COOLNT/OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
• SPINDLE/OFF—Controls the output of the SPINDL /OFF statement.
� Output (default)—The SPINDL /OFF statement is output at the end of each featuretool path.
� Do Not Output—SPINDL /OFF is output only once, at the end of the file.
Multiple Axis Output Options
These options become accessible when you set Number of Axes to 4 Axis.
• Use Rotate Output—If this option is not selected (default), all CL data is transformedand output in the coordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system. When you selectthis option, the system outputs the applicable TRANS and ROTABL commands to specifylinear and rotational transformations. Only select this option when indexing to a newtable position is desired.
• Rotation Output Mode—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected.Controls output of ROTABL statements. The values are: Incremental (default) andAbsolute. In Absolute mode, zero position is defined by the Program Zero.
• Rotation Direction—Available only when Use Rotate Output is selected. Allows youto specify that rotation is performed in a particular direction (this may occur when thereis an obstruction in one rotation direction but not another). The values are:
� Shortest (default)—Make the shortest possible move to the new position.
466
� CLW—Always rotate in the clockwise direction.
� CCLW—Always rotate in the counterclockwise direction.
• Rotation Axis—Specify the rotation axis: A-Axis or B-Axis (default).
Cutter Compensation
When you expand this field, the Output cutter position options becomeavailable:
• Tool Center—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the tool center.
• Tool Edge—Cutter location (CL) data is output with respect to the cutting edge of thetool. If you select this option, type the desired value in the Safe Radius text box. Thisvalue represents the smallest concave corner radius that can be safely machined, andmust be slightly bigger than the radius (Cutter Diameter/2) of the biggest tool on themachine. The Adjust Corner drop-down list gives you a choice of corner conditionoptions for convex corners:
� Straight—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straightsegments extended until they intersect.
� Fillet—When passing a convex corner, the tool path consists of two straightsegments connected with an arc.
� Automatic—The system adds a fillet corner condition at all the convex corners onthe outside contour of the part, and a loop corner condition at all the convex cornerson the inside contour of the part.
The Spindle tab
• Maximum Speed—Maximum allowable spindle speed for the machine tool (optional).Type the maximum speed value in RPM (revolutions per minute).
• Horsepower—Spindle horsepower (optional).
The Feed tab
• Feed Units—Select the rapid feed rate units from the Rapid Traverse drop-down list.The values are:
� IPM (default)—inches per minute
� MMPM—millimeters per minute
467
• Feed Limits—Type the value of the feed rate used for rapid traverse in the Rapid FeedRate text box (optional).
The Cutting Tools tab
• Tool Change Time—Time needed for changing a tool, in seconds (optional). Type thevalue in the text box, or use the UP and DOWN arrows next to the text box to increase ordecrease the value, respectively.
• The Cutting Tool Setup button opens the Tool Setup dialog box to let you set up thecutting tools associated with the machine tool.
The Travel tab
Lets you specify the travel limits for the machine tool: X-Axis Travel, Y-Axis Travel, and Z-Axis Travel. Specifying these values is optional. Valuesfor the travel limits along the axes should be the actual dimensions thatindicate the extent of the machine tool workspace relative to the ProgramZero coordinate system. For example, if a machine tool is 60 inches wide, andthe origin of the Program Zero coordinate system is located halfway betweenthe ends, specify the travel limits for X-Axis Travel as follows: type -30 inthe left text box and 30 in the text box on the right.
If you display or otherwise output the CL data for a machining feature thatexceeds the limitations of the machine tool where it is defined, theInformation Window will appear, listing the values of the limits that havebeen exceeded and their corresponding actual values.
The Comments tab
Type the comments associated with the machine tool in the text box(optional).
To Set Up a PPRINT Table
1. On the Output tab of the Machine Tool Setup dialog box, click PPRINT.
The PPRINT menu appears with the following options:
� Create—Create a new PPRINT table.
� Modify—Modify the current PPRINT table.
� Retrieve—Retrieve an existing PPRINT table from the current working directory.
468
� Save—Save the current PPRINT table for later use. You will be prompted for thename of the file. The file will have an extension “.ppr and will be stored in thecurrent working directory.
� Show—Show the current PPRINT settings.
2. If the table has not been set up, the Modify option will be grayed out. Choose Create. Ifyou have previously set up a PPRINT table, you can either change your former settingsusing the Modify option, or start with a clean table using Create.
The system displays the Activate PPRINT dialog box. It contains all the items that canbe output through PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not is determined by theflag value. The default flag value for all items is “NO. Change it to “YES if you want theitem to be output.
3. To change the flag value, highlight the item or items in the PPRINT table by clicking onthem once, then click on the appropriate action button (Yes or No), located in the lower-left portion of the dialog box. To unselect an item, click on it once more. You can also usethe Select All and Unselect All icons located in the lower-right portion of the dialog box.
4. To supply comments for an item, highlight it and type the comment in the Commentstext box. When you highlight an item with an existing comment, the comment isdisplayed in the Comments text box. While editing a comment, you can revert to theprevious value by clicking the drop-down arrow next to the Comments text box.
5. Click OK to finish setting up the PPRINT table.
The PPRINT Table
To output some model information to the CL files, you have to set up aPPRINT table for this model. This table contains all the items that can beoutput through PPRINT. Whether an item will be output or not isdetermined by the flag value. The default flag value for all items is “NO.Change it to “YES if you want the item to be output. You can add an optionalcomment to be output along with the item.
Note: Comments are limited to 69 characters or less.
Whenever you output CL data to file, the system will check the PPRINTtable. If any flag is set to “YES and the appropriate information is available,the corresponding PPRINT command will be output to the CL file.
The following items are output once per CL file:
• PART_NAME
• DATE_TIME
• SCALE
• TRANSLATE
469
• ROTATE
The following items are output once per operation:
• OPERATION_NAME
• OPERATION_COMMENTS
• LAYER_NAME
• UDF_NAME
• TOOL_TABLE
• ONLY_OUTPUT_USED_TOOLS
The following items are output once per feature:
• NC_SEQUENCE_NAME — The machining feature name.
• NC_SEQUENCE_COMMENTS — Comments associated with the machining feature.
• FEATURE_ID
• SEQUENCE_TYPE — The machining feature type.
• CUTCOM_REGISTER
• SPINDLE_SPEED
• CUT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• ARC_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• FREE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• RETRACT_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• PLUNGE_FEEDRATE_&_UNITS
• SCAN_TYPE
• RETRACT_HEIGHT
• NUMBER_OF_SLICES
The following items are output once per LOADTL or TURRET statement:
• TOOL_NAME
• TOOL_POSITION_NUMBER
470
• TOOL_COMMENTS
• TOOL_PARAMETERS
• TOOL_OFFSET_NUMBER
• CHAMFER_LENGTH
• CORNER_RADIUS
• CSINK_ANGLE
• CUTTER_DIAM
• DRILL_DIAMETER
• DRILL_LENGTH
• END_ANGLE
• END_OFFSET
• GAUGE_Z_LENGTH
• GAUGE_X_LENGTH
• HOLDER_TYPE
• INSERT_LENGTH
• LENGTH
• LENGTH_UNITS
• NOSE_RADIUS
• NUM_OF_TEETH
• POINT_ANGLE
• SHANK_DIAMETER
• SIDE_ANGLE
• SIDE_WIDTH
• TOOL_MATERIAL
• TOOL_ORIENTATION
• TOOL_TYPE
471
Cutting Tools
About Setting Up Tools
You can set up the cutting tools in advance, as part of the NC setup, and thenselect the appropriate tool when machining a feature, or create tools on thefly at the time of machining. Whenever you access the Cutting Tool Manager,the system displays the Tool Setup dialog box, which enables you to create,modify, and delete tools, as well as to review the tools already defined for thecurrent machine.
To Set Up Cutting Tools
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, do one of the following:
• On the top menu bar, click NC Setup > Cutting Tool Manager (this option becomesavailable after you set up an operation and a machine tool).
• On the Cutting Tools tab of the Machine Tool Settings dialog box, click CuttingTool Setup.
• At the time of machining a feature, click next to the Cutting Tool text box in thefeature-specific machining dialog box (for example, Pocket Milling).
Either of these actions opens the Tool Setup dialog box, with its namepreceded by the name of the current machine tool. From the Tool Setupdialog box, you can create, modify, and delete tools, as well as review thetools already defined for the current machine.
The Tool Setup Dialog Box
The upper portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains the Tool Table forthe current machine. The Tool Table defines the correspondence between adescriptive tool name (Name) and its location on the machine, that is, itspocket number (Number). You can optionally supply a value for the gaugelength register (Offset) and comments output for the tool (Comments). Eachmachine tool has its own Tool Table.
When you select a Tool Table entry in the upper portion of the Tool Setupdialog box, the system updates the middle and lower portions to display thistool’s parameters and section sketch.
472
The middle portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains the Tool Previewwindow, with the current tool section sketch, and the text boxes for definingthe following tool elements:
• Name—A descriptive tool name (for example, BALL125), which uniquely identifies thetool with a certain set of parameter values. The tool name is used throughout ExpertMachinist to identify the tool. You can store the tool’s parameters in a text file and thenretrieve it to use in a different manufacturing process. The tool Name serves as thename for this parameter file, therefore, all the operating system’s restrictions for filenames apply to Name (for example, it cannot contain spaces or periods). The name mustbe less than thirty-two alphanumeric characters long.
Note: The tool name can not contain hyphens (-). Underscores (_), however, can be used.
• Type—Select one of the predefined tool types available in Expert Machinist. Tool typescorrespond to the type of the machine tool and of the machining feature (for example, youwill need a milling tool to mill a Pocket; to machine a Hole Group feature, you can useboth milling and drilling tools). The tool type, in turn, defines the tool’s cross section and,therefore, the set of parameters you have to specify for the tool.
• Material—Specify the material that the tool is made of.
• Units—Length units of the tool. The default length units of a tool are those of the stock.If you change the Units, this will affect the actual tool dimensions.
The lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box contains three tabs:Geometry, Settings, and Speeds & Feeds.
The Geometry tab contains the text boxes for defining the Geometryparameters, that is, parameters that specify all the dimensions of the tool.These dimension values are used in calculating the tool path and materialremoved, and should accurately reflect the actual tool dimensions and lengthunits. Some of the parameters are required for defining the tool's crosssection, others are optional. The actual parameter names in this categorydepend on the tool Type.
The Settings tab contains the text boxes for defining some of the tool tableelements and various optional parameters that define tool properties otherthan geometry:
• Tool Number—Corresponds to the Number field of the Tool Table, which defines thetool's pocket number.
• Offset Number—Corresponds to the Offset field of the Tool Table, which supplies avalue for the gauge length register.
• Tool gauge lengths (Gauge X Length and Gauge Z Length)—Optional parametersused to create length qualifiers in the LOADTL or TURRET statements.
• Comments—A text string that will be stored along with the tool parameters and outputwith the tool table using PPRINT. If you want the tool table to show this comment, clickEdit > Table Comments in the top menu bar of the Tool Setup dialog box, and selectthe Use TOOL_COMMENT parameter option. If you want the tool table to show a
473
comment different than the tool Comments parameter string, click Edit > TableComments, select New Comment, and type in a new comment string.
The Speeds & Feeds tab lets you supply cutting data (feed, speed, axial andradial depths) for roughing and finishing with this tool, based on the stockmaterial type and condition.
To Set Up the Material Directory Structure
Expert Machinist lets you select the cutting tools and set up feeds and speedsbased on the stock material and condition. To utilize this functionality, youhave to set up a certain directory structure before you start defining youroperations and tooling.
Expert Machinist stores all the cutting tool data in a Tooling directory, whichis specified by using the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option. Forexample, you can set this configuration option as follows:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /home/users/toolcrib
Expert Machinist will then place all the tool parameter files (.tpm files) inthe /home/users/toolcrib directory.
To set up the material directory structure, create a subdirectory calledmaterials in your Tooling directory. Spell the directory name exactly asshown.
Under the materials directory, create subdirectories corresponding to yourstock materials and conditions. For example, you can create subdirectoriessteel20 , steel30 , aluminum , and so on. Your material directory structuresetup is now complete.
When you later define an operation or a cutting tool, the system will list theavailable material subdirectories for you to choose from.
When you save the cutting tool data, the system will store the tool geometryparameters in a .tpm file in the Tooling directory, and create a .tpm file withthe same name, containing the feeds and speeds data, in the appropriatematerial subdirectory. This feeds and speeds data can be used to initialize thevalues in the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Note: If you do not use the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option, thesystem will use your current working directory as the Tooling directory.
Example: Setting Up the Material Directory Structure
1. Designate your Tooling directory by setting the configuration option:
pro_mf_tprm_dir /home/users/toolcrib
474
2. In the toolcrib directory, create a subdirectory and name it materials .
3. In the materials directory, create subdirectories for all your materials and conditions.For example, create three subdirectories: steel20 , steel40 , and aluminum .
Your Material directory structure is now complete. Now, when you startExpert Machinist, you will have your three material subdirectories listedwhen you set up an operation (for stock material), and when you set up thecutting tools. If, for example, you specified your stock material as steel20 ,and then created a mill tool with the Name ball25 , your directory structurewill look as follows:
-home--users---toolcrib----ball25.tpm (the file containing tool geometry parameters)----materials-----aluminum-----steel20------ball25.tpm (the file containing tool feeds and speeds)-----steel40
To Add a New Tool
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > New.
2. The system fills in the fields in the dialog box with the default values:
� Name is a default name in the format T0001, T0002, and so on.
� Type is the first one in the list of the currently applicable tool types.
� Material has a default value of dash (-).
� Units are the same as the length units of the stock.
� Parameters that appear on the Geometry tab are defined by the tool Type.Required parameter fields contain a system-supplied default value, optionalparameters have a default value of dash (-).
� On the Settings tab: Tool Number is incremented by 1 with respect to the last onecurrently in the Tool Table; Offset Number is blank; other, optional, parametershave a default value of dash (-).
� On the Speeds & Feeds tab, the Stock Material value is that of the stock materialspecified in the Operation Setup dialog box; the cutting data fields are empty.
3. If you want to set up a tool of a different type, click on the arrow next to the Typeparameter and select the appropriate value. The system displays the parameter namesand default values for the new tool type.
4. Modify the parameter values, if desired. The Revert button restores the initial values.
475
5. Click Preview to display the tool section based on the current parameter values. TheTool Window button opens a separate, bigger, window with the tool section.
6. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until satisfied with the tool section.
7. Click Apply to add the new tool to the Tool Table.
8. To save the tool parameters and cutting data, click File > Save tool.
To Specify the Cutting Data for the Tool
Note: In order to be able to specify the cutting data for a tool, you have tofirst set up the Material directory structure.
1. Go to the Speeds & Feeds tab of the Tool Setup dialog box.
2. Select stock material. The Stock Material drop-down list corresponds to your Materialdirectory structure. The value displayed by default is that of the stock material specifiedin the Operation Setup dialog box.
3. You can supply separate data for Rough and Finish cutting. Select an Application:Roughing or Finishing.
4. Type the desired values in the text boxes for Speed, Feed, Axial Depth, and RadialDepth. The drop-down list on the right of each text box lets you change the units, asneeded. You can also switch between the English and metric unit systems by selecting theappropriate option in the Properties group; this will change the options available in theunits' drop-down lists.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for the second Application.
6. Save the tool. The system stores the cutting data in the appropriate Materialsubdirectory, in the <name>.tpm file, where <name> is the tool Name.
7. If you want to use the tool to cut a different material, repeat Steps 2 through 6.
The system uses the cutting data supplied for the tool when initializing thevalues in the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
To Retrieve Tool Parameters
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Open Tool Parameters File.
2. The system displays the browser window, which lists all the files with the .tpm extensionin the directory defined by the pro_mf_tprm_directory configuration option. If thepro_mf_tprm_directory configuration option is not set, the search starts in yourcurrent working directory.
3. Select a file name from the browser window and click Open.
4. The system searches the Tool Table for the Name of the tool being retrieved:
476
� If not found, the system appends the tool at the end of the Tool Table. Number(pocket number) is incremented by 1 with respect to the last one currently in theTool Table. The Offset field is left blank.
� If the system finds a tool in the current Tool Table that has the same name and thesame parameters as the one being retrieved, it highlights the appropriate Tool Tableentry and displays its parameter values and section sketch.
� If the name belongs to a tool that already exists in the current Tool Table but has adifferent set of parameters, the system issues a warning and queries you if you wantto overwrite an existing tool. If you confirm, it highlights the appropriate Tool Tableentry and displays the tool’s new parameter values and section sketch.
At the same time, the system looks for a .tpm file with the same name in the Materialssubdirectory corresponding to the stock material (as specified in the Operation Setupdialog box). If found, it retrieves the cutting data stored in this file into the appropriateSpeeds & Feeds tab fields.
Note: When you retrieve a tool parameters’ file, its type must correspond to the Typevalue in the Tool Setup dialog box; otherwise, the system will issue an error messageand the tool will not be retrieved.
To Add a Sketched Tool
You can use sketched tools for Free Form machining.
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click Edit > Sketch.
2. The system increments the pocket Number by 1 with respect to the last one currently inthe Tool Table and generates a default Name for the tool. The Offset field is left blank.
3. Modify Name as desired.
4. Click Sketcher.
5. The system starts the Sketcher user interface and opens a new window. Sketch the toolsection.
To Modify an Existing Tool
1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. The system updates the lower portion of the Tool Setup dialog box to display this tool’sparameters and section sketch.
3. Enter new values for parameters you want to modify.
4. Click Preview to display the tool’s section based on the new parameter values.
5. When satisfied, click Apply to update the Tooling database.
477
To Delete a Tool
1. Highlight the appropriate entry in the Tool Table.
2. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click Edit > Delete.
3. The system deletes the current table entry.
To Save Tool Parameters
1. Select the tool you want to save by highlighting the appropriate Tool Table entry.
2. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Save tool.
3. The system saves the tool parameters in a text file called <name>.tpm , where <name> isthe tool Name, in the directory defined by the pro_mf_tprm_dir configuration option. Ifyou have supplied the cutting data, that is, the speeds and feeds for the tool, this data isstored in a <name>.tpm file in the appropriate Materials subdirectory.
To Create a Tool Model
1. Create a new Pro/ENGINEER model of type Part, and give it the name of the tool.Reproduce the tool geometry by using the appropriate construction features (protrusions,cuts, and so on).
2. Create a coordinate system to represent the tool origin, that is, the tool control point. Thisis the point that will follow the tool path computed for machining a feature. Make surethe z-axis of the coordinate system is pointing in the upward direction (into the tool).Change the coordinate system’s name to “TIP (use Set Up, Name).
3. Establish associativity between the model’s dimensions and tool’s parameters. There aretwo ways to do this:
� Modify appropriate dimension symbols to exactly correspond to the parameternames. Choose Modify from the PART menu, then choose DimCosmetics andSymbol. Select the feature to display dimensions, then select dimension text andenter the new symbolic name, for example, Cutter_Diam .
� Add parameters to the model with the names exactly corresponding to the toolparameter names. This method is convenient when you want to define the toolparameters directly in the tool assembly (for example, Cutter_Diam for an insertdrill, not for a drill bit).
Notes:
• In some cases, parameter names do not exactly match the labels in the Tool Setupdialog box. For example, spaces are generally replaced with underscores. Sometimes, the
478
parameter name is truncated. To find out the exact parameter name, look in a .tpm filefor the appropriate type of tool.
• Parameter names are case-insensitive. For example, when modifying a dimension symbolor adding a model parameter for Cutter Diameter, you can use Cutter_Diam ,cutter_diam , or CUTTER_DIAM; the system will recognize either of these strings as atool parameter name.
• If an assembly is to be used as a tool model, you can modify dimension symbols or addparameters to any of the component parts as well as to the assembly itself.
Solid Tool Models
All Expert Machinist needs to know about a tool is its parameters. It createsa tool path and displays the default tool based on the values in the .tpm file.
However, you can enhance the CL data display and interactively check forinterference by showing a “real tool. In order to do this, design your tool as aregular Pro/ENGINEER model (part or assembly), and then establishassociativity between this model’s dimensions and the tool parameters. Whensuch a tool is used, you will see the real tool model instead of the default toolsimulation. This is also another way to create your tool library.
Standard LibraryIf you have a Pro/LIBRARY license, you can also use the standard tool libraryof solid tools. It contains common tools (mills, taps, and drills) of sizescorresponding to ANSI standards. For more information, refer to theTOOLING LIBRARY Catalog.
To Use a Tool Model
To use a tool model in Expert Machinist, you have to retrieve the tool usingthe Open Tool Library option. The system will look up the tool model andread appropriate dimension values into the tool parameter file. In the ToolPreview window of the Tool Setup dialog box, and when displaying a toolpath, you will see the actual tool model, not a default tool.
1. On the Tool Setup dialog box menu bar, click File > Open Tool Library.
2. Choose By Reference or By Copy:
� By Reference—Direct associativity with the library model will be established. Youwill not be able to modify the tool parameters for a particular machine tool by usingthe Tool Setup dialog box. If the tool model in the library is later modified, all themanufacturing data will be updated upon regenerating the manufacturing process.
479
� By Copy—The tool information will be copied into the manufacturing process. Thetool parameters for a machine tool can be modified using the Tool Setup dialog box;the library model will not be changed. If the library model is later modified, it willnot affect this manufacturing process. If some of the parameters are missing in thetool model, the system will prompt you for the missing values.
3. Select a tool model name from the browser window.
4. The system reads in the tool parameters from the model (the model name is used as thetool Name).
Using Assembly as a Tool Model
If an assembly is used as a tool model, the system will search the assemblyfirst, and then all the component parts in the same order as they wereassembled (that is, the first component will be searched first), for the toolparameters and origin data. Once a parameter is set, all values for the sameparameter found later will be ignored. In other words, the top-level assemblyparameters take precedence over component parameters, and after that theprecedence is determined by the order of assembly.
If, after all components are searched, some of the tool parameters aremissing, an error message will appear and you will be asked to select anothertool (if using the tool By Reference) or to supply the missing values (if usingthe tool By Copy).
Machining Features
About Machining Features
Machining features establish what material needs to be removed from thestock to achieve the reference model geometry. Each closed volume ofmaterial to be removed comprises a separate machining feature.
Define the machining features in the order you want them machined (oneexception: create an Entry Hole feature after you have created the closedfeature that you need it for). Use the proper machining feature typedepending on the shape of the volume, and on the combination of Hard andSoft Walls bounding this volume. Hard Walls are surfaces of the referencemodel; Soft Walls are surfaces of the stock. The bottom surface of the volumeis called the feature Floor; again, it is called a Hard Floor if this is a surfaceof the reference model and a Soft Floor if this is a surface of the stock.
The following feature types are available:
• Face—An open volume with a Hard Floor, completely surrounded by Soft Walls.
• Slab—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by Soft Walls. Unlike the Facefeature, the Slab may contain islands (bosses) on its Floor, or partial Hard Walls.
480
• Pocket—A closed volume with a Hard Floor, completely surrounded by Hard Walls. TheFloor may contain protruding bosses (islands).
• Through Pocket—A closed volume with a Soft Floor, completely surrounded by HardWalls.
• Step—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by one continuous chain of HardWalls and one continuous chain of Soft Walls. The Floor may contain protruding bosses(islands).
• Profile—An open volume with a Soft Floor, surrounded by one continuous chain of HardWalls and one continuous chain of Soft Walls.
• Channel—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by alternating chains of Hardand Soft Walls.
• Slot—An elongated volume with a Hard Floor, completely surrounded by Hard Walls,with full radii on two opposite ends.
• Through Slot—An elongated volume with a Soft Floor, which can be either completelysurrounded by Hard Walls, or have one chain of Soft Walls.
• Boss Top—Material left on top of a boss, for example, located inside a Pocket or Stepfeature.
• Flange—An open volume with a Hard Floor, surrounded by Soft Walls, and containing asingle large boss or void in the middle, so that only a relatively thin flange is beingmachined.
• O-Ring—A special case of a Slot feature, which has a Hard Floor and two chains of HardWalls at a constant offset from each other (that is, a cross section of this feature isconstant throughout). The hard walls can be of any shape as long as they meet theserequirements. In other words, this feature is a continuous closed groove or slot.
• Hole Group—A pattern of holes to be drilled.
• Entry Hole—A hole predrilled before machining a closed volume (such as a Pocket,Through Pocket, or Slot), to be used for the tool entry.
Once the features are defined, you can machine them, that is, create theappropriate tool paths, at any time and in any order.
To Create a Machining Feature
1. On the top menu bar, click NC Create > Features and select the option corresponding tothe feature type. Or, click the icon corresponding to the feature type on the toolbar.
The machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature) opens.
2. Define the elements of the machining feature dialog box, as needed. Usually, you arerequired to select the Floor surfaces; other elements are optional.
481
3. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit. The Preview button lets you check thefeature geometry by highlighting the Hard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
To Adjust Feature Boundaries
1. In the machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature), click .
The system reorients the model so that the XY-plane of the Program Zero coordinatesystem is parallel to the screen. All the walls become Sketcher entities; they aredisplayed in cyan.
2. Use the SKETCHER menu options to delete some entities or sketch new ones.
3. If the Intent Manager option is not selected, click Regenerate once the sketch iscompleted.
4. Click Done to return to the machining feature dialog box.
5. Click Preview to display the feature. All the Sketcher entities that you created whileadjusting feature boundaries become the feature Walls. If you use edges of the referencemodel, or sketch, these entities become Hard Walls. If you use edges of the stock, theseentities become Soft Walls. Use the Adjust Soft Walls option to change the type of Walls,if needed.
Example: Adjusting Feature Boundaries
The reference model in this example contains two superimposed slots thatyou want to machine as three separate Slot features. To create the Slotfeatures, you will have to adjust feature boundaries.
Create the first Slot feature:
1. Select the bottom of the slot as the Floor surface. The system creates a Slot feature asshown in the following illustration.
482
Select this surface.
2. Click to adjust feature boundaries. The system reorients the model and displays theSketcher grid. All the feature walls become Sketcher entities; they are displayed in cyan,with vertices highlighted in yellow. Delete the entities corresponding to the walls of thethin slot, as shown below.
Delete these entities.
483
3. Sketch two Tangent End arcs to close the contour, as shown below.
Sketch these arcs.
4. On the SKETCHER menu, click Done.
The system creates a Slot feature as shown in the next illustration. The Hard Walls arehighlighted in red.
484
To machine the thin slot, create two more Slot features, each with one SoftWall:
1. Create the second Slot feature. Select the same surface (the bottom of the slot) as theFloor surface. The system creates the Slot feature consisting of two contours left after thefirst Slot, each with a Soft Wall, as shown in the next illustration.
Select this surface.
2. Click to adjust feature boundaries, and delete the entities corresponding to one ofthe contours.
The system creates a Slot feature as shown in the next illustration. The Hard Walls arehighlighted in red, the Soft Wall in cyan.
485
3. Create the third Slot feature. Select the same surface (the bottom of the slot) as the Floorsurface. The system creates the Slot feature, with a Soft Wall, containing the materialleft after creating the first two Slot features.
To Adjust Soft Walls
1. In the machining feature dialog box (for example, Pocket Feature), click next to theAdjust Soft Walls element.
The system highlights all the feature walls, both Hard and Soft, in magenta.
2. Use the following options on the SELECT SRFS menu:
� Add—Select feature wall surfaces to change them to Soft Walls.
� Remove—Select feature wall surfaces to change them to Hard Walls.
� Show—Highlight the Soft Walls in cyan. Hard Walls stay highlighted in magenta.
3. Click Done/Return to return to the machining feature dialog box.
To Adjust Feature Depth
1. In the machining feature dialog box (for example, Profile Feature), click next to theAdjust Feature Depth element.
The system opens the WND DEPTH menu, with the Define option selectedautomatically, and the WIND DEPTH menu.
2. Use the following options on the WIND DEPTH menu:
� Specify Plane—Select a planar surface, or create a datum plane, normal to the z-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system, to specify the new Floor of the feature.
� Z Depth—Type a value along the z-axis of the Sequence Program Zero coordinatesystem.
3. Once you have adjusted the feature depth, you can use the following options on the WNDDEPTH menu:
� Show—Highlight the surface currently defining the feature depth in cyan.
� Remove—Remove the depth adjustment. The original Floor of the feature isrestored.
4. Click Done/Return to return to the machining feature dialog box.
486
To Machine a Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the appropriate machining dialog box, corresponding to the featuretype.
3. Specify the cutting tool, define the machining method and options, and type the values inthe machining dialog box, as needed. For more information on machining a feature ofspecific type, get help for the machining dialog box corresponding to the feature type.
Every machining dialog box contains a Tool Path Properties button. It opens the ToolPath Properties dialog box, where you can specify feeds and speeds, as well as generalmachining, entry/exit, and cut control options.
4. Click Play Path at the bottom of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Once you have completely defined the tool path for the feature, you can save thismachining strategy as a template, and then apply the template to other features of thesame type.
To save the current machining strategy as a template, click next to the Tool PathName text box, then type the template name in the New Name text box of the Save Asdialog box and click OK.
Note: When you save a machining strategy as a template, it is automatically saved withthe Prompt for a tool option; that is, the template contains no cutting tool informationand the system prompts you to select or define the cutting tool at the time you apply thetemplate. If you want to modify the template to always use a specific tool, open thetemplate in Template Manager and change it there.
6. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar type feature, click Next. This will finalize the creation of thecurrent tool path (equivalent to clicking OK), and then prompt you to select a feature tobe machined using the current settings, similar to the Mimic Toolpath functionality.
To Set Tool Path Properties
1. In a feature machining dialog box (for example, Pocket Milling), click Tool PathProperties.
487
The Tool Path Properties dialog box opens. It contains five tabs: Machine Options,Feed Rates, Clearance, Entry/Exit, and Cut Control. Each tab lists the options andvalues that define your machining strategy. Initially, the Tool Path Properties dialogbox contains either the default system values, or, if you are placing a machining templateor mimicking a Tool Path, the values from the template or the original Tool Path,respectively.
2. On the appropriate tabs of the Tool Path Properties dialog box, select the desiredoptions and type values, as needed.
On the Feed Rates tab, each feed rate has two fields: the first one lists the availablemethods of specifying this feed rate, the second one is a text box with the actual value:
� RAPID—The system will output the RAPID command for these moves. Thecorresponding Feed Rate text box is then empty and grayed out.
� Enter—Type the desired value in the corresponding Feed Rate text box.
� From Tool—The system retrieves the cutting data stored with the tool. This optionis available only if the tool contains associated cutting data. The corresponding FeedRate text box lists the retrieved value and is grayed out.
The Speed setting on the Machine Options tab and the Depth of Cut and Stepoversettings on the Cut Control tab also have a From Tool option, which utilizes thecutting data stored with the tool.
3. When you have changed all the necessary settings, click OK.
The system closes the Tool Path Properties dialog box and brings you back to thefeature machining dialog box, where you can verify you selections by clicking Play Path.
To Mimic a Tool Path
Use the Mimic Toolpath functionality when you have an existing tool pathand want to use the same settings on a similar type feature.
1. On the top menu bar, click NC Create > Tool Paths > Mimic a Toolpath.
2. Select the Tool Path feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. Click OK.
3. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box (only features of the same typeas the one machined by the selected tool path are listed). As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the appropriate machining dialog box, with all the settings in thisdialog (except the cutting tool name) copied from the original Tool Path feature.
Note: Expert Machinist uses the concept of a modal tool; that is, once you specify acutting tool, all subsequent machining features will use this tool until you explicitly
488
change it. (Look in the Index for details on other modal settings in Expert Machinist.)Therefore, when you mimic a tool path, the system does not copy the tool informationfrom the Tool Path feature that you mimic; instead, it uses the modal tool.
4. Change the cutting tool and the selected options, and modify the parameters, if needed.
5. Click Play Path at the bottom of the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
6. Click OK to complete machining the feature. Once the new tool path is created, it iscompletely independent from the original tool path.
Face Features
To Create a Face Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Face.
The Face Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Face1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Face feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature (that is, the topsurface of the reference model).
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
2. Select the Floor surface. On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Change Program Zero, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting the SoftWalls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine a Face Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
489
The system opens the Face Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box containsthree text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as FACE1_TP1 (thesystem uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). Thesystem will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name textbox to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Face Milling dialog box contains the options for defining theMachining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom ofthe dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Face Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Face Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Machining Mode
• Rough—Face down the stock and leave stock according to the Rough to value.
490
• Finish—Finish mill the reference model surface(s). When you select this option, you canuse the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
Cut Motion
These options define the cut direction:
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the toolreturns to the opposite side, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Face feature, moving back andforth. At the end of a pass, it retracts and moves to the beginning of the next pass, unlessthe Reverse Multiple Passes option is selected.
• Spiral—Generates a spiral cutting path.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of theProgram Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forthcut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel tothe x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cutdirection, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Motion Between Cuts
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connectionsbetween the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material foreach cut.
• Stay in Cut—The tool stays engaged in material between cuts.
• Clear Part on Last Cut—If Stay in Cut is selected, this option will make the tool clearthe part on the final cut of each pass.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cuttingmotions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of thenext cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool PathProperties dialog box).
491
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Face Milling dialog box contains the followingoptions:
• Reverse Multiple Passes—If Back and Forth is selected, this option will reverse theCut Angle on successive passes. Use this option to perform continuous back and forthmachining between passes.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a registeron your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. Ifyou use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Example: Face Machining
If you select a tool with Cutter Diameter bigger than the width of the stock,the tool will make a single cut at each depth, as shown in the illustrationbelow.
Slab Features
To Create a Slab Feature
492
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Slab.
The Slab Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Slab1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Slab feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
Example: Creating a Slab Feature
To machine the top of the part shown in the illustration below, create a Slabfeature. Select the top face of the reference model as the Floor surface.
Select this surface.
493
The system creates a Slab feature as shown in the next illustration. Thewalls of the two islands on the top face are Hard Walls; they are highlightedin red. The outer boundaries of the stock are Soft Walls; they are highlightedin cyan.
To Machine a Slab Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Slab Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box containsthree text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as SLAB1_TP1 (thesystem uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). Thesystem will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name textbox to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
494
The middle portion of the Slab Milling dialog box contains the options for defining theMachining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom ofthe dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Slab Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Slab Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Roughing
Rough Slab—Remove the material inside the Slab feature using roughmilling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stockvalues:
• Floor Stock—Stock to be left on the Floor surfaces.
• Wall Stock—Stock to be left on the Hard Walls.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can usethe Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough milling and finish floors within the same tool path,you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the Floor isbeing finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available whenboth the Rough Slab and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish Wallsoption is cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text box tothe right.
495
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the cut direction:
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass, thetool returns to the opposite side, to start the next pass in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Step feature, moving back andforth. At the end of a pass, it retracts and moves to the beginning of the next pass, unlessthe Reverse Multiple Passes option is selected.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of theProgram Zero coordinate system. The default is 0, which means that the toolcuts parallel to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To changethe cut direction, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the Hard Walls after the rough cut and before thefinish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value for theminimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text box tothe right.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connectionsbetween the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material foreach cut.
• Stay in Cut—The tool stays engaged in material between cuts.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cuttingmotions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
496
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of thenext cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool PathProperties dialog box).
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Slab Milling dialog box contains the followingoptions:
• Reverse Multiple Passes—If Back and Forth is selected, this option will reverse theCut Angle on successive passes. Use this option to perform continuous back and forthmachining between passes.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a registeron your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. Ifyou use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Pocket Features
To Create a Pocket Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Pocket.
The Pocket Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Pocket1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Pocket feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
497
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine a Pocket Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Pocket Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as POCKET1_TP1(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customizedname. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Nametext box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Pocket Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottomof the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
498
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Pocket Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Pocket Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Roughing
Rough Pocket—Remove material inside the pocket using rough milling andleaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stock values:
• Floor Stock—Stock to be left on the Floor of the pocket.
• Wall Stock—Stock to be left on the walls of the pocket.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor of the pocket. When you select this option, you canuse the Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough pocket milling and finish floors within the sametool path, you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while theFloor is being finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes availablewhen both the Rough Pocket and Finish Floors options are selected and the FinishWalls option is cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the textbox to the right.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the walls of the pocket. When you select this option, you canuse the Finish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depthincrements.
• Corners Only—Clean up the corners with a smaller tool after removing material fromthe pocket with a large tool.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the way the tool scans the horizontal cross-sections ofthe pocket:
499
• One Direction—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the tool retracts andreturns to the opposite side of the pocket, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—Continuously machines the pocket, moving back and forth.
• Spiral—Generates a spiral cutting path.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of theProgram Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forthcut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel tothe x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cutdirection, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the walls of the pocket after the rough cut andbefore the finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the valuefor the minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock textbox to the right.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the pocket:
• Plunge—The tool enters the material vertically.
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinatesystem. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Propertiesbutton and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry byclicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the ToolPath Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radiusof the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of thepart).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you mustfirst create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this pocket.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Pocket Milling dialog box contains the followingoption:
500
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
Through Pocket Features
To Create a Through Pocket Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Thru Pocket.
The Through Pocket Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Thru Pocket1 (the systemincrements the number for the next Through Pocket feature). You can type acustomized name.
� Define Feature Walls—Select the side surfaces to be machined.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
� Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature (by default, a ThroughPocket extends all the way through the stock). To specify a different Floor depth,select a surface, a datum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-levelProgram Zero coordinate system.
2. Select the walls of the pocket. Use the following commands on the SURF/LOOP menu:
� Surface—Select the wall surfaces individually.
� Loop—Specify a closed loop of surfaces by selecting a face they surround. If there ismore than one loop of edges (for example, there is a hole in the selected surface), youwill be prompted to select an edge to use.
3. On the SURF/LOOP menu, click Done.
4. On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
501
5. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
6. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
Example: Creating a Through Pocket
The illustration below shows creating a Through Pocket feature by using theLoop option on the SURF/LOOP menu:
1
2
1. Select the top surface.
2. Select an edge that belongs to one of the pocket walls.
The resulting Through Pocket feature is shown in the next illustration (HardWalls are shown in red):
502
To Machine a Through Pocket Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Through Pocket Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialogbox contains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as THRUPOCKET1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of thetool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can typea customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under theTool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Through Pocket Milling dialog box contains the options fordefining the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. Atthe bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
503
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Through Pocket Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Through Pocket Milling dialog boxcontains the following options.
Wall Machining
• Rough—Remove material inside the pocket using rough milling and leaving stock on thewalls of the pocket according to the Rough to value.
• Finish—Finish mill the walls of the pocket. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the way the tool scans the horizontal cross-sections ofthe pocket:
• One Direction—Cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass, the toolretracts and returns to the opposite side if the pocket, to start the next pass in the samedirection.
• Back and Forth—Continuously machines the pocket, moving back and forth.
• Spiral—Generates a spiral cutting path.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
504
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of theProgram Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forthcut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel tothe x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cutdirection, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the walls of the pocket after the rough cut andbefore the finish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the valuefor the minimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock textbox to the right.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the pocket:
• Plunge—The tool enters the material vertically.
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinatesystem. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Propertiesbutton and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry byclicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the ToolPath Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radiusof the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of thepart).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you mustfirst create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this pocket.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Through Pocket Milling dialog box contains thefollowing option:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
505
Step Features
To Create a Step Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Step.
The Step Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Step1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Step feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
� Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature. Select a surface, adatum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-level Program Zerocoordinate system.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine a Step Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
506
The system opens the Step Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box containsthree text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as STEP1_TP1 (thesystem uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). Thesystem will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name textbox to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Step Milling dialog box contains the options for defining theMachining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottom ofthe dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Step Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Step Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Roughing
Rough Step—Remove the material inside the Step feature using roughmilling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stockvalues:
507
• Floor Stock—Stock to be left on the Floor surfaces.
• Wall Stock—Stock to be left on the Hard Walls.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can usethe Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough milling and finish floors within the same tool path,you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the Floor isbeing finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available whenboth the Rough Step and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish Wallsoption is cleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text box tothe right.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the cut direction:
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the toolreturns to the opposite side, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Step feature, moving back andforth.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
These options define the cutting direction:
• Follow Hard Walls—The tool follows the shape of the Hard Walls.
• Straight Line—The tool cuts straight at a constant angle to the Program Zerocoordinate system.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of thefeature-level Program Zero coordinate system if Straight Line is selected.The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to the x-axis of the
508
Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cut direction, type the newvalue in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the Hard Walls after the rough cut and before thefinish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value for theminimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text box tothe right.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connectionsbetween the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material foreach cut.
• Stay in Cut—The tool stays engaged in material between cuts.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cuttingmotions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of thenext cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool PathProperties dialog box).
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Step Milling dialog box contains the followingoption:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
Profile Features
To Create a Profile Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Profile.
The Profile Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
509
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Profile1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Profile feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Walls—Select the side surfaces to be machined.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
� Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature (by default, a Profileextends all the way through the stock). To specify a different Floor depth, select asurface, a datum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-level ProgramZero coordinate system.
2. Select the Hard Walls. Use the following commands on the SURF/LOOP menu:
� Surface—Select the wall surfaces individually.
� Loop—Specify a closed loop of surfaces by selecting a face they surround. If there ismore than one loop of edges (for example, there is a hole in the selected surface), youwill be prompted to select an edge to use.
3. On the SURF/LOOP menu, click Done.
4. On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
5. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
6. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine a Profile Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Profile Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
510
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as PROFILE1_TP1(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customizedname. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Nametext box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Profile Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottomof the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Profile Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Profile Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Wall Machining
• Rough—Remove material using rough milling and leaving stock on the Hard Wallsaccording to the Rough to value.
• Finish—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
511
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the cut direction:
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cutting pass, thetool returns to the opposite side, to start the next pass in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Profile feature, moving back andforth.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
These options define the cutting direction:
• Follow Hard Walls—The tool follows the shape of the Hard Walls.
• Straight Line—The tool cuts straight at a constant angle to the Program Zerocoordinate system.
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of thefeature-level Program Zero coordinate system if Straight Line is selected.The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel to the x-axis of theProgram Zero coordinate system. To change the cut direction, type the newvalue in the Cut Angle text box.
Clean Up Cut—Cleans up the Hard Walls after the rough cut and before thefinish cuts, to remove scallops left by the rough cut. Type the value for theminimal amount of stock to be removed by this cut in the Stock text box tothe right.
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connectionsbetween the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material foreach cut.
• Stay in Cut—The tool stays engaged in material between cuts.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cuttingmotions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
512
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of thenext cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool PathProperties dialog box).
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Profile Milling dialog box contains the followingoption:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
Channel Features
To Create a Channel Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Channel.
The Channel Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Channel1 (the systemincrements the number for the next Channel feature). You can type a customizedname.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
513
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
Example: Creating a Channel Feature
To create a Channel feature, select its bottom surface as the Floor surface, asshown in the illustration below.
Select this surface.
The system creates a Channel feature as shown in the next illustration. TheHard Walls are highlighted in red; the Soft Walls are highlighted in cyan.
To Machine a Channel Feature
514
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Channel Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such asCHANNEL1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of thetool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can typea customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under theTool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Channel Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottomof the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
515
The Channel Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Channel Milling dialog box containsthe following options.
Roughing
Rough—Remove the material inside the Channel feature using roughmilling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stockvalues:
• Floor Stock—Stock to be left on the Floor surfaces.
• Wall Stock—Stock to be left on the Hard Walls.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can usethe Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Back Off Walls—When you do rough milling and finish floors within the same tool path,you can keep the tool off the walls by a specified additional distance while the Floor isbeing finished. You can then finish the walls later. This option becomes available whenboth the Rough and Finish Floors options are selected and the Finish Walls option iscleared. When you select this option, type the back-off distance in the text box to theright.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Corners Only—Clean up the corners with a smaller tool after removing material fromthe pocket with a large tool.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define the cut direction:
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only, following the trajectory of theChannel feature. At the end of each cut, the tool returns to the opposite side, to start thenext cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Channel feature, following itstrajectory and moving back and forth.
• Spiral—Generates a cutting path where the tool starts from one Soft Wall, cuts downthe center of the Channel, and then makes alternating cuts to the left and to the rightfrom the first cut. When necessary, the cuts follow the Hard Walls to remove all the
516
material inside the Channel feature. Use this option if the walls of the Channel featureare not parallel, or if it has more than two Soft Walls.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Connect Motions
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connectionsbetween the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material foreach cut.
• Stay in Cut—The tool stays engaged in material between cuts.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cuttingmotions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of thenext cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool PathProperties dialog box).
Start Wall
• Automatic—The Soft Wall where the tool starts cutting the material is chosen
automatically. Click next to the option to display the current Start Wall.
• Select—Select the Soft Wall where the tool starts cutting the material. Click next tothe option to select the Start Wall.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Channel Milling dialog box contains thefollowing option:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
517
Example: Channel Machining
This example shows machining the Channel feature shown in the illustrationbelow.
Select the following options in the Channel Milling dialog box:
• Rough
• Spiral
• Clear Part
• Stay Down
• Automatic
The resulting tool path is shown in the next illustration. The tool starts fromthe default Soft Wall, cuts down the center of the Channel, and then makesalternating cuts to the left and to the right from the first cut. It traverses theSoft Walls and does not retract between the cuts. When the tool reaches thewidening of the Channel, the cuts follow the Hard Walls to remove all thematerial inside the Channel feature. When the tool encounters the third SoftWall, it traverses this wall as well, and does not retract between the cuts,according to the selected options.
518
Slot Features
To Create a Slot Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Slot.
The Slot Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Slot1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Slot feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher. Use this option, for example, if you have two superimposed slots.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
519
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine a Slot Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Slot Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box containsthree text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as SLOT1_TP1 (thesystem uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name). Thesystem will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customized name.You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Name textbox to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Slot Milling dialog box contains the options for defining theMachining Method and Options, and the lower, collapsible, portion provides the optionsfor Advanced Slot Milling. At the bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK,Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
520
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle portion of the dialog box. The lower portion of the dialog box containsthe options for Advanced Slot Milling; use them if needed. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Slot Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Slot Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Roughing
Rough Slot—Remove the material inside the Slot feature using roughmilling and leaving stock on the Floor according to the Floor Stock value.Stock left on the Hard Walls depends on the Advanced Slot Milling optionsselected.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can usethe Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the slot:
• Plunge—The tool enters the material vertically.
521
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinatesystem. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Propertiesbutton and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry byclicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the ToolPath Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radiusof the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of thepart).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you mustfirst create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this slot.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
Options
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
The Advanced Slot Milling section of the Slot Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options:
• Single Center Cut (default)—The tool performs a single cut along the center of the slot.When you use this option, the amount of material left on the walls of the slot depends onthe difference between the width of the slot and the cutter diameter of the tool.
• Multiple Cut—The tool performs multiple cuts to remove the material inside the slot.Use the Wall Stock text box to specify the stock allowance left on the Hard Walls of theslot. When you use this option, the following additional options become available:
� One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the toolretracts and returns to the opposite side if the slot, to start the next cut in the samedirection.
� Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the slot, moving back and forth.
� Spiral—Generates a spiral cutting path.
Through Slot Features
To Create a Through Slot Feature
522
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Thru Slot.
The Through Slot Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Thru_Slot1 (the systemincrements the number for the next Through Slot feature). You can type acustomized name.
� Define Feature Walls— Select the side surfaces to be machined.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher. Use this option, for example, if you have two superimposed slots.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
� Adjust Feature Depth—Adjust the Floor depth of feature (by default, a ThroughSlot extends all the way through the stock). To specify a different Floor depth, selecta surface, a datum plane, or type a value along the z-axis of the feature-levelProgram Zero coordinate system.
2. Select the walls of the slot. Use the following commands on the SURF/LOOP menu:
� Surface—Select the wall surfaces individually.
� Loop—Specify a closed loop of surfaces by selecting a face they surround. If there ismore than one loop of edges (for example, there is a hole in the selected surface), youwill be prompted to select an edge to use.
3. On the SURF/LOOP menu, click Done.
4. On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
5. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
6. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine a Through Slot Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
523
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Through Slot Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialogbox contains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such asTHRU_SLOT1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion ofthe tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You cantype a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under theTool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Through Slot Milling dialog box contains the options fordefining the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. Atthe bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Through Slot Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Through Slot Milling dialog boxcontains the following options.
524
Roughing
Rough Slot—Remove the material inside the Slot feature using roughmilling.
Finishing
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box. This option becomes availableonly when you select the Finish Walls option above.
Cut Motion
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Start Position
This group of options can be used only if the Through Slot feature iscompletely surrounded by Hard Walls. If the Through Slot feature contains achain of Soft Walls (there can only be one such chain), then the start positionis determined automatically based on the Soft Wall location and theClimb/Conventional setting.
If the Through Slot feature is completely surrounded by Hard Walls, thenwhen you select the Finish Walls option, the Start Position group ofoptions becomes available.
If the Use Default option is selected, the tool will start at a default positionalong the through slot.
If you clear the Use Default checkbox, you can click next to it andselect a point anywhere on the edges surrounding the through slot. The tool
will start at the position closest to the selected point. Click to view thestart position.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the slot:
• Plunge—The tool enters the material vertically.
525
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinatesystem. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Propertiesbutton and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Helix—The tool enters along a helical path. You can customize the helical entry byclicking the Tool Path Properties button and using the Entry/Exit tab of the ToolPath Properties dialog box. Type the new values for the Helix Angle and the Radiusof the helix (the default for which is calculated by the system based on the size of thetool).
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you mustfirst create and machine an Entry Hole feature for this slot.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
Options
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
Boss Top Features
To Create a Boss Top Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Bosstop.
The Boss Top Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Boss_Top1 (the systemincrements the number for the next Boss Top feature). You can type a customizedname.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
526
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
Example: Creating a Boss Top Feature
To machine the NC Model in this example, create a Step feature, and selectthe bottom of the cavity as the Floor surface, as shown in the followingillustration. Machining the Step feature leaves the material on top of theprotruding boss.
Select this surface.
To machine the top of the boss, create a Boss Top feature. Select the top faceof the boss as the Floor surface.
527
Select this surface.
The system creates a Boss Top feature as shown in the next illustration. TheSoft Walls are highlighted in cyan.
To Machine a Boss Top Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
528
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Boss Top Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such asBOSS_TOP1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion ofthe tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. You cantype a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located under theTool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Boss Top Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottomof the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Boss Top Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Boss Top Milling dialog box containsthe following options.
Machining Mode
529
• Rough—Face down the boss top and leave stock according to the Rough to value.
• Finish—Finish mill the boss top. When you select this option, you can use the FinishPasses button to set up the number of finish passes and the depth increments.
Cut Motion
These options define the cut direction:
• One Direction—The tool cuts in one direction only. At the end of each cut, the toolreturns to the opposite side, to start the next cut in the same direction.
• Back and Forth—The tool continuously machines the Face feature, moving back andforth. At the end of a pass, it retracts and moves to the beginning of the next pass, unlessthe Reverse Multiple Passes option is selected.
• Spiral—Generates a spiral cutting path.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Cut Angle—Defines the angle between the cut direction and the x-axis of theProgram Zero coordinate system for One Direction and Back and Forthcut motion types. The default is 0, which means that the tool cuts parallel tothe x-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system. To change the cutdirection, type the new value in the Cut Angle text box.
Motion Between Cuts
These options describe the way the tool makes the horizontal connectionsbetween the cutting motions:
• Clear Part—The tool clears the Soft Walls when exiting and entering the material foreach cut.
• Stay in Cut—The tool stays engaged in material between cuts.
• Clear Part on Last Cut—If Stay in Cut is selected, this option will make the tool clearthe part on the final cut of each pass.
These options describe whether the tool retracts when connecting the cuttingmotions:
• Stay Down—The tool does not retract between the cut motions.
• Retract—The tool retracts at the end of a cut motion and goes to the beginning of thenext cut motion at retract height (as defined by the Clearance tab of the Tool PathProperties dialog box).
530
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Boss Top Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options:
• Reverse Multiple Passes—If Back and Forth is selected, this option will reverse theCut Angle on successive passes. Use this option to perform continuous back and forthmachining between passes.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a registeron your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. Ifyou use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Example: Boss Top Machining
This example shows machining the Boss Top feature shown in theillustration below.
Select a tool with Cutter Diameter bigger than the diameter of the boss (tomake one cut per pass).
Select the following options in the Flange Milling dialog box:
• Rough
• Finish
• One Direction
531
• Climb
• Clear Part
• Retract
Click Tool Path Properties > Cut Control and adjust Depth of Cut, asneeded.
The resulting tool path is shown in the next illustration.
Flange Features
To Create a Flange Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Flange.
The Flange Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as Flange1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next Flange feature). You can type a customized name.
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
532
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red, Soft Walls in cyan.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
Example: Creating a Flange Feature
In the NC Model shown in the illustration below, the stock is a casting with alarge cavity in the middle of the top surface. To machine the top of thereference model and avoid air machining, create a Flange feature. Select thetop face of the reference model as the Floor surface.
Select this surface.
The system creates a Flange feature as shown in the next illustration. Theouter boundaries of the stock are Soft Walls; they are highlighted in cyan.
533
To Machine a Flange Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Flange Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as FLANGE1_TP1(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customizedname. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Nametext box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Flange Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottomof the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
534
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The Flange Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the Flange Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Roughing
Rough Flange—Remove the material inside the Flange feature using roughmilling and leaving stock according to the Floor Stock and Wall Stockvalues:
• Floor Stock—Stock to be left on the Floor surfaces.
• Wall Stock—Stock to be left on the Hard Walls. If the Flange feature does not haveHard Walls, this text box will be unavailable.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can usethe Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments. If theFlange feature does not have Hard Walls, this option and the Finish Cuts button will beunavailable.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
Cut Motion
535
These options define the cut motion pattern:
• Follow Outer Contour—The tool follows the outer contour of the Flange.
• Follow Inner Contour—The tool follows the inner contour of the Flange.
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Start Location
These options describe where the tool starts cutting:
• Start From Outer Contour—The tool starts at the outer contour of the Flange andmoves inward.
• Start From Inner Contour—The tool starts at the inner contour of the Flange andmoves outward. This option is not available if the inner contour is comprised of HardWalls.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Flange Milling dialog box contains the followingoption:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
O-Ring Features
To Create an O-Ring Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > O-Ring.
The O-Ring Feature dialog box opens with the following elements:
� Feature Name—The default feature name, such as O-Ring1 (the system incrementsthe number for the next O-Ring feature). You can type a customized name.
536
� Define Feature Floor—Select the Floor surface for the feature.
� Adjust Feature Boundaries—Change the shape of the feature walls usingSketcher.
� Define Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for feature definitionand machining.
� Adjust Soft Walls—Change Hard Walls to Soft and Soft Walls to Hard.
2. Select the Floor surface(s). On the SELECT SRFS menu, click Done/Return.
3. Use the other elements, if needed. Click next to the element to display the currentsetting. The Preview button lets you check the feature geometry by highlighting theHard Walls in red.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
To Machine an O-Ring Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the O-Ring Milling dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such as O-RING1_TP1(the system uses the name of the feature for the first portion of the tool path name).The system will use this file name for NC data output. You can type a customizedname. You can also click the Comments button located under the Tool Path Nametext box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the feature being machined. This name is displayedfor information purposes only; you cannot change it. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the feature geometry.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
537
The middle portion of the O-Ring Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Machining Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At the bottomof the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
The O-Ring Milling Dialog Box
The Machining Method section of the O-Ring Milling dialog box containsthe following options.
Roughing
Rough Groove—Remove the material inside the O-Ring feature using roughmilling and leaving stock on the Floor according to the Floor Stock value.
Finishing
• Finish Floors—Finish mill the Floor surfaces. When you select this option, you can usethe Finish Passes button to set up the number of finish passes and the depthincrements.
• Finish Walls—Finish mill the Hard Walls. When you select this option, you can use theFinish Cuts button to set up the number of finish cuts and the depth increments.
• Use CUTCOM—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box. This option becomes availableonly when you select the Finish Walls option above.
Cut Motion
These options define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
538
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Start Position
If the Use Default option is selected, the tool will start at a default positionalong the closed groove.
If you clear the Use Default checkbox, you can click next to it andselect a point anywhere on the edges surrounding the closed groove. The tool
will start at the position closest to the selected point. Click to view thestart position.
Top Entry
These options describe the way the tool enters the groove:
• Plunge—The tool enters the material vertically.
• Ramp—The tool enters at Ramp Angle to the x-axis of the Program Zero coordinatesystem. You can customize the Ramp Angle by clicking the Tool Path Propertiesbutton and using the Entry/Exit tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Entry Hole—The tool enters along a predefined entry hole. To use this option, you mustfirst create and machine an Entry Hole feature.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the O-Ring Milling dialog box contains the followingoption:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
Example: O-Ring Machining
This example shows machining the O-Ring feature shown in the illustrationbelow.
539
Select the bottom of the groove.
Select a tool with Cutter Diameter corresponding to the width of the groove(to make one cut per pass).
Select the following options in the O-Ring Milling dialog box:
• Rough
• Climb
• Use Default
• Plunge
The resulting tool path is shown in the next illustration.
Hole Group Features
To Create a Hole Group Feature
540
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Hole Group.
The system opens the Drill Group dialog box. The top portion of the dialog box containstwo text boxes:
� Drill Group Name—The default feature name, such as DRILL_GROUP_0 (thesystem increments the number for the next Hole Group feature). You can type acustomized name.
� Program Zero Selection—The name of the coordinate system used for machining.
To change it, click next to the text box and select the new coordinate system.
The middle portion of the Drill Group dialog box contains four tabulated pages thatprovide means of Hole selection:
� Axes—Specify holes by selecting individual hole axes.
� Diameters—Specify holes by entering diameter value(s). The system automaticallyincludes all Hole or round Slot features of specified diameter(s).
� Surfaces—Specify holes by selecting surfaces of the reference model. The systemautomatically includes all Hole or round Slot features located on selected surfaces.
� Parameters—Select holes with a certain parameter value.
2. Specify the holes to be drilled using any combination of methods listed above. SeeCombining Selection Methods for information on how to use more than one selectionmethod for defining a Hole Group. Click for details.
The Info button opens an information window that lists the rules currently used in Holeselection.
The Preview button lets you view the currently selected holes by highlighting them inred.
3. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
Combining Selection Methods
Selecting holes by Diameters, Surfaces, and Parameters impliesspecifying a rule for hole selection. For example, if you specify a diametervalue, the system will search the model for the holes of this diameter andinclude them in the Hole Group. If you select a surface, the system willinclude all holes on this surface. If you specify a combination of rules, thesystem will look for holes that satisfy all of them; that is, if you specify adiameter value and select a surface, the system will include only the holes ofthe specified diameter that are located on the selected surface.
541
The Axes method lets you explicitly select and unselect hole axes, regardlessof other rules used in Hole selection.
To Select Holes by Axes
The Axes tab in the Drill Group dialog box enables you to select or unselectindividual hole axes.
Click Add and select hole axes to add them to the Hole Set.
When you have a series of holes created as a Pro/ENGINEER pattern, it isnot necessary to select all the hole axes. Select Pattern to indicate that youwant all the pattern members to be drilled, then select any axis belonging toa pattern. You can drill only some holes in the pattern using the Singleoption.
All axes currently included in the Hole Group are listed in the central listbox. If you have selected holes using a different method (for example,Diameters), the names of these axes also appear on the Axes tab.
To remove a previously selected axis from the Hole Group, highlight its namein the central list box and click Delete. Similar to adding axes, you can usethe Pattern option to remove a whole pattern of holes.
To Select Holes by Diameters
The Diameters tab in the Drill Group dialog box enables you to include allholes of a specified diameter.
When you click Add, the Select Hole Diameter dialog box opens. It lists allthe hole diameters present in the model. Select a diameter from the list, orclick Select and select a cylindrical surface on the model to specify thediameter. The system adds all holes of the specified diameter to the HoleGroup.
The diameter values selected so far are listed in the central list box on theDiameters tab. To remove all holes of a specified diameter, select its value inthe list box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes of a specifieddiameter, use the Axes tab.
To Select Holes by Surfaces
The Surfaces tab in the Drill Group dialog box enables you to include allholes on the selected surface.
Click Add and select surfaces to add all holes located on these surfaces to theHole Group.
542
The names of selected surfaces are listed in the central list box on theSurfaces tab. To remove all holes located on a surface, select its name in thelist box and click Delete. To remove some of the holes on a surface, use theAxes tab.
To Select Holes by Feature Parameters
The Parameters tab in the Drill Group dialog box enables you to includeholes that have certain parameter values.
You can create and modify feature parameters in Part or Assembly mode.
When you go to the Parameters tab, the Feature Parameter list boxcontains a list of all feature parameters associated with Hole and CosmeticThread features in the model. When you select a parameter name in the list,the Value text box below will contain a drop-down list of all the currentlypresent values for this parameter.
1. Select a name of parameter in the Feature Parameter list box.
2. Select an operator from the drop-down list. For parameter types Integer and Real, theoperators available are: “=, “!=, “>, “<“. For other parameter types, the only operatorsavailable are: “= and “!=.
3. Select a value from the drop-down list, or type a value.
4. Click Add.
5. The system displays the selected parameter and its value in the list box below andincludes all holes with the appropriate feature parameter values in the Hole Group.
To Machine a Hole Group Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Drilling Strategy dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such asHOLE_PATTERN1_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the firstportion of the tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC dataoutput. You can type a customized name. You can also click the Comments buttonlocated under the Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine StrategyComments.
543
� Feature Name—The name of the Hole Group being machined. You can click theAdd button located under the Feature Name text box to select other Hole Groupfeatures present in the model. The Remove button lets you remove previouslyselected Hole Group features. All the names of the Hole Group features selected formachining are displayed in the Feature Name text box. You can click the Previewbutton located under the Feature Name text box to highlight the holes beingmachined.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Drilling Strategy dialog box contains the options for definingthe Holemaking Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At thebottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Holemaking Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar type feature, click Next.
The Drilling Strategy Dialog Box
The Holemaking Method section of the Drilling Strategy dialog boxcontains the following options.
Cycle Type
• Drill—Drill a hole. Depending on the Cycle Modifier option selected, the followingstatement will be output to the NC file:
� Standard—CYCLE / DRILL
� Deep—CYCLE / DEEP
� Break Chip—CYCLE / BRKCHP
544
� Web—CYCLE / THRU (for multiple plates)
• Tap—Drill a threaded hole. Expert Machinist supports ISO standard thread output. TheCYCLE / TAP statement will be output to the NC file.
• Ream—Create a precision finish hole. The CYCLE / REAM statement will be output tothe NC file.
• Bore—Bore a hole to create a finish hole diameter with high precision. The CYCLE /BORE statement will be output to the NC file.
• Spotface—Drill a hole with an optional dwell at final depth to help assure a cleansurface at the bottom of the hole. The CYCLE / FACE statement will be output to the NCfile.
• Countersink—Drill a chamfer for a countersunk screw. The CYCLE / CSINK statementwill be output to the NC file. Select one of the Cycle Modifier options:
� Countersink—Type the desired diameter value in the Countersink text box.Countersink diameter is the final diameter of the hole after drilling, measured at thetop of the chamfer. Tool parameter Point_Angle defines the chamfer angle.
� Edge Break—Type the desired value in the Edge Break text box Tool parameterPoint_Angle defines the chamfer angle.
� Auto Chamfer—When you select this option, the system automatically finds all thechamfers with the angle matching the Point_Angle of the current tool, and makesthe necessary calculations for drilling based on the chamfer geometry.
Cycle Depth
These options define the depth of drilling:
• Auto—Depth of drilling is determined automatically, by referencing hole geometry. Ifthe selected axis is associated with several coaxial hole features, the maximum depth willbe selected as long as the tool fits inside the hole diameter, as shown in the illustrationbelow.
545
• Thru All—Drill a through hole, all the way through the stock. If you specify a breakoutdistance for Through drilling on the Cut Control tab of the Drilling Properties dialogbox, the system adds this value when calculating depth.
• Constant—Drill to specified depth. Type the drill depth value in the textbox below.
Measured Depth
These options define how the depth of drilling is measured with respect to thetool:
• Tool Shoulder—The drilling depth is measured with reference to the shoulder of thetool.
• Tool Tip—The drilling depth is measured with reference to the tip of the tool.
Drill this hole.
Shoulder TipTool
Offset Value—Type the tool offset value.
Register—Type the tool offset register number.
Hole Order
These options define the order of machining the holes:
• Shortest—The system determines which order of holes results in the shortest machinemotion time.
• One Direction—The system scans the holes with respect to the Program Zerocoordinate system, by incrementing the X coordinate and decrementing the Y.
• Back & Forth—The system scans the holes with respect to the Program Zero coordinatesystem, by incrementing the Y coordinate and going back and forth in the X direction.
• Spiral—The system scans the holes clockwise starting from the hole nearest to theProgram Zero coordinate system.
546
xy
xy
xy
Spira lBack & ForthOne Direct ion
Start Hole—Lets you select the first hole to be machined if the Hole Orderoption is Shortest or Spiral.
The Drilling Properties button opens the Drilling Properties dialog box,which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such as spindleand coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cut controloptions. The Cut Control tab contains options for adjusting hole depth:
• Through Holes—Select this option to adjust the depth for through holes. Type theadjustment value in the text box to the right.
• Blind Holes—Select this option to adjust the depth for blind holes. Type the adjustmentvalue in the text box to the right.
The Options section of the Drilling Strategy dialog box contains thefollowing option:
Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset ina register on your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the textbox to the right. If you use this option, NC output will contain theSET/OFSETL statements.
Example: Automatic Chamfer Machining
Create a Hole Group feature that includes all the holes.
CHAMFER 45 x .2
CHAMFER 30 x .16CHAMFER 30 x .2
Select this surface.
For the first Tool Path feature, use a tool with Point_Angle 90. It willmachine the 45-degree chamfers, as shown in the following illustration.
547
For the second Tool Path feature, use a tool with Point_Angle 120. It willmachine the 30-degree chamfers, as shown in the next illustration.
Entry Hole Features
To Create an Entry Hole Feature
Use an Entry Hole feature to specify an entry point when machining a closedfeature (Pocket, Through Pocket, or Slot). Even though you are going tomachine the Entry Hole before you machine the closed feature, create theEntry Hole feature after you have created the closed feature that you need itfor. You can use the same Entry Hole for more than one feature, if needed.
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Features > Entry Hole.
The Entry Hole Feature dialog box opens. The top portion of the dialog box containsthree text boxes:
� Entry Hole Name—The default feature name, such as ENTRYHOLE000 (thesystem increments the number for the next Entry Hole feature). You can type acustomized name.
� Feature Name—The name of the parent closed feature. The drop-down list containsthe names of all the features of appropriate type (Pocket, Through Pocket, or Slot)currently present in the model. Select the parent feature from the drop-down list.
548
� Program Zero—The name of the coordinate system used for machining the parentfeature. This name is displayed for information purposes only; you cannot change it.
You can click next to the text box to highlight the coordinate system.
The lower portion of the Entry Hole Feature dialog box contains the Setup Entry Holeoptions. At the bottom of the dialog box there are three buttons: OK, Cancel, andPreview.
2. Type the diameter value in the Hole Diameter text box. This is the expected size of thedrill to use for drilling the Entry Hole.
3. Use the other options, if needed, to specify the hole location and depth. By default, theEntry Hole is created in the approximate center of the parent feature, and its depthequals the depth of the parent feature. The Preview button lets you check the currentlocation and depth of the Entry Hole.
4. Click OK to complete the feature, Cancel to quit.
The Entry Hole Dialog Box
The Setup Entry Hole section of the Entry Hole dialog box contains thefollowing options.
Hole Diameter—The expected size of the drill to use for drilling the EntryHole. Type the diameter value in the text box.
Hole Location
• Place—Define the Entry Hole placement either automatically, or using the X and Ycoordinates of the Program Zero coordinate system.
• Corner—Define the Entry Hole placement with respect to a corner of the parent feature.
Place Entry Hole
These options appear when the Place option is selected for Hole Location:
• Automatic—When this checkbox is selected, the hole is placed in the approximatecenter of the parent feature. To specify a different placement, clear this checkbox andtype the desired values in the X Direction and Y Direction text boxes below.
• X Direction—Type the X coordinate of the Entry Hole axis with respect to the ProgramZero coordinate system.
• Y Direction—Type the Y coordinate of the Entry Hole axis with respect to the ProgramZero coordinate system.
Corner Entry Hole
These options appear when the Corner option is selected for Hole Location:
549
• Corner—Click and select a corner of the parent feature (either an edge or arounded surface). In a rounded corner, if the radius of the hole is less than the cornerradius, the system places the Entry Hole coaxial with the corner round. Otherwise (forexample, in a sharp corner), the system places the Entry Hole based on its diameter,tangent to the adjacent walls. To modify this placement, use the Wall Offset optionbelow.
• Wall Offset—Type the minimum offset of the Entry Hole from the walls adjacent to theselected corner.
Entry Hole Depth
Define the Entry Hole depth using one of the two options:
• Floor Offset—Specify how far above the floor of the parent feature the Entry Hole ends.By default, this offset is 0, and the Entry Hole depth equals the depth of the parentfeature.
• Enter Depth—Type the Entry Hole depth. By default, it is the depth of the parentfeature.
To Machine an Entry Hole Feature
1. On the toolbar, click . Another way to access this functionality is from the top menubar: click NC Create > Tool Paths > Machining.
2. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
The system opens the Drilling Strategy dialog box. The top portion of the dialog boxcontains three text boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such asENTRYHOLE000_TP1 (the system uses the name of the feature for the first portionof the tool path name). The system will use this file name for NC data output. Youcan type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located underthe Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
� Feature Name—The name of the Entry Hole being drilled. You can click the Addbutton located under the Feature Name text box to select other Entry Hole featurespresent in the model. The Remove button lets you remove previously selected EntryHole features. All the names of the Entry Hole features selected for machining aredisplayed in the Feature Name text box. You can click the Preview button locatedunder the Feature Name text box to highlight the holes being drilled.
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
550
The middle portion of the Drilling Strategy dialog box contains the options for definingthe Holemaking Method, and the lower portion lists the machining Options. At thebottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel, Next, and Play Path.
3. Change the cutting tool, if needed. You have to specify a tool name if there is no activetool.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
4. Define the Holemaking Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
5. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar type feature, click Next.
Free Form Machining
To Machine a Free Form Feature
Unlike other machining strategies in Expert Machinist, Free Formmachining does not require creating a feature and then machining it. Youdefine the machining strategy in one step by referencing model geometry (orsketching) and specifying the machining method and options, as needed.
Note: You can also use the Free Form feature just to supply certain CLcommands between other tool paths, if needed. In this case, you do not haveto specify a tool or define the Drive Geometry. When the Freeform Millingdialog box opens, click Play Path and insert the required CL commands.
1. On the toolbar, click .
The Freeform Milling dialog box opens. The top portion of the dialog box contains twotext boxes:
� Tool Path Name—The default name for the tool path file, such asFREE_MILLING_TP1. The system will use this file name for NC data output. Youcan type a customized name. You can also click the Comments button located underthe Tool Path Name text box to type the Machine Strategy Comments.
551
� Cutting Tool—The name of the cutting tool. When you use a Machine Tool for thefirst time within the NC process, there is no active tool and the text box displaysNone. For subsequent machining, the text box displays the name of the active tool.
The middle portion of the Freeform Milling dialog box contains the options for definingthe Drive Geometry and the Machining Method, and the lower portion lists themachining Options. At the bottom of the dialog box there are four buttons: OK, Cancel,Next, and Play Path.
2. Change the cutting tool, if needed.
If the Machine Tool has preset cutting tools, select the tool you want by clicking on thedrop-down arrow and selecting the tool name from the drop-down list.
To access the Cutting Tool Manager, click next to the Cutting Tool text box. Thisfunctionality lets you create new tools and modify existing ones.
Note: Unlike other machining features, for Free Form machining you can use a sketchedtool.
Click Show Tool below the Cutting Tool text box to display the currently selected toolin a pop-up window.
3. Define the Drive Geometry. The Drive Geometry defines the tool trajectory in the XY-plane of the Program Zero coordinate system. You can:
� Next to Use Model Edges, click and select edges from the reference model or
from the stock. To verify your selection, click . The system highlights the selectededges in cyan and indicates with an arrow which side the tool will be on. Click Flip,if needed, to change the side.
� Click next to the Sketch label and sketch the trajectory of the tool in the XY-plane of the Program Zero coordinate system.
4. Define the Cut Depth, that is, the height of the last tool pass. Click next to CutDepth and then use one of the CTM DEPTH menu commands:
� Specify Plane—Select a planar surface or create a datum plane parallel to the XY-plane of the Program Zero coordinate system.
� Z Depth—Type a value along the z-axis of the Program Zero coordinate system.
5. Define the Machining Method and Options, as needed, by selecting options and typingvalues in the middle and lower portions of the dialog box. Click Play Path at the bottomof the dialog box to display the currently defined tool path.
6. Click OK to complete machining the feature, Cancel to quit. If you want to use the samesettings to machine a similar feature, click Next.
552
Note: When you create a Free Form tool path, the system removes the appropriate stockmaterial, the same as for the other feature types. However, for Free Form features youcan specify that the system does not create the automatic material removal. To do this,set the configuration option freeform_toolpath_matrem to no.
The Freeform Milling Dialog Box
The Drive Geometry section of the Freeform Milling dialog box contains thefollowing elements.
• Program Zero—Change the coordinate system used for machining, if desired.
• Drive Geometry—Define the tool trajectory in the XY-plane of the Program Zerocoordinate system:
� Use Model Edges—Select edges from the reference model or from the stock.
� Sketch—Sketch the trajectory of the tool in the XY-plane of the Program Zerocoordinate system.
• Cut Depth—Define the height of the last tool pass.
The Machining Method section of the Freeform Milling dialog box containsthe following options.
Direction of Cut
These options are available when you define Drive Geometry by selectingmodel edges. They define where material is relative to the tool rotation:
• Climb—The tool is to the left of material (assuming clockwise spindle rotation).
• Conventional—The tool is to the right of material (assuming clockwise spindlerotation).
Tool Side
These options are available when you define Drive Geometry by sketching.They define where the tool is relative to the sketch:
• Left—The tool is to the left from the sketch.
• Right—The tool is to the right from the sketch.
• On—The tool follows the sketch. Use the Material Side options to specify cuttercompensation.
Material Side
553
These options define how to apply cutter compensation when the tool followsthe sketch:
• Left—Material is to the left.
• Right—Material is to the right.
Cut Ordering
These options define the order of machining if you specify multiple cuts andpasses:
• X-Y First—The tool makes all the cuts at a specific depth and then moves to the nextdepth.
• Z First—The tool makes multiple passes to depth and then goes to the next cut.
The Multiple Cuts button opens the Finish Cuts dialog box, where you canset up the number and depth of finish cuts.
The Multiple Passes button opens the Finish Passes dialog box, where youcan set up the number of finish passes and the depth increments.
The Tool Path Properties button opens the Tool Path Properties dialogbox, which provides access to lower-level control of the tool path, such asspindle and coolant statements, speeds, feeds, clearances, entry/exit, and cutcontrol options.
The Options section of the Freeform Milling dialog box contains thefollowing options:
• Use Cutcom—NC output will contain the CUTCOM statements. You can customizetheir format and locations by clicking the Tool Path Properties button and using theCut Control tab of the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
• Use Fixture Offset—Allows you to store the fixture transformation offset in a registeron your machine. Type the Fixture Offset register value in the text box to the right. Ifyou use this option, NC output will contain the SET/OFSETL statements.
Tool Path Display and Output
About Displaying the Tool Path
You can display the tool motion and a simulation of the tool before youcomplete creating a tool path, to verify the tool path and make a visual checkfor interference with fixtures. You can also display the tool motion, alongwith a tool simulation, for existing tool paths, and for a whole operation. All
554
simulated tool dimensions represent the parameters defined during toolsetup.
Whenever you display tool motion for a tool path or an operation, the systemopens the PLAY PATH dialog box. The collapsible upper portion of thisdialog box lists the cutter location (CL) data for the tool path or operation, asit would be output to a CL data file through Output > Create CL File. Youcan save this CL data in a CL file or an MCD file directly from the PLAYPATH dialog box, by clicking the appropriate option in the File menu.
The lower portion contains the following buttons: Play Forward, PlayBack, Stop, Fast Forward and Rewind, as well as Go To Next CLRecord and Go To Previous CL Record. It also contains the buttons forpositioning the cutting tool and for accessing the Tool Clearancefunctionality, and a slider to adjust the display speed.
When displaying the tool motion, you can make the tool stop at certain pointsby adding break points. You can also insert customized CL commands, suchas the specific postprocessor words required for correct NC output, at desiredlocations within the CL file. When you save the CL data, these commandswill be output to the CL file. If you add a tool motion command, thecorresponding motion will be also shown in the tool path display on thescreen.
To Display the Tool Path
You can display tool motion for a single tool path or for a whole operation. Todisplay tool motion for an operation, select the operation name in the ModelTree window. To display tool motion for a single tool path, select the name ofthe corresponding tool path in the Model Tree window.
Note: When you are machining a feature, or creating a Free Form tool path,you can display the tool path as it is currently defined by clicking the PlayPath button at the bottom of the dialog box.
1. In the Model Tree window, select the operation or the Tool Path that you want to display.Click the right mouse button and select Tool Path Player from the pop-up menu. Or, onthe top menu bar, click NC Create > Output > Tool Path Player.
The system opens the PLAY PATH dialog box and displays the cutting tool simulationin the initial location.
2. Click the Play Forward button to start playing the tool motion.
The system starts scrolling through the CL data file, moving the tool to reflect its currentposition on the screen. The solid red line represents the tip of the cutter as it cuts thematerial.
555
3. Click the Stop button to stop the tool motion display. The tool also stops upon reaching abreak point placed in the CL file (indicated by a red downward arrow appearing to the leftof the CL record). Use the other tool positioning options in the PLAY PATH dialog box,as needed.
4. You can save the current tool path to a CL or an MCD file. To do this, click File > Save orFile > Save As MCD, respectively.
5. To finish displaying the tool motion and close the PLAY PATH dialog box, click Close.
The PLAY PATH Dialog Box
Whenever you display tool motion for a tool path or an operation, the systemopens the PLAY PATH dialog box.
The collapsible upper portion of this dialog box lists the cutter location (CL)data for the tool path or operation, as it would be output to a CL data filethrough Output > Create CL File. You can save this CL data in a CL file oran MCD file directly from the PLAY PATH dialog box, by clicking theappropriate option in the File menu.
The lower portion contains the following buttons:
Name Description
Play Back Display the tool motion going back fromthe current position of the tool.
Stop Stop displaying the tool path.
PlayForward
Display the tool motion going forwardfrom the current position of the tool.
Go ToPreviousCL Record
Go to the previous CL record in the file.
Rewind Rewind to the start of the tool path.
FastForward
Fast forward to the end of the tool path.
Go To NextCL Record
Go to the next CL record in the file.
556
The Tool Clearance button lets you access the Measure functionality, tocompute tool interference, and clearance. If a solid tool model is used, itsgeometry can be selected for measuring. If the tool is defined by parameters,it will be temporarily converted into a “dummy part, with geometry based onthe appropriate tool parameters.
The Position Cutting Tool button lets you select a point on the tool path toposition the cutting tool. To position the cutting tool at a certain CL data line,click NCL File > Position Tool.
At the bottom of the dialog box, there is a slider to adjust the display speed.Moving the slider to the right makes the display faster; moving it to the leftslows the display.
The Close button closes the PLAY PATH dialog box.
To Add a Break Point
When displaying the tool motion, you can make the tool stop at certain pointsby adding break points in the CL file listing.
1. In the CL data listing, select a line where you want the tool to stop.
2. Click NCL File > Add break point.
3. The system indicates the break point by placing a red downward arrow to the left of theselected CL line.
When you play the tool motion, the tool stops upon reaching the break pointline. You can, for example, click Tool Clearance at this point, to measuretool interference or clearance. To resume playing the tool path, click the PlayForward button again.
Manipulating Break Points
When you add break points in a CL file listing, the system indicates them byplacing a red downward arrow to the left of the appropriate CL line. Whenyou play the tool path, the tool stops upon reaching the break point line inthe CL data listing.
To display the tool motion without stopping at break points, click NCL File >Suppress all break points. The break point information, however, will beretained; when you click NCL File > Resume all break points, all thebreak points will reappear.
To delete an existing break point, select the appropriate line in the CL datalisting, then click NCL File > Delete break point.
557
To Position the Tool
When you play the tool path, the position of the cutting tool on the screencorresponds to the position of the cursor in the CL data listing in the topportion of the PLAY PATH dialog box.
To change the tool position, use one of the following methods:
• Click the Position Cutting Tool button in the lower portion of the PLAY PATH dialogbox and select a point on the tool path to position the cutting tool.
• Select a line in the CL data listing, then click NCL File > Position Tool to position thetool at this line.
To Insert a CL Command
You can insert a customized CL command anywhere along the tool path. Usethis functionality to add the specific postprocessor words required for correctNC output.
1. Click NCL File > Insert CL Command.
The CL Command dialog box opens.
2. To select location for the CL command, click and select either a point on the tool pathon the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
3. Specify the command contents using one of the following methods:
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and type the command, line-by-line. Notethat this method does not provide syntax checking.
� Click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from thesyntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
� Click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser windowwill appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Notes:
� You can edit the contents of the Command text box at any point by placing thecursor in it and using the keyboard.
� If you supply more than one command line, they will be treated as a “block, that is,you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the whole block of command lines.
558
4. The Preview button inserts the command line(s) in the CL file at the selected location tolet you preview the result. Click OK to insert the command at selected location, Cancel—to quit inserting the command.
Using Parameters in CL Commands
When typing values for CL commands, you can input model parameters,preceded by an ampersand(&) sign. If there is a corresponding parameterdefined in relations, its value will be used in the CL command. If theparameter is not found, the system will prompt you for the parameter’s typeand value, and this parameter will be added to the relations. This way, theCL command can be changed at the top level (through Relations).
To Delete a CL Command
You can only delete user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commandspreviously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
1. Select a user-defined CL command.
2. Click NCL File > Delete CL Command.
3. The system deletes the selected command from the CL file listing.
To Redefine a CL Command
You can only redefine user-defined CL commands, that is, the CL commandspreviously added by using the Insert CL Command option.
1. Select a user-defined CL command.
2. Click NCL File > Redefine CL Command.
The CL Command dialog box opens.
3. To select a new location for the CL command, click and select either a point on thetool path on the screen or a line in the CL file listing.
4. To edit the command contents, use one of the following methods:
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and edit the command. Note that thismethod does not provide syntax checking.
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,click Menu and compose the command by selecting appropriate keywords from thesyntax menus and typing values in response to the system prompts.
559
� Place the cursor in the Command text box and delete the current contents. Then,click File and read in a file containing the CL command lines. The browser windowwill appear to let you select the file name. The expected file extension is “.cmd.
Note: If you do not delete the contents of the Command text box before using the Menuor File option, you will create additional command lines. From then on, these lines willbe treated as a “block, that is, you will be able to move, copy, or delete only the wholeblock of command lines.
5. The Preview button lets you preview the result. Click OK to complete redefining thecommand, Cancel—to quit.
To Save CL Data in a File
When you display the tool motion for a tool path or operation, you can savethe current CL data in a CL file or an MCD file directly from the PLAYPATH dialog box:
1. On the top menu bar of the PLAY PATH dialog box, click File.
2. Click one of the following options:
� Save—Output CL data to a CL file, with the name corresponding to the name of theTool Path feature.
� Save As—Output CL data to a CL file with a different name. Type the new name inthe browser window.
� Save As MCD—Postprocess CL data and output it as an MCD file. The PostProcessor Options window opens. Select the desired options and click Output.
To Output a CL File
You can output the Cutter Location (CL) data for a single tool path or for awhole operation to a CL data file. To output an operation, select the operationname in the Model Tree window. To output a tool path, select the name of thecorresponding tool path in the Model Tree window.
1. In the Model Tree window, select an operation or a Tool Path feature. Click the rightmouse button and select Output Tool Path from the pop-up menu. Or, on the top menubar, click NC Create > Output > Create CL File.
The system opens the Save As dialog box, with the default name of the output file shownin the New File text box.
2. To accept the default name, click OK. Or, type a different file name in the New File textbox of the Save As dialog box and click OK.
560
The system generates the CL file and saves it to disk.
Note: To output NC codes for a tool path or an operation, use the Create NCCode command. You can also save the tool path in either CL or MCD formatdirectly from the PLAY PATH dialog box.
To Output NC Codes
You can output the Cutter Location (CL) data for a single tool path or for awhole operation to a CL data file. This CL data file will then have to bepostprocessed to generate an MCD file, containing the proper NC codes.
You can also output the NC codes for a tool path or operation directly to anMCD file. To output an operation, select the operation name in the ModelTree window. To output a tool path, select the name of the corresponding toolpath in the Model Tree window.
1. In the Model Tree window, select an operation or a Tool Path feature. Then, on the topmenu bar, click NC Create > Output > Create NC Code.
2. Select one of the following commands:
� Automatic—The system uses the default postprocessor associated with the machinetool (specified at the time of Machine Tool Setup).
� Select Post—The system lists the available postprocessors. Select the postprocessorto use.
The Save As dialog box opens, with the default name of the output file shown in theNew File text box.
3. To accept the default name, click OK. Or, type a different file name in the New File textbox of the Save As dialog box and click OK.
The Post Processor Options window opens.
4. Select the desired options and click Output.
The system generates the MCD file and saves it to disk.
Note: You can also save the tool path in either CL or MCD format directlyfrom the PLAY PATH dialog box.
561
Template Machining
About the Template Manager
If your company has certain frequently used machining strategies, you canstreamline the machining process by creating templates corresponding tothese machining strategies, and then applying the right template whenmachining a feature.
A machining strategy is a way to machine a feature: it contains all themachining options and values that you would normally define in a machiningdialog box (such as Pocket Milling or Step Milling), as well as all the toolpath properties. It can also contain the name of the tool to use, or prompt forthe tool at the time you apply the template.
A template may contain one or more strategies for machining the same typeof feature. Once you define the strategies (by selecting the desired optionsand typing values, as needed), save the template. Then, once you havecreated a feature in Expert Machinist, you can machine it by applying anexisting template.
Template Manager is a separate application, which can be run from withinExpert Machinist or as a stand-alone. Before you can run the TemplateManager, your system administrator has to download the appropriate JREfiles and do the setup according to the instructions on the Customer Webpage.
To start the Template Manager, do one of the following:
• On the top menu bar in the Expert Machinist window, click NC Setup > TemplateManager.
• In the system window, type the name of the Template Manager executable:
<loadpoint>/apps/mfgapps/java/bin/template_run
where <loadpoint> is the Pro/ENGINEER load point.
Note: You can also create a template by machining a feature and then savingthe machining strategy, as it is defined by the selected options and specifiedvalues, as a template.
To save the current machining strategy as a template from the machining
dialog box, click next to the Tool Path Name text box and specify thetemplate name.
To Create a New Template
562
1. In the Template Editor window, select the feature type by clicking on one of the Featuresicons, located in the lower-left portion of the window. These icons correspond to the iconsin the Expert Machinist toolbar that you use for creating features.
Once you select an icon, the picture to the right of the icons, which contains a schematicvisualization of the feature type, changes to reflect the selected feature type.
2. Click below the feature type icons, or click the New icon located in the toptoolbar of the Template Editor window.
The system loads the appropriate template and starts creating the first strategy. Thestrategy has a default name based on the feature type (for example, Step0). You canchange the name by typing it in the Strategy Name text box.
3. Select the desired option from the Machining Tool group:
� Prompt for a tool—The template contains no cutting tool information. At the timeyou apply the template, the system prompts you to select or define the cutting tool.
� Specify a tool—Type the name of the cutting tool in the text box. The tool name isstored with the template. At the time you apply the template, make sure theappropriate cutting tool exists on the machine tool currently in use.
4. Use the other options, as needed, to define the machining strategy. The options on thefirst tab correspond to those that appear in a machining dialog box of this type (forexample, if you define a Step strategy, the options on the Step tab are the same as youwould get in a Step Milling dialog box). The Properties tab contains the same tabs andoptions as the Tool Path Properties dialog box.
5. Once a machining strategy is defined, you can add another strategy to the same template.This way, you can, for example, define a rough milling and a finish milling strategywithin the same template. When you apply a template with more than one strategy, thesystem creates the appropriate number of tool paths. To add a new strategy to thetemplate, click Edit > New Strategy. Then define the new strategy as described above.
6. When finished defining the machining strategies, save the template by clicking File >Save. This will save the template with a .tpl extension.
Note: The name of a .tpl file can not be longer than 31 characters and must all belowercase.
7. Click in the lower-left corner of the dialog box to return to the main page of theTemplate Editor dialog box and define another template, for a different type of feature.
8. To exit the Template Editor, click File > Exit.
563
To Convert an Existing TPL Template File to XML Format
The template files are currently saved in the XML format. In Beta version,templates were saved in the TPL format. Currently, both formats aresupported within the Expert Machinist. However, if you created sometemplates in Beta version and want to save them for future use, it isrecommended that you translate them into the XML format by following theprocedure below.
1. Click File > Translate > TPL To XML.
2. Click … next to the From text box and select the name of the template file in the browserwindow. The path and name appear in the From text box.
3. Click … next to the To text box, select the path and type new name of the template file inthe browser window. The path and name appear in the To text box.
4. Click OK.
The system converts the TPL file to XML format.
To Place a Template
Once you have created a template for a certain feature type, you can machinefeatures of this type by applying the template. You have to define the featurebefore you apply a template to it.
1. On the top menu bar, click NC Create > Tool Paths > Place Template.
The system opens the browser window listing all template files in the current directory.
2. Select the template file in the browser window.
3. Select the feature name in the Select Feature dialog box. As you place the cursor over afeature name in the dialog box, the appropriate geometry is highlighted on the screen.Click OK.
4. If the template was created using the Prompt for a tool option, the system prompts youto select or define a cutting tool.
If the template was created using the Specify a tool option, and the cutting tool doesnot exists on the machine tool currently in use, the system issues an error message andaborts placing the template. Define the appropriate cutting tool and apply the templateagain.
Once the template is successfully placed, the system creates the appropriatetool path and removes the stock material corresponding to the featuregeometry.
564
Miscellaneous
To Manipulate Features Using the Model Tree
You can manipulate existing features, for example, redefine or delete them,directly from the Model Tree window by using a pop-up menu. For machiningfeatures, this pop-up menu also provides the options of creating a tool path orplacing a template; and for tool paths, the options of displaying the tool pathon the screen or outputting it to a file.
To manipulate a feature from the Model Tree:
1. Select the feature name in the Model Tree window.
If you select a machining feature, the system highlights the feature geometry on thescreen. If you select an operation, the system highlights the geometry of all themachining features that belong to this operation.
2. Click the right mouse button.
The system opens a pop-up menu. The options in this menu correspond to the type ofselected feature.
3. Select the desired option.
The system starts the appropriate user interface.
Options Available from the Model Tree
When you select a machining feature in the Model Tree window, the systemhighlights the feature geometry on the screen. If you select an operation, thesystem highlights the geometry of all the machining features that belong tothis operation.
Depending on the type of feature selected in the Model Tree, the pop-upmenu contains the following options:
Pop-UpMenuOptions
System Action
565
Redefine Opens the Machine Tool Setup dialogbox, to let you redefine the currentmachine tool.
Tool PathPlayer
Opens the PLAY PATH dialog box, todisplay tool motion for the wholeoperation.
OutputTool Path
Starts the user interface for outputtingthe operation to a file (equivalent toclicking NC Create > Output >CreateCL File).
Redefine Opens the Operation Setup dialog box,to let you redefine the current operation.
Delete Starts the user interface for deleting afeature and its children. The children ofan operation include all the machiningfeatures that belong to that operationand their associated tool paths.
CreateToolpath
Opens the appropriate dialog box formachining this type of feature.
566
PlaceTemplate
Starts the user interface for placing amachining template (equivalent toclicking NC Create > Tool Paths >Place Template).
Redefine Opens the appropriate feature dialogbox (for example, Pocket Feature), tolet you redefine the current feature.
Delete Starts the user interface for deleting afeature and its children. The children ofa machining feature include itsassociated tool path(s).
Mimic aToolpath
Starts the user interface for using thesettings from an existing Tool Pathfeature to machine another feature ofthe same type (equivalent to clickingNC Create > Tool Paths > Mimic aToolpath).
Tool PathPlayer
Opens the PLAY PATH dialog box, todisplay the current tool path.
OutputTool Path
Starts the user interface for outputtingthe tool path to a file (equivalent toclicking NC Create > Output >CreateCL File).
Redefine Opens the appropriate machining typedialog box (for example, PocketMilling), to let you redefine the currenttool path.
Delete Starts the user interface for deleting afeature and its children.
Tool PathPlayer
Opens the PLAY PATH dialog box, todisplay the current tool path.
567
OutputTool Path
Starts the user interface for outputtingthe tool path to a file (equivalent toclicking NC Create > Output >CreateCL File).
Redefine Opens the Freeform Milling dialogbox, to let you redefine the current FreeForm feature.
Delete Starts the user interface for deleting afeature and its children.
To Toggle Material Display
The stock is displayed in green, to make it easily distinguishable from thereference part geometry, which is displayed in the default Geometry systemcolor (usually, white).
By default, the stock model is displayed in its current machined state; that is,it is shown as the entire model, less any material that has been removed by atool path.
Another option for stock display is to show it as it would exist if all currentlydefined machining features were completely machined. This way, you caneasily view the material that is left to be machined off, and createappropriate machining features.
To toggle between the two ways of viewing the stock material:
1. On the toolbar, click .
The system displays the stock in such a way that only the "extra" material left to bemachined off is shown in green. The system temporarily removes from the stock modelall the material corresponding to the currently defined features. Whenever the edges ofthe stock coincide with the edges of the reference model, they are shown in Geometrycolor.
2. To toggle back to the all-green stock display, click once more.
568
Pro/PROCESS for MFG
Introduction
About Pro/PROCESS for MFG
Pro/PROCESS for MFG is a stand-alone Pro/ENGINEER module that definesthe part machining process steps, material removal, fixtures, and parameterinformation.
The Pro/PROCESS for MFG part machining process consists of two distinctphases:
1. The process planner defines the process flow of machining.
2. The user details and finalizes the process plan.
After these two steps have been sufficiently defined, the manufacturingengineer, or an NC programmer, creates the NC tool path for actual materialremoval. The goal of Pro/PROCESS for MFG is to create a process plan withas much detail as desired, document this process, and then use it to create amanufacturing toolpath.
About Defining the Process Plan Work Flow
To define the part machining process plan work flow, the process plannermay need to have access to:
1. A library of tools, holders, workcell and available fixtures.
One of the setup steps for process planning involves the documentation and inventory ofall tools, fixtures, and holders for easy retrieval by the process planner. The library ofmachining tools are classified by function, size, and application. The process planner cancreate these fixtures, holders, and workcell as needed; that is, the database need not becomplete before the work begins.
2. The design part as provided by the design department.
The design part is typically in the released format. The released model containsdimensions, tolerances—dimensional and geometric—and surface finish information.
3. The workpiece geometry as available from a supplier or manufacturingengineer.
The workpiece often represents an assembly of a part at some state of machining. It ispossible that the starting workpiece for one process planner is the end result of aprevious machining operation. Except for workpiece surfaces where the tolerance is
569
sufficient to meet design requirements, the dimensional, surface or tolerance informationassociated with the design part is used by the process planner to decide on tools andfixtures.
To define the machining process plan work flow, the process planner mayneed to perform:
• An assembly of the workpiece and design model.
Given the workpiece and design model information, the process planner assembles thetwo parts in such a way as to provide sufficient machine allowance and co-locate criticalfeatures; such as an axis for a boss and reference datum planes.
Sometimes, the process planner or user creates just the casting model, and then createsthe final design model through material removal. This way, the process planner or usercan better model the design through the manufacturing process, because the designmodel incorporates limitations of the manufacturing process.
• An assembly of the workpiece into a relative fixture.
The process planner, or user, needs to define how the workpiece with the reference modelassembled inside will be assembled relative to a fixture.
• The creation of a custom fixture.
If there are no preexisting fixtures, then the process planner, or user, passes theworkpiece along with manufacturing instructions to the tools department for creation ofa custom fixture
• A simplification of the model representation.
The process planner, or user, often wishes to create a representation of a design part thatis as simple as possible, yet contains all necessary details in the area to be machined.
• Workcell and tool definition and selection.
Based on process planing requirements such as material, stock allowance, surface finish,and tolerance, the process planner or user defines or retrieves a workcell and may choosea tool for each machining step or NC sequence.
• A representation of the workpiece with material removed.
The process planner or user needs this representation for input to the next machiningstep and also to document the process.
• Modifications to the machining steps.
After defining all steps, the process planner may reorder the machining steps, add orinsert more steps, or delete some of the unnecessary machining operations.
570
To Use Pro/PROCESS for MFG
The following procedure outlines a typical session in Pro/PROCESS for MFG.
1. Click File > New to create a new process assembly, or click File > Open to open anexisting assembly.
2. Select Manufacturing as the Type.
3. Select Process Plan as the Sub-type.
4. Enter a name for the process assembly.
5. Click OK to open the MANUFACTURING menu.
6. Click Mfg Sequence, Step, or New Step to create or redefine a manufacturing step orgeneral step and click Done.
7. If no operation has been created, the operation creation user interface appears.
8. If an operation already exists, the STEP TYPE menu appears. Click one of thecommands:
� Fixture—create a typical setup [place part A in fixture B]
� Mfg Model—assemble Workpieces, Ref Models, General Assemblies and MfgAssemblies.
� Machine—create milling, hole making, turning, and WEDM step types which canbe performed at this workstation type.
� General—create all of the step types which can be performed at any workstationtype. These steps include inspect, paint, debur, edge break, and so on.
� Surface—create all of the step types which are specific to surface workcells. Thesesteps do not perform any changes to the component geometries.
� Volume—create all of the step types which are specific to volume workcells. Thesesteps include heat treating and shrinkage. These steps do not perform any changesto the component geometries.
9. Click Done to open the Step dialog box, allowing you to define elements specific to thestep type. Select components to be assembled directly from the screen or from the ModelTree window.
10.Define additional elements (such as, description of the step, a simplified representation,time, and cost estimates) for the step. Click OK in the dialog box when you are satisfiedthat all desired elements are defined.
11.Define additional steps by clicking Step from the MFG SEQUENCE menu. The systemdisplays the existing steps in the STEP LIST menu. The previous list being referred to isonly for the current operation. To list steps for all operations, click All Operations fromthe SEL STEP menu.
571
12.To replay the steps, click Play Steps from the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
13.Create detail drawings of the manufacturing process by adding the process step model toa drawing. A Process State dialog box appears when the model is added to the drawing.The Process State dialog box lists the steps in the manufacturing process. If you wantto, select the desired step and a simplified representation, then click OK. The VIEWTYPE menu appears, from which you can place a view of the model in the specified step.
14.Use Pro/REPORT to create a manufacturing report table for the step, which lists only thecomponents assembled during the active step or a table of manufacturing parameters.The system lists a new set of report symbols, beginning with a &mfg prefix, and unique toprocess steps.
15.When you create a view of another step, set the current step by clicking Views from theDRAWING menu, and then Dwg Models > Set State. The Set State command sets thecurrent default state which will be used for the next placed view. Use the View andModify View functions to change an existing Process State view.
About Specific Uses for Pro/PROCESS for MFG
Specifically, you can use Pro/PROCESS for MFG to complete the followingtasks:
• Create and manipulate manufacturing steps which may or may not generate NCsequences.
• Group manufacturing steps into operations where you can define how the model changeswith material removal, refixturing, or use of a different tool.
• Leave a manufacturing step in a partially defined state so that the NC planner cancomplete the step; that is, define the NC tool path.
• Examine the steps with the display of the manufacturing model accurately reflecting thematerial removal, similar to the Play Steps functionality available in Pro/PROCESS forASSEMBLIES. You can easily pick a step to roll the model back to. Rolling back themodel from step to step represents successive processing steps.
• Access such features as workcell, tooling, and site parameters from the manufacturingstep level.
• Create process planning documentation reflecting the process planning steps andparameters.
About the Part Machining Process Plan
To define the part machining process plan, the process planner uses:
• Legacy data from previously completed plans.
572
Existing Pro/MFG data may be used as a layout skeleton. Often sections of a preexistingplan are used in the current definition. The planner can place text from existing thirdparty data by cutting and pasting the appropriate sections of an old plan, using UDFsfrom other Pro/MFG or Pro/PROCESS for MFG models, or by using Pro/TOOLKITfunctionality.
• Workpiece geometry as a start condition.
The workpiece represents any form of raw stock; bar stock, casting, and so on that isgoing to be machined during manufacturing operations. It may easily be created bycopying the design model and modifying the dimensions or deleting/suppressing featuresto represent the real workpiece. The benefits of using a workpiece include:
� Automatic definition of extents of machining when creating manufacturingsequences.
� Dynamic material removal simulation and gouge checking in Pro/MFG.
� In-process documentation by capturing removed material.
The workpiece geometry serves as a start condition for the part machining process plan.The engineer knows that by using some manufacturing techniques the start part can betransformed into a finished part. The workpiece, at various stages of machining, alsodefines the design and configuration of the fixture.
• Design model as an end condition.
The design model represents the machining target. The design part also has the surfacefinish, dimensions, and tolerances defined. No matter what approach the process plannertakes in getting from workpiece geometry to finished geometry, the process goal is toachieve these surface finish, dimensions, and tolerances.
• A basic understanding of the available processing equipment; such as tools, holders,fixtures, and work centers.
To Document the Part Machining Process Plan
In documenting the part machining process plan work flow, the user wantsto:
1. Document the process planning steps.
2. After defining a manufacturing process plan step, the user needs to document the processplanning step in a company accepted format. There are five classes of process planningsteps which require specific documentation:
� Material removal—which includes typical manufacturing steps such as mill, turn,drill, bore, tap, and so on.
� Fixturing—which includes a typical setup drawing; for example, place part A intofixture B.
573
� Manufacturing model—which includes assembly of material or the creation ofadditional workpieces.
� Non-manufacturing—which includes inspection, packing, and deburring.
� Non-material removal—which includes shrinkage and plating. The documentationis similar to the material removal step except no geometry simulation is performed;that is, the results of these steps are not reflected in part geometry.
3. Simplify the representation of a part in all non-machined areas.
In some cases, the user wants to simplify the display of any part geometry which is non-critical to the particular machining step in order to simplify the manufacturing modelrepresentation.
4. Document the material removal process.
The user needs to document the material removal process including minimum sufficientdimensioning, tool and holder information, along with any necessary machininginstructions.
5. Create drawing views or report tables for each machining process. The end products of theprocess planning procedure include:
� The tool selection
� The holder
� The fixture list which is cross-referenced to the process plan step
� The setup drawing which contains a simplified, representative assembly of theworkpiece and fixture assembly
� The process plan drawing which contains the workpiece and the necessarydimensions, tolerances, and instructions to produce that material removal step
6. Create and dimension auxiliary views.
For some of the drawings, the user may need to create and dimension additionalbreakout sections or auxiliary views as appropriate.
Process Steps
About Process Assemblies
A process is a Pro/ENGINEER assembly that contains the features definingthe manufacturing steps. It follows the naming conventionsprocess_name.asm and process_name.mfg. A process assembly hasdependencies on one or more workpieces and design models. The processobject has a required (for Pro/PDM purposes) dependency on the workpiece.
574
A process allows assembly and manipulation of entire reference modelsrelative to other models in the process assembly. A user can create a partiallycomplete manufacturing model and then retrieve the model intomanufacturing to finish defining the machining steps and to generate thetoolpath.
The system retrieves the process model in whatever state it exists at the endof the process; that is, retrieves any components and sets the last step as theactive step. The system retrieves into memory all components required forthe process model and displays only the components that are active from thelast step.
To Use Process Mode
In Process mode, you can create process plans to describe manufacturingoperations that are applied to produce a product.
1. Click File > New.
2. Select Manufacturing under Type and Process Plan under Sub-type. Enter a namefor the new process assembly.
3. Click OK to open the MANUFACTURING menu.
4. Click one of the following commands on the MANUFACTURING:
� Mfg Setup—Defines the workcell library, tooling library, manufacturabilitydatabase, and fixture library. Opens the MFG SETUP menu.
� Mfg Sequence—Manipulates a process step (add, create, redefine and so on). Opensthe MFG SEQUENCE menu.
� Component—Performs certain assembly component operations. Displays theCOMPONENT menu.
� Simplfd Rep—Creates, modifies, or sets simplified representations.
� Modify—Modifies process or process component dimensions and features. Opens thePROCESS MOD menu.
� Regenerate—Updates modified part and assembly dimensions.
� Play Steps—Views assembly at individual steps of the process plan. Opens theSTEP REGEN menu.
� Relations—Adds and edits constraint equations.
� Program—Accesses Pro/PROGRAM.
� Integrate—Resolves differences between the source and target processes.
575
MFG SETUP Menu Commands
When you click Mfg Setup from the MANUFACTURING menu, the MFGSETUP menu opens with the following commands:
• Workcell Lib—Defines and activates the workcell libraries.
• Tooling Lib—Defines and activates tool libraries.
• Param Setup—Sets up manufacturing parameters. Opens the PARAM SETUP menuwith the following commands:
� Site—Sets up the site used by the current operation.
� Mach DB—Sets up machinability database files.
• Mfg Geometry—Sets up the manufacturing geometry. Opens the MFG GEOMETRYmenu with the following commands:
� Mill Volume—Creates a volume to be removed during an NC sequence.
� Mill Surface—Creates a user-defined surface quilt that can be referenced bySurface milling NC sequences or by Mill Volumes.
� Mill Window—Creates a window for mill NC sequence.
� Turn Profile—Creates a profile for turning NC sequence.
� Drill Group—Groups axes for drilling NC sequence.
� Datum Feats—Creates datum features in the manufacturing model.
MFG SEQUENCE Menu Commands
When you click Mfg Sequence from the MANUFACTURING menu, theMFG SEQUENCE menu opens with the following commands:
• Operation—Creates and redefines operations and sets the current operation. Thecurrent operation is the last operation in the feature list which has not been rolled back.Opens the Define Operation menu with the following commands:
� Name—Specifies the operation name.
� Workcell—Specifies the workcell or machine tool.
You need not specify an exact workcell. The following are new types of workcells:
Surface—Specifies grinding machines and any other machine which doesn't changethe geometry of a workpiece surface.
576
Volume—Specifies heat treating workcells and any other workcell which does notchange the geometry of the part.
General—Specifies any workcell which does not affect the geometry of theworkpiece.
Mach Sys—Specifies the coordinate system for CL output.
Comments—Specifies operation comments.
Parameters—Specifies operation parameters.
From—Specifies location point.
Home—Specified location point.
• Step—Creates and redefines step features. The types of steps available depends uponthe type of workcell defined for the operation. Opens the STEP TYPE menu with thefollowing commands:
� Fixture—Creates a fixture step.
� Mfg Model—Documents the assemblies of workpieces, reference models, generalassemblies, and manufacturing assemblies; that is, the addition of stock to bemachined.
� Machine—Specifies all of the step types which can be performed at a workstationtype. Opens the MACH AUX menu. The specific machining step type availabledepends upon the active operation's workcell type.
� General—Specifies all of the step types which can be performed at any workstationtype. General step types include inspecting, painting, deburring, edge breaking, andso on.
� Surface—Specifies all of the step types which are specific to surface workcells.Surface step types do not perform any changes to the component geometries.
� Volume—Specifies all of the step types which are specific to volume workcells.Volume step types include heat treating, plating, and shrinkage.
COMPONENT Menu Commands
When you click Component from the MANUFACTURING menu, theCOMPONENT menu opens with the following commands:
• Package—Uses the Package functionality to move packaged components that are not inthe design assembly.
• Delete—Deletes components and their children from the assembly. Process steps arechildren of components; therefore, deleting a workpiece deletes process steps whichreference it.
577
• Suppress—Suppresses steps related to the workpiece to be deleted. Opens theDELETE/SUPP menu.
• Resume—Resumes suppressed components. Opens the RESUME menu with thefollowing commands:
� All—Resumes all suppressed components.
� Layer—Resumes the components on current layer.
� Last Set—Resumes the last set of suppressed components.
� Feat ID—Resumes a component having a specified ID.
• Redefine—Redefines one or more component constraints.
• Reroute—Reassigns component references.
• Reorder—Reorders components.
• Insert Mode—Activates or cancels Insert Mode.
• Pattern—Creates a pattern of a component which has not been patterned.
• Del Pattern—Removes a pattern of a component.
• Adv Utilities—Accesses advanced assembly component functionality. Opens the ADVCOMP UTL menu with the following commands:
� Replace—Replaces an existing component with another one.
� Copy—Copies components.
� UDF Library—Groups components together into a UDF.
� Group—Creates components from UDFs.
� Merge—Merges components into a single part.
� Cut Out—Subtracts reference parts from other parts.
MFG MODIFY Menu Commands
When you click Modify from the MANUFACTURING menu, the MFGMODIFY menu lists the following commands:
• Mod Part—Opens the MODIFY menu to modify a part.
• Mod Assem—Opens the MODIFY menu to modify an assembly.
• Mod Subasm—Opens the MODIFY menu to modify a subassembly.
578
• Mod Dim—Opens the MODIFY menu to modify dimensions.
• Mod Mach Step—Opens the STEP LIST menu to modify parameters for machinesteps.
• Mod Pattern—Opens the SELECT FEAT menu to modify machining step patterndimensions.
STEP REGEN Menu Commands
When you click Play Steps from the MANUFACTURING menu, the STEPREGEN menu lists the following commands:
• Set Step—Selects a step from the Process Window.
• PreviousStep—Rolls model back one step.
• Next Step—Regenerates model forward one step.
• Set Operation—Selects an operation from the Process Window.
• Previous Oper—Rolls model back one operation
• Next Oper—Regenerates model forward one operation.
• Step Info—Displays information for current step.
• Oper Info—Displays information for current operation.
Select Step Menu
To select steps, use the Select Step menu. This menu contains a check marklist of steps, showing the step number and name.
Read About and Create Steps
About Play Steps
Play steps allow you to walk through the manufacturing process; set aspecific step and operation, roll the model back one step or operation, anddisplay information for the current step or operation.
About Process Steps
Process steps describe all the actions used to manufacture the product. Youcan only have one active step at any time. Process step types are: Fixture,Manufacturing Model, Machine, General, Surface, and Volume.
579
To Create a Machine Step
Machine steps include: milling, turning, hole making.
1. Click MANUFACTURING > Mfg Sequence to open the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
2. Click Mfg Sequence > Step to open the DEFINE OPER menu.
3. The system opens the DEFINE OPER menu. The specific machining step type availabledepends upon the active operation's workcell type:
� Name—Specifies the machine step name. This is an optional field.
� Comments—Specifies machine step comments. This is an optional field.
� Tool—Specifies a tool for this machining step. This is an optional field.
� Parameters—Specifies manufacturing parameters for this machining step. This isan optional field.
� References—Specifies references for this machine step. This is an optional field.You can specify machining specific and general process references for this machinestep. The Process Refs option allows you to select general component, feature,surface, edge, curve, quilt, datum, dimension or tolerance references to add to thismachine step. These references can later be displayed by the manufacturingengineer when completing the machine step in Pro/MFG. The remaining options arespecific to the type of machine step.
� Simplified Rep—Specifies a simplified representation for the step. This is anoptional field.
� Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the machine step. This is an optionalfield.
� Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the machine step. This is an optionalfield.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
5. Click OK to commit and continue.
About Fixture Steps
Fixture steps allow you to assemble, create, disassemble, and reassemblefixture components.
580
To Create a Fixture Step
1. Click Step from the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
2. Click New Step from the STEP LIST menu.
3. Click Fixture from the STEP TYPE menu.
4. The system opens the FIXTURE STEP dialog box, which contains the following options:
� Name—Specifies the fixture name.
� Components—Selects components with which to fixture. Opens a menu withcommands to Assemble, Create, Disassemble, Reassemble, and Prev State.Reassemble presents a list of previously disassembled fixture components. PrevState presents a list of all previous fixture steps.
Note: Use the COMPONENT menu to delete or redefine any of the fixture components.
� Comments—Specifies fixture comments. This is an optional field.
� Simplified Rep—Specifies a simplified representation for the step. This is anoptional field.
� Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the fixture setup. This is an optionalfield.
� Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the fixture setup. This is an optionalfield.
5. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
6. Click OK to commit and continue.
About General Steps
General steps types handle operations which do not involve any change to thegeometry of the workpiece. These steps include painting, burnishing,inspection, and so on.
To Create a General Step
1. Click New Step from the STEP LIST menu.
2. Click General from the STEP TYPE menu.
3. The system opens the GEN STEPS menu and the STEP: General dialog box, whichcontains the following options:
581
� Name—Specifies the general step name. This is an optional field.
� Type—Specifies type of step. This is a required field.
� Comments—Specifies general step comments. This is an optional field.
� References—Specifies references for this general step. This is an optional field.Opens the GEN REFS menu which allows you to select component, feature,surface, edge, curve, quilt, datum, dimension or tolerance references to add to thisgeneral step.
� Simplified Rep—Specifies a simplified representation for the step. This is anoptional field.
� Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the general step. This is an optionalfield.
� Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the general step. This is an optionalfield.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
5. Click OK to commit and continue.
About Volume Steps
Volume steps handle operations which involve scaling the part, such as heattreating and shrinkage. Volume steps do not perform any changes to thecomponent geometries.
To Create a Volume Step
1. Click New Step from the STEP LIST menu.
2. Click Volume from the STEP TYPE menu.
3. The system opens the GEN STEPS menu and the STEP: Volume dialog box, whichcontains the following options:
� Name—Specifies the volume step name. This is an optional field.
� Type—Specifies type of step. This is a required field.
� Comments—Specifies volume step comments. This is an optional field.
582
� References—Specifies references for the volume step. This is an optional field,which allows you to select component, feature, surface, edge, curve, quilt, datum,dimension or tolerance references to add to this general step.
� Simplified Rep—Specifies a simplified representation for the step. This is anoptional field.
� Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the volume step. This is an optionalfield.
� Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the volume step. This is an optionalfield.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
5. Click OK to commit and continue.
About Manufacturing Model Steps
Manufacturing model steps allow you to assemble workpieces and referencemodels through several options, including general manufacturing assemblies.Assembly of workpieces and reference models can be performed throughoutthe manufacturing process.
To Create a Manufacturing Model Step
1. Click Step from the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
2. Click New Step from the STEP LIST menu.
3. Click Mfg Model from the STEP TYPE menu.
4. The system opens the STEP: Mfg Model dialog box,which contains the following options:
� Name—Specifies the manufacturing model setup name.
� Components—Selects components to manufacture. Opens a menu with options tocreate or assemble new components or select existing components from Pro/MFG.
Use the COMPONENT menu to delete or redefine any of the manufacturingcomponents.
� Comments—Specifies manufacturing model comments. This is an optional field.
� Simplified Rep—Specifies a simplified representation for the step. This is anoptional field.
583
� Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the manufacturing model setup. Thisis an optional field.
� Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the manufacturing model setup. Thisis an optional field.
5. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
6. Click OK to commit and continue.
About Surface Steps
Surface steps handle operations which involve offsetting one or more surfacesby some amount. Surface steps do not perform any changes to the componentgeometries.
To Create a Surface Step
1. Click New Step from the STEP LIST menu.
2. Click Surface from the STEP TYPE menu.
3. The system opens the GEN STEPS menu and the STEP: Surface dialog box, whichcontains the following options:
� Name—Specifies the surface step name.
� Type—Specifies type of step. This is a required field.
� Comments—Specifies surface step comments.
� References—Specifies references for the surface step. This is an optional field. Youcan use it to select component, feature, surface, edge, curve, quilt, datum, dimensionor tolerance references to add to this general step.
� Simplified Rep—Specifies a simplified representation for the step.
� Time Estimate—Specifies a time estimate for the surface step.
� Cost Estimate—Specifies a cost estimate for the surface step.
4. Select the feature step fields you wish to define or change and click Define.
5. Click OK to commit and continue.
584
View Steps
To View a Process Step
1. Click Play Steps from the MANUFACTURING menu.
2. Click Set Step from the STEP REGEN menu. The system opens the SELECT STEPmenu with the current active step check marked.
3. Select the step you want to view and click Done.
4. The system displays the current active step in the manufacturing process and highlightsgeneral or process references and material removals in magenta.
Note: Highlighting is performed for all step level commands; for example Next Step, PrevStep, Set Step, but not for any operation level commands; for example Previous Oper,Next Oper, or Set Operation.
To View a Previous or Next Step
1. Click Play Steps from the MANUFACTURING menu.
2. Click Previous Step from the STEP REGEN menu to view a previous step.
The system displays the previous step in the manufacturing and highlights general orprocess references and material removals in magenta.
3. Click Previous Step from the STEP REGEN menu to view another previous step, orclick Done/Return.
4. To view the next step, click Next Step.
The system displays the next step in the manufacturing process and highlights generalor process references and material removals in magenta.
To View the Process Operation
1. Click Play Steps from the MANUFACTURING menu.
2. Click Set Operation from the STEP REGEN menu. The system opens the SELECTOPER menu with the current active operation check marked.
3. Select the operation you want to view and click Done.
To View the Previous or Next Operation
1. Click Play Steps from the MANUFACTURING menu.
585
2. Click Previous Oper from the STEP REGEN menu. The system displays the model atthe end of the previous operation.
3. Click Next Oper from the STEP REGEN menu to display the model at the end of thenext operation, or click Done/Return.
Documenting the Process
Create Customized Documentation
About Drawing Mode
You can use Drawing mode to easily create in process documents, similar tothe way you create a view of a part or assembly, by selecting a process stepfrom a list. The system creates a default view of the process component atthat step.
In Drawing mode, you can create customized documentation for thecomponent process. Views of each step can be placed, component displaycontrolled based on their status in the step, and report tables created usingPro/REPORT.
To Create Views of Process Steps
1. Click Views from the DRAWING menu.
2. Click Dwg Models from the VIEWS menu to add, remove, or set as current one of thedrawing models.
3. Click Set State from the DWG MODELS menu to set the process state of the currentdrawing model, and then designate the process representation.
Using the Process State dialog box, you can select a process step and simplifiedrepresentation.
Process State Dialog Box Options
The Process State dialog box contains a scrollable list that displays theprocess component steps. You can select a step to show in the view. Ifsimplified representations are available, you can select one from the drop-down list. The system selects the representation for that process state bydefault.
The Process State dialog box also contains a Final Mfg State option whichappears at the end of the list of process states. The Final Mfg Staterepresents the state which was used when creating views or repeat regions ofassembly machining assemblies prior to Pro/ENGINEER Release 18.0. The
586
geometry is in its final state, and the active fixture is the last one activated inPro/Mfg.
The Final Mfg State is useful in two ways:
• It allows you to obtain the state expected prior to Pro/ENGINEER Release 18.0. Forexample, you may have a machining assembly—which you may or may not havepreviously worked on in Pro/PROCESS for MFG—which is configured with theexpectation that the pre-Release 18.0 state is used when creating the drawing. Hence,this state is necessary for compatibility with legacy models and legacy work habits
• If no fixture was activated in Pro/MFG, then it allows you to create views or repeatregions which always reference the final state of the manufacturing process, regardlessof which steps are added, removed, or reordered in the future.
To Enter an Existing Drawing
1. Click File > Open.
2. Click Type > Drawing from the File Open dialog box
3. Enter the file name and click Open.
To Open a New Drawing
1. Click File > New.
2. Click Type > Drawing from the New dialog box
3. Enter the file name and click OK.
4. From the New Drawing dialog box, you can specifiy a default model, also the sheet sizeand orientation for the drawing.
5. Click OK.
To Copy a Process Drawing Sheet
1. Click Sheets from the DRAWING menu.
2. Click Copy Process from the SHEETS menu.
3. Select a different process state and click OK to continue.
Note: For maximum performance in regenerating drawings, it is recommended that youcreate no more than one state per sheet.
The system copies the manufacturing processes and generates a new sheet. The CopyProcess function preserves the scale and orientation of the process component. Click
587
Cancel from the Process State dialog box to return to the DRAWING menu, or selectanother step and click OK to create more copies.
4. Click Set Current from the SHEETS menu and enter the new sheet number.
Sheets Menu Commands
If you have a license for Pro/DETAIL, you can use the Sheets command inthe DRAWING menu to create multiple sheet drawings and move items fromone sheet to another. You can view the sheets of a multi-sheet drawing usingPro/ENGINEER.
The SHEETS menu displays the following options:
• Previous—Displays the previous sheet.
• Next—Displays the next sheet.
• Set Current—Sets a current sheet. This option is only available when there is morethan one sheet.
• Process State—Sets or resets the state for the entire sheet, for both views and repeatregions.
• Add—Creates a new sheet at the end of the drawing.
• Remove—Deletes a specified sheet or sheets from the drawing.
• Reorder—Moves a sheet from its present position to another. If there are only twosheets, the system reorders them automatically.
• Switch Sheet—Moves items (views, detail and draft items, and drawing tables) fromone sheet to another. If the drawing has only one sheet, the system automatically createsa second sheet after you click items to move.
• Format—Adds a drawing format to the sheet.
When there is more than one sheet in a drawing, an additional tag, SHEET #OF # displays at the bottom of the main window. When working with multi-sheet drawings, keep in mind the following:
• When you switch a projection view to another sheet, it becomes independent. You canthen move the parent view, and the projection view on another sheet does not update. Ifyou switch these views again to the same sheet, the projection view immediately becomesa child of the parent.
• You can change drawing scales on each sheet independently.
• Partial views stay unchanged on one sheet when you change the scale on another.
• If you erase a view on one sheet, you can resume it on any other sheet.
588
Read About Process State
To Change the Process Component State in a View
1. Click Process State from the MODIFY VIEW menu, then select a view of a processcomponent.
The system displays the Process State dialog box with the process component state andsimplified representation used in the view selected in the lists.
2. Click the process component state and/or the simplified representation you want tochange
3. Click OK.
The system changes the view process state to the selected process state. The systemmakes this state the current process component state when creating new views.
To Set Process Component State in New Views
1. Click Set State from the DWG MODELS menu.
The system opens the Process State dialog box with the current process componentstate and simplified representation selected in the lists.
2. Click the process component state and/or the simplified representation you wish to set.
3. Click OK.
The system sets this state as the current process component state when creating newviews.
Specific Process Considerations
About Process-Specific Considerations
Some process-specific considerations include: adding a view or repeat region,modifying a view or repeat region, switching sheets of views or repeatregions, and the default model's process state.
About Adding a View or Repeat Region
When the current default model is a machining process assembly and a viewor repeat region of the current default model exists on the current sheet, thenthe new view or repeat region's process state becomes that of the existingview or repeat region. The simplified representation of the view or repeatregion being added becomes that of the current, default model.
589
About Modifying a View or Repeat Region
When you select a view of a machining process assembly using Modify Viewand ProcessState and then change the process state, this change applies toall views and repeat regions of this assembly on the current sheet. Thischange also applies to any sheet containing child views from the currentsheet—-and so on recursively. Use the Model/Rep user interface to examinetables describing this behavior.
The system prompts you to confirm or cancel this change if it affects any viewor repeat region which you did not originally select for modification. Thesimplified representation specified only affects the views or repeat regionswhich you originally selected.
About Switching Sheets of Views or Repeat Regions
When switching sheets for views or repeat regions of machining processassemblies, for the views or repeat regions of each of these assemblies,consider the following:
• If there are no views or repeat regions of the assembly on the target sheet, or the processstate of such views or repeat regions is the same as that of the view or repeat regionbeing moved, then nothing changes from the current system behavior. This is the sameas the current Pro/PROCESS for ASSEMBLIES behavior.
• If there are views or repeat regions of the assembly on the target sheet, or the processstate of such views or repeat regions is not the same as that of the view or repeat regionbeing moved, each complete set of related views simply has its process state changed tothat existing on the target sheet.
If you select any view to move whose parent or child view you did not selected to move,the system prompts you to confirm or cancel changing the state of all other sheets uponwhich related views remain.
About Machining Process Assembly as Default Model
When the current, default model is a machining process assembly, considerthe following:
• The Dwg Models menu option Set State is dimmed except when the current sheet hasno views or repeat regions of this assembly.
• When you enter a sheet containing views or repeat regions of this assembly, the current,default process state changes to that of the views or repeat regions on the entered sheet.
590
• If you use the Set Model option to switch the current model to a machining processassembly which appears on the current sheet, the system switches the process state ofthis newly current model to that appearing on the current sheet.
Reports
To Create a New Report
1. Click File > New > Report.
2. Enter the name of the report and click OK to open the New Report dialog box.
3. Specify a sheet size with Set Size, or use the Retrieve Format to retrieve a format thatyou previously created.
4. Click an instance and click Open to display a drawing sheet in the active window, andthe REPORT menu.
5. Click REPORT > Table.
6. Click Create.
7. Define a repeat region. Click Repeat Region from the TABLE menu, and then click Addfrom the TBL REGIONS menu.
8. Pick the cells that you want to include to repeat with model.
9. Enter title text in a row or column outside of the repeat region (unless you want that textto repeat with every occurrence of model data) by using Enter Text and typing thedesired text.
10.The repeat region in the table must contain symbol parameter information to be displayedin the table. You can enter these using the keyboard by choosing Enter Text from theTABLE menu and Keyboard from the ENTER CELL menu; or you can click ReportSym from the ENTER CELL menu.
11.Add the process model to the report by clicking Views from the REPORT menu andentering the name of the process.
12.To add views of the assembly to the report, continue by adding a general view to thesheet. If you do not want views of the model in the report, click Quit from the VIEWTYPE menu and Done/Return from the VIEWS menu. The system still adds the modelto the report, but it does not display it on the sheet. You can add the drawing views at anytime.
13.If necessary, click Repaint to display the contents of the table.
14.You can add a drawing format to the report or change it by selecting Format from theSHEETS menu and Add/Replace from the DRAW FORMAT menu. You can predefinetables on these drawing formats and save them to be recalled at any time into a report ordrawing.
591
You may also add the drawing table used in the report by including it in a drawingformat that you can retrieve. When you add a drawing format containing a table to areport, drawing, or layout, the table becomes independent of the format. If you decide toreplace the format, the table highlights, and you can delete it.
Pro/REPORT Parameters for Manufacturing Process Drawings
Drawings of manufacturing processes are the same as drawings of any otherPro/ENGINEER object. However, special parameters are available usingPro/REPORT to create a custom table detailing the component process. Anentire list of available system parameters appears in the following table.
When creating a report, it is important to consider the structuring of thesymbols in the report. Pro/REPORT parameters used in Pro/PROCESS forMFG are based upon either the current step or operation in the drawing orall steps and/or operations in the drawing.
Parameter Name Definition
&mfg.actoper.actstep.comp.name
Lists the names ofall manufacturingprocesses in thecurrently active stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.comp.type
Lists the types of allmanufacturingprocesses in thecurrently active stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.comp.param.name
Lists the names ofall parameters foreach processcomponent in thecurrently active stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.comp.param.value
Lists the values ofall parameters foreach processcomponent in thecurrently active stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
592
&mfg.actoper.actstep.name
Lists the name ofthe currently activestep associated withthe currently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.param.name
Lists the names ofall parametersassociated with thecurrent process stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.param.value
Lists the values ofall parametersassociated with thecurrent process stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.tool
Lists the tool of thecurrently active stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.actstep.type
Lists the type of thecurrently active stepassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.step.comp.name
Lists the name foreach componentassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.step.comp.type
Lists the types of allmanufacturingprocesses for allsteps associatedwith the currentlyactive operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.comp.param.name
Lists the names ofall parameters foreach processcomponentassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
593
&mfg.actoper.step.comp.param.value
Lists the values ofall parameters foreach processcomponentassociated with thecurrently activeoperation.
&mfg.actoper.step.name
Lists the name foreach step associatedwith the currentlyactive operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.param.name
Lists the names ofall parameters foreach step associatedwith the currentlyactive operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.param.value
Lists the values ofall parameters foreach step associatedwith the currentlyactive operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.tool
Lists the tool foreach step associatedwith the currentlyactive operation.
&mfg.actoper.step.type
Lists the type foreach step associatedwith the currentlyactive operation.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.name
Lists the names ofall components forall operations.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.param.name
Lists the names ofall parameters foreach processcomponent for eachstep associated withall operations.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.param.value
Lists the values ofall parameters foreach processcomponent for eachstep associated withall operations.
&mfg.oper.step.comp.type
Lists the type ofcomponent being
594
processed for eachstep associated withall operations.
&mfg.oper.step.name Displays the nameof each stepassociated with alloperations.
&mfg.oper.step.param.name
Lists the names ofall parametersassociated with thesteps associatedwith all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.param.value
Lists the values ofall parametersassociated with thesteps associatedwith all operations.
&mfg.oper.step.tool Displays the tool forevery stepassociated with alloperations.
&mfg.oper.step.type Displays the typefor every stepassociated with alloperations.
ARepeat Regions in Reports
Repeat regions are user-defined rows, columns, or combinations ofrows/columns (cells) that duplicate themselves to accommodate the amount ofdata that the model currently possesses. They contain the following:
• System and user-defined parameters (such as description, time, and cost) for which thevalues are extracted from the model that is associated with the report.
• Standard table text
By using repeat regions, your tables that contain report data can expand andcontract with varying quantities of data supplied by the models.
595
If you have a license for Pro/REPORT, you can create a repeat region in anymode in which you can create a table (Drawing, Report, Layout, Diagram, orFormat mode). You can nest repeat regions or make them two-directional.
Other Process Functions
About Obtaining Information
Using the main Info menu, you can access general information concerningmass properties, Bill of Materials, measure etc. To obtain process-specificinformation such as cost, time estimates, and component usage lists, use theProcess command on the Info menu.
The Process Info menu has the following commands:
• Sequence Info—Displays an Information Window containing the textual informationfrom the process sequence, including the description and type of each step, all attributenames, and the corresponding values.
• Step Info—Displays an Information Window containing the textual information onselected process steps.
Using these options, you can access an information window that displays thecomplete process sequence. It includes information such as the step type,description, all attributes, and their values. The system saves thisinformation to a file as it is displayed, so you can print it without actuallystepping through all of the steps.
About Step Information
You can obtain information about a particular step by using the Info option inthe Select Step dialog box, or the main Info > Process menu. If you chooseone of these options, the system displays an Information window containingthe following:
• Step number and type
• Machining defined
• Abbreviated description of the step description
• Time estimate
• Cost estimate
• Simplified representation name
• Full description
596
When you show the status of components in the design assembly, you can adda column in the model tree called process status, which lists the currentstatus of all components (that is, assembled, not assembled, assembling, andso on.)
Simplified Representations
About Using Simplified Representations with Large Design Assemblies
Simplified representations can increase your ability to work effectively withlarge design assemblies. They improve visual clarity and performance. Theyare used to simplify the process model by excluding or substitutingcomponents for all steps or to simplify only the current state (that is, step).Simplified representations of the design model can also be used whencreating process steps in the manufacturing process.
Note: When dealing with simplified representations on models, be sure that references youhave removed do not affect downstream applications. For example, if you place amachine coordinate system on a fixture, and then use a simplified representation toremove the fixture for display purposes, it is possible toolpaths will not compute as theirreferences no longer exist.
To Create Simplified Representations for a Process Model
1. Select Simplfd Rep from the MANUFACTURING menu.
2. Create or set the current representation.
Components are excluded or substituted for only one step in the processassembly by creating or setting the current representation when defining orredefining the step.
To Apply Simplified Representations to a Step
1. Open the STEP dialog for the desired step.
2. Choose Simplfd Rep from the STEP dialog box to set or create a simplifiedrepresentation for the step.
You can use simplified representations of the design assembly when you create assemblesteps in the process assembly.
597
To Retrieve a Simplified Representation From a Process
1. Create a simplified representation of the process component before adding the designmodel to the process.
2. Creating a simplified representation of the process component provides the RetrieveRep menu selection when you add a model to the process.
Note: Components excluded in the design model do not appear on the screen in phantom linefont but appear in the Model Tree of the assembly where they are selected.
Sample Session
About the Sample Session
This group of Help topics represents a sample session on a process model.The sample session includes retrieving the model, checking the play stepsfunctionality, checking the copy process functionality, defining a newoperation, and creating drawings; and presents some basic Pro/PROCESS forMFG features.
To Retrieve the Process Model
1. Select File > Open.
2. Enter the manufacturing part name. The system regenerates the process model, displaysthe last step in the process model, and displays the part's model tree.
Example: Retrieved Process Model
The process model is a rough out on the inside of the part.
598
To Create Drawings
1. To create a new drawing sheet select File > New.
2. Click Type > Drawing.
3. Click OK to open the New Drawing dialog box.
4. Select a default model and a template.
5. Click Done to create the drawing and open the DRAWING menu and the DETAIL menu.
6. To add or modify views and data placement on the drawing sheet, click Views > AddView from the DRAWING menu.
To Use the Play Steps Functionality
1. Select Play Steps > Set Step. The system displays the Select Step menu with the laststep checked as the active step.
2. Select the step you wish to set as active and click OK.
3. To roll the model forward one step, select Next Step from the Step Regen menu. Thesystem displays material removals and process references in magenta.
Note: The step display allows you to interactively examine the model.
Example: MFG Model Stock Assembled
The figure below represents Step 1.
599
The following three figures represent Step 2, Step 3, and Step 4 of the model.
Note: Rolling the model from step to step represents successive processing steps; that isprocess planning stages.
600
To Use the Copy Process Functionality
The Copy Process functionality allows you to refer to a predefined sheet asa template for subsequent sheets. The process plan model is maintainedwithin process plan files. It may be necessary for you to document routesheets and/or process plan sheets using the Pro/DETAIL function.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Enter the name of the drawing. The system regenerates the drawing and displays thefirst sheet in the drawing.
601
3. To move to the next drawing select Sheets > Next. The system displays the next drawingsheet.
4. To copy the process select Sheets > Copy Process. The system displays the ProcessState dialog box, from which you can select the process state for the next sheet by clickingOK.
5. To set the current sheet select Sheets > Set Current, and enter the desired sheetnumber directly.
Example: Copy Process Functionality
The example drawings shown below are of the cover plan.
Cover Plan Sheet 1 of 3 with Notes
602
Cover Plan Sheet 2 of 3 with Notes is shown below
603
604
Cover Plan Sheet 3 of 3 with Notes is shown below.
605
606
For this example, Sheet 4 is set as the current (see Copy Process Sheet 4 Setas Current.)
607
To Define a New Operation
1. Click File > New.
2. Click Type > Manufacturing, and Sub-type > Process Plan to open theMANUFACTURING menu..
3. Click Mfg Sequence to open the MFG SEQUENCE menu.
4. Click Operation to open the DEFINE OPER menu from which you can define the newoperation.
For this example, Workcell is checked along with Done Oper, and menu commandsWorkcell —> Use Prev —> OP020 are selected. This indicates that the workcell usedfor this new step is the same as the one used in a previous operation (OP020).
As shown in the dialog box below, the name of the fixture step is defined as SETUP_2,one fixture component is disassembled and then reassembled onto the part, commentsare entered, no simplified representation is defined, a time estimate of 0.15 and a costestimate of 5.00 are supplied.
608
609
Index
44 Axis Area ...........................................................................................................................................................280
TURN SEQ.......................................................................................................................................................2804 Axis Plane ..........................................................................................................................................................1634X_LEAD_ANGLE.......................................................................................................................................104, 1114X_LEAD_RANGE_OPT .............................................................................................................................104, 1114X_MAX_LEAD_ANGLE............................................................................................................................104, 1114X_MIN_LEAD_ANGLE .............................................................................................................................104, 1114X_TILT_ANGLE ................................................................................................................................................111
AAbort.....................................................................................................................................................................392
GOUGE STOP..................................................................................................................................................391Above CtrLn..........................................................................................................................................................292Acme.....................................................................................................................................................................286Activate.................................................................................................................................................................153
FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................153
Add ...............................................................................................................................................................166, 356AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................355AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................166CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330CREATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375FEATURE REFS...............................................................................................................................................243HEIGHT ...........................................................................................................................................................221SELECT SRFS
for Milling.....................................................................................................................................................160SELECT SRFS
for Gouge Checking.......................................................................................................................................391SKETCH VOL ..................................................................................................................................................251STOCK BOUND...............................................................................................................................................271SURF DEFINE..........................................................................................................................................258, 263SYNCH
in Trajectory Milling......................................................................................................................................227in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................335
TAPER ANGLE................................................................................................................................................329Add Ref Prts..........................................................................................................................................................162Add Slice...............................................................................................................................................................178Adjust Tool............................................................................................................................................................169
PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169Advanced ..............................................................................................................................................................250
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
AI Macro...............................................................................................................................................................286All...........................................................................................................................................................................47
610
CLEAR ...............................................................................................................................................................47GATHER FILL .................................................................................................................................................247REPLACE.........................................................................................................................................................391
All Loops ..............................................................................................................................................................249CLOSURE ........................................................................................................................................................249
All Operations .........................................................................................................................................................53All Opts.................................................................................................................................................................430ALLOW_NEG_Z_MOVES ...................................................................................................................................101AlngToolAxis........................................................................................................................................................369
TOOL APPR .....................................................................................................................................................369Along Cutline ........................................................................................................................................................167
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................167Along Z.................................................................................................................................................................223Along Z Dir ...........................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................166DEFINE AXIS ..................................................................................................................................................355
ALT_OSETNO_VAL .............................................................................................................................127, 128, 132Alternate................................................................................................................................................................345
WHICH REF.....................................................................................................................................................345ALTERNATE_SIDE_OUTPUT.....................................................................................................................127, 132Append..................................................................................................................................................................388Appr Walls ............................................................................................................................................................172APPR_EXIT_EXT.................................................................................................................................................118APPR_EXIT_HEIGHT ..........................................................................................................................................119APPR_EXIT_PATH ..............................................................................................................................................118Approach.......................................................................................................................................................177, 178
BUILD CUT .....................................................................................................................................................177Approach Point......................................................................................................................................................328
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................328APPROACH_DISTANCE .............................................................................................................................119, 120
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
APPROACH_FEED ......................................................................................................................................112, 119APPROACH_MOVE.............................................................................................................................................147APPROACH_TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................120
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92APPROXIMATE_SPLINES ..................................................................................................................................142Arc Length ............................................................................................................................................................272
END DIM TYPE ...............................................................................................................................................272ARC_FEED...........................................................................................................................................................112
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
ARC_FEED_CONTROL .......................................................................................................................................112Area ......................................................................................................................................................................276
TURN SEQ.......................................................................................................................................................276Assemble.................................................................................................................................................................24
FIXT COMP .......................................................................................................................................................47MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................23
Assembly machining................................................................................................................................................20manufacturing model ...........................................................................................................................................27manufacturing process ............................................................................................................................. 21, 22, 23
ATTACH_WIDTH................................................................................................................................................143Attributes ..............................................................................................................................................................425
611
REDEF NC SEQ ...............................................................................................................................................425Auto ......................................................................................................................................................................306Auto Drilling .................................................................................................................................................317, 323
create ................................................................................................................................................................318reorder ..............................................................................................................................................................324
AUTO_INNER_CUTLINE....................................................................................................................................102AUTO_SYNCHRONIZE.......................................................................................................................................102Automatic................................................................................................................................................................58
CORNER ADDin Milling ......................................................................................................................................................229in Turning .....................................................................................................................................................273in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................330
MAT REMOVAL................................................................................................................................................58VOL..................................................................................................................................................................175
AUTOSYNCH_START_END ...............................................................................................................................142Auxiliary ...............................................................................................................................................................342Axis ......................................................................................................................................................................178
APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177Axis control...........................................................................................................................................................165
variable .............................................................................................................................................................165Axis Def................................................................................................................................................................166AXIS_DEF_CONTROL ........................................................................................................................................103AXIS_SHIFT.........................................................................................................................................................109
BBACK_BORE_CLEARANCE...............................................................................................................................141BACK_CLEAR_ANGLE ......................................................................................................................................131Beginning
LOCATE CMD.................................................................................................................................................375Below CtrLn..........................................................................................................................................................292Bisect ....................................................................................................................................................................331Blank ....................................................................................................................................................................257
DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................315Blend
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
BlindDRILL DEPTH .................................................................................................................................................305
Bndry Chain ..........................................................................................................................................................198Bndry Loops..........................................................................................................................................................244Bndry Srfs .............................................................................................................................................................244Bore ..............................................................................................................................................................299, 300Boss Top .......................................................................................................................................................518, 520
creating .............................................................................................................................................................518machining .........................................................................................................................................................521
BOTTOM_SCALLOP_HGT..................................................................................................................................106BOTTOM_STOCK_ALLOW ................................................................................................................................107Break Chip ............................................................................................................................................................299BREAKOUT_DISTANCE.....................................................................................................................................138Build Cut...............................................................................................................................................................178
SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................164Build Slice.............................................................................................................................................................176Buttress .................................................................................................................................................................286
612
By CopyUSE TOOL .........................................................................................................................................................79
By Cur Oper ............................................................................................................................................................53By Cut
USE PRV OPT..................................................................................................................................................334By FeatList............................................................................................................................................................373By NC Seq
USE PRV OPT..................................................................................................................................................334By Pick..................................................................................................................................................................373By Reference
USE TOOL .........................................................................................................................................................79By Region .............................................................................................................................................................178By Rule .................................................................................................................................................................373By Slice.................................................................................................................................................................178By Tool .................................................................................................................................................................373
CCap Plane ..............................................................................................................................................................249Chamfer
CORN MOTION...............................................................................................................................................274CHAMFER_DIM ..................................................................................................................................................131Change
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388SELECT SRFS..................................................................................................................................................160
Change Type .........................................................................................................................................................330Channel .........................................................................................................................................................505, 507
creating .............................................................................................................................................................505machining .................................................................................................................................................507, 508
Check Surfs ...........................................................................................................................................................162chk_part_surfs_profpock........................................................................................................................................163CHK_SRF_STOCK_ALLOW........................................................................................................................111, 112
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92
CIRC_INTERPOLATION .................................................................................................................................89, 90Circular interpolation ...............................................................................................................................................90
set up ................................................................................................................................................................420CL Command ........................................................................................................................................................372
SKETCHER......................................................................................................................................................355CL data .........................................................................................................................................................379, 550
adding CL commands ........................................................................................................................................372deleting a command...................................................................................................................................378, 551display
in real time mode...........................................................................................................................................385interrupting....................................................................................................................................................385when creating an NC sequence.......................................................................................................................385
edit............................................................................................................................................................388, 390including postprocessor words ...........................................................................................................................550including post-processor words ..........................................................................................................................398NC aliases .........................................................................................................................................................394output
for a set of NC sequences...............................................................................................................................381redefining a command................................................................................................................................400, 551saving to file......................................................................................................................................................552
613
subroutine programming ....................................................................................................................................401using parameters.................................................................................................................................372, 399, 551
CL file...................................................................................................................................................................379CL Measure...........................................................................................................................................................385CL TRANSF menu ................................................................................................................................................386cl_arrow_scale.......................................................................................................................................................383CL_DIST...............................................................................................................................................................144CL_OUTPUT_MODE ...........................................................................................................................................144Clear
FIXT COMP .......................................................................................................................................................47Clear Edits.............................................................................................................................................................388CLEAR_DIST ...............................................................................................................................................116, 121
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CLEARANCE_EDGE ...........................................................................................................................................120CLEARANCE_OFFSET........................................................................................................................................140CntrSrfLocal..........................................................................................................................................................182Cnvnl Local ...........................................................................................................................................................182Colors
tool motions ......................................................................................................................................................432Command
MODIFY CMD.................................................................................................................................................377Comments
OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................................52SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................52
ComponentDEFINE FIXT.....................................................................................................................................................47
COMPONENT menu.............................................................................................................................................569commands .........................................................................................................................................................569
ConcaveCORN MOTION...............................................................................................................................................331
CONCAVE_RADIUS............................................................................................................................................130in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
Configuration options ............................................................................................................................................444assy_mfg_open_mode........................................................................................................................................444freeform_toolpath_matrem.................................................................................................................................543pro_mf_tprm_dir ...............................................................................................................................................467
Constant Peck........................................................................................................................................................301Construct.................................................................................................................................................................58Continue
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385GOUGE STOP..................................................................................................................................................391
Contour1 ...............................................................................................................................................................337Contour2 ...............................................................................................................................................................337Contouring ............................................................................................................................................................324Convex
CORN MOTION...............................................................................................................................................331CONVEX_RADIUS..............................................................................................................................................130
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141COOLANT_OPTION ..............................................................................................................................................90COOLANT_PRESSURE .........................................................................................................................................90Coord Sys
SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................48
614
Coordinate systemmachine...............................................................................................................................................................49NC sequence .......................................................................................................................................................49orientation ...........................................................................................................................................................49select.............................................................................................................................................................48, 49
COORDINATE_OUTPUT.......................................................................................................................................90Copy
CL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................378SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
Copy Text..............................................................................................................................................................388Copy Volume ........................................................................................................................................................256Corner Edges
LOCAL OPT.....................................................................................................................................................180SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................183
CORNER_ANGLE................................................................................................................................................331in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CORNER_FINISH_TYPE .....................................................................................................................................126CORNER_LENGTH......................................................................................................................................331, 332
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141CORNER_OFFSET...............................................................................................................................................110CORNER_ROUND_RADIUS...............................................................................................................................108Corners
INT CUTin Milling ......................................................................................................................................................229in Turning .....................................................................................................................................................273in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................330
Countersink ...........................................................................................................................................................300Create
CL COMMAND........................................................................................................................................375, 376CTRL PNT........................................................................................................................................................351DEF END............................................................................................................................................................53DEF FROM.........................................................................................................................................................53DEF HOME ........................................................................................................................................................53DEF START .......................................................................................................................................................53DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................315FIXT COMP .......................................................................................................................................................47FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47GROUP.....................................................................................................................................................345, 346MACH CSYS......................................................................................................................................................48MDB SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................155MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................23NCSEQ COMM ..................................................................................................................................................52PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340SEL...................................................................................................................................................................391SEQ CSYS..........................................................................................................................................................48SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................151SUBROUTINES........................................................................................................................................401, 403
Create Profile.........................................................................................................................................................289Csys Pattern...........................................................................................................................................................428Cur Workcell .........................................................................................................................................................153Current Dir
SELECT SITE...................................................................................................................................................153Curve Chain
615
CHAIN..............................................................................................................................................................293Customize ...............................................................................................................................................................51
including post....................................................................................................................................................372CUSTOMIZE_AUTO_RETRACT.........................................................................................................................104Cut
INT CUT...........................................................................................................................................................218Cut Motion
INFO ITEMS ....................................................................................................................................................175Cut motions
for volume and profile milling............................................................................................................................174CUT_ANGLE........................................................................................................................................................109
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUT_DIRECTION............................................................................................................................................98, 99in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUT_ENTRY_EXT ..............................................................................................................................................122CUT_EXIT_EXT...................................................................................................................................................122CUT_FEED.............................................................................................................................................................89CUT_MOTION_CONNECT..................................................................................................................................144CUT_OFFSET.......................................................................................................................................................136CUT_TYPE..................................................................................................................................................... 99, 114CUT_UNITS ...........................................................................................................................................................89CUTCOM ..............................................................................................................................................113, 114, 115
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUTCOM_LOC_APPR.........................................................................................................................................114in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CUTCOM_LOC_EXIT..........................................................................................................................................114in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
CUTCOM_MOVE.................................................................................................................................................145CUTCOM_MOVE_APPROACH...........................................................................................................................145CUTCOM_ON_SPIRAL........................................................................................................................................115CUTCOM_REG_INCR .........................................................................................................................................146CUTCOM_REG_START ......................................................................................................................................146CUTCOM_REGISTER..........................................................................................................................................114
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
CUTLINE_EXT_TYPE .........................................................................................................................................102CUTLINE_TYPE ............................................................................................................................................ 94, 102Cutter Step ............................................................................................................................................................385Cutting tools ..........................................................................................................................................................468
adding a new tool...............................................................................................................................................468deleting .............................................................................................................................................................471materials setup...................................................................................................................................................467modifying..........................................................................................................................................................471retrieving...........................................................................................................................................................470saving parameters ..............................................................................................................................................471setting up...........................................................................................................................................................465sketched tools ....................................................................................................................................................470specifying speeds and feeds ...............................................................................................................................469
616
using solid tools.........................................................................................................................................471, 472CYCLE_FORMAT................................................................................................................................................138CYCLE_OUTPUT.................................................................................................................................................138
DDatum Axis ...........................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................166DEFINE AXIS ..................................................................................................................................................355
Datum PointAPPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177CREATE POINT...............................................................................................................................................360
Deep..............................................................................................................................................................299, 300DEEP_GROOVE_OPTION...................................................................................................................................128Define
CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183MILL START PNT ...........................................................................................................................................209OPER ORDER..................................................................................................................................................373PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169PIVOT PNT ......................................................................................................................................................168SYNCH OPER..................................................................................................................................................374
Define OrderORDER PATCH ...............................................................................................................................................182
Del Pattern ............................................................................................................................................................427DELAY
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
DELAY_UNITS ....................................................................................................................................................140Delete
CL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................400CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................315FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47HOLES .............................................................................................................................................................303MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................24PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152SUBROUTINES................................................................................................................................................401
Delete Profile.........................................................................................................................................................289Depth
SLICE ...............................................................................................................................................................176Design model
replace ................................................................................................................................................................25Design UDF ..........................................................................................................................................................343Detach
WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................325Dialog boxes....................................................................................................................202, 480, 514, 516, 528, 530
Boss Top Feature...............................................................................................................................................518Boss Top Milling...............................................................................................................................................521Channel Feature.................................................................................................................................................505Channel Milling.................................................................................................................................................508
617
CL Command .....................................................................................................................................398, 399, 550Create Stock ......................................................................................................................................................448Drilling Strategy................................................................................................................................................536Entry Hole.................................................................................................................................................541, 542Entry/Exit Move ................................................................................................................................................202Face Feature......................................................................................................................................................482Face Milling......................................................................................................................................................483Flange Feature...................................................................................................................................................524Flange Milling...................................................................................................................................................527Freeform Milling ...............................................................................................................................................545Machine Tool Settings ................................................................................................................................. 37, 458Machining Properties.........................................................................................................................................480Operation Setup........................................................................................................................................... 32, 454O-Ring Feature..................................................................................................................................................528O-Ring Milling..................................................................................................................................................530PLAY PATH.....................................................................................................................................................548Pocket Feature...................................................................................................................................................490Pocket Milling...................................................................................................................................................492Profile Feature...................................................................................................................................................502Profile Milling...................................................................................................................................................504Slab Feature ......................................................................................................................................................485Slab Milling ......................................................................................................................................................488Slot Feature .......................................................................................................................................................511Slot Milling...............................................................................................................................................513, 514Step Feature ......................................................................................................................................................498Step Milling ......................................................................................................................................................500Through Pocket Feature .....................................................................................................................................493Through Pocket Milling.....................................................................................................................................496Through Slot Feature .........................................................................................................................................514Through Slot Milling .........................................................................................................................................516Tool Setup.........................................................................................................................................................465
DimensionsMOD NC SEQ ..................................................................................................................................................424
DirectionCUT ALNG.......................................................................................................................................................335CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219
Disp Cycles ...........................................................................................................................................................385Disp Model..............................................................................................................................................................79Display
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................383Done
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385Done Oper...............................................................................................................................................................31Drawing mode ...............................................................................................................................................577, 578
about .................................................................................................................................................................577creating customized documentation....................................................................................................................577enter a new or existing drawing..........................................................................................................................578
Drill ..............................................................................................................................................................299, 300Drill Group............................................................................................................................................................315Drive Surf..............................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................166
618
EEdge......................................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................166CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................219
EdgesSELECT CRNR ................................................................................................................................................183SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................238
EditCL DATA .................................................................................................................................................388, 389CREATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375TOOL MODE ...................................................................................................................................................216
EndCUT ENDS .......................................................................................................................................................272LOCATE CMD.................................................................................................................................................375
End Plane ..............................................................................................................................................................232END_MOTION.......................................................................................................................................................91END_OVERTRAVEL...........................................................................................................................................111
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
END_STEP_DEPTH .............................................................................................................................................128END_STOP_CONDITION......................................................................................................................................90Ends
INT CUT...........................................................................................................................................................272SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................272
Engraving..............................................................................................................................................................238Enter String ...........................................................................................................................................................377Enter Value
DEFINE AXIS ..................................................................................................................................................355Entry Hole.....................................................................................................................................................540, 542
creating .............................................................................................................................................................540machining .................................................................................................................................................542, 543
ENTRY_ANGLE....................................................................................................................................116, 120, 121in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
ENTRY_EDGE .....................................................................................................................................................120Excld Surfs............................................................................................................................................................171Exclude .................................................................................................................................................................247Exit
BUILD CUT .....................................................................................................................................................177EXIT_ANGLE.......................................................................................................................................................121
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
EXIT_DISTANCEin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
EXIT_FEED..........................................................................................................................................................120EXIT_TYPE..........................................................................................................................................................121
in Milling ............................................................................................................................................................92Expert Machinist....................................................................................................................................................443
creating a process ..............................................................................................................................................443creating an NC Model........................................................................................................................................444
619
modal settings....................................................................................................................................................443process overview ...............................................................................................................................................442retrieving a process............................................................................................................................................444
EXT DIR menu......................................................................................................................................................271Extend...................................................................................................................................................................264Extrude
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
FFace ......................................................................................................................................................................482
creating .............................................................................................................................................................482HOLE MAKING ...............................................................................................................................................299machining .........................................................................................................................................................483MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................209
Features.........................................................................................................................................................514, 528adjusting boundaries ..........................................................................................................................................475adjusting depth ..................................................................................................................................................479adjusting Soft Walls...........................................................................................................................................479Boss Top ...........................................................................................................................................................518Channel.............................................................................................................................................................505creating .............................................................................................................................................................475Entry Hole.................................................................................................................................................540, 541Face ..................................................................................................................................................................482Flange ...............................................................................................................................................................524Free Form..........................................................................................................................................................543GATHER SEL...................................................................................................................................................244Hole Group .......................................................................................................................................................532machining .........................................................................................................................................................480O-Ring ..............................................................................................................................................................528Pocket ...............................................................................................................................................................490Profile ...............................................................................................................................................................502Program Zero ....................................................................................................................................................456Slab...................................................................................................................................................................485Slot ...................................................................................................................................................................511Step...................................................................................................................................................................498Through Pocket .................................................................................................................................................493Through Slot .....................................................................................................................................................514types of machining features................................................................................................................................473using the Model Tree .........................................................................................................................................556
Feed Color.............................................................................................................................................................432Female Part ...........................................................................................................................................................330FF
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388File
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................379Filename
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391Fill ........................................................................................................................................................................247Fillet
CORN MOTIONin Milling ......................................................................................................................................................230in Turning .....................................................................................................................................................274
620
in Wire EDM.................................................................................................................................................331SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
FINA.......................................................................................................................................................................92Find...............................................................................................................................................................377, 378Finish
WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................325First.......................................................................................................................................................................430Fixed
HOLE MAKING ...............................................................................................................................................299FIXT_OFFSET_REG ..............................................................................................................................................90Fixture.....................................................................................................................................................................47Fixtures ...................................................................................................................................................................46Flange ...........................................................................................................................................................524, 526
creating .............................................................................................................................................................524machining .................................................................................................................................................526, 527
Flat........................................................................................................................................................................258FLOAT_TAP_FACTOR........................................................................................................................................139Floating.................................................................................................................................................................299FLUSH_REG_APPROACH...................................................................................................................................146FLUSH_REG_DETACH .......................................................................................................................................147FLUSH_REG_INCR..............................................................................................................................................146FLUSH_REG_START...........................................................................................................................................146Follow Sketch........................................................................................................................................................355Free Form machining.....................................................................................................................................543, 544FREE_FEED...........................................................................................................................................................89From .............................................................................................................................................................174, 293From Depth ...........................................................................................................................................................177From Edges
CUT LINE DEF ................................................................................................................................................198From File
CL INSERT.......................................................................................................................................................375FULL_RETRACT_DEPTH
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
GGen Assem..............................................................................................................................................................26General
THREAD TYPE................................................................................................................................................286GENRTR_APPROACH.........................................................................................................................................147GENRTR_DETACH..............................................................................................................................................147GENRTR_FINISH.................................................................................................................................................147GENRTR_REG_INCR ..........................................................................................................................................147GENRTR_ROUGH...............................................................................................................................................147Go Delta................................................................................................................................................................362Go Home...............................................................................................................................................................363GoTo Point ............................................................................................................................................................360Gouge Check .........................................................................................................................................................391GOUGE_AVOID_TYPE
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122Groove
TURN SEQ.......................................................................................................................................................283Groove Feat...........................................................................................................................................................238
621
GROOVE_FINISH_TYPE......................................................................................................................127, 128, 131Group
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................345
HHEAD 1 ................................................................................................................................................................276HEAD 2 ................................................................................................................................................................276Height
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................221High speed machining............................................................................................................................................173HOLDER_TYPE ...................................................................................................................................................276Hole Group....................................................................................................................................................533, 535
combining selection methods .............................................................................................................................533creating .............................................................................................................................................................532machining .........................................................................................................................................................536pattern selection.................................................................................................................................................534selecting holes by axes.......................................................................................................................................534selecting holes by diameter ................................................................................................................................534selecting holes by feature parameters..................................................................................................................535selecting holes on a surface ................................................................................................................................534
Hole Set .................................................................................................................................................303, 304, 305Holemaking...........................................................................................................................................................298
5-axis ........................................................................................................................................................300, 301depth options.....................................................................................................................................................305selecting holes
by axes..........................................................................................................................................................307by diameter ...................................................................................................................................................308by feature parameters.....................................................................................................................................309by points .......................................................................................................................................................309on a surface ...................................................................................................................................................308pattern selection.............................................................................................................................................307using Drill Group...........................................................................................................................................316using previous Hole Set .................................................................................................................................303
starting point .............................................................................................................................................306, 307Holes.............................................................................................................................................................298, 299Horizontal
OFFSET SURF.................................................................................................................................................254
IIn Session
SELECT SITE...................................................................................................................................................153Index Table ...........................................................................................................................................................429INFEED_ANGLE..................................................................................................................................................137Info
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330GRP PLACE .....................................................................................................................................................345OPER ORDER..................................................................................................................................................373SHOW GOUGE................................................................................................................................................391SUBROUTINES................................................................................................................................................401UPTO DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................175
InsertCL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
622
Insert File ..............................................................................................................................................................388ISO........................................................................................................................................................................286
JJOG_DIST.............................................................................................................................................................141Jump .....................................................................................................................................................................388
KKeyboard...............................................................................................................................................................376
LLathe.................................................................................................................................................................35, 36
horizontal ............................................................................................................................................................36vertical ................................................................................................................................................................36
Lead InTOOL MOTION................................................................................................................................................367
Lead OutTOOL MOTION................................................................................................................................................367
LEAD_RADIUSin Milling ..........................................................................................................................................................141in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
LeftSLOT OFFSET.................................................................................................................................................219
Libraryfixtures..........................................................................................................................................................46, 47tool models..........................................................................................................................................................77
LineEDIT POS .........................................................................................................................................................388
LINTOL ..................................................................................................................................................................89Local Mill..............................................................................................................................................................182Location ................................................................................................................................................................166
AXIS DEF OPT.................................................................................................................................................166Loop
CORN MOTION...............................................................................................................................................331SURF................................................................................................................................................................160
LoopsGATHER EXCL................................................................................................................................................247GATHER FILL .................................................................................................................................................247
MMach Csys
OPERATION ................................................................................................................................................48, 49Mach DB...............................................................................................................................................................155MACH_ID...............................................................................................................................................................88MACH_NAME .......................................................................................................................................................88Machinability Database
setup .................................................................................................................................................................155use ....................................................................................................................................................................158
Machine SrfsSEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................184
623
Machine tools ........................................................................................................................................................458creating .............................................................................................................................................................458cutter compensation output ..................................................................................................................................36default post.................................................................................................................................................. 36, 458lathe..............................................................................................................................................................36, 40mill .....................................................................................................................................................................36mill/turn .................................................................................................................................................. 36, 39, 40wedm ..................................................................................................................................................................36
Machining ...............................................................................................................................480, 481, 482, 515, 529Boss Top ...........................................................................................................................................................521Channel.............................................................................................................................................................507Entry Hole.........................................................................................................................................................542Face ..................................................................................................................................................................483Flange ...............................................................................................................................................................526Free Form...........................................................................................................................................543, 544, 545Hole Group .......................................................................................................................................................536mimicking a tool path ........................................................................................................................................481O-Ring ..............................................................................................................................................................529Pocket ...............................................................................................................................................................491Profile ...............................................................................................................................................................503saving as template..............................................................................................................................................480setting Tool Path Properties ...............................................................................................................................480Slab...................................................................................................................................................................487Slot ...................................................................................................................................................................512Step...................................................................................................................................................................499Through Pocket .................................................................................................................................................495Through Slot .....................................................................................................................................................515using settings for next tool path..........................................................................................................................480using the Model Tree .........................................................................................................................................556
Male Part...............................................................................................................................................................330Manufacture
assembly machining.......................................................................................................................................22, 23coordinate systems...............................................................................................................................................48Info Box..............................................................................................................................................................30machining process ...............................................................................................................................................28material removal..................................................................................................................................................58NC sequence .......................................................................................................................................................50parameters............................................................................................................................................... 83, 84, 85part machining...............................................................................................................................................22, 23route sheet .........................................................................................................................................................437setting up
machinability database...................................................................................................................................155sites ..............................................................................................................................................................150tool motion colors..........................................................................................................................................432
subroutine programming ....................................................................................................................................401using part families ...............................................................................................................................................25using Pro...................................................................................................................................................346, 438workpiece............................................................................................................................................................20
MANUFACTURING menu ...................................................................................................................................566Manufacturing model
assembly machining.............................................................................................................................................26part machining
example .............................................................................................................................................. 20, 21, 22Manufacturing UDF...............................................................................................................................................342
624
Material removal......................................................................................................................................................58Matrl Remove..........................................................................................................................................................58MAX_SPINDLE_RPM
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
MCD File ..............................................................................................................................................................406MDB Library.........................................................................................................................................................158Measure
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388Mfg Assem..............................................................................................................................................................26Mfg Geometry .......................................................................................................................................................243Mfg Model ..............................................................................................................................................................24MFG MODIFY menu ............................................................................................................................................570MFG SEQUENCE menu........................................................................................................................................568MFG SETUP menu................................................................................................................................................567mfg_auto_ref_prt_as_chk_srf.................................................................................................................................163mfg_xyz_num_digits
for Gouge Checking output ................................................................................................................................391Mill .........................................................................................................................................................................35Mill Surf................................................................................................................................................................244Mill surface
adding patches...................................................................................................................................................258creating .............................................................................................................................................................258merging.............................................................................................................................................................264modifying..........................................................................................................................................................265shade.........................................................................................................................................................264, 265trim...................................................................................................................................................................264
Mill SurfaceMFG GEOMETRY ...................................................................................................................................258, 263SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160
Mill VolumeMFG GEOMETRY ...........................................................................................................................................243SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160
Mill WindowMFG GEOMETRY ...........................................................................................................................................241
Mill/Turn.................................................................................................................................................................35Milling ..................................................................................................................................................................207
4-axis ................................................................................................................................................................163Build Cut at NC sequence level..........................................................................................................................164defining mill window.........................................................................................................................................241defining volume.................................................................................................................................................243engraving ..........................................................................................................................................................237facing................................................................................................................................................................209local ..........................................................................................................................................................180, 181pocketing...........................................................................................................................................................215profiling ....................................................................................................................................................213, 214region................................................................................................................................................................178swarf.................................................................................................................................................................207thread................................................................................................................................................................231trajectory...........................................................................................................................................................216volume ......................................................................................................................................................170, 171
Milling volumecopying .............................................................................................................................................................256for through pockets............................................................................................................................................249
625
example ........................................................................................................................................................252gathering ...........................................................................................................................................................244modifying..........................................................................................................................................................257offset.................................................................................................................................................................255round.................................................................................................................................................................256shading..............................................................................................................................................................256sketching...........................................................................................................................................................251trim...................................................................................................................................................................253
MIN_STEP_DEPTHin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
MirrorCUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................387WEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................334
Mod NC Seq..........................................................................................................................................................424Mod Pattern...........................................................................................................................................................430Model
SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160Model Tree....................................................................................................................................................433, 434Modify
CL COMMAND................................................................................................................................................377DRILL GROUP.................................................................................................................................................316FIXTURE SET....................................................................................................................................................47MDB SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................155MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................424NCSEQ COMM ..................................................................................................................................................52pattern...............................................................................................................................................................430PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
Modify Dim...........................................................................................................................................................257Modify Input .........................................................................................................................................................158Modify Srf.............................................................................................................................................................265Modify Surf...........................................................................................................................................................265Modify Vol
MILL VOLUME ...............................................................................................................................................256Motion Params ......................................................................................................................................................424Move Text.............................................................................................................................................................388
NName
DEFINE FIXT.....................................................................................................................................................47OPERATION ......................................................................................................................................................31SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................52
NC Alias .......................................................................................................................................................394, 395NC Model..............................................................................................................................................................444
creating .............................................................................................................................................................444creating separately .............................................................................................................................................445creating stock ....................................................................................................................................................446manipulating......................................................................................................................................................445replacing a reference model................................................................................................................................446
NC Seq Info...........................................................................................................................................................150NC sequence
auxiliary....................................................................................................................................................341, 342
626
create ..................................................................................................................................................................50group.................................................................................................................................................................342pattern...............................................................................................................................................................427reorder ..............................................................................................................................................................426Wire EDM ........................................................................................................................................................324
NC SequenceINFO ITEMS ....................................................................................................................................................175MACHINING......................................................................................................................................................51MOD PROCESS ...............................................................................................................................................424redefine.............................................................................................................................................................425SELECT FEAT ...................................................................................................................................................53
NC SEQUENCE menu ............................................................................................................................................51NCL_FILE ..............................................................................................................................................................88ncl_file_extension..................................................................................................................................................380Negative X ............................................................................................................................................................271
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271Negative Z.............................................................................................................................................................271
EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271New Sequence .........................................................................................................................................................51Next
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388NOW ................................................................................................................................................................329SHOW GOUGE................................................................................................................................................391
Next Cut................................................................................................................................................................218Next Slice..............................................................................................................................................................176No Core.................................................................................................................................................................332No Model ................................................................................................................................................................79None
APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271MFG UDF REF.................................................................................................................................................343PAT TYPE........................................................................................................................................................428SLOT OFFSET.................................................................................................................................................219
Norm SurfSEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................238
Norm to Part..........................................................................................................................................................223Normal
TOOL MOTION........................................................................................................................................365, 366NORMAL_LEAD_STEP
in Milling ..........................................................................................................................................................141in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
NowNOW ................................................................................................................................................................329
Num Inst ...............................................................................................................................................................430NUM_PROF_PASSES
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122NUM_PROFILE_PASSES
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141NUM_TRANSVERSE_CUTS ...............................................................................................................................136NUMBER_CUTCOM_PTS
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141NUMBER_CUTS
627
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122NUMBER_FIN_PASSES ......................................................................................................................................136NUMBER_OF_ARC_PTS.......................................................................................................................................90NUMBER_PASSES
in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122NUMBER_STARTS..............................................................................................................................................136
OOffset
CUT ALNG.......................................................................................................................................................335CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219ON....................................................................................................................................................................282
Offset CsysEND DIM TYPE ...............................................................................................................................................272
Offset Plane...........................................................................................................................................................272On.........................................................................................................................................................................282
CUT START .....................................................................................................................................................199ON....................................................................................................................................................................282
On Toolpath ..........................................................................................................................................................360One By One...........................................................................................................................................................198Operation
CL data output...................................................................................................................................................379MACHINING......................................................................................................................................................31MFG SETUP.......................................................................................................................................................31REDEF NC SEQ ...............................................................................................................................................425SELECT FEAT .................................................................................................................................................379
Operations .............................................................................................................................................................453Program Zero ............................................................................................................................................456, 457setup .................................................................................................................................................................454
Order Regions........................................................................................................................................................178ORIENT_ANGLE .................................................................................................................................................141O-Ring ...................................................................................................................................................528, 529, 530
creating .............................................................................................................................................................528machining .................................................................................................................................................529, 530
OSETNO_VALin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Output Order .........................................................................................................................................................373OUTPUT_POINT...................................................................................................................................125, 127, 128OUTPUT_THRD_PNTS........................................................................................................................................136
PParam Files..............................................................................................................................................................83Parameters
MOD NC SEQ ..................................................................................................................................................424SEQ SETUP........................................................................................................................................................83SLICE ...............................................................................................................................................................176UPTO DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................175using in relations ...............................................................................................................................................150
PartSEL SURF ........................................................................................................................................................162
Part machining...............................................................................................................................................561, 564Process plan .......................................................................................................................................564, 565, 566
628
work flow defined..............................................................................................................................................561PAT MODIFY menu .............................................................................................................................................430PAT TYPE menu...................................................................................................................................................428Pattern
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................427Pattern Def ............................................................................................................................................................404PECK_DEPTH
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
PERCENT_DEPTH...............................................................................................................................................136Pick
EDIT POS .........................................................................................................................................................388Pivot Curve ...........................................................................................................................................................169Pivot Pnt................................................................................................................................................................168Placement
MODIFY CMD.................................................................................................................................................377Play Cut
SLICE ...............................................................................................................................................................176UPTO DEPTH ..................................................................................................................................................175
Play Path ...............................................................................................................................................................385Play Steps..............................................................................................................................................................385Plunge ...........................................................................................................................................................363, 364
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................239Plunge milling .......................................................................................................................................................238PLUNGE_ANGLE................................................................................................................................................133PLUNGE_FEED......................................................................................................................................................89PLUNGE_UNITS....................................................................................................................................................89Pnts on Srf.............................................................................................................................................................166Pocket ...........................................................................................................................................................490, 491
creating .............................................................................................................................................................490machining .........................................................................................................................................................491
Pocketing...............................................................................................................................................................215Position
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Positive X..............................................................................................................................................................271EXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
Positive ZEXT DIR...........................................................................................................................................................271
POST_MACHINING_FILE.....................................................................................................................................88PPRINT..................................................................................................................................................... 43, 44, 462PPRINT table ...........................................................................................................................................44, 462, 463PRE_MACHINING_FILE .......................................................................................................................................88Prev
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
Prev NC Seq..........................................................................................................................................................180Prev Tool...............................................................................................................................................................184Preview
ADJ TOOL........................................................................................................................................................169Previous
SHOW GOUGE................................................................................................................................................391Pro/PROCESS for MFG..................................................................................................................560, 561, 562, 563
629
goals .................................................................................................................................................................560how to use .........................................................................................................................................................562introduction to ...................................................................................................................................................560specific uses ......................................................................................................................................................563
Pro/REPORT.........................................................................................................................................................583parameters..................................................................................................................................583, 584, 585, 586
pro_mdb_dir..........................................................................................................................................................155pro_mf_tprm_dir .....................................................................................................................................................74pro_mf_workcell_dir ...............................................................................................................................................43Process ...................................................................................................................................................566, 567, 581
defined ..............................................................................................................................................................566specific considerations .......................................................................................................................................581to use Process mode...........................................................................................................................................566
Process drawing.....................................................................................................................................................579to copy ..............................................................................................................................................................579
Process State..................................................................................................................................................578, 580dialog box options .............................................................................................................................................578set state .............................................................................................................................................................580
Process Steps............................................................................................................571, 572, 573, 574, 575, 576, 577Fixture step .......................................................................................................................................................572General step ......................................................................................................................................................573Machine step .............................................................................................................................................571, 572Manufacturing Model step .........................................................................................................................574, 575Play step............................................................................................................................................................571Surface step...............................................................................................................................................575, 576to create views...................................................................................................................................................577Viewing ............................................................................................................................................................576Volume .............................................................................................................................................................574
PROF_INCREMENTin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141
PROF_STOCK_ALLOWin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Profile ...........................................................................................................................................................502, 503creating .............................................................................................................................................................502machining .................................................................................................................................................503, 504MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................214TURN SEQ.......................................................................................................................................................281
Program Zero.........................................................................................................................................................456defining.............................................................................................................................................................456feature level.......................................................................................................................................................457operation level...................................................................................................................................................456z-axis orientation ...............................................................................................................................................457
PULLOUT_ANGLE..............................................................................................................................................133PULLOUT_DIST
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
QQuit
CL CONTROL..................................................................................................................................................385
630
RRadius Subst..........................................................................................................................................................340RANGE_NUMBER
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137in Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Rapid feed rate.......................................................................................................................................................461set up ............................................................................................................................................................37, 40set up ........................................................................................................................................................459, 461
RAPTO_DIST .......................................................................................................................................................141Ream.............................................................................................................................................................299, 300Redefine
AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................355CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249CUSTOMIZE
in Holemaking...............................................................................................................................................359GRP PLACE .....................................................................................................................................................345MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................24PROC ACTION.................................................................................................................................................425SUBROUTINES................................................................................................................................................404TAPER ANGLE................................................................................................................................................329
Redefine Profile.....................................................................................................................................................289Redo
AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................168BUILD CUT .....................................................................................................................................................178CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183
Ref Cut MtnCUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................334
Ref Model ...............................................................................................................................................................26Ref Part
MFG UDF REF.................................................................................................................................................343Ref Pattern ............................................................................................................................................................430Ref Sequence.........................................................................................................................................................182References
GATHER SPEC ................................................................................................................................................244REDEF NC SEQ ...............................................................................................................................................425
RegisterMFG PARAMS.................................................................................................................................................339PARAM SETUP................................................................................................................................................339
REGISTER_TABLE..............................................................................................................................................147Relations ...............................................................................................................................................................149
using manufacturing parameters .........................................................................................................................150Remove
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................355AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................168CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183DEF END............................................................................................................................................................53DEF FROM.........................................................................................................................................................53DEF HOME ........................................................................................................................................................53DEF START .......................................................................................................................................................53FEATURE REFS...............................................................................................................................................243HEIGHT ...........................................................................................................................................................221
631
MILL START PNT ...........................................................................................................................................209PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169PIVOT PNT ......................................................................................................................................................168SELECT SRFS
for Milling.....................................................................................................................................................160SELECT SRFS
for Gouge Checking.......................................................................................................................................391SKETCH VOL ..................................................................................................................................................251STOCK BOUND...............................................................................................................................................271SYNCH OPER..................................................................................................................................................374TAPER ANGLE................................................................................................................................................329
Remove AllFEATURE REFS...............................................................................................................................................243REMOVE CRN.................................................................................................................................................183REMOVE SURF ...............................................................................................................................................160SELECT SRFS..................................................................................................................................................391
Remove SingleREMOVE CRN.................................................................................................................................................183REMOVE SURF ...............................................................................................................................................160
Remove Slice.........................................................................................................................................................178Reorder
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................425Repeat regions ...............................................................................................................................................581, 587
adding ...............................................................................................................................................................581modifying..........................................................................................................................................................581switching sheets.................................................................................................................................................581
ReplaceCONF REPL .....................................................................................................................................................391MFG MDL..........................................................................................................................................................25
Replacing a design model or a workpiece .................................................................................................................25Report ...........................................................................................................................................................437, 438Reports..........................................................................................................................................................582, 587
create ................................................................................................................................................................582repeat regions ....................................................................................................................................................587
RetractTOOL MOTION................................................................................................................................................364
Retract surface...................................................................................................................................................54, 55RETRACT_FEED ...................................................................................................................................................89RETRACT_RATIO ...............................................................................................................................................134RETRACT_UNITS..................................................................................................................................................89Retrieve
MFG PARAMS...................................................................................................................................................83RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
RETURN_TO_START..........................................................................................................................................147REVERSE_DIST...................................................................................................................................................143Revolve
SOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
RewCL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388
RightSLOT OFFSET.................................................................................................................................................219
Rotate
632
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................386PAT TYPE........................................................................................................................................................428
RoughWEDM OPT .....................................................................................................................................................325
ROUGH_OPTIONin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
ROUGH_STOCK_ALLOWin Turning .........................................................................................................................................................122
Route Sheet ...........................................................................................................................................................437Run
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391
SSame
WHICH REF.....................................................................................................................................................345Sample session ......................................................................................................................................................589Save
RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152
Save File ...............................................................................................................................................................388SCA ......................................................................................................................................................................122Scale
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................388SCAN_TYPE
in Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137Screen Edit ............................................................................................................................................................391Screen Play............................................................................................................................................................385Search ...................................................................................................................................................................391Second...................................................................................................................................................................430Seed Surface..........................................................................................................................................................244Sel By Menu............................................................................................................................................................48Sel Loops
CLOSURE ........................................................................................................................................................249Sel Surf
SRF PRT SEL ...................................................................................................................................................162Select
ADD BOUND...................................................................................................................................................269CLEAR ...............................................................................................................................................................47CR ............................................................................................................................................................339, 340CTRL PNT........................................................................................................................................................351DEF END............................................................................................................................................................53DEF FROM.........................................................................................................................................................53DEF HOME ........................................................................................................................................................53DEF START .......................................................................................................................................................53GATHER STEP ................................................................................................................................................243LOCATE CMD.................................................................................................................................................375MACH CSYS......................................................................................................................................................48SEL...................................................................................................................................................................160SEL...................................................................................................................................................................391SEQ CSYS..........................................................................................................................................................48WORKCELL.......................................................................................................................................................31
Select AllSEL...................................................................................................................................................................160
633
Select CurveCREATE PROFILE...........................................................................................................................................293
Select Profile .........................................................................................................................................................289Select Set
OUTPUT...........................................................................................................................................................381Select Step menu ...................................................................................................................................................571Select Surface
CREATE PROFILE...........................................................................................................................................292Seq Info...................................................................................................................................................................51Seq Setup ................................................................................................................................................................51Sequences
REDEF SUB .....................................................................................................................................................404Set
MFG PARAMS...................................................................................................................................................85Set Axis
ADJ TOOL........................................................................................................................................................169Set Colors..............................................................................................................................................................432Set Range ..............................................................................................................................................................433Set up
machinability database.......................................................................................................................................155manufacturing database........................................................................................................................................28sites...................................................................................................................................................................150
Set UpCR ............................................................................................................................................................339, 340
Setup Time ............................................................................................................................................................437DEFINE FIXT.....................................................................................................................................................47
ShadeMILL SURFACE ..............................................................................................................................................264MILL VOLUME ...............................................................................................................................................256
Sheets menu options ..............................................................................................................................................579Show
AXIS DEF.........................................................................................................................................................356AXIS DEF TYPE ..............................................................................................................................................168CLOSE LOOP...................................................................................................................................................249CORNER EDG .................................................................................................................................................183CREATE CMD .................................................................................................................................................375GOUGE STOP..................................................................................................................................................391HEIGHT ...........................................................................................................................................................221HOLES .....................................................................................................................................................304, 305MDB SETUP ....................................................................................................................................................155MILL START PNT ...........................................................................................................................................209ORDER PATCH ...............................................................................................................................................182PECK TABLE...................................................................................................................................................301PIVOT CRV......................................................................................................................................................169PIVOT PNT ......................................................................................................................................................168RAD SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................340SELECT SRFS
for Milling.....................................................................................................................................................160SELECT SRFS
for gouge Checking .......................................................................................................................................393SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152STOCK BOUND...............................................................................................................................................271TAPER ANGLE........................................................................................................................................329, 330
Show All
634
AUTO SELECT ................................................................................................................................................330SHOW GOUGE................................................................................................................................................391
Show Edits ............................................................................................................................................................388Show Error ............................................................................................................................................................158Show Input............................................................................................................................................................158Show Mach DB .....................................................................................................................................................158Show Path
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388Show Regions........................................................................................................................................................178Show Result
GRP PLACE .....................................................................................................................................................345Show Select...........................................................................................................................................................245Show Slices ...........................................................................................................................................................178Show Volume........................................................................................................................................................250Side Surfs ..............................................................................................................................................................335simplified representations...............................................................................................................................588, 589
add to a step ......................................................................................................................................................588apply to the process model .................................................................................................................................588retrieve from a design model ..............................................................................................................................589with large design assemblies ..............................................................................................................................588
Simulated tool path .................................................................................................................................385, 396, 546Site
CELL SETUP....................................................................................................................................................153MFG PARAMS.................................................................................................................................................149PARAM SETUP................................................................................................................................................150
Sitessetting up...........................................................................................................................................................150using .................................................................................................................................................................149
SketchADD BOUND...................................................................................................................................................269APPR EXIT OPT ..............................................................................................................................................177CREATE PROFILE...........................................................................................................................................291CREATE VOL ..................................................................................................................................................250CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................219INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................219TOOL MODE
in Milling ......................................................................................................................................................216Skip
CONF REPL .....................................................................................................................................................391WHICH REF.....................................................................................................................................................345
Skip Patch .............................................................................................................................................................182Skip Region...........................................................................................................................................................178Slab...............................................................................................................................................................486, 487
creating .............................................................................................................................................................485machining .................................................................................................................................................487, 488
Slice..............................................................................................................................................................176, 177Slot ........................................................................................................................................................511, 512, 513
creating .............................................................................................................................................................511machining .................................................................................................................................................512, 513
Solid..............................................................................................................................................................250, 251Some
REPLACE.........................................................................................................................................................391SPARK_ALLOW ..................................................................................................................................................144Specify
635
CORNER ADD .................................................................................................................................................330CUT START .....................................................................................................................................................199
Specify PlaneCTM DEPTH ....................................................................................................................................................177
SPEED_CONTROLin Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_RANGEin Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_SENSEin Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_SPEEDin Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
SPINDLE_STATUS ..............................................................................................................................................139Stand Alone
UDF OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................................343Standard ................................................................................................................................................................299Start
CUT ENDS .......................................................................................................................................................272Start Axes..............................................................................................................................................................240Start Height
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................222Start Point
CHAIN..............................................................................................................................................................294SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................209
START_MOTION...................................................................................................................................................91Status Box .............................................................................................................................................................385Std Size ...................................................................................................................................................................76Step...............................................................................................................................................................498, 499
CL EDIT ...........................................................................................................................................................388creating .............................................................................................................................................................498GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391machining .................................................................................................................................................499, 500
STEP REGEN menu..............................................................................................................................................570STEP_OVER
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141Stock .............................................................................................................................................................446, 447
creating .............................................................................................................................................................446material display .................................................................................................................................................560modifying allowances ........................................................................................................................................451modifying outline ..............................................................................................................................................452retrieving...........................................................................................................................................................444
Stock Allow...........................................................................................................................................................274Stock Bound ..........................................................................................................................................................270STOCK_ALLOW
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141STOP_DIST ..........................................................................................................................................................143StopAtStart............................................................................................................................................................385Straight
CORN MOTION...............................................................................................................................................331Subordinate
UDF OPTIONS .................................................................................................................................................343Subroutine programming........................................................................................................................................401Subroutines............................................................................................................................................................401Suggest..................................................................................................................................................................183
636
Surf & BndGATHER SEL...................................................................................................................................................244
Surf Chain .............................................................................................................................................................198SURF DEFINE menu.............................................................................................................................................258Surface
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................221INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................221SEL SURF ........................................................................................................................................................162SURF................................................................................................................................................................161
Surface milling ......................................................................................................................................................202entry and exit moves..........................................................................................................................................202
SurfacesGATHER EXCL................................................................................................................................................247GATHER SEL...................................................................................................................................................244GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................391OFFSET SURF.................................................................................................................................................254SELECT CRNR ................................................................................................................................................183SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................160
SweepSOLID OPTS ....................................................................................................................................................250SRF OPTS ........................................................................................................................................................258
Synch ....................................................................................................................................................................337Synchronize
MACHINING....................................................................................................................................................374
TTable Corners ........................................................................................................................................................340Tangent
TOOL MOTION........................................................................................................................................364, 365Tangent Chain .......................................................................................................................................................198TANGENT_LEAD_STEP
in Milling ..........................................................................................................................................................141Tangential
OFFSET SURF.................................................................................................................................................254Tap................................................................................................................................................................299, 300Taper Angle
INT CUT...........................................................................................................................................................329MACH AUX .....................................................................................................................................................335
TAPER_ANGLE ...................................................................................................................................................144Templates...............................................................................................................................................553, 554, 556
creating .....................................................................................................................................................554, 555placing ..............................................................................................................................................................556saving................................................................................................................................................................554saving machining strategy..................................................................................................................................480Template Manager.............................................................................................................................................554using the Model Tree .........................................................................................................................................556
Thin ......................................................................................................................................................................251Thread
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................232TURN SEQ.......................................................................................................................................................286
Thread Cyl.............................................................................................................................................................232Thread Point
CUT ALONG....................................................................................................................................................328
637
THREAD_FEEDin Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
THREAD_FEED_UNITSin Holemaking...................................................................................................................................................137
Through Pocket .............................................................................................................................................494, 496creating .............................................................................................................................................................493machining .........................................................................................................................................................496
Through Slot..................................................................................................................................................515, 516creating .............................................................................................................................................................514machining .........................................................................................................................................................516
Thru AllDRILL DEPTH .................................................................................................................................................305
Time Increment .....................................................................................................................................................385To Depth ...............................................................................................................................................................177TOLERANCE ............................................................................................................................................. 88, 89, 90
GOUGE CHECK...............................................................................................................................................393Tool
DISPLAY CL....................................................................................................................................................385INFO ITEMS ....................................................................................................................................................175MOD NC SEQ ..................................................................................................................................................424
Tool change time ............................................................................................................................................. 36, 458Tool control point ....................................................................................................................................................65Tool Info ...............................................................................................................................................................150Tool Kerf
SKETCHER......................................................................................................................................................355Tool Motion
control points.....................................................................................................................................................351incorporating cut motions...................................................................................................................................352incremental motions...........................................................................................................................................362point..........................................................................................................................................................360, 361
Tool path........................................................................................................................................546, 547, 548, 549adding break points....................................................................................................................................397, 549displaying the tool motion..........................................................................................................................397, 548outputting CL data.............................................................................................................................................552outputting NC codes ..........................................................................................................................................553positioning the tool ....................................................................................................................................398, 550saving to file..............................................................................................................................................400, 552
Tool path (see CL data)..........................................................................................................................................385Tool Radius ...........................................................................................................................................................255Tool travel limits ............................................................................................................................................. 36, 458TOOL_OVERLAP
in Wire EDM.....................................................................................................................................................141Tools
creating models ...................................................................................................................................................78models library......................................................................................................................................................77sketch................................................................................................................................................................217solid tools in Turning...........................................................................................................................................81using models .......................................................................................................................................................79
Top Surfaces..........................................................................................................................................................172Trajectory
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................216Translate
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................386PAT TYPE........................................................................................................................................................428
638
TrimCREATE VOL ..................................................................................................................................................253
TRIM_TO_WORKPIECEin Milling
offsetting Mill Volumes.................................................................................................................................255trimming Mill Volumes .................................................................................................................................254
Turn Profile ...................................................................................................................................................289, 290in Thread Turning..............................................................................................................................................286
Turning .................................................................................................................................................................2884-axis area.........................................................................................................................................................280area ...................................................................................................................................................................277groove ................................................................................................................................................284, 285, 286multiple machining areas ...................................................................................................................................292output coordinates .............................................................................................................................................266profile ...............................................................................................................................................................282remainder material analysis................................................................................................................................288thread................................................................................................................................................................287Turn Profile.......................................................................................................................................................289using tool outline .................................................................................................................................................81
Turning Envelope ..........................................................................................................................................267, 268Two Contour .........................................................................................................................................................227Type
GATHER SPEC ................................................................................................................................................244
UUDF (User.............................................................................................................................................................342UDF Library
MFG UTILS......................................................................................................................................................343Unblank.................................................................................................................................................................257
DRILL GROUP.........................................................................................................................................315, 316Undo
BUILD CUT .............................................................................................................................................178, 179CORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330
Undo LastCORNER COND...............................................................................................................................................330
Undo SkipORDER PATCH ...............................................................................................................................................182
Unified..................................................................................................................................................................286Units
CUT PATH .......................................................................................................................................................388Unselect
DEFINE CHAIN ...............................................................................................................................................198Update Slices.........................................................................................................................................................178Upto Depth............................................................................................................................................................174Use CurOper..........................................................................................................................................................345Use Prev
INTERACT PATH ............................................................................................................................................334MACH CSYS......................................................................................................................................................48MFG PARAMS.................................................................................................................................................148SEQ CSYS..........................................................................................................................................................48WORKCELL.......................................................................................................................................................31
Use Quilt ...............................................................................................................................................................250User Def Srf ..........................................................................................................................................................426
639
User Def Vol .........................................................................................................................................................426UserDefCmd .........................................................................................................................................................377UV Plane...............................................................................................................................................................335
VValue
OFFSET SURF.................................................................................................................................................254Variable Peck ........................................................................................................................................................302views.............................................................................................................................................................581, 582
adding ...............................................................................................................................................................581modifying..........................................................................................................................................................581switching sheets.................................................................................................................................................581
Visibility .......................................................................................................................................................151, 152Volume
MILL SEQ ........................................................................................................................................................171SEQ SETUP......................................................................................................................................................171
WWalls.....................................................................................................................................................................254WEDM....................................................................................................................................................................35Where Used
SITE SETUP .....................................................................................................................................................152Window.........................................................................................................................................................171, 172Wire EDM..............................................................................................................................................324, 325, 336
2-axis ................................................................................................................................................................3244-axis ................................................................................................................................................................335contouring cut motions ......................................................................................................................................325Head1/Head2 format..........................................................................................................................................336mirroring cut motions ........................................................................................................................................334No Core cut motions..........................................................................................................................................332radius substitution..............................................................................................................................................341register tables ....................................................................................................................................................340
Workcell..................................................................................................................................................................35create ............................................................................................................................................................35, 36MFG SETUP.......................................................................................................................................................35OPERATION ................................................................................................................................................31, 32
Workpiece ..............................................................................................................................................20, 21, 22, 23MFG MDL TYP..................................................................................................................................................23no geometry.........................................................................................................................................................24SURF PICK.......................................................................................................................................................160using part families ...............................................................................................................................................25
workpiece geometry.......................................................................................................................................564, 565in part machining process plans..........................................................................................................................564
XXY ........................................................................................................................................................................336XY Plane...............................................................................................................................................................335
ZZ Depth
640
CTM DEPTH ....................................................................................................................................................177Z-Axis Orientation...................................................................................................................................................50
